NX 2.0.8300 3.0.8300 Service Manual

HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Service Manual

Document No: DD+DIS105.10E
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
1st edition *
* For the revision status per chapter please refer to the latest version of the “Order List, Checklist for Completeness”
in the GSO Library.
This documentation is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS105.10E
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:
The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 0
06-2010 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 29578714
sw_00_about manual_e_template_v08
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS105.10E About this Manual
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 1

06-2010 Type 4406/303 Agfa Company Confidential
► Purpose of this Document
This document provides information on the structure and contents of the Service
Manual.
It also describes the changes of the product compared to the previous release.
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date
1.0 06-2010 Initial release


► Chapter Overview
Chapter
Order List
0 This chapter gives an overview of the latest released Editions/Revisions of the chapters
below. The completeness of the Manual can be checked using this chapter.
0 Generic Safety Directions

This chapter contains the generic safety directions.
Product Description
1 This chapter provides the product description of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, the intended
use and limitations of this machine, configurations and performance characteristics, service
functions and a compatibility chart.
Safety Directions
2 This chapter contains product specific safety directions that are valid throughout the whole
documentation.
Installation Planning
3 This chapter can be ordered separately via DD+DIS105.10E. It contains necessary
information for preparing the installation of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
Installation and Configuration

4 This chapter contains a detailed description of the installation and configuration procedures
of a staged NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 system.
Software Options
This chapter contains detailed descriptions of the installation, configuration and use of
5
software packages and hardware that can be ordered or downloaded additionally to the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software.
6 Acceptance Test
This chapter provides the checklists for the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Acceptance Test.
7 Upgrade Installation
This chapter contains installation instructions for upgrades to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
Release Information
8 This chapter provides release information of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 and lists solved issues
of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software.
9 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides guidance when issues occur with the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
Maintenance
10 This chapter describes all necessary steps to maintain the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
workstation.
11 Service Bulletins
This chapter contains Service Bulletins referring to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 issues.
Glossary
12 This chapter contains an overview of all abbreviations and their definitions used throughout
the document.
13 Spare Parts List

This chapter provides a listing of all Spare Parts for the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.


► Explanation of notes
Safety relevant Notes

Icon Signal Word Situation
CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or damage to the
equipment described in the manual and/or damage to any
other equipment or goods and/or environmental pollution can
be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a user,
engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or serious injuries can be
the consequence.
Not-safety relevant Notes

Icon Name Type of Information
INSTRUCTION: Indicates an instruction where it is important to follow literally
the described actions.
IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

to prevent malfunction.
NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

without having a direct influence on the step or action.
• Highlights unusual points.
• Indicates background information.
• Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
► Conventions
Highlighting of Tasks
Task number Task Description Remark
(1) Connect the cable. Examples for working steps to be performed in
(2) Switch the machine on. the listed sequence.
Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

(1) Press <F9> or double-click the Examples are: Menu topics, keyboard keys,
<Refresh> button. icons, device buttons, commands etc.
(2) Enter file name. In this example a file name has to be entered
as term.


1 About this Manual
1.1 Target Group
This NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Documentation provides information for

the Field Service Engineer.
1.2 Download from MedNet
This Service Manual is available on the MedNet GSO Library

(Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1.3 Changes compared to preceding NX Versions
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 is a maintenance release for NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100 (DR use

only) and NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 (CR use only). NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 can be used
in a mixed CR and DR environment.
1.4 Changes compared to NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100
1.4.1 New Customer Features and Improvements in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
• For CR only: Musica MCE (Micro Calcification Enhancement):

It offers an improved image processing which can help in drawing attention to
potential micro-calcifications in Mammography images.
• Improved, smoother W/L for Musica² images
• Office Viewer available without print function (new ABC code, not for all regions)
• Improved visibility of DoseBar-graph (displayed in colour)
• Veterinary “Patient Sex”:
A veterinary-specific translation is provided for the different values of patient sex,
i.e. for "Male", "Female" and "Other“.


1.4.2 Main New Service Features and Improvements for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
• Installation improvements, semi-automated installation of “auxiliary” software

during NX activation:
o The XRDi (XRG Connectivity) and MCE (Micro Calcification Enhancement)
software is installed by the NX Activation Utility.
o The Activation Utility chooses the auxiliary software required by the applied
license and installs the version(s) that are compatible with the currently
installed NX version.
o Auxiliary software install dialogue is displayed when running Activation Utility
manually and silently (during upgrade).
• Installation improvements, automated import/export of data:
o When upgrading a NX 2008 or NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 system to
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 the export/import of configuration data, image data
and dose statistics data can be performed automatically by the upgrade
installer.
o Depending on the hardware platform, it takes approximately 1 - 2 minutes per
1000 images for the export and the same time for the import.
o The known dedicated export/import tools still exist and must be used for
upgrades of NX version ≤ NX 2008. They also can be used when upgrading
a NX 2008 or NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 system.
• Other improvements:
o Upgrade DOTNET 2 Æ DOTNET 3.5 SP1
o SQL Server Express 2005 SP3
o Improvements of the License Management
o NX installation only possible if a network is available (automatic check)
o Importing Configuration Files: It is now possible to import NX 3.0.X000
configuration files on a NX 2.0.8300 system
o Changes in verification logic of Musica² pediatrics licenses


1.5 Changes compared to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200
1.5.1 New Customer Features and Improvements in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
• An additional patient identification field “Other Patient IDs” DICOM TAG

(0010,1000) is available. It can be used for local ID numbers, e.g.
“NHS Number”. It is available in the same way that the “Patient ID” is available,
except for the search box. It can be searched for in list (select column and type).
• The possibility to use wildcards via the symbol “*” in the search function of NX is
available. The symbol “*” can be typed at the beginning of the entry.
NX always automatically uses a wildcard at the end of an entry.
1.5.2 Main New Service Features and Improvements for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
No new service features have been applied in NX 2.0.8300 / NX 3.0.8300. For solved
issues refer to section 1.7.
1.5 Main Differences between NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 DR Application to CR
• For DR exposures no ‘ID’ button is needed and available.

• For DR exposures a ‘Copy Exposure’ button is present for multiple identical
exposures.
• New icons in exposure thumbnails are available to indicate:
o Exposure type: CR – DR
o Detector used: Table – Wall
o Detector status (DR only): Ready – not ready
1.6 Solved HQ Complaints
For a complete list of all HeadQuarter (HQ) complaints, solved in

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, refer to chapter 8 Release Information DD+DIS105.10E


HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable

eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

HEALTHCARE Chapter 1
Imaging Services Product Description
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides the product description of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300,

Type 4406/303, intended use and limitations, possible configurations and performance
characteristics.
Edition. Release Change

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E Chapter 1 - Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart
DD+ DIS105.10E Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration
DD+ DIS105.10E Chapter 6 - Acceptance Test Protocol
DD+DIS109.10E Chapter 5 - Offline Configuration Tool Installation and Use
DD+DIS111.10E Chapter 5 - Musica2 Image Processing Software
DD+DIS012.06E Licensing Service Documentation
DD+DIS275.09E DX-D 300 System Application Manual
DD+DIS035.06E DX-Si System Application Manual
DD+DIS125.09E Enclosure - Installation Procedure ID Scanner

sw_01_description_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Product Description
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE .......................................................................................................................8

1.1 NX Workstations for GenRad-Mammography Mixed Use ........................................................8
1.1.1 Limitations for GenRad-Mammography Mixed Use..................................................................9
1.2 NX Central Monitoring System (CMS) ....................................................................................10
1.2.1 Limitations for CMS.................................................................................................................10
1.3 NX Veterinary..........................................................................................................................11
1.4 NX Office Viewer.....................................................................................................................11
1.4.1 Limitations of the NX Office Viewer ........................................................................................11
2 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY..................................................................................................12
2.1 General Network Information ..................................................................................................12
2.2 Optional Intensive Care Unit (ICU) Workflow .........................................................................12
3 INTENDED ENVIRONMENT OF THE PRODUCT.................................................................13

4 MENUS AND FUNCTIONAL KEYS........................................................................................13
5 SERVICE FUNCTIONS ..........................................................................................................13
5.1 NX Software Service Tools .....................................................................................................13
5.2 Additional Software .................................................................................................................14
6 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ..............................................................................................14

6.1 Process View – NX Workstation .............................................................................................14
6.2 Data Files Subfolders and Image Flow...................................................................................16
6.2.1 Image comes from Digitizer – regular Flow ............................................................................17
6.2.2 Image comes from Digitizer – irregular Flow ..........................................................................17
6.2.3 Image Processing Flows.........................................................................................................18
6.3 Configuration Management.....................................................................................................18
6.4 Technical Background on Software Deployment....................................................................19
6.4.1 Production Process.................................................................................................................19
6.4.2 Activation Process ..................................................................................................................20
6.5 Partitioning ..............................................................................................................................20
6.6 RAID Support for NX Workstations.........................................................................................21
6.7 Security and User Policy.........................................................................................................21


6.7.1 Authentication Management – Who are you?.........................................................................21
6.7.2 Authorization Management – What are you allowed to do? ...................................................22
6.7.3 Pre-installed Technical User Accounts ...................................................................................22
6.7.4 New User Accounts ................................................................................................................23
6.8 Backup/Restore Principles......................................................................................................23
6.9 Disk Space Management........................................................................................................25
6.9.1 Clean Up Rules .......................................................................................................................25
6.9.2 Clean Up Mechanism..............................................................................................................25
6.9.3 Manual Clean Up ....................................................................................................................26
6.10 NX Central Monitoring System (CMS) ....................................................................................27
6.10.1 Main Purpose ..........................................................................................................................27
6.10.2 Process View – NX CMS ........................................................................................................27
6.10.3 Deployment View ....................................................................................................................29
6.10.4 Configuration data Origin ........................................................................................................30
6.10.5 Central Administration.............................................................................................................31
6.10.6 Simultaneous Viewing.............................................................................................................31
6.10.7 Simultaneous Editing ..............................................................................................................31
7 NX CONFIGURATION TASKS...............................................................................................32
7.1 Offline Configuration Tool .......................................................................................................32
7.2 Archiving .................................................................................................................................32
7.3 Gridline Suppression...............................................................................................................32
7.4 Emergency Procedure ............................................................................................................32
8 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE .....................................................................................33

9 EXAM TREE CONVERTER ...................................................................................................33
9.1 Overview of VIPS and ADC QS Exam Trees .........................................................................34
9.2 Overview of NX Exam Tree ....................................................................................................35
9.3 Background on the NX Exam Tree .........................................................................................36
9.4 Exam Tree Model....................................................................................................................38
9.5 Exposure Types Features.......................................................................................................38
9.5.1 View Code and View Position .................................................................................................38
9.5.2 Body Part and Anatomic Region.............................................................................................38


9.5.3 Enable Laterality Option..........................................................................................................39
9.5.4 Automation in NX ....................................................................................................................39
10 LOGGING ...............................................................................................................................39
10.1 Log Viewer ..............................................................................................................................39
10.2 Log Configuration....................................................................................................................42
11 THE NX - LICENSING PROCESS IN A NUTSHELL..............................................................42

11.1 Common Problems / Error Messages.....................................................................................42
11.2 NX Starter Kit ..........................................................................................................................42
12 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 LICENSES ........................................................................................43

12.1 Licenses and NX Version........................................................................................................43
12.2 NX Technical Licenses ...........................................................................................................43
12.2.1 NX ADVANCED MEASUREMENTS.......................................................................................44
12.2.2 NX ADVANCED TOOLS.........................................................................................................44
12.2.3 NX BACKGROUND DARKENING..........................................................................................45
12.2.4 NX BASE.................................................................................................................................45
12.2.5 NX BASIC TOOLS ..................................................................................................................45
12.2.6 NX BLACK BORDER..............................................................................................................45
12.2.7 NX CENTRAL BASE...............................................................................................................46
12.2.8 NX CONFIG ACTION BUTTON..............................................................................................47
12.2.9 NX DICOM PRINT ..................................................................................................................47
12.2.10 NX DICOM STORE SCU ........................................................................................................48
12.2.11 NX DIGITISER ........................................................................................................................48
12.2.12 NX DOSE CONSISTENCY.....................................................................................................48
12.2.13 NX DR WORKFLOW ..............................................................................................................49
12.2.14 NX EMERGENCY...................................................................................................................50
12.2.15 NX EXPORT ...........................................................................................................................50
12.2.16 NX EXPORT AUTOMATION ..................................................................................................50
12.2.17 NX EXTENDED STORAGE....................................................................................................51
12.2.18 NX FULL LEG FULL SPINE ...................................................................................................52
12.2.19 NX GRIDLINE SUPPRESSION ..............................................................................................52
12.2.20 NX ICU CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................52


12.2.21 NX IDIS1 .................................................................................................................................52
12.2.22 NX MAMMO MIXED USE .......................................................................................................53
12.2.23 NX MAMMO XRG ...................................................................................................................54
12.2.24 NX MPPS ................................................................................................................................54
12.2.25 NX MULTI EXAM SHEET .......................................................................................................55
12.2.26 NX MULTI PATIENT EXPORT ...............................................................................................55
12.2.27 NX MUSICA1 ..........................................................................................................................55
12.2.28 NX MUSICA1 ADVANCED .....................................................................................................55
12.2.29 NX MUSICA1 DENTAL...........................................................................................................55
12.2.30 NX MUSICA1 PEDIATRIC......................................................................................................56
12.2.31 NX MUSICA1 RADIOTHERAPY.............................................................................................56
12.2.32 NX MUSICA1 URO TOMO .....................................................................................................56
12.2.33 NX MUSICA2 ..........................................................................................................................57
12.2.34 NX MUSICA2 ADVANCED .....................................................................................................57
12.2.35 NX MUSICA2 CHEST/ABDOMEN/SKELETON ADULTS/PED .............................................58
12.2.36 NX MUSICA2 GENRAD SOFT ...............................................................................................58
12.2.37 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO...........................................................................................................58
12.2.38 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO MCE..................................................................................................59
12.2.39 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO_XXX Processing Packages..............................................................59
12.2.40 NX MUSICA2 NEO NATALS ..................................................................................................60
12.2.41 NX MUSICA2 PEDIATRIC......................................................................................................60
12.2.42 NX MUSICA2 VET LARGE ANIMALS....................................................................................60
12.2.43 NX MUSICA2 VET SMALL ANIMALS ....................................................................................60
12.2.44 NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL................................................................................60
12.2.45 NX NEW FEATURES 3.0 .......................................................................................................60
12.2.46 NX OFFICE VIEWER..............................................................................................................61
12.2.47 NX OFFICE VIEWER 2...........................................................................................................61
12.2.48 NX PRIORS ............................................................................................................................61
12.2.49 NX QA TOOLS........................................................................................................................62
12.2.50 NX REPEAT REJECT.............................................................................................................62
12.2.51 NX RISLINK ............................................................................................................................62


12.2.52 NX SPLIT DISPLAY................................................................................................................63
12.2.53 NX SQUARE MARKER ..........................................................................................................63
12.2.54 NX TELERADIOLOGY............................................................................................................63
12.2.55 NX VETERINARY ...................................................................................................................63
12.2.56 XRDI DXSI <NN>....................................................................................................................64
13 P-VALUES ..............................................................................................................................64
13.1 Situation without P-Values ......................................................................................................64
13.2 What is Grayscale Standard Display Function (GSDF)? ........................................................65
13.3 What are P-Values?................................................................................................................65
13.4 Limitations of P-Values ...........................................................................................................66
14 IMPORTING TECHNICAL IMAGES .......................................................................................66

15 EXPOSURE INDEX VERSUS LGM DOSE VALUES.............................................................67
15.1 Compatibility of Dose Values ..................................................................................................67
15.2 Dose Monitoring ......................................................................................................................67
16 INTEGRATING THE HEALTHCARE ENTERPRISE (IHE) ....................................................68

16.1 IHE - a brief Introduction .........................................................................................................68
16.2 Modern Hospital Information Flow ..........................................................................................68
16.2.1 Example for a Profile: “Scheduled Workflow” .........................................................................69


1 Intended Use
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation has four separate intended use types:
• NX for General Radiology (GenRad) / Mammography (Mammo) / Mixed Use
(GenRad + Mammo)
• NX for Veterinary
• NX Central Monitoring System (CMS)
• NX Office Viewer
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 is intended to be installed, used and operated only in

accordance with the safety procedures given within this manual for the purpose for
which it was designed.
1.1 NX Workstations for GenRad-Mammography Mixed Use
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 is a standalone CR/DR workstation. The NX workstation

can be used in mixed environment which includes CR/DR General Radiology and
CR Mammography environments. It is used for:
• Image acquisition
• Identification
• Image processing (Musica Image Processing)
• Image transmission
• Providing XRG connectivity for setting and receiving XRG parameters.
RIS
PACS
Send raw image + XRG param.

age
Send raw im
Send XRG param.
NX DIGITIZER
DR (example)
MODALITY
(example)
Film
CD ROM
Figure 1


It receives images from a digitizer or Agfa validated DR Panel, prepares these images
for diagnostic use and:
• Sends them to a printer to print on film.
• Sends them to an archive (PACS).
• Burns them on CD ROM.
• Identifies examinations using RIS-based worklists.
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 provides tools to modify image quality of the medical images
and to predefine image processing settings.
1.1.1 Limitations for GenRad-Mammography Mixed Use
• The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation is not intended to be used as an archive

system.
• The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation is not intended to be used as an image
viewer for diagnostic reading for Mammography.
• TWAIN digitizers require a dedicated NX workstation and cannot be used for
mixed use. For an overview of TWAIN and DICOM digitizers refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart
DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Depending on the activated licenses, the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation will allow
to perform:
• Only GenRad examinations:
If the technical license NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO is not available, Mammography
examinations cannot be configured in the Configuration Tool.
• Only Mammography examinations:
If the technical license NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO is available and the technical
license NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MIXED is not available, GenRad examinations
cannot be selected in the NX Application.
• Both GenRad and Mammography examinations ("Mixed Use"):
If the technical licenses NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO and
NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MIXED are both available, GenRad and
Mammography examinations can be executed on the same system.
NOTE:
• The technical license NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO cannot be
disabled in the Configuration Tool. I.e. a Mammo-only system
cannot be turned into a GenRad system without updating the
ALF file.
• Mammography functionality is available depending on
regional/country releases and/or compliance to local
regulations.


1.2 NX Central Monitoring System (CMS)
CMS
NX NX NX NX NX
Figure 2
The intended use of the NX Central Monitoring System is:

• Centrally search for exams performed on any of the connected NXs.
• Do quality monitoring centrally (dose monitoring, reject analysis).
• Perform queue management.
• Discuss imaging problems at a central location, away from the exam room.
• Perform QC tasks flexible either on the in-room NX or on the central station
(e.g. day/nightly work).
• Prepare images received from the connected NXs for diagnostic use.
• Send the images to a printer to print on film.
• Send the images to an archive (PACS).
• Burn the images on CD-ROM.
• Provides tools to modify image quality of the images and to predefine image
processing settings.
1.2.1 Limitations for CMS
• CMS is able to connect to maximum 5 NXs.

• Images from one NX cannot be transferred to another NX.
• No local storage of exams on CMS.
• CMS and NX cannot run on the same PC.
• Cassette identification is not possible on CMS.
• Only simple queries can be made.
• It is not an archive (or PACS).
• All workstations connected to a CMS must share the same dose measurement
type (either Logarithmic Median (LGM) or Exposure Index (EI).


1.3 NX Veterinary
The Veterinary NX workstation functions identical to a GenRad NX workstation.

The functional differences are linked to a dedicated Veterinary license:
• Additional DICOM fields can be configured in the Configuration Tool.
• A Veterinary exam tree is available.
1.4 NX Office Viewer
NX Office Viewer is a software-only application for viewing digitized images created on

NX Modality workstations. The application is installable on any PC fulfilling the defined
minimum requirements.
NX Office Viewer is intended to view images for Mammography, Radiotherapy,
General Radiology (GenRad) and Veterinary.
NOTE:
Since the Installation of the NX Office Viewer software is performed by the user, this
service documentation does not contain installation and configuration instructions.
For detailed information about the NX Office Viewer refer to the NX Office Viewer
Installation Manual (doc 4429) on MedNet HealthCare Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ NX 2.0.8300 - NX 3.0.8300 Æ
User Manual.
For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative.
1.4.1 Limitations of the NX Office Viewer
• Display image quality depends on the connected monitor. With the additional
diagnostic monitor images are displayed with diagnostic quality, but no extensive
toolset for softcopy reading is foreseen.
• With NX Office Viewer the presentation of images can be changeed, but these
changes cannot be saved.
• NX Office Viewer can be used to print images on an office type printer in non-
diagnostic quality.
• NX Office Viewer can be used to export images to hard disk in
non-diagnostic quality.
• NX Office Viewer is not intended to be used as an archive.
• Maximum six NX Office Viewers can be connected to two NX.


2 Network Connectivity
2.1 General Network Information
The NX requires a 100 Mbit ethernet network to exchange information

with other devices. NX communicates with other devices in the hospital network using
the DICOM protocol.
2.2 Optional Intensive Care Unit (ICU) Workflow
The license NX_ICU_CONFIGURATION allows the NX workstation to be used mobile

inside the hospital, e.g. the intensive care unit (ICU).
The network prerequisites for the ICU workflow are:
• The NX must run on a laptop PC.
For information which NX laptop is compatible with the ICU workflow, refer to the
• Availability of either a wireless network (WiFi) or fixed network (Ethernet) that
can be easily unplugged.
NOTE:
• Combined use of wireless and fixed network is not supported.
• NX Central Monitoring System and NX Office Viewer do not support wireless
network.
INSTRUCTION:
For detailed information about the ICU workflow and the installation of required
components refer to the installation instructions enclosed to the ID Scanner
DD+DIS125.09E or the ID Scanner service manual available on MedNet GSO Library


3 Intended Environment of the Product
• The NX system can either be installed in an X-ray room or outside

an X-ray room.
• Targeted users of the NX system are:
o Private radiologists
o Clinics
o Imaging centers
o Large hospitals, in hospitals the system can be used in the central
radiology department, in emergency rooms, in intensive care units as well
as in other decentralized locations.
• The NX system is sold world-wide.
• The NX system can be installed in mobile environments such as vans,
trucks or ships.
• The NX system can be used in a secure environment (authentication, audit trail,
secure communication using certificates).
4 Menus and Functional Keys
NOTE:
Menus and functional keys to be operated by the customer are not part of this
chapter. This functional description describes service specific activities only.
For an overview of functional keys to be operated by the customer, refer to the
NX User Manual (NX Online Help).
5 Service Functions
5.1 NX Software Service Tools
The NX comes with a variety of service tools that can be found in the Windows Start
Menu: Start Æ Agfa. A complete list of the tools and explanations to the tools can be
found on the NX workstation.
To view the list go to: Start Æ NX Æ Service Æ About NX Service Tools


5.2 Additional Software
Name Shortcut Description

ASAP Start Æ Programs Æ AGFA DX-S Used for configuring the TWAIN
digitizer (e.g. DX-S).
DICOM Not installed on the NX System. The The sniffer can be installed on the
Sniffer installer and documentation are NX to capture all incoming and
available on the NX System in this outgoing DICOM traffic and can be
folder: very useful for trouble shooting.
C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Installers\
Dicom sniffer
6 Software Architecture
6.1 Process View – NX Workstation
The NX workstation consists out of the following processes. Each process is assigned
to a certain account that grants the process the required privileges to perform its tasks.
QCID Viewer 2 Uses Agfa Licensing 5

Account: Interactive User Service
Account:
NTAUTHORITY\LocalSystem
uses
Uses
Config Tool 3
NX backend 1 Account: Interactive User with
Account: Local Admin local admin privileges for test
(Default: NXWorkstationUser) Uses connection and activation of
services new configuration.
exposed by
Uses
Imaging Server 4
Figure 3


1. NX backend:
When active, visible in the Task Manager as:
NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe
This process (Window Service) automatically starts up with the system and runs in the
background.
• It performs all business services requested by the QCID viewer
(e.g. Session management, Print Job Service, ID Tablet communication,
Audit Logging etc.).
• It receives licensing information from the Agfa Licensing Service.
During regular use of the NX, this process doesn’t have to be stopped or started
manually.
This process runs under a fixed account, independently of the logged in account.
2. QCID Viewer:
When active, visible in Task Manager as:
NX.Application.Visual.QCIDViewer.exe
This process runs the NX Viewer.
• It receives requests from the user via user interface.
• It sends requests to the NX backend to perform the business services.
This process can be started automatically with system start by putting a shortcut into
the start up menu. It can also be stopped and started manually.
This process runs under the account used to log in to the system.
3. Config Tool:
NX.Application.Visual.ConfigTool.exe
This process runs the Configuration Tool.
• It receives requests from the Key User/FSE/CAS via user interface.
• It uses services exposed by the NX backend.
To be able to perform device test and activate new configuration settings, the user
account of the respective user has to be designed as a local Windows administrator
(not to confuse with the NX authorization, which is an application-level concept).


4. Imaging Service:
NX.Application.NonVisual.ImagingServer.exe
It performs the image-preprocessing requested by the NX backend
(XRayImagePreprocessor).
It does not need to be started nor stopped manually.
5. Agfa Licensing Service

LicensingServiceNT.He.exe
This process runs the Licensing service and provides the licensing information to the
NX backend. This service starts up together with the system.
manually.
This process runs under a fixed account (LOCALSYSTEM), independently of the
logged in account.
6.2 Data Files Subfolders and Image Flow
This section provides an overview of the usage of the subfolders of the folder
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles and how it relates to the image flow.
NOTE:
Following terms are used below:
• Temporary storage:
The files remain in this folder as long as required during a “flow” (incoming image
from digitizer, sending an image to a printer or an archive, etc.). These files are
typically required for the correct NX functioning during the flow execution and
deleted afterwards.
• Permanent storage:
Files remain in this folder as long as the associated image is available in an NX
session in the database. These files are typically required for correct NX
functioning as long as the image is available on the NX.
• Semi-permanent storage:
The lifetime of the files is dynamically managed by NX software based on e.g.
available disk space and last access time. These files are typically not required
for correct NX functioning, but removing them slows down performance next time
the images are used by the system.


6.2.1 Image comes from Digitizer – regular Flow
The following folders on the NX workstation are involved in a regular flow of the image:
• DicomAcquiredFiles (temporary storage):
When an image is received from a DICOM digitizer, the result
(demographic data and image pixels) is stored as a dcm file in this folder.
• TwainAcquiredFiles (temporary storage):
When an image is received from a TWAIN digitizer, the result (demographic data
and image pixels) is stored in two files (XML file with demographic data and
pixel file) in this folder.
• PixelFiles (temporary storage):
Subsequently the demographic data is stored in the NX DataBase and the pixel
data is stored in pure raw format in the PixelFiles folder (independently whether a
DICOM or a TWAIN digitizer was used).
• PreprocessedPixelFiles (permanent storage)
The pixel data is preprocessed (rotation, gridline suppression, overscan removal)
and the result is stored in the PreprocessedPixelFiles folder. These pixel files are
still in a “raw” format, i.e. prepared for further image processing.
6.2.2 Image comes from Digitizer – irregular Flow
The following folders on the NX workstation are involved in an irregular flow of the
image:
• Refused:
When the incoming image flow fails for some reason (i.e. the image is not
delivered to the PreprocessedPixelFiles folder), the related file(s) are moved from
the DicomAcquiredFiles/TwainAcquiredFiles into a separate Refused folder.
DICOM files are moved to a Refused subfolder of the DicomAcquiredFiles folder.
TWAIN files are moved to a Refused subfolder of the DataFiles folder.
NOTE:
The Refused folders are not cleaned up automatically.
• DicomStore/TwainProcessedFiles (Enhanced Service Mode):

When a digitizer is set in Enhanced Service Mode, a copy of the related files in
the DicomAcquiredFiles/TwainAcquiredFiles is created in a separate folder.
DICOM files are copied into the DicomStore subfolder. TWAIN files are copied
into the TwainProcessedFiles subfolder.
NOTE:
The Enhanced Service Mode storage folders are cleaned up at the
moment the Enhanced Service Mode is again disabled.


6.2.3 Image Processing Flows
The following folders on the NX workstation are involved in the image processing flow:
• ImageCache (semi-permanent storage):
Processed versions of the pixel files are “cached” in the ImageCache folder to
improve NX performance when images need to be displayed or printed.
Depending on the usage scenario, a “low resolution” and/or a “normal resolution”
version is stored.
• ArchiveCache (temporary storage):
Processed versions of the pixel files which are rendered for archiving are stored
in the ArchiveCache folder as long as the archival job has not been finished.
• QueueFiles (temporary storage):
Job descriptions (for printing, archiving and mpps reporting) are stored in an NX
private format in the QueueFiles subfolders. These files do not contain any pixel
data.
• ExportAutomationStash (temporary storage):
Storage location for the Dicom files which are produced by Export Automation
and which are waiting to be burned onto CD or DVD.
• PatientPhotoFiles (permanent storage):
Storage location for the patient photos that are put on a print sheet.
6.3 Configuration Management
The following figure gives an overview of the NX configuration management:
Online (on site) Offline (e.g. on service PC)

Operating System
NX System Users Licenses
NX Application
User Interface
Modify configuration
NX Application layer Portable storage medium

(runs in the background) (checked to be virus-free,
e.g. USB memory stick)
Export
Uses
Load
Export
Load
1
Configuration Offline Configuration
Tool Tool
NX Database: 2 5
contains 3
configuration data
Figure 4


1. The current configuration data (settings) are loaded from the NX Database into the
Configuration Tool.
2. The user (FSE/CAS) modifies the configuration settings via the Configuration Tool.
The licenses are used to determine the scope of functions available on the
NX System.
3. The modified configuration is activated in the Configuration Tool.
I.e. the configuration data is loaded back into the NX database.
4. The NX Application layer uses the configuration data to determine its functional
behavior and the appearance of the NX Application User Interface.
5. Offline Configuration Tool:
The configuration data can be exported from the Configuration Tool to a portable
medium. From this portable medium the configuration data can be loaded into the
Offline Configuration Tool. The configuration data can be modified on the
Offline Configuration Tool and later be re-imported to the Configuration Tool.
6.4 Technical Background on Software Deployment
NX systems are produced on standard platforms. The standard platform is defined by:
• Specific hardware
• Specific operating system
The NX software is installed on top of the hardware and operating system.
6.4.1 Production Process
All systems staged by production are equipped with the same software configuration,
including:
• XOS (operating system)
• Hotfixes
• OS Language Packs (MUI) for all supported languages
• NX Software (not yet activated)
• NX Online Help for all supported languages
• XRDI Software
• FUSE software
• Drivers for all supported types of
o UPS
o Monitor (including Niowatch calibration software)
• Digitizer software installers (installation is done during activation of the system)


6.4.2 Activation Process
On site, the licenses are loaded on the system and the NX software is 'activated'.
Based on the available licenses, the software is activated for a specific intended use:
• GenRad/Mammo/Mixed Use
• Veterinary
• CMS
Based on digitizer type and user selection, the software is activated for a specific dose
monitoring type:
• LGM
• Exposure Index (EI)
The Digitizer software for the connected type of digitizer is installed.
6.5 Partitioning
Depending on the hardware type, the NX has one or two hard disks.
The different types are:
• Two hard disks of different sizes (This is only exists on upgraded
CR QS systems)
Æ Partition C: on the first disk, the size is defined by the OS installation
Æ Partition D: on the second disk; size = maximum capacity
• One hard disk
Æ Partition C: size defined by OS installation
Æ Partition D: size = remaining capacity
• Two hard disks of identical size for RAID
Æ Partition C: on first disk; size defined by the OS installation;
Æ Partition D: on first disk; size = remaining capacity
NOTE:
If systems are delivered with 2 hard disks for RAID support, the
second hard disk is NOT used for partition D.
For all types:

• First partition - drive letter C: Contains the System data, the Configuration data
and the Exam Demographics data.
• Second partition – drive letter D: Contains all Image pixel data and Backup data.


6.6 RAID Support for NX Workstations
RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) allows data to be distributed across

multiple hard disks to provide data redundancy (mirroring) and increase fault tolerance.
A RAID array contains two hard disks where the data between the two hard drives is
mirrored in real time to provide good data reliability in case of a single disk failure.
When one disk fails all data is immediately available on the other one without any
impact on the integrity of the data.*
* The correct term for a RAID system taking advantage of mirroring disks to increase reliability is “RAID 1”.
Figure 5
NOTE:
• Systems with RAID support are delivered with an extra hard disk and activated
RAID mirroring. No extra installation or configuration activities are required.
• If a clean installation is performed on an NX system with RAID support, RAID has
to be activated after the clean installation procedure.
6.7 Security and User Policy
6.7.1 Authentication Management – Who are you?
On NX, the users with their passwords and policies are stored on the operating system
(or on the domain).


6.7.2 Authorization Management – What are you allowed to do?
6.7.2.1 Security Repository
For authorization purposes, NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 uses a XML Security Repository.

This XML file is used to store the data that is managed in the
Configuration Tool Æ Security Æ User Management pane (roles, permissions and
user-to-role assignments).
The XML file is located in:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Authorization\SecurityRepository.xml
IMPORTANT:
Since the XML file is digitally signed, do not edit this file directly. This will invalidate the
digital signature.
6.7.2.2 Authorization Model
The authorization model used in NX is RBAC (Role Based Access Control).

The information of the RBAC is stored in the SecurityRepository.xml.
This figure reflects the multi-level user right assignment on NX:
is allowed to execute is assigned to

Operation Role User
is enrolled in
Figure 6
6.7.3 Pre-installed Technical User Accounts
The following user accounts are pre-installed on the NX workstations:

• NXWORKSTATIONUSER: Internal service account that cannot be used to
connect interactively. Used as account for the NX
workstation and NX configuration service.
• CRSERVICE: User account that can be used by service to login to
the local system.
• ADMINISTRATOR: User account that can be used by the hospital IT
personnel to login to the local system.


6.7.4 New User Accounts
NOTE:
Existing users on operating system level must be added explicitly to the Configuration
Tool list of NX Users as 'new user'.
The access rights to the different NX functions are bundled into 'operations'. These
operations cannot be changed.
The operations are bundled into 'user roles'. The user roles can be configured, but the
NX system provides a set of predefined user roles that should fulfill normal
requirements:
• Service Engineer • Quality Assurance engineer
• Security Operator • Security administrator
• Operator • System administrator
• Super operator
A role defines which operations can be executed. Users can be ‘enrolled’ to one or
multiple roles.
Uses
Operator:
xe cu te is assi
ed to e Role gn ed to
is allow
Window level: James Ensor:
Operation User
e
ut
is allowed to execute
ec
ex
is
to
as
d
si g
we
ne
ll o
d
a
to
is
Manual print: John Doe:

Operation User
View:
Operation
Figure 7
6.8 Backup/Restore Principles
There are 3 main functional parts in an installed NX system:

1. Programs: This includes OS, binaries, sound files, local user accounts and all
installed software.
2. Config data: Configuration data, including the part of the database that contains
configuration data.
3. Examination data: The image pixel files, and the part of the NX database
containing patient data and image demographics.


Data Stored on Backup using

Local user accounts System Data (partition C): Not backed up
Windows OS
Certificates System Data (partition C): Not backed up
Windows certificate key store
NX Application Software System Data (partition C): Not backed up
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin
Configuration data Configuration Data (partition C): NX Backup utility
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (configuration or
(Database Store) complete)
License file Configuration Data (partition C): NX Backup utility
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (configuration or
complete)
Fingerprint file System Data (partition C): Not backed up
Windows OS
Pixel files Data (partition D): Cannot be backed up
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles using NX software. Send
images to archive or
printer.
Authorization: User roles Configuration Data (partition C): NX Backup utility
and user to role C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Authoriz (configuration or
assignments ation (XML-file) complete)
Logo files (used in print Configuration Data (partition C): NX Backup utility
sheet layouts, etc. C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (configuration or
complete)
Exam data (demographic Configuration Data (partition C): NX backup utility
data) C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (complete)
(Database Store)
Temporary files Data (partition D): Not backed up
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles
Registry settings System Data (partition C): Not backed up
Windows OS
Operating System (OS) System Data (partition C): Not backed up
Windows OS
NX Backup Utility Data Backup (partition D): Not backed up
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Backup
Logging Data System (partition C): Not backed up
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\NX
NOTE:
The NX backup utility is version-dependent. This means that a backup created with a
previous release of the NX Software (e.g. NX 2.0) cannot be used to restore.


6.9 Disk Space Management
6.9.1 Clean Up Rules
NOTE:
The Clean up rules are not configurable.
• LOCKED sessions are not cleaned up at all. They have to be unlocked first.
• Only CLOSED sessions can be cleaned up.
• Sessions can only be cleaned up if they are older than 24 hours. The oldest
sessions are cleaned up first. This is based on the Clean Up date and time.
• Only sessions with session PRINT and ARCHIVE automation state DONE or
NOT REQUESTED are cleaned up. When the session automation state is
REQUESTED or FAILED, the session is not cleaned up automatically. It either
has to obtain the ‘DONE’ status first, or be cleaned up manually.
• There is no exception for sessions which contain images that are ‘PLANNED’ or
‘CASSETTE_IDENTIFIED’. Rationale: If the session is older than 24 hours, the
cassette will probably have been overwritten anyway. Also for ‘REJECTED’
images, no exception is made since rejected images are not important enough to
risk the hard disk to saturate.
• Once a session is cleaned up, the corresponding jobs in the queue(s) are also
deleted. This implies all jobs, independent of the status.
• Other automation tasks, such as MPPS or routing to a softcopy display, do not
have any influence on the clean up behavior. In other words: When the session
has a MPPS automation state ‘FAILED’ it is still cleaned up.
• Not regarding the free space on the database, images should only stay on the NX
for maximally a certain amount of days (this can be configured using the NX
Configuration Tool).
6.9.2 Clean Up Mechanism
Every hour, NX performs these checks:

• If the disk space occupied by images on the DATA partition exceeds
a defined limit, the NX cleans up the disk until less than this limit of disk space is
occupied by images.
NOTE:
If the NX_EXTENDED_STORAGE license is enabled, the limit is set to a
higher value since there is more hard disk space available.


• If more than 7500 sessions are stored in the database, NX cleans up sessions
until less than 7500 sessions are in the database.
• If more than 17000 exposures are stored in the database (inclusively exposures
without images), NX cleans up sessions until less than 17000 exposures are in
the database.
NOTE:
If the NX_EXTENDED_STORAGE license is enabled, the limit is set to
30000 exposures.
• A warning is displayed if the limit is still exceeded after the clean up (MESS164).
Every hour, this procedure is repeated. In case the hard disk has run full, NX will block
incoming images.
NOTE:
If a session is about to be cleaned up, but a job is still in the state “PROCESSING”,
NX waits until this job is in another state (e.g. “FAILED” or “DONE”) before cleaning up
the session.
If an automation task has not been completed yet, the session will not be cleaned up
anyway. This note only applies to jobs that are NOT caused by an automation task.
6.9.3 Manual Clean Up
A session can be cleaned up manually. Typical use examples:

• Archive automation: the images have arrived on the PACS successfully, but the
storage commitment message was lost. Hence, the session will not have status
‘DONE’, but it can be cleaned up manually.
• In a very work intensive period, it might be needed to delete ‘DONE’ sessions
that are younger than 24 hours.
There is no error message foreseen when a manual clean up is done for a session
which has still scheduled jobs on some queues. These jobs will be cleaned up with the
session automatically, without warnings.
If a session however has jobs in progress, deletion cannot happen until this job has
either ended (status DONE) or failed.


6.10 NX Central Monitoring System (CMS)
6.10.1 Main Purpose
The NX CMS is a separate application that allows to:

• Centrally manage the dose & repeat/reject statistics.
• Trigger workflow automation from within the CMS system.
• View/Edit images residing on different NX in-room systems.
It does not allow any identification-related actions (identifying a cassette, etc).
6.10.2 Process View – NX CMS
The NX CMS consists out of the following processes. Each process is assigned to a
certain account that grants the process the required privileges to perform its tasks.
QCID Viewer 1
Account: Interactive User
uses
Agfa Licensing 3 Config Tool 2

Service uses Account: Interactive User with
Account: local admin privileges for test
NTAUTHORITY\LocalSystem connection and activation of
new configuration.
Figure 8
NOTE:
Important difference when compared to an in-room NX:
There is no NXWorkstation service for the Central Management System.


1. QCID Viewer:
NX.Application.Visual.QCIDViewer.exe
This process runs the NX Viewer.
• It receives requests from the user via user interface.
This process can be started automatically with system start by putting a shortcut into
the start up menu. It can also be stopped and started manually
2. Config Tool:
NX.Application.Visual.ConfigTool.exe
This process runs the Configuration Tool.
• It receives requests from the Key User/FSE/CAS via user interface
• It retrieves user information from the Agfa Licensing Service.
To be able to activate new configuration settings, the user account of the respective
user has to be designed as a local Windows administrator (not to confuse with the NX
authorization, which is an application-level concept).
3. Agfa Licensing Service:

LicensingServiceNT.He.exe
This process runs the Licensing service and provides the licensing information to the
NX backend. This service starts up together with the system.
manually.
This process runs under a fixed account (LOCALSYSTEM), independently of the
logged in account.


6.10.3 Deployment View
Standard NX PC 1 Standard NX PC 2
«Process» «Process»
QC Viewer QC Viewer
«Process» «Process»
«Process»
NX Workstation NX Workstation
«Process»
Central
QC Viewer
Figure 9
The CMS allows to access sessions and images residing on different in-room
NX systems. They are communicating to each other using TCP/IP.
The NX systems the CMS needs to monitor are configured on the CMS system.
Data is shared between the Central QC system and the in-room station using hidden
shared folders:
• One share folder for the run-time data
• Another share folder for the configuration data
The Central QC Viewer reads the data from the in-room NX system and does not copy
it locally.


6.10.4 Configuration data Origin
On a CMS are less items to be configured as the actual archive destination, printers,
etc are all depending on the configuration of the NX in-room system that the CMS
is using.
Configuration steps In-room configuration Central configuration

Priors configuration 9 9
Automated printing /archiving and 9 ⎯
manual print / send
List of connected rooms ⎯ 9
Authorization configuration ⎯ 9
GUI customization configuration 9 9
(SPS worklist, which is shown (including the central
in case of ‘Transfer image’) QC overview)
Licensing configuration 9 9
(the license checks are (the license checks are
performed in the back-end) performed in the front-end)
Device configuration 9 ⎯
Exam tree configuration 9 ⎯
NOTE:
• After the configuration is changed on an in-room NX workstation,
restart the CMS.
• After the configuration is changed on the CMS, restart the connected
in-room NX workstations.


6.10.5 Central Administration
<<nodeInstance>> <<nodeInstance>>
In-room system A: NX System In-room system B: NX System
Us
Collect daty by accessing the

es
es
databases remotely.
Us
<<nodeInstance>>
Central QC Viewer: NX System
Figure 10
The CMS system can be configured such that the dose and repeat or reject statistics
are all stored on the CMS system. When configured, the CMS system will – at regular
intervals - try to contact each connected room, retrieve the statistics and move them to
the CMS DB. This all happens without any user intervention.
6.10.6 Simultaneous Viewing
If the same examination is being displayed on another workstation at the same time,
this icon appears next to the examination in the worklist or next to the patient name in
the open-examination-drop-down on top of the Examination or Viewing screen.
In this case, be aware that the system is not designed for simultaneous editing!
6.10.7 Simultaneous Editing
If someone else is applying changes to the same image or exam data, at the same
time, some of the changes made in parallel may be undone by the other user.
A message may be shown saying "The requested action has not been performed."
When someone is editing an image, the changes will be visible on the other stations
within maximum 15 seconds after the change has completed.


7 NX Configuration Tasks
The configuration of an NX system is described in detail in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E
In the following sections some important configuration topics are explained.
7.1 Offline Configuration Tool
For information about the Offline Configuration Tool refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 5 Offline Configuration Tool Installation and Use
7.2 Archiving
• If the archive supports DICOM Grayscale Presentation State (GSPS),

annotations are stored separately from the image. The annotations can be made
visible or invisible on the archive. If the archive doesn't support DICOM GSPS,
annotations are burned into the image. Markers are always burned into the
image.
• If manual entry of XRG parameters is configured and the archive is configured
with the CR IMAGE SOP class, only the attributes that exist in the CR IMAGE
SOP Class will be sent to the archive.
This is different compared to CR QS for Mammography, which sent the other
attributes as private attributes.
7.3 Gridline Suppression
The use of Standard Resolution cassettes in combination with Gridline Suppression is

not supported, e.g. on ADC Compact Plus, CR 25.0 and CR 75.0, CR 35-X and
CR 85-X digitizers.
7.4 Emergency Procedure
The NX software has a built-in emergency feature that allows more flexibility. The user
has to trigger emergency using the Emergency Exam button in the Worklist
environment. Refer to the Configuration Tool Online Help (F1) in General Configuration
Æ Workflow Management Æ Emergency Procedure for information on configuring the
Emergency Procedure on NX.
The configuration of the Emergency Procedure in Workflow Management, applies to


the built-in NX Emergency functionality, triggered by the user via the Emergency Exam
button in the Workflow environment. If the user requires the Emergency Procedure that
is triggered via the Emergency buttons on the digitizer, refer to the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration
DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link), section Configuring Digitizers.
8 Acceptance Test Procedure
The acceptance test procedure (ATP) allows verifying the specified functionality and
performance on site after installation and other service interventions.
Æ It proves that the device is fit for the intended use.
IMPORTANT:
This technical Acceptance Test does not replace any Acceptance Tests defined
for Solutions (e.g. Acceptance Test for the CR Mammography Solution).
INSTRUCTION:
To perform the NX Acceptance Test, use the Acceptance Test Protocol (ATP) in the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 6 Acceptance Test DD+DIS105.10E
9 Exam Tree Converter
A tool is provided to convert existing exam trees to an NX exam tree:

VIPS, ADC QS 2.0, ADC QS 2.1, CR QS 3.0, CR QS 3.5 Æ NX
The exam tree converter tool creates an NX XML file, to be imported into the
NX Configuration Tool. The tool only converts the exam tree. Printers, archives,
digitizers have to be reconfigured manually.
The procedure is described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
NOTE:
• The tool cannot be used to create Mammography exam trees.
• The conversion of mammography exposures is not converted. If the converter
detects such exposures, they will be skipped.
For an overview of exam trees, see the next sections.


9.1 Overview of VIPS and ADC QS Exam Trees
VIPS ADC QS
Exam Set (aka Study Group)

Radiologist
+Name
+Name +CpfOrder
Exam Set (aka Study Type)

+Name
Exam +CpfOrder
+HoldRequest
+Name
+PrefetchParameters
+RequestedCopyCount
+RoutingParameters
SubExam (aka SubStudy)

SubExam (aka SubStudy)
+Name
+Name +CpfOrder
IMPM +Qualifier +Body Part
+FilmLayout +OperatingCode
+PorCode
+CorCode
+ExpoCode
Image Processing +NrOfCopies Exposure
Menu, containing all +Erasure
+HCP +Name
Musica1 processing
+PS +CpfOfer
parameters
+SCP +CassetteOrientation
+AS +CollimationParameters
+BodyPart +ErasureExposureDose
+Laterality +ExposureClass
+Hold +IPMenuNumber
+RADI[10] +ImageProcessingParameters
+ImageUuid
+Laterality
+QCType
+QSQualifier
+SensName
+Laterality
+TechnicalImage
+ViewPosition
Figure 11


9.2 Overview of NX Exam Tree
NX
AgeGroup
+Name
+AgeRange
+IsPediatric
ExamGroup GUI_ExamGroup
+Name +ProtocolCodeList
+ApplicationType +Visible
+GUIPosition
Exposure Type FLPSExposureSet

+Name +NrOfImages
+BodyPart
+AnatomicRegion
+ViewPosition
+View Code FLPSExposurePart
+CassetteOrientation
+ImageLaterality
+EnableMarker
+Zoom
+SpeedClass
+ErasureDose
+CollimationConfig
+CollimationBorder
+PrinterProfile = Default ExamGroup
+ArchiveAutomation = Default +Musica1Settings
+ProtocolCodeList +Musica2Offset
+ImageProcessing = Both
+GUIPosition
Figure 12


9.3 Background on the NX Exam Tree
There are again 3 levels as in VIPS (compare QS: 4 levels). This scheme reflects the
data structure of the exam tree:
Figure 13
Age Group
• Highest level = Age Group, linked to Musica1 or Musica2 paediatric processing
(license!). Age Groups are fixed, because they depend on Musica processing.
• NX automatically chooses the Age Group, based on patient’s birth date
(possibility to pick other Age Group, e.g. 10 years old child 80 kg).
• Without the pediatric license the Age Group is always “Adults”.
The availability of age groups on the system depends on the Paediatric Licenses.


Exposure Group
• Extra functionality vs. ADC QS
• Exposure group = grouping of different exposures
• Reason 1: Protocol codes (see also ‘RIS configuration’.)
• Reason 2: Automatic print of > 1 image on a sheet.
• Reason 3: Facilitate operator workflow.
Changed compared to ADC QS: Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) workflow
• New concept: “FLFS Set”
• Operator adds all FLFS exposures at once with a “FLFS Set”.
• Images are automatically stitched.
• Improved selection behavior and workflow
Print configuration
• Fixed print layouts (no print layout editor in NX)
• If nothing specified on exposure level in exam tree: default 1 on 1 printing with
sheet size depending directly on cassette size.
• Advanced print layouts Æ use in combination with exposure groups or
use manually.
• Drag and drop images onto a sheet.
• Available sheet sizes depend on installed printers.
Changed compared to NX 1.0 and NX 2.0 Mammography

• Multiple archive destinations (up to 3) can be configured on exposure level.
Advanced find & replace

• Allows searching exposure types in the Configuration Tool with query.
• Possible to change certain attributes
• Example: “change sensitivity of all Chest images from 100 to 200, except for the
chests in the Baby Age Group”


9.4 Exam Tree Model
Exam Tree model: 3 levels
Age Group
(Fixed)
Exam Group
(Configurable)
Exposure Type
(Configurable)
Figure 14
9.5 Exposure Types Features
9.5.1 View Code and View Position
• View Position = PA, AP, LL, RL (mandatory)

• View Code = Extended table for DX images (optional)
• The Configuration tool helps the service engineer in finding the correct view code.
• Incorrect Patient Orientation problem should be fixed (unwanted flipping of
images in PACS):
Æ Correct View Position can be used (not “AP” for all images).
9.5.2 Body Part and Anatomic Region
• Body Parts: as defined in DICOM. It is not possible to add customized body parts,
but all DICOM tags are translated.
• Anatomic Region = Extended table for DX images (optional)
• Body Part may be left empty.


9.5.3 Enable Laterality Option
• Image Laterality = Left, Right, Both, Unpaired

• Example: Chest = Unpaired
• Example: Hand = Left, right or both
• Enable laterality option: When exposure is “both”, and L/R marker is placed Æ
laterality changes to “Left” or “Right” automatically.
• Laterality can be configured per exposure type.
9.5.4 Automation in NX
• Default automation is configured system wide: Print and/or archive automation

(licensed!)
• Exposure types have “print automation” and “archive automation” values.
• Possible values: Default, off
• “Default” = System wide setting, can be overruled by “off”
• Example: System wide print automation, but don’t print FLFS partial images.
• As of NX 2008 (NX 3.0.7000): Export automation
10 Logging
The Cx Logging components consist of:

• Logger component (integrated in the NX application)
• Log Viewer
10.1 Log Viewer
NX sends log entries using a log originator.

This ‘originator’ is the fully qualified name of the component that was has logged the
entry.


A log entry contains:

• Timestamp
• Originator
• Level (Debug, Information, Warning, Error, Fatal)
• Message
• Thread ID
• Exception (optional, logged if the log entry corresponds to an exception that
occurred)
• Additional properties
Logging Example:
Timestamp : 2004-11-18 14:35:08.599
Originator : Agfa.NX.Application.NonVisual.ImageAcquisition.DeviceCoor
dination.MockupDashboard.ServicePlugIn.MockupPlugIn
Log level : INFO
Message : $Finished configuring remoting from file:
C:\views\amdoh_nx_vam1329_main_branch\ADC_QS_N
GA\bin\Debug\plugins\qcidviewer.xml
Domain : Agfa.NX.Application.NonVisual.ConsoleHost.exe
User : AGBMI\amdoh
Thread : 4088
Figure 15
Per process, a log file is being created with a maximum size constraint on it. The
principle for removing old entries is First In First Out (FIFO).
NX has three main log files:
• NX workstation service logging
• QC/ID Viewer logging
• NX Configuration tool logging
NOTE:
The NX application does not use the Windows Event log. All logging is written to a
file stored per process in the location: C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\NX\XML


The Log Viewer has the following features:

• Read log entries from file. Once opened, live updates will be visualized at the end
of the logging view while the NX application is still running.
• Merge log entries from different locations.
• Grid view of the log entries
• Detailed view of the selected log entry
• Tree view of the log originators
• Filter functionality
• Basic search functionality
• Export filtered log entries
Figure 16
Extended functionality:
• Dock-able windows
• Multi-select in logging grid
• Copy selected log messages to the clipboard.
• Advanced search functionality
• Coloring of log entries in logging grid
• Customizable grid views
• Save/restore of filter an color profiles


10.2 Log Configuration
The standard logging has every component’s level set to INFO. This implies that INFO,
WARNING, ERROR and FATAL messages are being logged.
In the Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Logging it is possible to activate DEBUG-level
logging for certain features.
Sample features: Detailed archive logging, detailed print logging, etc.
11 The NX - Licensing Process in a Nutshell
For detailed procedures how to obtain a license file, see the Licensing Service
Documentation DD+DIS012.06E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
11.1 Common Problems / Error Messages
Error message about expired trial licenses:

Æ Disable the license or customers buy the full license.
Broken/lost license dongle:
Æ Contact Agfa and replace the dongle. See also Licensing Service Documentation
User has license but functionality is still unavailable:
Æ Check security role of the user.
11.2 NX Starter Kit
The NX Starter Kit consists of one box containing:

• CD containing:
o All NX software components
o Tutorial, Installation Guide, and ReadMe in PDF
• DVD containing:
o Documentation
o Tutorial in full color, License Agreement
• USB Dongle (also available as separate spare part)
For the spare part order number refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 13 Spare Parts List DD+DIS116.10M


12 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Licenses
12.1 Licenses and NX Version
The availability of special NX features (licenses) on an NX system depends on what

the customer has ordered.
The version number displayed in the "About NX" dialog depends on the installed
licenses. NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 introduced new features (licenses) compared to
the predecessor NX version.
• If the new licenses are not active, the version number of the software will be
NX 2.0.8300.
• If new licenses are active, the version number becomes NX 3.0.8300.
NX is always sold with an initial start up pack, which can be extended with optional
license packs. The list of start up packs and the available optional license packs for
each start up pack is documented in the Commercial Licensing table published on the
Mednet HealthCare Library, path:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ
NX 2.0.8300 – NX 3.0.8300 Æ How to Sell Æ NX 2.0.8300 – NX 3.0.8300 -
Commercial Licensing.
License packs and license options consist of a collection of technical licenses that
enable or disable those specific features.
12.2 NX Technical Licenses
The following sections describe the content of the different NX technical licenses.
They provide descriptions of each license, listing all included use cases and
supplementary specifications. The licenses are sorted in alphabetical order.


12.2.1 NX ADVANCED MEASUREMENTS
The advanced measurement license gives the user the ability to use the following tools:
• Linear and circular calibration
• Angle
• Surface measurement of an circular, rectangular, free hand or polygonal
annotation
• Distance measurement
• Leg length difference measurement
• Scoliosis measurement
• Perpendicular
• Line with midpoint
• Set different colors
Enable: The tools mentioned above are available.

Disable: Same as in “Advanced Tools and Annotations”
12.2.2 NX ADVANCED TOOLS
The advanced tools and annotations license gives the user the ability to use the
following tools:
• Position a patient positioning marker
• Zoom/roam image
• Add predefined text
• Add text with/without arrow
• Invert image
• Apply shutters
• Show and hide histogram
Enable: The tools mentioned above are available.

Disable: If this license is disabled, the image mark up due to this license stays
visible.
New markup is not possible.


12.2.3 NX BACKGROUND DARKENING
The NX_MAMMO_DARKENING technical license makes the background darkening

feature available for mammography images that are processed with the
Mammography, Mammography T2 or Mammography Magnification Spot package.
12.2.4 NX BASE
The NX base license is needed to allow starting the application.

Without this license, the application is regarded as an unlicensed version which can be
the result of an illegal copy. This license allows basic actions in the 4 GUI panes:
• Worklist overview
• Examination
• Viewing & editing and
• Main menu
The main goal is to identify cassettes and view the images. MUSICA1 processing and
Technical image import is included in this license.
This license is not applicable to CMS systems.
12.2.5 NX BASIC TOOLS
The basic tools license gives the user the ability to use the tool Free Text Annotation.
Enable: Free Text Annotation functionality is available

Disable: Free Text Annotation functionality is not available
12.2.6 NX BLACK BORDER
The black border license gives the ability to make the area outside the collimation
borders black or different shades of grey.
When activated:
• The area outside the collimation area will always be black or grey.
• It is possible to deactivate or re-activate the black border by clicking on an icon.
• The density of the black border can be configured.


12.2.7 NX CENTRAL BASE
The NX CMS base license is needed to allow starting the CMS application.
Without this license, the application is regarded as an unlicensed version which can be
the result of an illegal copy.
This license allows basic actions in the 4 GUI panes:
• Search pane
• Examination
• Viewing & editing
• Main menu
The main goal is to view the images residing on other NX stations, NOT to identify
cassettes. MUSICA1 processing and Technical image import is included in this license.
This license is only applicable to CMS installations.
12.2.7.1 Worklist Overview
The worklist overview contains a list of patients and their images as long as they are in
the database. It is possible to create new patients, copy existing patient data or create
an own worklist. It is possible to transfer images from one session into another.
12.2.7.2 Examination
The examination pane allows composing an exam for one patient with one or more
exposures and link that data with the patient data. It is possible to edit the patient or
exposure data, add or copy an exposure or reject an image. The preview shows the
images as they are digitized. When finished they can be rotated or flipped. A ‘left’- or
‘right’-marker can be added. It is possible to have more than one patient active and to
toggle between them.
12.2.7.3 Viewing & Editing
The viewing & editing allows looking more closely to the image. The same
functionality’s as in the examination pane are available and also W/L and burn and
manual collimation can be performed. An image can be saved as new. With this license
it is also possible to edit, move or delete annotations (measurement, collimation,
markers, etc.)


12.2.7.4 Main Menu
The main menu gives access to exit the NX-application or enter other applications that
are linked to the NX (e.g. Service menu, Configuration menu).
NOTE:
This base configuration does not include:
• Printing
• Exporting
• Sending
Of images to any destination without at least one of the concerned licenses.
Enable: This license is always enabled!

Disable: (Not possible)
12.2.8 NX CONFIG ACTION BUTTON
The NX_CONFIG_ACTION_BUTTON technical license makes the feature available to

configure an extra button in the different NX Viewer environments (Worklist,
Examination, Viewing & Editing, Main Menu) which launches an external application.
12.2.9 NX DICOM PRINT
The DICOM print license gives the ability to send images to a DICOM printer on a
predefined layout. When activated it will be possible to:
• Configure one or more DICOM printers.
• Manual print a print sheet.
• Go to print view.
• Define the sheet layout (out of a predefined list of layouts), the sheet size and
printer.
• Configure per exposure or group of exposures how they must be printed.
• Automatically print an image at the closure of a session.
Enable: Print configuration to be verified!

Disable: No specific actions needed – automatic and manual printing just will be
disabled.


12.2.10 NX DICOM STORE SCU
The DICOM store license gives the ability to transmit images in DICOM format towards
an archive via DICOM store SCU and to ask (if configured) a storage commitment.
When activated it will be possible to:
• Configure one or more DICOM archives
(GSPS possibilities, storage commit, etc.).
• Manual send an image to one of the configured archives.
• Enable Automatic Archiving of the session to an archive station (only one archive
station can be configured for automatic sending) at the closure of the session.
NOTE:
Automatic archiving of rejected images is not part of this license.
Enable: Archive configuration to be verified!

All archive destinations should be properly configured.
The automatic archive destination should be known.
Disable: No specific actions needed – automatic & manual archiving just will
be disabled.
12.2.11 NX DIGITISER
The digitizer license limits the use of digitizers. Only the licensed digitizer(s) can be
used.
The digitizer description file contains a reference to the necessary digitizer license. This
way, new digitizer description files can be made for new digitizers without the need to
re-compile the NX software.
Configuration of a digitizer for which no license fee is paid remains possible, but the
images sent by such a digitizer will be blocked by the NX and the radiographer will be
notified via the NX GUI.
12.2.12 NX DOSE CONSISTENCY
The Dose Consistency Reporting license gives the ability to view and print the LGM
value and to export dose consistency reports.


When activated:
• LGM can be shown and printed in a numeric value.
• A bar graph can be displayed and printed, indicating over- or underexposure.
• All information can be exported.
• Dose can be configured manually (average LGM value per exposure type).
Disable: When this license is disabled, the dose statistics will be saved. The
rationale behind this is that the dose statistics should be available
immediately upon enabling the license. Therefore the task will always be
executed in the background, independent of the activation of the license.
12.2.13 NX DR WORKFLOW
The DR workflow license gives the ability to connect to a DR modality.

When activated it is possible to:
• Configure a DR X-Ray device.
• Configure DR X-Ray Exposure settings.
• Configure additional GUI attributes.
• Send exposure parameters to the DR modality.
• Receive exposure parameters from the DR modality.
• View and print the DR exposure parameters.
• Display additional icons in image thumbnails.
NOTE:
• The license cannot be disabled within the Configuration Tool.
• The license cannot be enabled together with NX_MAMMO_XRG.
• The license cannot be enabled together with NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO.
• NX_IDIS1 must be present and enabled.
• NX_MUSICA2 must be present and enabled.
• NX_BLACK_BORDER must be present and enabled.
• NX must be activated as an Exposure Index (EI) system.
• A configuration exported on a system with NX_DR_WORKFLOW license cannot
be imported on a system without that license (the reverse is possible).
• When starting the Offline Configuration Tool one has to choose whether the
NX_DR_WORKFLOW license is to be used or not.
For details refer to the:

• DX-D 500 System Application Manual DD+DIS134.09E
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
• DX-D 300 System Application Manual DD+DIS275.09E


12.2.14 NX EMERGENCY
The emergency license improves the workflow for emergency patients.

When activated:
• Every emergency patient gets automatically the highest priority for printing and
sending.
• Images that are going to a PACS get a ‘HIGH’ label in the study priority tag.
• It is also possible to activate and configure a trauma protocol in the exam tree.
• It is possible to automatically generate an Emergency patient name. The used
name and sequence can be adjusted per site.
• In case the RIS generates an Emergency name, this can be detected and this
patient will be processed as an emergency patient.
12.2.15 NX EXPORT
The export license gives the ability to export images.

• Configure one or more export destinations.
• Manual export of images or complete sessions.
Enable: Export configuration should be verified.

Disable: No specific actions needed.
12.2.16 NX EXPORT AUTOMATION
The NX_EXPORT_AUTOMATION technical license makes the Export Automation

feature available. This features automatically queues incoming images for
Dicom Export to DVD.


12.2.17 NX EXTENDED STORAGE
This license sets the limit of disk space on the data partition, that can be effectively
used for storing images, to a higher value. This means that a higher number of images
can be stored on the NX workstation:
Digitizer / Cassette type Maximum number of images

storeable on NX workstation
Without extended With extended
storage (160GB) storage (420GB)
CR 35-X / CR 85-X
18 x 24 cm Mammography 4150 10650
18 x 24 cm 16800 30000*
14" x 17" High Resolution (HR) 4560 11680
CR 30-X
18 x 24 cm 16736 30000*
14" x 17" 4549 11657
DX-G
18 x 24 cm 16800 30000*
DX-M
18 x 24 cm 16800 30000*
* NOTE:
• This number of images is limited by the NX software. The other numbers are
limited by the disc space.
• For further information on the extended disk space limit and extended maximum
number of exposures, refer to section 6.9.2.


12.2.18 NX FULL LEG FULL SPINE
The Full Leg Full Spine license gives the ability to stitch two to four images together so
they can become one new image.
• Configure exposures for stitching.
• Manually stitch images that are identified as FLFS images.
• Automatically stitch FLFS images.
Enable: Check FLFS configuration.

Disable: Stitch dialog is unavailable, even for FLFS partial images. Stitched image
results however remain visible.
FLFS exposure types cannot be added to a session.
12.2.19 NX GRIDLINE SUPPRESSION
This license activates grid lines suppression on all incoming images, except for:
• Mammography images
• Test images (quality control images)
12.2.20 NX ICU CONFIGURATION
With this license activated, it is possible to manually open up to 50 exams

(instead of only 18 exams).
12.2.21 NX IDIS1
The IDIS1 connection license gives the ability to connect to an IDIS1 modality.
• Send exposure parameters to the modality.
• Receive exposure parameters from the modality.
• View and print the exposure parameters.
• Configure X-ray device settings.


• Configure X-ray Exposure settings.

• Configure additional GUI attributes. For details refer to the:
o DX-Si System Application Manual DD+DIS035.06E
o DX-D 500 System Application Manual DD+DIS134.09E
o DX-D 300 System Application Manual DD+DIS275.09E
Enable: • Extra GUI attributes in Exposure pane

• Extra configurable devices
• Possibility to define and use sub-exposures
• Reactivate the configuration using the Configuration Tool.
Disable: • Disable IDIS specific GUI attributes.
• Hide IDIS devices in Configuration Tool.
• Reactivate the configuration using the Configuration Tool.
12.2.22 NX MAMMO MIXED USE
From NX 2008 onwards there is no more explicit separation between GenRad and
Mammography systems. The NX System can be activated as an InRoom MixedUse
system. This implies that the system can potentially be used for both GenRad and
Mammography examinations.
The actual available capabilities depend on the set of licenses. There are certain
interactions between the licenses NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MIXED and
NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO (refer to section 12.2.37):
Setting 1 • NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO enabled

• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MIXED disabled
Result 1 Only Mammography examinations can be performed.
Setting 2 • NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO enabled

• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MIXED enabled
Result 2 Mammography and Genrad examinations can be performed.


NOTE:
• On a “mammography only” system (see setting 1) the non-mammography
examinations are blocked by the NX Viewer. The NX Viewer does not allow
including non-mammography exposures into examination sessions. It is still
possible to work with non mammography exposures in the exam tree
configuration within the Configuration Tool (also system diagnosis exposures).
• To avoid misuse of “mammography only” for GenRad purposes, it is not possible
to disable the NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO technical license in the Configuration
Tool.
• To use Musica2 for both GenRad and Mammography purposes a Mixed system is
required. It is not possible to combine Mammography (= always Musica2) and
Musica GenRad on one system.
12.2.23 NX MAMMO XRG
The mammography XRAY connection license gives the ability to connect NX to a

mammography modality.
• Receive mammography attributes from the X-ray modality.
• Link the received attributes with an image.
When disabled, it will be possible to:

• Manually input XRG attributes.
12.2.24 NX MPPS
The MPPS license gives the ability to send MPPS messages to a RIS/Archive.
• Configure the MPPS destination.
• Send MPPS messages.
Enable: Check MPPS configuration.



12.2.25 NX MULTI EXAM SHEET
The NX_MULTI_EXAM_SHEET technical license makes the feature available to drag

and drop images from multiple sessions – and possibly multiple patients – onto a single
print sheet.
12.2.26 NX MULTI PATIENT EXPORT
This license enables multiple selection in the ‘Export images’ main menu function, such
that more than 1 patient’s images can be exported in one action.
12.2.27 NX MUSICA1
NX MUSICA1 for GenRad is always active. The sub-licenses give extra MUSICA1
functionality (this license is part of the NX Base license).
Enable: This license is always enabled.

Disable: (not possible)
12.2.28 NX MUSICA1 ADVANCED
The MUSICA1 advanced processing license gives the ability to change the MUSICA1
parameters of an image. When activated it is possible to adapt the detailed MUSICA1
parameters.
Enable: No specific actions needed.

12.2.29 NX MUSICA1 DENTAL
Same as in section 12.2.32


12.2.30 NX MUSICA1 PEDIATRIC
The MUSICA1 Paediatric license gives the ability to use MUSICA1 paediatric
processing parameters for a specific exposure.
• Setup the exam tree with different age groups.
• Use the MUSICA1 paediatric processing parameters.
It should be impossible to disable this license.
Enable: A specific part of the default exam tree is unlocked

(the other age groups).
The configuration of the exposures in the other age groups has to be
validated as well.
Disable: The specific part of the default exam tree is locked, which means the
respective exposures cannot be used anymore for new images.
(invisible in the Configuration Tool)
12.2.31 NX MUSICA1 RADIOTHERAPY
This license enables an extra exam group. The Radiotherapy (RT) support license
gives the ability to use RT processing parameters for a specific exposure. This license
is only available for Musica1.
Enable: A specific part of the default exam tree is unlocked

Disable: The specific part of the default exam tree is locked, which means the
respective exposures cannot be used anymore for new images
12.2.32 NX MUSICA1 URO TOMO
The MUSICA1 Uro-Tomo license gives the ability to configure Uro-Tomo exposures.
These are exposures that are part of an Uro-Tomo exam. The only way to obtain Uro-
Tomo exams is to convert a QS exam tree that contains Uro-Tomo exams.
Enable: The Uro-Tomo exposures are available in the NX application for

identifying new images.
Disable: The Uro-Tomo exposures are not available in the NX application.


12.2.33 NX MUSICA2
When this license is active, all new images will be processed with MUSICA2.
When activated:
• All new images will be processed with MUSICA2.
• It is possible to configure MUSICA2 settings.
• Old images will still be processed with MUSICA1.
• The default processing is GenRad unless one of the sublicenses is active.
• This license overrules the MUSICA1 licenses. A combination of MUSICA1 and
MUSICA2 is not possible (except for test images).
NOTE:
When changing from MUSICA1 to MUSICA2, the exam tree should be preserved. For
the details, refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Musica2
Image Processing Software DD+DIS111.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Enable: New images processed with MUSICA2.

Exposure types that do not have a MUSICA2 package assigned are
unavailable, until they are properly configured.
Disable: Vice versa: if exposure types are not configured for MUSICA1, they
cannot be used to make new images.
12.2.34 NX MUSICA2 ADVANCED
This license gives the ability to change the Musica2 processing parameters of an
image.
NOTE:
If this Musica license is to be used, the License Musica2 should also be enabled.
For the details, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Musica2
Enable: Always possible to set the Musica2 processing parameters.

Disable: Not always possible to set the Musica2 processing parameters.


12.2.35 NX MUSICA2 CHEST/ABDOMEN/SKELETON ADULTS/PED
For abdomen, chest and skeleton exposures there are specialized Musica² packages
and licenses for adults and paedeatrics. In total there are 6 Musica² premium licenses.
12.2.36 NX MUSICA2 GENRAD SOFT
This license enables the configuration of a separate Musica² taste.
12.2.37 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO
The MUSICA2 MAMMO license gives the ability to use NX as a mammography

workstation. When activated it will be possible to:
• Process mammography exposure types with the Musica2 mammography
processing parameters.
• Add and View mammography exposure types in the exam tree.
• Send, export mammography images in DICOM MG format (if supported by the
destination).
• Add mammography exposures.
• Process mammography exposures with a Musica2 mammography package.
When this license is disabled it will be impossible to:

• View and add mammography exposure types in the exam tree.
• View and add mammography exam groups.
• View mammography exam groups in the add image pane.
• Use the Musica2 mammography package.
For the details, refer to the CR Mammography Solution Manual - Chapter 3.04
Appendices, Configuration of the CR Mammography Musica Mammo Image
Processing Software from NX 2008 on DD+DIS227.04E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


12.2.38 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO MCE
This license is required for the Musica2 MCE (Micro Calcification Enhancement)
functionality.
If this license is available, the separate MCE software will be installed during activation
of the NX. For more information about Musica2 MCE refer to the CR Mammography
Solution Service Manual, chapter 3.4 Appendices Musica MCE (Micro Calcification
Enhancement) Image Processing Software DD+DIS227.04E.
12.2.39 NX MUSICA2 MAMMO_XXX Processing Packages
As of NX 3.0.7000 intro an alternative Musica2 processing package for general

Mammography (referred to as Mammo T2) is introduced. Additionally to this, a
specialized Musica2 processing packages for some specific Mammography
examination views. Use of these features requires availability of the associated
technical licenses.
These licenses are:
• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_T2
• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_MAGNIFY_SPOT
• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_SURGIC_BIOPSY
• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_NEEDLE_BIOPSY
• NX_MUSICA2_MAMMO_STEREOTAXY
The concurrent use of both standard Mammo and Mammo T2 exposures in the exam
tree is allowed but results in a verification warning.
Technical limitations:
• In the Configuration Tool, in case of configuration of a CR1B digitizer:
o Configuration of an exposure - in the exam tree - with "MammographyT2"
image processing package results in a Verification Error.
o Configuration of presentation taste settings (Brightness, Contrast,
Sharpness) – in the General Æ Workflow Management Æ Image
Presentation pane - for any Mammo package which is different from
0 results in a Verification Error.
• In the NX Viewer, in case of an image produced by a CR1B digitizer:
o In Viewing & Editing, the Presentation Taste settings (Brightness, Contrast,
Sharpness) are forced to be all 0.


12.2.40 NX MUSICA2 NEO NATALS
This license enables the configuration of the Musica2 package for neo-natals.
12.2.41 NX MUSICA2 PEDIATRIC
The MUSICA2 paediatric license gives the ability to use the MUSICA2 paediatric
processing parameters.
• Process exposure types with the MUSICA2 paediatric processing parameters.
• Setup the exam tree with different age groups.
For the details, refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Musica2
12.2.42 NX MUSICA2 VET LARGE ANIMALS
This license enables the configuration of the Musica2 package for veterinary large
animals.
12.2.43 NX MUSICA2 VET SMALL ANIMALS
This license enables the configuration of the Musica2 package for veterinary small
animals.
12.2.44 NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL
This license determines the Window/Level algorithm to be used for Musica2 images. If
enabled, the improved W/L behaviour for Musica2 images is active.
12.2.45 NX NEW FEATURES 3.0
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software is released as both NX 2.0.8300 and NX 3.0.8300

product. Most new NX 3.0.8300 functionalities are protected by the NX 3.0.8300
technical licenses listed above.
Only with the NX_NEW_FEATURES 3.0 technical license the following extra features
become available.


• Support of 3MP Monitors

• DICOM Export to Hard Disk
• Print entire study in 1 go (<F7> key)
• Store/apply window/level from within NX Viewing & Editing environment
• Configuration of:
o Forced operator identification
o Automatic selection of next exposure thumbnail
o Mandatory patient fields
o Multiple RIS devices
o Multiple DICOM export destinations
o Full screen image viewing
o 10 changeable mammography markers
NOTE:
It is not possible to disable the NX_NEW_FEATURES_3_0 technical license in the
Configuration Tool.
12.2.46 NX OFFICE VIEWER
This license allows up to six Office Viewer instances to connect to maximum two
NX workstation simultaneously.
12.2.47 NX OFFICE VIEWER 2
This license allows up to six Office Viewer instances to connect to maximum two
NX workstation simultaneously.
12.2.48 NX PRIORS
The priors license gives the ability to receive relevant prior images from an archive.
When activated it is possible to view the priors related to the current patient.
Enable: Check priors configuration.



12.2.49 NX QA TOOLS
The QA tools license gives the user the ability to use specialized QA tools:
• Rectangular with SAL
• Import of technical and functional test images
• Display of technical and functional test image
12.2.50 NX REPEAT REJECT
The Repeat Reject Analysis Program (RRAP) license gives the ability to enter a reject
reason when rejecting images and to export a report.
• Enter a reject reason when rejecting an image.
• Configure the predefined reject reasons.
• Export the RRAP statistics.
• Send the rejected image to a reject area (DICOM store).
• Query for sessions that contain rejected images.
• Configure reject archive.
12.2.51 NX RISLINK
The RIS link license gives the ability to all relevant information from a RIS and use this
for the identification of a patient.
• Configure the RIS link.
• Select a patient from the worklist containing all demographic data needed to
successfully perform the examination.
• Link protocol codes to exposure data: When protocol codes are sent by the RIS,
the necessary exposures can be pre-selected.
When this license is not installed, there will be no specific RIS mapping in the “inactive”
part of the configuration. However, there can already be a list of configured protocol
codes, which can be used once the RIS license is installed.


12.2.52 NX SPLIT DISPLAY
The NX_SPLIT_DISPLAY technical license makes the Split View feature available.
This feature allows display of 2 images next to each other in the Viewing & Editing
softcopy view.
12.2.53 NX SQUARE MARKER
The watermark acts as a trigger to check the correct identification of the positioning on
a CR/DR system. It shows if an image has been rotated or flipped.
When activated:
• A marker appears on each image on a fixed place.
• It is possible to activate/deactivate the display of the marker.
12.2.54 NX TELERADIOLOGY
The teleradiology license gives the ability to compress images when send to a DICOM
store destination. The quality factor and compression factor can be configured.
Enable: Activate extra transfer syntaxes in the configuration of archives, namely

those with a JPEG encoding.
Disable: De-activate those transfer syntaxes – check archive configuration.
12.2.55 NX VETERINARY
The NX_VETERINARY technical license makes the specialized image attributes for
Veterinary application available. These attributes are to be configured in the
General Settings Æ Veterinary Settings.
The Activation Utility initializes the NX System as a veterinary system only if the
NX_VETERINARY technical license is available. A Veterinary NX system does not
start if no valid NX_VETERINARY technical license is available.


12.2.56 XRDI DXSI <NN>
The general radiography DR Modality license limits the use of DR Modalities. Only the
licensed DR Modality can be used.
NOTE:
The General Radiography DR Modality license cannot be enabled together with the
Musica2 Mammography license.
13 P-Values
13.1 Situation without P-Values
The appearance of grayscale images displayed on different types of softcopy displays

or printed on different types of hardcopy devices has often been inconsistent and is not
optimized to the perception character of the eye.
These facts have an impact on the image quality:
• Optimal image viewing parameters (e.g. no window/ level to rectify) selected on
one device appear different when displayed on a different device.
• Device capabilities/ characteristics vary.
• The same number of gray levels cannot be rendered or perceived on different
devices.
• Displayed images look different from printed images.
The reasons for this are:

• Display devices vary in the maximum luminance they can produce.
Display CRT vs. film on a light box is an extreme example.
• The characteristic curve of monitors varies.
• Ambient light or illumination has an influence on the perceived image.


13.2 What is Grayscale Standard Display Function (GSDF)?
In order for the radiologist to distinguish all possible masses on a display monitor, film
on a light box, projector etc. all grayscales used in the image must be perceptible. This
is achieved by applying the DICOM Grayscale Standard Display Function
(DICOM GSDF).
The GSDF:
• Describes how pixel values should be interpreted or displayed.
• Relates pixel values to displayed luminance levels.
• Describes visual consistency in how a medical image appears.
• Is based on human perception.
• Describes a grayscale image, presented on grayscale or color displays.
The GSDF is the relation between Just Noticeable Differences (JND) in contrast and
the luminance.
13.3 What are P-Values?
Device independent presentation of contrast can be achieved using the DICOM GSDF
(see section 13.2) to standardize display and print systems.
All devices (monitors, printers and light boxes) have to be calibrated according to the
GSDF.
• JND (see section 13.2) index is “perceptually linearized”:
• Same change in input is perceived by the human observer as the same change
in contrast.
o JNDs are mapped to absolute luminance
o Determine range of display:
 Minimum to maximum luminance
 Minimum to maximum JND
o Linearly map:
 Minimum input value to minimum JND
 Maximum input value to maximum JND
 Input values are then called “P-Values”


13.4 Limitations of P-Values
• The P-values are only a means to achieve device independence.

• P-values do not automatically produce a “better” image.
• Diagnostic value could be influenced when image is viewed on an inconsistent
device.
14 Importing technical Images
For customized quality control tasks, the FSE or a key user with appropriate access
rights can import technical images to the NX workstation.
Technical images can be sent to printer or archive.
The procedure how to import the images is described in the NX User Manual
(or online help) section "Using the Main Menu".
If multiple images are imported, images having common session attributes (patient
name, birth date, study UID, etc.) are put in one session.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware of following limitations of technical images:
• Only images in the DCM-format can be imported.
• The SOP class used is “secondary captured image” SOP class.
• No Look-up tables (with the exception of ‘IDENTITY’ in case of P-values).
• The photometric interpretation is MONOCHROME1 or MONOCHROME2.
• The image rescale type (0028,1054):
o If rescale type is a known value: File can be imported.
Possible values: OD, GAMMA, P-VALUES, OD REL, LOG_E REL
o If the rescale type has another value:
Assume that the image is a p-value image.
o If the rescale type is not present:
Assume that the image is a p-value image.
• Apart from window-level, image processing on technical images is strictly limited.


15 Exposure Index versus LGM Dose Values
During activation of the NX software, the workstation will be configured in such a way
that the dose monitoring will make use of LGM (Logarithmic Median) values or
Exposure Index (EI) values.
• LGM is a logarithmic value that will respond in a logarithmic way to changes in
the detector dose.
• EI is a linear value that responds in a linear way to changes in detector dose.
15.1 Compatibility of Dose Values
Even if dose monitoring features are not used, these values are inherent part of
image processing.
• On NX workstation only one single type of dose values must be used.
• NX workstations of the same cluster (connected to the same CMS) must share
the same type of dose values.
The type of dose monitoring that can be used on an NX workstation is related to the
digitizer(s) connected to the NX. Refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E for an overview of compatible
digitizer types an dose value types (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
15.2 Dose Monitoring
Both LGM and EI values are derived from the pixel histogram and only apply to the
region of Interest (areas with direct radiation on the detector and collimated areas on
the tube are left out). Manual collimation will affect these values, only the area within
the collimated zone is taken into account.
The higher the value, the higher the detector dose (relatively) was. Since the X-ray
beam quality influences the values, this is not an absolute dose measuring tool, but a
good relative dose indicator to monitor the applied doses.
Dose monitoring will compare the LGM or EI of an image with a "reference LGM" or a
reference EI ("Target Exposure Index" or TEI) and calculates the deviation which will
be kept into the statistics and can be visualized on the NX by means of a bar graph.
In case of LGM values the system stores a reference LGM and a standard deviation on
this reference value. In case of an EI the system stores a Target Exposure Index (TEI)
and a standard deviation on this TEI. Besides the EI, a Deviation Index (DI) is
calculated and displayed on the NX for every image. The DI expresses the deviation of
the EI from its TEI.


16 Integrating the HealthCare Enterprise (IHE)
16.1 IHE - a brief Introduction
IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise) is an initiative by healthcare professionals

and industry to improve the way computer systems in healthcare share information.
IHE promotes the coordinated use of established standards such as DICOM and HL7
to address specific clinical needs in support of optimal patient care.
Systems developed in accordance with IHE communicate with one another better, are
easier to implement, and enable care providers to use information more effectively.
The main intent is to is to make (IT) systems work reliably in hospitals and to “close the
information loop” in a typical patient visit to Radiology. This contributes to the goal that
all care providers had full information about patient’s care.
More information about IHE:
www.rsna.org/IHE, www.himss.org/IHE and http://www.ihe.net/
To view Agfa’s IHE integration statement, visit

http://www.agfa.com/en/he/support/doc_library/ihe/index.jsp
16.2 Modern Hospital Information Flow
In a modern hospital information flow a variety of Actors are involved.

Examples for actors are:
• HIS (Hospital Information System)
• RIS (Radiology Information System)
• Modality (e.g. NX)
• PACS (Picture Archiving and Communication System)
• Billing
Those Actors exchange information via Transactions using messages based on

established standards, such as HL7, DICOM and W3C (in our case: almost always
DICOM). The NX e.g. performs Transactions (communicates) with RIS and PACS
A set of required and optional Transactions between certain Actors are called Profiles.
An example is the Profile “Scheduled Workflow”.


16.2.1 Example for a Profile: “Scheduled Workflow”
Figure 17 gives an example for a typical “Scheduled Workflow”.
2 RIS
1
HIS 3
11
4
5 Modality
7 6
PACS
Printer 8
10
9
Figure 17
1. At the Registration the patient’s information is gathered and entered into the
Hospital Information System (HIS).
2. The patient is examined and the required treatments/examinations are determined.
All Radiology relevant examinations are sent to the Radiology Information System
(RIS).
3. At a central point, the examination is entered into the modality worklist and
assigned to an X-Ray room with e.g. NX as processing station (modality
workstation). After the examination is completed and archived, the modality gives
feedback about that and the worklist is updated.
4. Via the patient information it is checked if already existing prior studies exist in the
archive.
5. The NX receives the worklist containing the examinations. The radiographer
performs the examinations and the images are sent to archive PACS/printer.
6. The images are archived.
7. The radiologist views the images on a diagnostic workstation.


8. The images are printed on film.

9. The film is archived.
10. The radiologist views the film on a light box.
11. The diagnosis report is sent to the report repository which can be retrieved to
continue the treatment.
The Profile “Scheduled Workflow” combines and controls all Actors and Transactions
that are needed to realize the scheduled workflow from the patients registration via
diagnosis up to providing the report of the diagnosis for the next visit.
In this Profile the NX performs following operations:
• RIS Query (modality worklist)
• Archiving Images (+ Storage Commit) (images stored)
• Printing Images
• MPPS (acquisition completed)
• Exporting Images to CD-ROM (if required)


Imaging Services Product Description
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart
The Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 informs the

Field Service Engineer about released NX versions and their components.
IMPORTANT:
Although this document is updated regularly, it is possible that newer versions of
software/hardware are already released. Please check the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Bulletins for the most recent release information.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.0:
1.1 07-2010 Added XRDI 9.1. See sections 3.1, 3.2 and 3.7.
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E Chapter 4 – Installation and Configuration – Appendices
DD+DIS108.10E Chapter 5 – Monitor Options
DD+DIS116.10M Chapter 13 – Spare Parts List
DD+DIS134.08E FUSE – Fast Update Service (Automatic Software Update)

sw_01_description_e_template_v07
Product Description
DD+DIS105.10E Software/Hardware Compatibility Chart
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D – 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the “Generic Safety Directions” document
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the “Generic Safety Directions” and on
the product.
NOTE:


Product Description
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOFTWARE / HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY CHART NX SYSTEM............................ 5

2 HARDWARE................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 NX Version – DICOM Digitizer Software ....................................................................... 6
2.2 NX Version – TWAIN Digitizer Software........................................................................ 6
2.3 NX Version – NX Workstation PCs ................................................................................ 7
2.4 Monitor – NX Workstation PC ........................................................................................ 7
2.4.1 Monitor Software............................................................................................................ 8
2.5 NX Workstation PC – Intensive Care Unit Workflow (ICU) Feature .............................. 8
2.6 NX Version – Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ....................................................... 9
2.7 NX Version – Switch Implementation ............................................................................ 9
3 SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................... 9
3.1 Software and Documentation Versions delivered on new NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Workstations .................................................................................................................. 9
3.1.1 Automatically installed Software .................................................................................. 10
3.2 Software and Documentation Versions delivered on NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Starterkit

DVDs............................................................................................................................ 10
3.3 Operating System – PC ............................................................................................... 12
3.4 Operating System – NX Version .................................................................................. 12
3.5 NX Version – Hotfix Version ........................................................................................ 12
3.6 NX Version – Operating System Languages ............................................................... 13
3.7 X-Ray Generator Interfacing Software (XRDI)............................................................. 13
3.8 ID-Tablet Firmware ...................................................................................................... 13
3.9 Monitor Hardware, Drivers and Calibration Software .................................................. 13
3.9.1 Monitor Calibration Instructions ................................................................................... 14
3.9.2 Monitor Model File ....................................................................................................... 14
3.10 NX Version – User Documentation CD........................................................................ 15
3.11 In-Room NX – Central Monitoring System (CMS) ....................................................... 15
3.12 NX Version – RIS Software.......................................................................................... 16
3.13 Digitizer Type – Dose Calculation Setting ................................................................... 16
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................. 17


Product Description
4.1 HP EliteBook 8540p Notebook PC .............................................................................. 17
4.2 Workstation HP 8000 Elite ........................................................................................... 17
4.3 Workstation HP DC7800 / Workstation HP DC7900 ................................................... 18
4.4 HP EliteBook 8530p Notebook PC .............................................................................. 18
4.5 Latitude DELL D830 (laptop) ....................................................................................... 19
4.6 Workstation DELL 960 ................................................................................................. 19
4.7 Workstation DELL 755 ................................................................................................. 20
4.8 Workstation DELL 745 *............................................................................................... 20
4.9 Workstation DELL GX 620 * ........................................................................................ 21
4.10 Workstation DELL 670 *............................................................................................... 21


Product Description
1 Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart NX System
The Software / Hardware Compatibility Chart NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 defines the

Hardware and Software that are compatible and released with NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
systems.
Each component of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 system at customers’ sites should match
the compatibility to other component as described in this document.
The overview is focused on the information that are relevant for the FSE when installing,
upgrading or maintaining the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
Some items are only valid for particular environments. The supported environments for
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 are:
 GenRad NX workstation in GenRad Solution connected to DICOM digitizer

 CR Mammography NX workstation in CR Mammography Solution
 CMS NX Central Monitoring Station
 DX-S NX workstation connected to DX-S digitizer, but not in DX-Si Solution
 CR 30-X NX workstation connected to CR 30-X digitizer
 DX-G NX workstation connected to DX-G digitizer
 DX-M NX workstation connected to DX-M digitizer
Caption for the tables on the following pages:
 = compatible
 = not compatible


Product Description
2 Hardware
2.1 NX Version – DICOM Digitizer Software
NX version DICOM Digitizer software

Compact Solo Compact CR CR CR CR DX-M
Plus 75.0 85-X 25.0 35-X
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 COP_1312 SOL_2205 ACP_1204 ACP_5102 C25_3102 NIM_2015
NOTE:
The support of digitizer types is defined by the available digitizer licenses in the
ALF file.
2.2 NX Version – TWAIN Digitizer Software
NX version TWAIN Digitizer software

CR 30-X DX-S DX-G
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 CRE_1703 * STR_1505 NIM_1009A **
* CRE_1309 and CRE_1309.A are not released for CR 30-X systems with DELL D830 laptop.
** As of NIM_2XXX DX-G will be a DICOM digitizer.
NOTE:
The support of digitizer types is defined by the available digitizer licenses in the
ALF file.
 On new NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstations, the compatible device software is

available on the NX workstation. It will be automatically installed during activation of
the NX software if the NX workstation is connected to a TWAIN digitizer.
 On workstations upgraded from earlier NX versions or after a clean
installation, the compatible device software may not be available on the NX
workstation. Then it has to be downloaded from Mednet and manually installed on
the NX workstation:
(1) Go to the Mednet GSO Library to download the device software package,
Path: GSO Library  Computed Radiography  CR Digitizers  <Digitizer
name>  Freeware
(2) Refer to the installation of the software, described in the respective digitizer
service manual.


Product Description
2.3 NX Version – NX Workstation PCs
NX version DELL PC
830
620 670 745 755 960
laptop
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 30-X, CR 85-X, CR 35-X, DX-G      
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 25.0, CR 75.0, DX-S      
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 (CMS)      
NX version HP PC
DC7800 DC7900 8530p 8540p 8000
laptop laptop Elite
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 30-X, CR 85-X, CR 35-X, DX-G    * 
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 25.0, CR 75.0, DX-S     
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 (CMS)     
* HP 8540p supports DX-G as DICOM digitizer only.
NOTE:
All NX PCs must be equipped with 2 GB RAM minimum.
2.4 Monitor – NX Workstation PC
Monitor DELL PC
620 670 745 755 960 830 laptop
Dell Standard Monitor LCD E172FP * * * * * 
BARCO MFCD 1219**      
BARCO MFCD 1219 TS**      
BARCO NIO 3MP-1H-PCIe Diagnostic Monitor**      
BARCO NIO 2MP-1H-PCIe Diagnostic Monitor**      

* Not supported for Mammography systems.
** These monitors support P-Values.


Product Description
Monitor HP PC
DC7800 DC7900 8530p 8540p 8000 Elite
laptop laptop
HP Standard Monitor LCD L1710 * *   *

HP Standard Monitor LCD LA1951g * *   *
BARCO MFCD 1219**     
BARCO MFCD 1219 TS**     
BARCO NIO 3MP-1H-PCIe Diagnostic Monitor**     
BARCO NIO 2MP-1H-PCIe Diagnostic Monitor**     
* Not supported for Mammography systems.
** These monitors support P-Values.
2.4.1 Monitor Software
See section 3.9 "Monitor Hardware, Drivers and Calibration Software".
2.5 NX Workstation PC – Intensive Care Unit Workflow (ICU) Feature
IMPORTANT:
 The Intensive Care Unit workflow (ICU) must only be used for GenRad applications.
 Only one ICU workflow operating mode is possible on one NX workstation, either
wireless or fixed network.
The following table shows which NX workstation PCs support the ICU workflow feature
(technical license NX_ICU_CONFIGURATION):
NX workstation PC ICU workflow

Fixed network Wireless network
Dell 830 laptop  *

HP8530p laptop  
HP8540p laptop  
* Requires installation of wireless network (WiFi) card.


Product Description
2.6 NX Version – Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
NX version Powerware 5115 Powerware 5125

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 30-X, CR25.0,
CR35-X, CR 75.0, CR 85-X, DX-G
 
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + DX-S  
NOTE:
Powerware 5115 and 5125 require the Power Management Software LanSafe 5.0.8
or LanSafe 5.0.9.
2.7 NX Version – Switch Implementation
NX version DELL DELL

Powerconnect Powerconnect
2216 2708
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 + CR 30-X, DX-S  
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
+ CR25.0, CR35-X, CR 75.0, CR 85-X, + DX-G, CMS
 
3 Software
3.1 Software and Documentation Versions delivered on new

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Workstations
Software Version
User Documentation 7.1.000
TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP) CRE 1703, ,STR 1505, NIM_1009A, NIM_2015
Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE) 1.0.003
X-Ray Generator Interfacing Software (XRDI) XRDI 9.0 (build 9.0.1041)
For more details see section 3.7. XRDI 9.1 (build 9.1.0011)


Product Description
3.1.1 Automatically installed Software
These software components are automatically installed during activation or upgrade of

the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software if the License File contains a license that depends
on one of the components:
 TWAIN Digitizer (ASAP) software (only on activation of a new NX Workstation)
 Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE)
 X-Ray Generator Interfacing Software (XRDI)
To install these components without installing or upgrading the NX software, use the
component installers that are available on the NX Starterkit DVD 1 (see section 3.2).
This can be necessary e.g. in case a license is added to the License File that requires
one of the automatically installed software components.
NOTE:
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual also lists the "Sedecal Software Console
(DX-D 300 U-arm)" as automatically installed software. This software is neither
available on the NX Starterkit DVDs nor on the new NX workstations. The software
must be downloaded and installed manually.
For instructions refer to the DX-D 300 System Service Manual DD+DIS289.09E,
chapter 2 Installation and Set-Up (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
3.2 Software and Documentation Versions delivered on NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

Starterkit DVDs
IMPORTANT:
The Starterkit DVDs also known as Clean Installation Kit, are frequently updated with
new contents. This document always describes the latest version. Make sure the latest
version is available. To upgrade the version of the kit either refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 13 Spare Parts List DD+DIS116.10M
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link) for the correct order number or download the Clean
Installation Kit:
(1) Open the FTP Access document on the GSO library with information how to
access the FTP server (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
(2) Connect to the FTP server according to the instructions given in the FTP Access
document.
(3) Download the following ISO files and burn it as disk image on CD:
NX_X.8300_DVD1_VX.Y.iso (File size: Approximately 2,2 GB)
NX_X.8300_DVD2_VX.Y.iso (File size: Approximately 2,4 GB)


Product Description
Software on Starterkit DVD 1 (version 6.6) Version

NX application NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Location: Service Software\NX Application NX X.0.8300 (build NX 6.5.1203)
NX Office Viewer NX Office Viewer
Location: Service Software\NX Application NX X.0.8300\OfficeViewer NX X.0.8300 (build 6.5.1203)
NX Service Updates none
ID Tablet Firmware, Location: Service Software\ID tablet firmware 1.12.07
Automatic Updates (FUSE) Agent 1.1.0001
Location: Service Software\Automatic Updates (Fuse) Agent
Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE) 1.0.003
Location: Service Software\NX Application NX X.0.8300\MCE
X-Ray Generator and DR Detector Interfacing Software (XRDI) XRDI 9.0 (build 9.0.1041)
For more details see section 3.7 XRDI 9.1 (build 9.1.0011)
Location: Service Software\NX Application NX X.0.8300\XRDI
Varian DR Detector Driver Software L05 Release 3
NX Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
(build NX 6.5.1203)
XRDI for NX Offline Config Tool XRDI 9.0 (build 9.0.1041)
XRDI 9.1 (build 9.1.0011)
Documentation on Starterkit DVD 1 (version 6.6) Version

User Documentation 7.1.000
Service Documentation Reference Sheet Edition 1 Revision 0
Software on Starterkit DVD 2 (version 6.5) Version

XOS (Operating System for Clean Installation) 1.0.28
Hotfixes 3.0.42
BARCO Driver for 2MP and 3MP displays 1.1
Location: DRIVERS\\BARCO Diagnostic Monitor 1.1\setup.exe
MediCal QAWeb, Location: DRIVERS\MediCal QA Web Agent 1.09.02\setup.exe 1.09.02
BARCO Touchscreen USB driver version 2.0 2.0 (default version)
Location: DRIVERS\MFCD1219_Touchscreen drivers\Touchscreen driver 2.0\setup.exe
BARCO Touchscreen USB driver version 1.0 1.0
Location: DRIVERS\MFCD1219_Touchscreen drivers\Touchscreen
driver\1.0\Touchscreen driver 1.0\Barco_TouchScreen_Driver\setup.exe
ELO Touchscreen USB driver 3.1.2
Location: DRIVERS\ELO TouchScreen USB 3.1.2\elosetup.exe
Lansafe driver version 5.0.8 5.0.8 (default version)
Location: DRIVERS\Lansafe 5.0.8\LanSafeInstaller\setup.exe
Lansafe driver version 5.1.3 5.1.3
Location: DRIVERS\LanSafe 5.1.3 - PowerSuite
5.0.9\LanSafeInstaller\\Software\LanSafe\Windows32\setup.exe
RAID Tool HP8000, Location: DRIVERS\RaidTool\HP8000\sp44098.exe sp44098
RAID Tool HP7900 – Dell 960 R208364
Location: DRIVERS\RaidTool\HP7900-DELL960\R208364.exe
RAID Tool DELL755 – HP7800 R173416
Location: DRIVERS\RaidTool\DELL755-HP7800\R173416.exe
ADB Tool, Location: DRIVERS\ADB\ADB v2.13.00 NX.exe 2.13.00
Model files -


Product Description
3.3 Operating System – PC
Operating System DELL PC

830
620 670 745 755 960
laptop
XOS 1.0.24    *  
XOS 1.0.25    *  
XOS 1.0.26    *  
XOS 1.0.28    *  
Operating System HP PC
DC7800 DC7900 8530p laptop 8540p laptop 8000 Elite
XOS 1.0.24 * *   
XOS 1.0.25 * *   
XOS 1.0.26 * *   *
XOS 1.0.28 * *   *
* Support for RAID systems
3.4 Operating System – NX Version
All NX versions are downwards compatible with the existing Operating System
versions (XOS).
3.5 NX Version – Hotfix Version
To ensure the correct functionality of the system, make sure that at least
Hotfix version 3.0.13 is installed.
It is recommended, that the latest available Hotfix version is installed on the system.
Run the FUSE updater on the NX workstation or Service PC to receive the latest
available Hotfix version.
NOTE:
For instructions to obtain and install the Fast Update Service (FUSE) software refer to
the FUSE Service Manual FUSE - Fast Update Service (Automatic Software Update)


Product Description
3.6 NX Version – Operating System Languages
IMPORTANT:
As of the release of NX version 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 the support for OS Languages
(Windows Multilingual User Interface Packages) is discontinued. It is not allowed to
install OS Languages on NX Workstations.
For more information refer to the NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 Service Bulletin No.1
“Release of NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000“ DD+DIS324.08E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
3.7 X-Ray Generator Interfacing Software (XRDI)
NX version XRDI Component version

2.1 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.1
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300         
3.8 ID-Tablet Firmware
All NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Systems run with the ID-tablet firmware 1.12.07 or higher.
3.9 Monitor Hardware, Drivers and Calibration Software
NOTE:
 Special monitor hardware, drivers and calibration software are only needed for
optional non-standard monitors listed in the following table.
 For information of the availability of the drivers, refer to section 3.2.
 The installation instructions of the hardware and drivers are described in
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS108.10E
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link). The following table shows which drivers are needed
for the different monitors.


Product Description
Monitor Hardware BARCO Monitor ELO

and Software MFCD MFCD MFCD NIO 3MP-1H- NIO 2MP-1H- ELO Wide
1218 1219 1219 TS PCIe Diagn. PCIe Diagn. Screen Touch
IPCIe Controller
hardware
     
BARCO Diagnostic
Monitor driver
     
BARCO Touchscreen
USB driver
     
ELO Touchscreen USB

Driver
     
MediCal QAWeb
calibration software
     
3.9.1 Monitor Calibration Instructions
NOTE:
The calibration instructions are described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS108.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Refer to this chapter to find out which calibration procedure has to be applied to which
monitor.
3.9.2 Monitor Model File
If the monitor type cannot be selected in the NX Configuration Tool, the monitor type is
not known to the NX yet. The monitor type can be added to the system using the model
file describing the monitor type. The monitor model file is available on Mednet GSO
Library:
Path:
Computed Radiography  CR Workstation Software  <NX version>  Freeware
Link to the MedNet GSO Library: Intranet Link / Extranet Link


Product Description
NOTE:
Some monitor model files have a double resolution specification. They have the
following functionality:
The first resolution specifies the monitor resolution. The second resolution limits the
space on the monitor occupied by the NX application. This leaves some space to the
right side of the NX application, where another application (e.g. modality console
software) can be displayed.
The instructions to add a new monitor type are described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
3.10 NX Version – User Documentation CD
NX version User Documentation CD

XDOC 7.0.000 (see NX Starterkit DVD 1)
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 
3.11 In-Room NX – Central Monitoring System (CMS)
This table shows which combinations of in-room NX workstations with Central

Monitoring workstations are possible:
In-Room NX NX CMS version

Workstation 2.0.6805 2.0.6805 2.0.6805 3.0.8000 3.0.8200 * 3.0.8300*
version SU1 SU2 SU1 *
2.0.6805      
2.0.6805 SU1      
2.0.6805 SU2      
2.0.8000 /
3.0.8000 SU 1
     
2.0.8200 /
3.0.8200
     
2.0.8300 /
3.0.8300
     
* NX CMS is always delivered as 3.0.xxxx version (not delivered as 2.0.xxxx versions).


Product Description
3.12 NX Version – RIS Software
Following RIS Clients can be installed on an NX Workstation:

 Penrad RIS
 MRS RIS
 QDoc RIS
 Elefante
 CRIS
3.13 Digitizer Type – Dose Calculation Setting
IMPORTANT:
The Dose Calculation settings must be identical on all NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
in a cluster!
Digitizer Dose Calculation Setting

Exposure Index (EI) Logarithmic Median (LGM)
Compact  
Solo  
Compact Plus  
CR 75  
CR 85  
CR 25  
CR 35  
CR 30-X  
CR 30-X SCF (Speed Class Free)  
DX-S  
DX-G  
DX-M  


Product Description
4 Technical Specifications
4.1 HP EliteBook 8540p Notebook PC
Processor Intel® Core™ i5-540M Processor (3M cache, 2.53 GHz)

Memory Minimum 4 GB
Hard drive Minimum 250 GB
Floppy drive Not available
CD drive CD-RW - DVD+/-RW
NVIDIA NVS 5100M graphics with 1 GB dedicated DDR3 video
Video/Display memory / 15.6-inch diagonal LED-backlit HD+ anti-glare
(1600 x 900)
Audio Internal audio speaker
Fixed Network: Gigabit Network card − 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Network network interface adaptor
Wireless Network: WLAN card Intel 802.11a/b/g/n I3 8540p
3 x USB 2.0 interface
Other
2 x USB 3.0 interface
Connectivity
Firewire (1394a connector)
4.2 Workstation HP 8000 Elite
Processor Quad-Core, minimum 2.66 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 4 GB
Hard drive 2 disks of equal size, 2 x 500 GB
Video Onboard
Network Network card 10/100/1000 Mb/s Gigabit Ethernet LAN
Minimum 8 x USB connection
Connectivity 2 x Serial connection
Firewire (1394 Controller Card)


Product Description
4.3 Workstation HP DC7800 / Workstation HP DC7900
Processor Dual-Core, minimum 2.33 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
Hard drive 2 disks of equal size, 2 x 500 GB
Video Onboard
4.4 HP EliteBook 8530p Notebook PC
Processor Dual-Core, 2.53 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
Hard drive Minimum 250 GB
Video/Display Minimum 15.4” Widescreen
Fixed Network: Gigabit Network card − 10/100/1000 Mbit/s
Network network interface adaptor
Wireless Network: WLAN card Intel 802.11a/b/g/n I3 AMT 8530p
Other 4 x USB 2.0 interface
Connectivity Firewire (1394a connector)


Product Description
4.5 Latitude DELL D830 (laptop)
Processor Dual-Core, minimum 800 MHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
Hard drive 1 disk, minimum 80 GB
Video/Display Minimum 15.4”
Network card 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet network interface
Network
adaptor
Other
1 x Serial connection
Connectivity
Firewire (1394a Controller Card)
4.6 Workstation DELL 960
Processor Dual-Core minimum 2.33 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
Video Onboard + DVI (Digital) Adapter Card full height
Other
Connectivity


Product Description
4.7 Workstation DELL 755
Processor Dual-Core minimum 2.33 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
1 disk, minimum 250 GB
Hard drive or
2 disks of equal size, minimum 2 x 250 GB for RAID support
Video Onboard + DVI (Digital) Adapter Card full height
Other
Connectivity
4.8 Workstation DELL 745 *
Processor Dual Core, minimum 800 MHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum 2 GB
Floppy drive 3.5”/1.44 MB floppy drive
On board video card:
Video DVI connection, Resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels,
32 bit colours, Look-Up-Table (LUT) support
Other
Connectivity
* Released for upgrades in the field.


Product Description
4.9 Workstation DELL GX 620 *
Processor Minimum 3.40 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum required: 2 GB
Hard drive 1 x 80 GB + 1 x 160 GB
Floppy drive 3.5”/1.44 MB floppy drive
On board video card:
Video DVI connection, Resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels, 32 bit colours,
Look-Up-Table (LUT) support
Network Network card 10/100/1000 Mb/s
* Released for Upgrades in the field.
4.10 Workstation DELL 670 *
Processor Minimum 3.6 GHz Intel processor

Memory Minimum required: 2 GB
Hard drive 2 x 36 GB
Floppy drive 3.5"/1.44 MB floppy drive
Matrox G550 PCI or
Video** nVidia NVS280 PCI-e or
nVidia NVS285
Audio Internal speaker
Network Network card 10/100/1000 Mb/s
2 x Firewire (1394 Controller Card)
* Released for upgrades in the field.
** This PC was released with different video boards.


This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.
Imaging Services Safety Directions
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides all safety information and instructions the

field service engineer (FSE) must know when working with NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300,
Type 4406/303.

Revision Date
Document Title
Not applicable

sw_02_safety_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRODUCT SPECIFIC SAFETY DIRECTIONS ........................................................................4

1.1 Acceptance Test .......................................................................................................................4
1.2 Safety Directions for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 ...........................................................................5
1.2.1 Safety Directions for Installation and Configuration..................................................................5
1.2.2 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Recovery.....................................................................5
1.2.3 Safety Directions for Operating the System..............................................................................6
1.3 Safety Directions for the Full Leg Full Spine Functionality .......................................................7
1.3.1 Safety Precautions for Full Leg Full Spine Cassette Holder.....................................................7
2 USAGE ACCORDING TO REGULATIONS .............................................................................8


1 Product specific Safety Directions
1.1 Acceptance Test
NOTE:
After applying installation/configuration procedures on the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
system (GenRad or Mammography), performing the Acceptance Test is mandatory!
This has to be done for each single NX workstation.
This Acceptance Test only covers the requirements for the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
workstation as a component. To meet the requirements for solutions refer to the
Acceptance Test specific for the respective solution!
A printed copy of the ATP can be used to carry signatures to prove the final
acceptance by the customer and for archiving in the NSO for regulatory proofs.
INSTRUCTION:
To perform the Acceptance Test, use the Acceptance Test Protocol (ATP) in
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 6 Acceptance Test DD+DIS105.10E


1.2 Safety Directions for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
1.2.1 Safety Directions for Installation and Configuration
Activating Licenses:
CAUTION:
Due to wrong date & time and time zone settings license may become invalid.
Before activating a license key file, make sure the correct time zone, date and time
have been configured!
Upgrading from earlier NX version and keeping the images:

CAUTION:
Images can be lost after upgrade!
Close all exam sessions before you continue with the upgrade procedure.
1.2.2 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Recovery
Viewing log files:

CAUTION:
Violation of patient privacy possible.
Since the patient privacy information is human readible, it must be treated as
confidential information and protected from unauthorized access.
Exporting Images for problem analysis:

CAUTION:
Violation of patient privacy possible.
The patients demographics contain patient privacy information.
They must be treated as confidential information and protected from
unauthorized access.


Installing NX PC Hardware:
WARNING:
Electrical device. Electric shock possible.
Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you disconnect or
connect cables on printed circuit boards.
CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed.
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0)
around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting
metal piece.
1.2.3 Safety Directions for Operating the System
Initializing cassettes:
WARNING:
Poor image quality caused by wrong cassette initialization.
Initialize the cassette/plate as described in the service document enclosed to
the cassette/plate.
Change the image processing parameters as described in the service document
enclosed to the cassette/plate.
Editing printer settings:

WARNING:
Loss of diagnostic information due to wrong printer settings.
Always check the magnification type and smoothing factor configuration for the printer.
Configuring Scheduled Procedure Step (SPS):

WARNING:
Potential loss of data due to wrong SPS (Scheduled Procedure Step)
configuration.
Ensure correct mapping of incoming SPS attributes to the internal NX data structure.


1.3 Safety Directions for the Full Leg Full Spine Functionality
The User Manual informs the user of special precautions required for optimal
performance of FLFS examinations:
• Use the FLFS cassette holder.
• Use the dedicated FLFS exposure types.
• Do not use fast ID.
1.3.1 Safety Precautions for Full Leg Full Spine Cassette Holder
When you are using a cassette holder, always take into account the following
safety precautions to avoid physical injury:
Mounting the cassette holder rack:

WARNING:
Cassette holder rack can tilt and cause injury.
Mount the rack firmly on the wall before attaching the cassette holder to it.
Handling the cassette holder:

WARNING:
Handling the cassette holder can cause injuries.
Always handle the cassette holder with two people.
NOTE:
Installing and using the cassette holder, give notice to the following points:
• When you are using the Agfa EasyLift, read the safety precautions
mentioned in the EasyLift User manual.
• Take care to hold the cassette holder upright, with the slots at the sides,
to prevent the leaden anti-scatter grid from falling out of the
cassette holder.
• Only insert FLFS CR cassettes into the cassette holder if the latter is
attached properly to the rack.


Locating and moving the cassette, cassette holder and anti-scatter grid:
CAUTION:
Cassette, anti-scatter grid and cassette holder can be damaged due to incorrect
location or movement.
Locate and move the anti-scatter grid only as described in the instructions.
2 Usage According to Regulations
Be aware of the following regulations when installing the system:
• The system must be installed in compliance with IEC 60601-1 and UL 60601-1
(US and Canada):
This means that the NX workstation PC (a non-medical electrical equipment and
compliant with EN 60950) has to be placed outside a radius of:
o 1.5 m (IEC)
o 6 ft = 1.83 m (UL)
around the patient (according to the local valid regulation).
Figure 1
• No parts of the system are in direct contact with the patient.

• Other equipment that is in contact with the patient is not connected directly to
the Agfa system without additional protective measures.


Safety Compliance
The Workstation console and the ID Tablet comply with the following safety standards:
• UL 1950, Third Edition
• CAN/CSA 22.2 No. 950-95, Third Edition (cUL)
• EN60950 (TÜV)
• TÜV
The equipment bears the CE mark and fully complies with the CE Directive
89/336/EEC and with the federal code of the United States, bearing on:
Emission and immunity according to EN 60601-1-2, for emissions the equipment
complies with EN 55011 class A (CISPR 11). This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
Emissions according to 47 CFR part 15 subpart B, Class A. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio-parameters according to ETS 300330.
When connecting equipment to these outlets, take care not to exceed the maximum
total current of 4 A.


Imaging Services Installation Planning
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS106.10E
sw_03_install-planning_e_template_v07
1
DD+DIS106.10E Installation Planning
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


It informs about planning and preparing the installation of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
software.
The NX 2.0.8300 and NX 3.0.8300 software versions are based on a identical
installation file. The functional difference between the versions is based on the
activated license packages.
The GenRad, Mammography, Central Monitoring System (CMS) and Veterinary
software versions are based on a identical installation file. The version difference is
based on the activated license packages.
For detailed information refer to chapter 1 Product Description of the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual (DD+DIS105.10E).

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual:
Chapter 1 - Product Description
Chapter 1 - SW / HW Compatibility Chart
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration
DD+DIS012.06E Licensing Service Manual


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW AND CHECKLIST FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING OF NX 2.0.8300 /

3.0.8300....................................................................................................................................5
2 GATHERING INFORMATION ..................................................................................................7
2.1 Asking for Contact Persons ......................................................................................................7
2.2 Gathering Network Settings ......................................................................................................7
2.3 Prerequisites for NX Laptop for wireless Intensive Care Unit Workflow.................................12
2.4 Asking for Security Requirements of the Customer................................................................12
2.4.1 User Permissions / Authorization............................................................................................13
2.4.2 Certificates ..............................................................................................................................13
2.4.3 Hospital Guidelines .................................................................................................................13
2.5 Preparing Connectivity of the Modality ...................................................................................18
2.5.1 Using the ADB-Tool ................................................................................................................18
2.5.2 Setting up “Viewing Priors” Functionality ................................................................................18
2.6 Obtaining a Standard Configuration from Application Representative ...................................19
2.7 Obtaining Application License File (ALF)................................................................................19
2.7.1 Information required for Creation of an ALF with Simplified ELMS ........................................20
2.7.2 Information required for requesting an ALF File from the NSO ..............................................21
3 PREPARATORY TASKS OF THE CUSTOMER ....................................................................21

3.1 Scheduling On-site Visit..........................................................................................................22
3.2 Preparing the Installation Room..............................................................................................22
3.3 Deliver Network Topology to Field Service Engineer .............................................................25
3.4 Allocating the Delivery in Time................................................................................................25
3.5 Planning Office Viewer Installation .........................................................................................25
4 PROVIDING REMOTE ACCESS ...........................................................................................26

5 SUPPORTED HARDWARE PLATFORMS ............................................................................26
5.1 Supported Monitors.................................................................................................................27
5.2 Supported UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Types..........................................................27
5.3 Supported RIS Clients to be installed on the NX Workstation................................................27


1 Overview and Checklist for Installation Planning of

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Site: Date:
Goal: The following list details the topics to be prepared for an
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 installation before going on-site.
Topics: Done
Collect Information:
Ask for Contact Persons
Collect information about Application Type:
• NX for GenRad / Mammo
• NX for Veterinary
• NX Central Monitoring System (CMS)
Collect Network Settings.
Collect information for optional wireless Intesive Care Unit
workflow (ICU).
Collect information about Dose type (depending on digitizer
type) *

• Logarithm Median (LGM)
• Exposure Index (EI)
Ask for Security Requirements of the Customer
Prepare Connectivity of the Modality
Obtain a Standard Configuration from Application
Representative
Obtain the Application License File (ALF)
Preparatory Tasks of the Customer:
On-site Visit scheduled
Installation Room prepared
Network Topology delivered to Field Service Engineer
Delivery in Time allocated
Provide Remote Access:
Remote access prepared prior to installation
* For more information about the Dose Types refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
Product Description and SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


IMPORTANT:
Limitations for Central Monitoring Systems (CMS):
• When installing a CMS, be aware that the In-Room NX Workstations may need to
be upgraded.
• When installing an In-Room NX Workstation, be aware that the connected CMS
and all other connected In-Room NX Workstations may need to be upgraded.
To check which versions of CMS and In-Room NX Workstations are compatible
refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility
Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
• All In-Room NX workstations connected to the same CMS must have the same
dose type setting (LGM or EI).
IMPORTANT:
Before going on-site to install an NX system it is essential that the Field Service
Engineer takes some preparatory measures to allow a smooth installation.
These tasks are:
• Collecting information (see section 2).
• Explaining the customer which preparation activities he has to perform
(see section 3).
• Preparing Remote access (see section 4).


2 Gathering Information
2.1 Asking for Contact Persons
ACTION:
Get names, telephone numbers and e-mail addresses of the persons who are involved
in the NX installation:
Contact Persons Name Phone E-mail

Sales representative
Responsible
Radiologist/
Radiographer
Hospital IT security
specialist
Hospital Network
specialist
Hospital Physicist
for modality
Modality Field
Engineer
2.2 Gathering Network Settings
ACTION:
Ask the hospital IT-Manager to define and provide settings for the
network environment for all applicable Agfa components that have to be configured and
enter them in the following tables.
NOTE:
It is not allowed to give hostnames with an underscore.


NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Processing Station

Processing Station Name (hostname)
Performed Station AE Title
Fast Preview AE Title
Fast ID AE Title
Storage Commit AE Title
Workgroup No Yes Name:
Hospital Domain No Yes
Name:
Account to be used:
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS (Domain Name Server) IP Address
Remarks:
Digitizer 1st Digitizer 2nd Digitizer 3rd Digitizer 4th Digitizer

Type
Hostname
IP address
Subnet_mask
Default router
AE_title
Station Name *
Remarks:
* Station name appears in the Graphical User Interface.


InRoom stations 1st Room 2nd Room 3rd Room 4th Room
(CMS only)
Name
Hostname
Remarks:
Hard Copy Printer 1st HCP 2nd HCP 3rd HCP 4th HCP
Type/Make
Hostname
IP Address
DICOM Port
AE_title
Remarks:
PACS 1st Station 2nd Station 3rd Station 4th Station

Archive Station
Type/Make
Hostname
IP address
DICOM Port
(Storage SCP port)
Dicom Port
(Storage Commit)
AE_title (Storage SCP)

AE_title (Storage Commit)
Remarks:


DICOM RIS/HIS Server 1 Server 2

Hostname
IP address
MWL* port number
AE_title
MPPS MPPS RIS/HIS 1 MPPS RIS/HIS 2
Hostname
IP address
MPPS** port number
AE_title
Remarks:
* MWL: Modality Worklist

** MPPS: Modality Performed Procedure Step
Non DICOM RIS

DataFile Path
Network drive access
IP address
Hostname
User name
Password
Remarks:
Audit Log Server

Hostname
Port number
IP address
Remarks:


Study Export on Network

Network destination
Remarks:
Backup on Network
Network destination
Remarks:
NOTE:
In case of a Clean Installation also the Windows License Key is needed.
This can be found on a sticker attached to the NX PC.


2.3 Prerequisites for NX Laptop for wireless Intensive Care Unit Workflow
A NX laptop with WiFi (wireless network) card can optionally be used in a wireless
network environment for mobile use inside the hospital, e.g. Intensive Care Unit (ICU).
It is operated in combination with a mobile ID Device and a mobile X-Ray unit.
IMPORTANT:
The wireless Intensive Care Unit Workflow must only be used for GenRad applications.
Following prerequisites must be fulfilled on site:
Prerequisites for wireless NX Laptop (ICU)

Compatible NX laptop is available or ordered. For more details refer OK
to chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart.
WiFi card for NX laptop is ordered. For more details refer to chapter 1 OK *
SW/HW Compatibility Chart. *
WiFi network is available on site and compatible with the WiFi card. OK
ID Scanner is available on site or ordered. OK
Optional technical license NX_ICU_CONFIGURATION is included in OK

the license file. For more details refer to section 2.7.
* Only required if the NX laptop is not already equipped with a wireless network (WiFi) card.
NOTE:
Installation instructions are described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
2.4 Asking for Security Requirements of the Customer
ACTION:
Ask the customer for specific requirements regarding data security policy of
the hospital, especially the topics listed in sections 2.4.1 - 2.4.3.


2.4.1 User Permissions / Authorization
ACTION:
Ask the hospital personnel representatives prior to the installation to decide how to
define the user roles.
2.4.2 Certificates
NOTE:
This section is not applicable to NX CMS stations.
In case the customer representative wants to work with Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)
communication, some actions are required:
(1) Ask whether the hospital has its own CA (Certification Authority), or whether Agfa
needs to supply certificates for its devices.
(2) Try to collect the certificates of the devices with which the NX system will need to
communicate prior to the installation.
IMPORTANT:
Otherwise lot of time will be lost during the installation, because the SSL
connection cannot be tested unless all certificates are present.
(3) Provide the NX system certificate up-front to the hospital (or in case they have
their own CA, ask them to generate the NX system certificate).
(4) Arrange that either the NX certificate is installed on all systems with which
NX needs to communicate or make sure that somebody is present at the time of
installation who is able and has the permissions to do this.
2.4.3 Hospital Guidelines
The Hospital Guidelines can contain advice to hospital IT-personnel concerning

security-related deployment of the NX workstation in a hospital network environment.
They can contain:
• Useful hints on security improvement
• Limitations of the operating system/NX software
ACTION:
Cross-check the following “General Security Guidelines” and “Local Security Policy
Setting Guidelines” together with the Hospital IT security specialist with the Hospital
Guidelines in order to avoid conflicting settings.


2.4.3.1 General Security Guidelines
(1) Discuss the recommended Antivirus Software:

Installing Antivirus software on all Workstations is a basic step in protecting the
data. But this is nearly useless if the definitions aren't updated regularly.
NOTE:
It is recommended to use certain antivirus software. For details refer to NX
2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and
Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E section Settings for Anti-virus
Software (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
Remarks of
the customer:
(2) Discuss disabling EFS (Encrypting File System):

Using the New Technology File System (NTFS) as of Windows XP Professional
allows to encrypt files and folders using the Encrypting File System (EFS). This is
however not advised for performance reasons.
Remarks of
the customer:
(3) Discuss password protecting the screensaver:

This is a basic security step that could be circumvented by users.
Make sure all of the workstations have this feature enabled to prevent an internal
threat from taking advantage of an unlocked console. For best results:
• Choose the blank screensaver or logon screensaver.
• Avoid OpenGL and graphic intensive screensavers that use a lot CPU cycles
and memory.
• Make sure the wait setting is appropriate. Users can be kept from changing
this setting via Group Policy or the local security policy.
NOTE:
How to password protect the screensaver is described in chapter 04
Appendices of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual (DD+DIS105.10E)
section “Edit Security settings according to Hospital guidelines” section
“Enabling Password protection of the Screensaver.


(4) Discuss replacing the "Everyone" Group with "Authenticated Users" on File
Shares:
"Everyone" in the context of Windows security, means anyone who gains access
to the network can access the data.
NOTE:
Never assign the "Everyone" Group to have access to a file share on the
network, use "Authenticated Users" instead. This is especially important
for printers, who have the "Everyone" Group assigned by default.
(5) Discuss using passwords on all user accounts:

Windows allows user accounts to utilize blank passwords to log into their local
workstations, although accounts with blank passwords can no longer be used to
log on to the computer remotely over the network.
IMPORTANT:
• It is recommended not to use blank passwords since they weaken the
security of the system.
• Make sure passwords are assigned to all accounts, especially the
Administrator account and any accounts with Administrator privileges.
(6) Discuss limiting the number of unnecessary accounts:

Any duplicate user accounts, test accounts, shared accounts, general department
accounts, etc. should be eliminated.
Permissions should be assigned as needed using group policies, and the
accounts should be audited regularly. These generic accounts are famous for
having weak passwords (and lots of access) and are at the top of every hacker's
list of accounts to crack first.


2.4.3.2 Local Security Policy Setting Guidelines
NOTE:
The following settings concern the Local Security settings of the operating system.
How to edit the settings is described in chapter 4 “Installation and Configuration
Appendices” (DD+DIS105.10E) section “Edit Security settings according to Hospital
guidelines” sub-section Editing Local Security Policy settings.
(1) Discuss using Software Restriction Policies:

Using a software restriction policy can prevent unwanted programs from running.
This includes viruses and Trojan horses, or other software that is known to cause
conflicts when installed. Software restriction policies can be used on a standalone
computer by configuring the local security policy, or can be integrated with Group
Policy and Active Directory.
Remarks of
the customer:
(2) Discuss setting Account Lockout Policy:

Windows includes an account lockout feature that will disable an account after an
administrator-specified number of logon failures. There are two common goals for
using account lockout:
o Make it obvious that multiple attempts have been made to log on to a user
account with an invalid password.
o Protect accounts from attempts to guess a password by dictionary attacks
or iterative guessing. There is not one correct setting here that will apply to
all environments. Consider reasonable settings for the environment.
Recommendation:
o Account lockout duration: "forever (until admin unlocks)”
o Account lockout threshold:
Enable local account lockout after 5-10 failed attempts
o Reset account lockout counter: After not less than 30 minutes
If this is too restrictive, consider permitting the account to automatically unlock
after a certain period of time.
Remarks of
the customer:


(3) Discuss setting stronger Password Policies:

Microsoft suggests the following settings for password security:
o Set a password history maintenance
(using Enforce password history) of at least 6 passwords.
o Set a maximum password age appropriate to the network
(typically not more than 42 days).
o Set a minimum password age appropriate to the network
(typically between 1 and 7 days).
o Set the minimum password length to at least 8 characters.
Remarks of
the customer:
(4) Discuss editing audit policy of the operating system:

In the local policies of the operating system it can be determined which events
are audited. The following events should be audited:
Event Level of Auditing

Account logon events success, failure
Account management success, failure
Logon events success, failure
System events success, failure
(5) Discuss Disabling the Ability to boot from a Floppy or CD ROM on

physically unsecured Systems:
There are a number of 3rd party utilities that pose a security risk if used via a
boot disk (including resetting the local administrator password). Access to the
floppy and CD-ROM drives can also be restricted in Windows via the
Local Computer Policy.


2.5 Preparing Connectivity of the Modality
ACTION:
Check beforehand, if the presence of the modality field service engineer is required
during installation (e.g. if XRDi license has to be installed).
If yes, make an accurately timed appointment with the modality field service engineer
for the day the installation takes place.
2.5.1 Using the ADB-Tool
Information about the Agfa DICOM Bridge tool can be found on the NX workstation:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\ADB\docs\ (PDF file)
NOTE:
• The NX workstation is by default not offering a PDF reading tool. Either:
o Install the PDF reader from the NX User Documentation CD or
o Copy the PDF file to the service laptop PC.
• Authorization to modify the ADB-Tool configuration is restricted to the crservice
account.
2.5.2 Setting up “Viewing Priors” Functionality
For setup / configuration of a Viewing Priors two steps are mandatory:
(1) Configure IMPAX (WEB1000) via Professional Services.

This step has to be triggered by the AGFA consultant.
These configuration items are relevant for NX:
• The IP-address (only for WEB1000)
• The user name
• The password
(2) Configure the NX Viewing Priors functionality. The procedure is described in:
The configuration tool online help and NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E


NOTE for IMPAX 4.1 and 5.x:

The viewing priors functionality is only available if WEB1000 is ready for it.
The preconditions, commercial and technical procedures are described in
the document:
"HEALTHCARE SERVICES EUROPE - NX - WEB1000 Integration:
Viewing Prior Studies - Commercial Procedure and Technical Documentation"
(Intranet Link / For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner).
NOTE for IMPAX 6.2 and higher

The viewing priors functionality is only available if IMPAX is ready for it.
The preconditions and commercial and technical procedures are described in
the document:
"NX - IMPAX6 Integration: Viewing Prior Studies: Installation & Configuration Manual"
(Intranet Link / For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner).
2.6 Obtaining a Standard Configuration from Application Representative
ACTION:
Ask the Agfa Clinical Application Specialist (CAS) for a typical NX standard
configuration that can be loaded during installation. This will shorten the application visit
considerably.
2.7 Obtaining Application License File (ALF)
There are two possibilities to obtain the ALF:

• The license file is created by the FSE himself, using the Simplified ELMS.
• The license file is generated (using the Simplified ELMS) and provided by the
National Sales Organization (NSO). Using this option, the GSO Service dispatcher
or the FSE initiates the request to generate a new license file towards the NSO.
This process is defined by local procedures in the countries.
The license file is created in ELMS by the ELMS coordinator in the NSO and
provided to the FSE via ELMS or e-mail.
INSTRUCTION:
For a detailed description of the procedure how to obtain a License File (ALF) refer to
the Licensing Service Manual (DD+DIS012.06E) on MedNet GSO Library


2.7.1 Information required for Creation of an ALF with Simplified ELMS
ACTION:
Gather the following information to be able to create the ALF.
Sales Order (SO) Number

Identification of the hardware
AGFA serial number
Identification of the new software
Version of NX to be installed NX 3.0.8300 NX 2.0.8300
Update to later version No Yes Name:
(e.g. NX 3.0.8300 SU1)
Base License (Starter pack)
Optional License packages
Identification of the customer

Hospital Address
Contact Person Name:

Phone:
NOTE:
• Ensure that the *.ALF file is delivered before going on site.
• For a Mammography workstation to take advantage of the connectivity to the
X-Ray Modality, dedicated licenses for the X-ray device interface (XRDI) software
have to be ordered as an extra option to the NX Workstation.


2.7.2 Information required for requesting an ALF File from the NSO
ACTION:
Provide the NSO with following information. The NSO will provide the ALF file.
Identification of the hardware

AGFA serial number
Identification of the dongle, contained in the starter kit
Dongle ID
Version of NX to be installed NX 3.0.8300 NX 2.0.8300
Update to later version No Yes Name:
(e.g. NX 3.0.8300 SU1)
Optional License packages
Identification of the customer (if not known on ELMS yet)

Hospital Address
Contact Person Name:

Phone:
3 Preparatory Tasks of the Customer
Sections 3.1 - 3.4 have to be carried out by the customer timely before the
installation date in order to have the site properly prepared.


3.1 Scheduling On-site Visit
ACTION:
Inform the customer about the installation date and possible impact of the installation on
day-to-day routines (e.g. how long the system will be unavailable in the hospital).
Date of Installation _________ / __________ / ________

Availability of personnel
Sales representative
OK Not OK Not required
(if required)
Responsible radiologist/radiographer OK Not OK
Hospital IT security specialist OK Not OK
Hospital Network specialist OK Not OK
Hospital Physicist for modality

(if required)
Modality field service engineer
(if required)
3.2 Preparing the Installation Room
(1) Inform the customer which necessary room preparations he has to carry out
before the installation date:
Installation room/network requirements

Power Sockets Minimum: 2x, recommended: 4x
Network Connection Minimum: 1x, recommended: 2x
Recommended:
Network Speed
Minimum 100 Mbit switched network, full duplex
Network protocol TCP/IP
Twisted-Pair ETHERNET 10/100/1000

Ethernet Interface specification
BASE T(X)
Network setting on device* AUTOSENSE (10/HD, 100/HD/FD, 1000/HD/FD)
Network setting on switch* AUTOSENSE
* It is preferable to configure both sides (NX and switch) AUTOSENSE.

If AUTOSENSE is not possible, NX and switch must be configured on both sides on the same
way. Both sides should be configured “fixed” at the appropriate speed and duplex mode. In case of
a fixed network port, ask the network administrator for the proper speed and duplex mode.


NOTE:
If there will be a router or firewall installed between the segments of following
devices, it may lead to connection problems (the command <ping> will not
work). Ask the hospital system administrator, for an access-list or security rule
which could be blocking the traffic between the devices:
• NX workstation
• NX Central Monitoring System
• Digitizer
• Printers
• PACS
• RIS
(2) Inform the customer to provide furniture for the NX system that is suited for the
system dimensions listed below:
Recommendations for Furniture Height Width Depth Net Weight

Minimum space required for Desktop PC 45 cm 19 cm 46 cm Maximum 10 kg
Minimum space required for a

60 cm 45 cm 25 cm Maximum 10 kg
BARCO Monitor
Minimum space required for a ELO
41 cm 52 cm 35 cm Maximum 10.5 kg
Touchscreen Monitor
Minimum space required for
38 cm 38 cm 15 cm Maximum 10 kg
Standard Flatpanel Display
(3) Inform the customer to setup the furniture for the NX system that fulfills the
recommendations for positioning monitors listed below:
• Prefer working parallel to a

window.
Figure 1


• Avoid sitting opposite a

window.
Figure 2
• Avoid reflections through

direct sunlight.
Figure 3
• Avoid reflections from a

light source in the room
(e.g. lamps, view box).
Figure 4
NOTE:
For detailed information on ergonomic working conditions, please consult the
respective local regulations.


3.3 Deliver Network Topology to Field Service Engineer
(1) Inform the customer to provide a network topology (structure overview) in which
the NX system will be implemented, e.g. planned network switches.
(2) Ask the hospital to create a domain account for AGFA Servicing that also has
administrator rights on the local computer:
• If the hospital is working in a domain and
• If the NX application security for the hospital is done by the Field Service
Engineer.
NOTE:
On the installation day, log in using this domain account prior to setting up the NX
application security via the Configuration tool.
3.4 Allocating the Delivery in Time
ACTION:
Before going on site, check with the customer representative that the equipment has
arrived in time. Take necessary steps to make sure that the equipment is complete.
3.5 Planning Office Viewer Installation
ACTION:
Inform the customer about the possibility to install the Office Viewer. The Office Viewer
software can be installed by the customer on any PC. The customer can find the
software installer and all needed information (e.g. minimum hardware and Operating
System requirements) on the User Documentation CD.


4 Providing Remote Access
ACTION
Inform the customer that it is advised to have “Remote Access” for NX 2.0.8300 /
3.0.8300 prepared prior to installation of the system.
5 Supported Hardware Platforms
Be aware of the supported hardware platforms. For an overview of supported hardware

platforms and technical specifications refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NOTE:
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 cannot be installed on hardware reused from previous
CR QS installations.
IMPORTANT:
Hewlett Packard (HP) laptops are delivered with West-European power cable
connecting the mains power outlet with the laptop's external AC adaptor.
The adaptor inlet requires a C5 (EN/IEC 60320/C5) connector:
Figure 5: C5 connector
ACTION
For other countries, coordinate that a power cable is available that fits the respective
local mains power outlet.


5.1 Supported Monitors
For an overview of supported types, technical specifications and P-Value configurability

refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart
NOTE:
NX only runs with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 1024 pixels.
5.2 Supported UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Types
For an overview of supported UPS types, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service

Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E
5.3 Supported RIS Clients to be installed on the NX Workstation
For an overview of supported RIS Clients refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service



Chapter 4
HEALTHCARE Installation and Configuration
Imaging Services
Appendices
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides step-by-step instructions for sub-procedures of the

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 installation and configuration that are optional or only
needed in certain less common scenarios.
The sub-procedures are included in this manual in a random order, so no specific
sequence is followed. For an overview of the described procedures refer to section 1.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
DD+DIS106.10E Chapter 3 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS107.10E Chapter 5 - Clean Installation Procedure
DD+DIS108.10E Chapter 5 - Monitors Options
DD+DIS115.10E Chapter 7 - Upgrade Installation from NX

sw_05_install-config_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Appendices
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF DESCRIBED PROCEDURES ........................................................................6

2 UPGRADING ID TABLET FIRMWARE ....................................................................................7
2.1 Checking Firmware Version of the ID Tablet ............................................................................7
2.2 Installing new Firmware Version ...............................................................................................8
3 EDITING SECURITY SETTINGS ACCORDING TO HOSPITAL GUIDELINES ....................12

3.1 Editing Local Security Policy Settings.....................................................................................12
3.2 Enabling Password Protection of the Screensaver.................................................................15
4 TWAIN DIGITIZER DEVICE SOFTWARE (ASAP).................................................................15

5 BACKUP INFORMATION.......................................................................................................16
5.1 ‘Backup configuration data’ Script...........................................................................................16
5.2 ‘Backup all data’ Script............................................................................................................17
5.3 Changing the default Location of the Backup Destination......................................................18
5.4 Scheduling a standard NX Backup .........................................................................................19
6 INSTALLING A POWERWARE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) ...................23

7 CHANGING THE REGIONAL SETTINGS (LANGUAGE / DATE & TIME) OF THE NX .......30
7.1 Configuring Local String Formats (e.g. Date & Time) of the NX Workstation ........................30
7.2 Configuring the Language of an NX User Account.................................................................31
7.3 Configuring the default Language for new NX User Accounts ...............................................31
8 LAPTOP POWER SETTINGS ................................................................................................32

9 IMPORT AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ...........................................................34
9.1 Full Import - Partial Import ......................................................................................................34
9.1.1 Full Import and Activation of an NX Configuration File...........................................................34
9.1.2 Partial Import an NX Configuration File into an active Configuration .....................................35
9.2 Import NX Exam Tree .............................................................................................................36
9.3 Import CPF-File or QS-XML-File Exam Tree..........................................................................37
9.3.1 General Configuration Conversion Rules ...............................................................................38
9.3.2 Useful Information concerning the Structure of the NX Exam Tree........................................38
9.3.3 Converting Step by Step .........................................................................................................39
9.3.4 Importing the converted Exam Tree into NX Configuration Tool ............................................41


9.4 Creating Exposure Groups .....................................................................................................41
10 SECURE COMMUNICATION (SSL) ......................................................................................42

10.1 Explanation of SSL .................................................................................................................43
10.2 Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Personal’ Store....................................................43
10.3 Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Trusted Root Certification Authorities’ Store.......46
10.4 Enabling the Secure Communication in NX Configuration Tool .............................................49
10.5 Granting the current User Access to the private Key of the personal Certificate ...................49
10.5.1 Finding out the currently used User Account Name (if not known) ........................................50
11 SETTINGS FOR ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE............................................................................50

11.1 McAfee 8.0 ..............................................................................................................................50
11.2 Norton Antivirus 10.0 ..............................................................................................................58
11.2.1 Special Feature of Norton Antivirus ........................................................................................58
11.2.2 Norton Antivirus Corporate 10.0 Settings: Server...................................................................58
11.2.3 Norton Antivirus Corporate 7.6 Settings: Client ......................................................................61
12 MONITOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION .............................................62

13 HOW TO CONFIGURE P-VALUES FOR MONITOR, PRINT OR ARCHIVE .........................62
13.1 Barco Monitors ........................................................................................................................63
13.2 Printer (Hardcopy)...................................................................................................................63
13.2.1 Determination of View Box Illuminance and ambient Luminance...........................................63
13.2.2 Configuring P-value Output on NX and Setup Environment Conditions for

Hardcopy Viewing ...................................................................................................................64
13.2.3 Required Tool: Luminance Meter............................................................................................65
13.3 Archive ....................................................................................................................................67
14 MANAGING PROTOCOL CODES .........................................................................................67

14.1 General Information for Mapping RIS Protocol Code Attributes.............................................68
14.1.1 Following DICOM (this is the default Mapping) ......................................................................68
14.1.2 Using an other Sequence .......................................................................................................68
14.1.3 Using a ‘string Field’................................................................................................................69
14.1.4 Converting Protocol Codes using the Excel Sheet (ready for Import) ....................................70
15 REMOVING RESTORE POINTS ...........................................................................................71

16 ACCESS TO NETWORK DRIVE FOR NON-DICOM RIS......................................................73


16.1 Share an NX Drive ..................................................................................................................73
16.2 Access to Network Drive (Domain) .........................................................................................73
16.2.1 On the Domain ........................................................................................................................74
16.2.2 On the NX ...............................................................................................................................74
16.3 Access to Network Drive (Workgroup)....................................................................................75
16.3.1 On the Workgroup Remote System ........................................................................................75
16.3.2 On the NX ...............................................................................................................................77
17 INSTALLING NEW DEVICE MODELS...................................................................................79

17.1 Printer Model Files ..................................................................................................................80
17.1.1 Installing Printer Model Files...................................................................................................80
17.1.2 Released Printer Model Files..................................................................................................80
17.2 Installing a new Archive Type .................................................................................................80
17.3 Installing a new ID Tablet Type...............................................................................................81
17.4 Installing a new Digitizer Type ................................................................................................81
17.5 Installing a new Monitor Type .................................................................................................81
18 HOW TO USE A NETWORK DRIVE FOR EXPORTING IMAGES ........................................82

19 ADDING A NX WORKSTATION TO THE CPF-FILE USING THE CCM TOOL .....................84
19.1 Adding the NX Station to the cpf File Configuration ...............................................................85
20 SWITCHING DOSE CALCULATION FROM LGM TO EXPOSURE INDEX (EI)....................94

20.1 When is a Change from Lgm to EI required? .........................................................................94
20.2 EI Configuration on a new System .........................................................................................95
20.3 Switching from Lgm to EI on a running NX (or when upgrading from a NX) ..........................95
20.4 Exposure Index Configuration during Clean Install.................................................................96


1 Overview of described Procedures
The following table gives an overview of the described procedures in this chapter.
Click on the section number in column See section to be directed to the respective
section:
Procedure: See section:

1. Upgrading ID Tablet firmware 2
2. Editing Security settings for Hospital guidelines 3
3. Downloading TWAIN digitizer device software (ASAP) 4
4. Creating Backup 5
5. Installing an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) 6
6. Changing the regional settings 7
7. Applying specific power settings for laptop PCs 8
8. Importing available configuration settings 9
9. Switching on secure communication (SSL) 10
10. Configuring settings for Anti-virus software 11
11. Installing Monitor Software and calibrating monitors 12
12. Configuring P-values 13
13. Managing protocol codes 14
14. Removing restore points 15
15. Creating access to Network Drive for non-DICOM RIS 16
16. Installing new Device Models 17
17. Using a network drive for exporting images 18
18. Adding an NX Workstation to the CPF file using the CCM tool 19
19. Switching Dose Calculation from LGM to Exposure Index (EI) 20


2 Upgrading ID Tablet Firmware
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 minutes
NOTE:
If the ID tablet firmware version is 1.12.07 or higher this step is not required.
2.1 Checking Firmware Version of the ID Tablet
(1) Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Logging Æ Logging Viewer

(2) In the main menu select: File Æ New Æ Log4Net File Reader (XML Layout)
(3) When asked to, select the file following the path:
C:/Agfa/Healthcare/Log/NX/XML/NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe
(4) In the Search window type e.g.: firm
(5) Identify the currently installed ID Tablet firmware version in the “Message Detail”
window:
Figure 1: Example screenshot


2.2 Installing new Firmware Version
(1) Switch OFF the ID tablet and connect it via serial port (COM port) to the NX PC.
If all serial ports of the NX PC are already in use (e.g. by touch screen or UPS),
connect the ID tablet to the serial port of the service PC.
(2) Log in using the crservice account (on the NX PC).
(3) Stop the NX. Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Stop NX
(4) Find the package BF2Upgrade_V1.12.07.zip on the
NX Starterkit DVD 1 in folder Service Software.
(5) Unzip file and copy extracted files to hard disk (e.g. C:\temp).
(6) Double-click the file “BF2Upload1.12.exe”.
(7) Click <Next> to choose default destination directory:
Figure 2
(8) Click <Next> to start copying files:
Figure 3


(9) Check the box <Yes, Launch the program file> and click <Finish> to
complete setup:
Figure 4
(10) Click the button <Select BF2-File…>, select the software file saved on hard
disk “1007_agfa_id_tablet_1_12_07.BF2” and then click <Open>:
Figure 5
(11) Click <Next> to upload software.


(12) Check that the correct serial port, where ID-Tablet is connected to, is selected
and click <Next>.
Remark: Initial Protocol should be “Raw RS232 (only for initial setup)”:
Figure 6
NOTE:
If the PC has only one COM port, select COM1. If it has more COM
ports and it is not known which one is connected to the ID tablet, check it
in the Device Manager:
Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel, choose System and there the
register Hardware. Click the button <Device Manager…>. The COM
ports are listed in Ports (COM & LPT).
(13) First click <Upload> to start the upload process and then switch
on ID-Tablet! Installation progress is shown in the status bar.
Figure 7


(14) After the message “Transferred BF2- File successfully” appears, click
<Close> to finish the upload:
Figure 8


3 Editing Security Settings according to Hospital Guidelines
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 3 Installation Planning

DD+DIS106.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) contains advice for the hospital
IT-personnel concerning security-related topics of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
workstation in a hospital network environment.
This section provides the procedures for editing these settings in accordance with the
hospital guidelines and the needs of the customer gathered in chapter 3
Installation Planning.
3.1 Editing Local Security Policy Settings
(1) Open the Local Security Policy window:

Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Administrative Tools Æ
Local Security Policy.
Figure 9
(2) To edit the Software Restriction Policy choose the Folder

Software Restriction Policies:
Figure 10
For more information about this topic see also:

http://www.microsoft.com/technet/prodtechnol/winxppro/maintain/rstrplcy.mspx


(3) To edit the Account Lockout Policy choose the folder

Account Policies Æ Account Lockout Policy:
Figure 11
(4) Double-click following items to edit:

• Account lockout duration: Edit minutes.
• Account lockout threshold: Edit number of invalid attempts.
• Reset account lockout counter after: Edit minutes.
(5) To edit the Password Policy choose the folder

Account Policies Æ Password Policy:
Figure 12
(6) Double-click following items to edit:

• Enforce password history: Define how many passwords are remembered.
• Maximum password age: Define how many days the password is valid.
• Minimum password age:
Define after how many days the password can be changed.
• Minimum password length:
Define how many characters the password must have.
• Password must meet complexity requirements:
Enable or disable complexity requirements for the password.


(7) To edit the Audit Policy choose the folder

Local Policies Æ Audit Policy:
Figure 13
(8) Double-click the policy items to edit the settings.

(9) To edit Ability to boot from floppy or CD-ROM choose the folder
Local Policies Æ Security Options:
Figure 14
(10) Double click following items to edit:

• Devices: Restrict CD-ROM access to locally logged-on user only:
Define if remotely logged on users have access to the CD-ROM.
• Devices: Restrict floppy access to locally logged-on user only:
Define if remotely logged on users have access to the floppy drive.


3.2 Enabling Password Protection of the Screensaver
(1) Right-click on the desktop of the NX and choose Properties.

(2) Go to the tab Screen Saver.
Figure 15
(3) Choose the “Blank” screensaver.

(4) Set the waiting time according to customers preference.
(5) Check the checkbox “On resume, password protect”.
(6) Click <OK>.
4 TWAIN Digitizer Device Software (ASAP)
If the NX Workstation is connected to a TWAIN digitizer and the compatible device

software (ASAP) is not available on the NX, it has to be downloaded from Mednet
GSO Library and installed on the NX workstation.
To find the compatible version number(s) refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E
(1) Go to the Mednet GSO Library to download the device software package
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link):
Path: GSO Library Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ
<TWAIN DIGITIZER> Æ Freeware (File size: Approximately 25 MB - 60 MB)
(2) Refer to the installation of the software, described in the respective digitizer
service manual.


5 Backup Information
After installation and after any change to the configuration of NX, it is important to
make a backup. Different scripts exist to make a backup. These copy the backup data
to following folder (by default):
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Backup:
Figure 16
NOTE:
The backup scripts only keep the last five backups made using a FIFO (First In First
Out) mechanism. Older ones are removed from the system!
5.1 ‘Backup configuration data’ Script
The back-up includes:

• Configuration Data:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (Database Store)
• License file:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration
• Authorization (user roles and user to role assignments):
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (XML-file)
• Logo files (used in print sheet layouts, etc.):
IMPORTANT:
Be aware that the back-up does not include image files or examination
data (exams).


ACTION:
To activate the script, go to:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore Æ Backup Configuration data
Result:
The script creates a folder in the backup folder with a date and time stamp:
‘NX_X-YYYYMMDDTHHMMSS’ (Example: NX_2_20071130T013517) it contains the
following files:
Figure 17
5.2 ‘Backup all data’ Script
The back-up includes:

• Configuration Data:
• License file
• Authorization (user roles and user to role assignments):
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration (XML file)
• Logo files (used in print sheet layouts, etc.):
• Exam data (demographic data):
NOTE:
This does not include the image pixel data, which are on the partition D.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware that the back-up does not include image files.


ACTION:
To activate the script, go to:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore Æ Backup all data
Result:
The script creates a folder in the backup folder with a date and time stamp:
‘NX_X-YYYYMMDDTHHMMSS’ (Example: NX_2_20071130T013517) it contains the
following files:
Figure 18
NOTE:
The folder NXBackupDevice.zip contains the data base (DB) backup.
5.3 Changing the default Location of the Backup Destination
By default, the NX backup script creates a backup locally on the Data & Backup
partition (D:). It is possible to backup to a network drive instead.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the account under which the backup will be performed has
sufficient rights to access & write in the folder on the remote location.
To change the backup destination:
(1) Go to Start Æ AGFA Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore and choose the script
Re-Direct Backup Destination:
Figure 19
(2) Click the browse button <…>.


(3) Choose the new destination in the browse window and click <OK>.
(4) Click the button <Set Directory>.
(5) Click <OK> on the message “Backup Destination successfully changed”.
NOTE:
This script changes the following registry settings:
<HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\BackupDir>
5.4 Scheduling a standard NX Backup
REQUIRED TIME:
Optionally, one can schedule a backup by scheduling one of the two existing backup
scripts (backup all data or backup configuration data). the Scheduling functionality
available in Windows XP is used for this.
NOTE:
• Only scheduling the script ‘configuration backup’ doesn’t make much sense as the
configuration is typically not changed any more after the setup of the NX.
• Scheduling a ‘backup all data’ only makes sense if the NX is equipped with two hard
disks (e.g. not on Dell 745). If the first disk crashes one can restore the backup and
as the images still reside on the second disk most of the data can be recovered. On
a single disk system, if the disk crashes, the image data is also gone. So here it
doesn’t make sense restoring the data (if not lost itself) as the backup contains no
images.
• In general, it is advised to schedule the backup task in a period when less activity is
expected on the NX station. When a backup is taking place, the user can continue
working although the system performance is impacted minimally.
(1) Log on to the system using an administrator account (e.g. crservice).

(2) Start up Scheduled Tasks from “Start Æ Program files Æ Accessories Æ
System Tools”. The following window is shown:
Figure 20


(3) Double-click on “Add scheduled task”.

Result: The Scheduled Task Wizard opens up.
(4) Click <Next>:
Figure 21
(5) Click the <Browse...> button:
Figure 22
(6) In the file browser dialog browse to:

• C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Bin\Service\NXBackup_Full.bat for full backup
or
• C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Bin\Service\NXBackup_ConfigData.bat for backing
up only the configuration data.
(7) Click <Open>.


(8) Select the frequency of the backup (normally daily/weekly) and click <Next>:
Figure 23
(9) Select the start time (= time when the system is preferably not used or rarely
used. In case that office hours apply, it’s advised to schedule to after-hours) and
click <Next>.
Figure 24
(10) Enter the user account name & password under which this task may run. The
task will run under this profile independent of the fact that somebody is logged in
or not and click <Next>:
NOTE:
In case of password expiration, the task will cease to run!
Preferably use an administrator account to run this task
(e.g. crservice) or definitely an account that doesn’t have very strong
password expiration rules. This does not need to be a local account. In a
domain setup, also a domain account can be used.


Figure 25
(11) Click <Finish> on the message: You have successfully scheduled …
NOTE:
There is no indication that a backup is taking place (meaning that the user is not
disturbed by this fact), only in case that the user is logged in with the same user
account as the one under which the backup task is running.
To check whether a task was active or not:
(1) Navigate to: Sart Æ Control panel Æ Scheduled tasks
(2) Check the ‘status’ column which will indicate whether the last run was okay or not.


6 Installing a Powerware Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Shut down the NX Workstation.

(2) Power down the UPS.
(3) Use the standard serial cable to connect the UPS.
NOTE:
• Connecting the UPS via USB cable is not supported.
• Powerware UPS in combination with CR QS 3.x requires a modified
serial cable. This must not be used on NX!
(4) Power on the UPS.
(5) Power on the NX Workstation.
NOTE:
On a new NX workstation delivered from production site, the following steps are
already done in production and can be skipped!
(6) If the Windows Hardware Wizard is started insert the NX Starterkit DVD 2 and
click <Next>:
Figure 26


(7) To find the compatible version of the LanSafe software refer to

(8) Start the installation of the LanSafe software by opening the LanSafe Setup
Wizard from: NX STARTERKIT DVD 2:
DRIVERS Æ LanSafe [compatible version] Æ LanSafeInstaller Æ setup.exe
(9) Click the <Next> button:
X.X.X
Figure 27
(10) Accept the terms of the license agreement and click the <Next> button.
(11) Select LanSafe Controller to install it onto the system and click the <Next>
button:
Figure 28


(12) Select Serial Connection [COM port] and click the <Next> button:
Figure 29
(13) Verify the serial connection by clicking the <OK> button:
Figure 30
(14) Select the serial port the UPS is connected to and click the <Next> button:
Figure 31


(15) Select manufacturer and model of the UPS and click the <Next> button:
Figure 32
(16) Set password to: Set2adminpassw and click the <Next> button:
Figure 33
(17) Specify CountDown and Shutdown periods.

Recommended:
• Set a Countdown period of 5 minutes maximum allowing the user to finish an
ongoing acquisition with the digitizer.
• Set a System Shutdown period of 3 minutes maximum.


(18) Click the <Next> button:
Figure 34
(19) Type in the group identifier (computer name) and click the <Next> button:
NX
Figure 35
(20) Don't fill in any SMTP information. Click the <Next> button.
(21) Accept the default installation destination and click the <Next> button.
(22) Accept the default program folder and click the <Install> button.


(23) Check the checkbox Launch LanSafe and click the <Finish> button.
Figure 36
NOTE:
When running the Lansafe software, it is possible that the following message box is
shown which can be ignored by clicking <Register Later>:
Figure 37
(24) From the Configuration menu, select Management Settings.

(25) Click the <Options> button:
Figure 38


(26) Make sure the ‘Never power-off UPS’ check box is unchecked.
(27) Click the <OK> button to close the Options dialog:
Figure 39
(28) Click the <OK> button to close the ‘Management Settings’.

(29) From the Configuration menu, select Event Notification.
(30) The Event Notification window opens up. Select the ‘Power failure’ Alert Type
from the list. Enter a ‘Notification delay’ of 120 seconds:
Figure 40
(31) Choose the ‘Command’ tab and check the checkbox

Enable command execution:
Figure 41


(32) Click the button <Browse…> and browse to C:\Agfa\HealthCare\NX\Bin and

choose the file:
NX.Application.NonVisual.PowerFailureShutdown.exe
(33) Click the <OK> button to apply the Event Notification settings.
Result The UPS is now configured for a notification delay of 120 seconds.
If the power is restored within this period, the user won’t notice a power failure.
7 Changing the regional Settings (Language / Date & Time)

of the NX
REQUIRED TIME:
For a complete setup of regional settings, perform the following steps:
Checkpoints: See section:

Configuring Local String Formats (e.g. Date & Time) of the NX 7.1
1.
Workstation
2. Configuring the Language of an NX User Account 7.2
3. Configuring the default Language for new NX User Accounts 7.3
7.1 Configuring Local String Formats (e.g. Date & Time) of the NX Workstation
NOTE:
• These settings are made for displaying numbers, percentages, dates and times in
the NX Application and on hardcopy prints.
• They are independent of the logged in user and must be identical on all NX
Workstations connected to a Central Monitoring System (CMS).
(1) Go to: General Configuration Æ Regional Settings in the Configuration Tool

(2) Press <F1>.
(3) Refer to the Config Tool online help on how to configure the regional settings
for the NX Workstation.


7.2 Configuring the Language of an NX User Account
NOTE:
This setting depends on the logged in user.
(1) Log in using the user account.

(2) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Regional Settings.
(3) Open the "Regional Options" tab.
(4) Modify "Language setting" to match the customer requirements.
(5) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
The language of the crservice user account should be English.
7.3 Configuring the default Language for new NX User Accounts
(1) Log on to the system using the crservice account.

(2) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Regional Settings.
(3) Open the "Regional Options" tab.
(4) Modify Language setting to match the default language.
(5) Open the Advanced tab.
(6) Check the option Apply all settings to the current user account and to the
default user profiles".
(7) A new dialog pops up: Click <OK>.
(8) Click <Apply>.
NOTE:
This also changes the language of the crservice account, which must
stay in English. To restore this setting, next steps are mandatory:
(9) Modify Language setting to English.

(10) Open the Advanced tab.
(11) Uncheck the option Apply all settings to the current user account and to the
default user profiles.
(12) A new dialog pops up: Click <OK>.
(13) Click <OK>.


8 Laptop Power Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
For an NX laptop PC, special power settings have to be applied to each individual
user account.
IMPORTANT:
These settings are required to prevent NX malfunctioning when closing the laptop lid
during operation.
(1) Go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Power Options

(2) Click through the tabs Power Scheme, Alarms, Advanced and Hibernate and set
all settings as shown in the screenshots (Figure 42 – Figure 45):
Figure 42


Figure 43 Figure 44
Figure 45
(3) Click <OK> to save the settings.


9 Import Available Configuration Settings
REQUIRED TIME:

1. Full Import - Partial Import 9.1
2. Import NX Exam Tree 9.2
3. Import CPF-File or QS-XML-File Exam Tree 9.3
4. Creating Exposure Groups 9.4
9.1 Full Import - Partial Import
NOTE:
Use Full Import or Partial Import:
• For importing configuration data from another NX-system.
• For importing configuration data that was prepared offline
(with the Offline Configuration Tool).
• When cloning the system, e.g. by usage of a country-wide
Starter configuration file.
9.1.1 Full Import and Activation of an NX Configuration File
NOTE:
A full import of an In-Room NX Workstation Configuration File into a Central Monitoring
System Configuration File is not possible.
Use Partial Import (see section 9.1.2) to import configuration settings from an In-Room
NX Workstation to a CMS.
(1) Start up the configuration tool: Start Æ AGFA Æ NX Æ Start NX Configurator

(2) Select the option ‘Load a configuration from an external file’.


(3) Browse to the location where the NX Configuration file resides

and confirm the selection.
(4) Verify the configuration to see that there are no errors.
(5) Activate the configuration. The imported configuration is now reflected into the
database.
(6) Confirm the message: "This will stop and restart NX. Any ongoing operations
will be aborted".
9.1.2 Partial Import an NX Configuration File into an active Configuration

(2) Select the option ‘Load active configuration’.
(3) Go to menu 'File' and select 'Partial load from file'.
(4) Click <OK> to the warning message.
(5) Browse to the location where the NX Configuration file resides and confirm
the selection.
(6) Check the configuration items that are to be imported. When moving the mouse
over the items, more details are displayed on what is imported.
Click <Import>.
Figure 46


NOTE:
When importing configuration settings from an In-Room NX Workstation to a
CMS, some configuration settings will not be transferred:
• From Image Presentation Settings:

o Enable burn
o Show square marker
o Collimation border density
• From UI Configuration – Worklist Environment Settings:
o Worklist configuration
o Closed List configuration
• From Security Configuration:
o Configured SSL settings
• Exam tree configuration: No exam tree on CMS
(7) After the import has ended, click <OK>.

(8) Verify the configuration to see that there are no errors.
(9) Activate the configuration. The imported configuration is now reflected into the
database.
(10) Confirm the message: "This will stop and restart NX. Any ongoing operations
will be aborted".
9.2 Import NX Exam Tree
NOTE:
Use Import Exam Tree:
• For importing exam tree configuration settings from another NX-system
• For importing standard exam tree configuration settings
It is not recommended to import exam tree configuration data that was exported and
edited offline with the Offline Configuration Tool, because the edited examinations will
be added to the exam tree and not overwrite the original examinations.
Use Partial Import for this.
NOTE:
The system diagnosis exam group is the only exam group to be loaded by default.



(3) Select Exam/Add Exams from the menu.
(4) Browse to the location where the exam tree export file resides
and confirm the selection.
(5) The system presents a list of exam groups that are available in the exam tree
export file.
(6) Select the exam groups to import.
Result After importing, the selected exam groups are available in the workspace and can be
used after activating the configuration.
9.3 Import CPF-File or QS-XML-File Exam Tree
NX is delivered with a tool that can convert exam trees in Customer Parameter File
(CPF)-file format or in QS-XML-file format to a format that can be imported in the NX
configuration tool.
The tool should only be used in two situations:
• The first time installing an NX site with no previous AGFA CR. The basic exam
tree (the CPF or XML file currently used for all installs) can be converted into
the NX (XML) format. For all subsequent new installs the NX .XML file can be
re-used.
• When converting a site from QS/VIPS to NX the exams and processing that
was configured on that site can be re-used, without having to type in everything
manually.
This tool has only one goal: To avoid that all exam names and the associated Image
Processing parameters need to be typed in manually. It doesn’t convert Device
configuration data, print layouts, etc.
NOTE:
• If there is no exam tree available, a factory default exam tree file is available on the
NX Workstation that can be further customized.
• Converting an exam tree from CR QS for Mammography to be used on NX for
Mammography is not supported.
See the CR Mammography Solution Manual for the configuration procedure of NX
for Mammography.
• The tool accepts only CPF files created by CCM Tool version 1.1.07. If it was
created on an older version, re-open it in CCM 1.1.07 (available on NX: Start Æ
Agfa Æ Service Æ CCM Tools Æ CCM), save it again and use this CPF file.


9.3.1 General Configuration Conversion Rules
Be aware that:
• Only diagnostic exposures are mapped into the new NX exam tree structure.
• Service or system diagnostic exposures are NOT mapped. NX will be shipped
with default service and diagnostic exposure types, which are automatically
added at the creation of a new exam tree.
• Printers, archives, digitizers and other devices are NOT imported from the old
configuration. Print sheets templates and layouts are also discarded.
• RIS mappings are NOT imported. NX has standard RIS mappings on board for
the different types of RIS systems.
• All other configuration data is set to the default values.
9.3.2 Useful Information concerning the Structure of the NX Exam Tree
The NX exam tree is structured in:

• Exam group (e.g. Upper extremities, Abdomen, Shoulder, etc.)
NOTE:
Maximum 21 exam groups can be used
o Exposures (e.g. Elbow AP, Knee LAT, etc.)

NOTE:
Maximum 30 exposures per Exam group can be used
Be aware of following useful hints concerning the conversion of CR QS/VIPS

exam trees to NX exam trees:
• Age groups are available but they are fixed, and can only be used with a
PEDIATRICS license, no new age groups can be used to create a
radiologist level.
• VIPS and QS did have more levels in the exam tree, depending on the situation
at the site. E.g. depending on the previously installed system (RIS or no RIS, PACS
or no PACS). These levels were used in different ways to achieve certain
functionality. There are also different approaches in different countries. This is due
to the range of possibilities available.
• When starting converting the configuration file, try to forget the old structure and why
it was there in that way. Just aim to achieve an EXAM TREE with the simple
EXAM GROUP Æ EXPOSURE structure.


• On earlier installed sites it has been observed that in some cases converting a file
results in an enormous number of EXAM GROUPS.
This occurs in situations where the RIS Study Description was mapped directly to
QS/PRID Study type for automatic selection in ID Software. Converting this kind of
file results in many EXAM GROUPS containing just a few exposures.
The exposures under these multiple Exam Groups need to be reorganized into new
broader Exam Groups (e.g. Upper extremities, Abdomen, Shoulder,… max 21 can
be used).
This needs to be done after the import of the converted file into the NX Configuration
tool.
• In some cases the conversion results in a large amount of exposures.
This occurs when Left and Right exposures are included in the tree. This is also
done to achieve automatic selection based on the direct mapping of RIS Series
description to QS/PRID sub-study type.
These Left /Right exposures need to be removed: E.g. change ‘Elbow AP left’ and
‘Elbow AP right’ to ’Elbow AP’.
The functionality that was achieved in both of the above cases can now be achieved
in a different way.
Basically it is only required to create a new exposure type if it involves a different

exposure technique, different view position or different image processing. Keep the
exam tree as short as possible!
NOTE:
• NX also provides the possibility to create Exposure groups. These should not be
considered when converting the exam tree. Refer to section 9.4 for more information
on Exposure groups.
• Configuring Full Leg Full Spine still requires additional configuration work:
Copy exposure and indicate Full Leg Full Spine.
9.3.3 Converting Step by Step
(1) Take the basic XML or CPF file (the one that is used for CR QS installs).
(2) Start the exam tree conversion tool (Start Æ AGFA Æ NX Æ ServiceÆ Install
Tools Æ ExamTree Conversion Tool).
(3) Indicate CPF or XML.
(4) Click <Open File>.
(5) Select the XML or CPF to be converted.


(6) A dialog box will display if DICOM body parts are not according to DICOM
standard (e.g. translated or spelling error) and if the correct Body parts need to
be selected.
(7) A dialog box will display the Study group types deduced from the file. Indicate
which ones to convert into which NX Age groups.
NOTE:
Following special cases may occur:
• Service Study type group: This does not need to be converted
(these exams are fixed in NX).
• Official Pediatric Age Groups: Map them to the corresponding NX
pediatric groups (only if a Pediatrics license has been purchased).
• If the Pediatric exams are done on a dedicated workstation: Split the
tree into two trees. One for Genrad NX and one for the pediatric-
dedicated NX.
• If the Pediatric exams are needed on all NX workstations: Map both
study groups to the 17+ Age Group (Adult). The Study Group name will
be linked to the Study Type name to form the new Exam Group name.
Organize it into 2x8 Exam Groups.
• If the Pediatric license is activated on NX but the user wants to use his
home-made Pediatric Group, map the Study Group into NX Pediatric
Age Group.
• Sometimes the Study Groups are set up per room (e.g. room 1, room
2, IVP room, etc.). This was done either to provide a different tree to
different rooms on a QS cluster (e.g. an IVP room and Small bone room
on same cluster) or to be able to print to different printers from different
rooms (e.g. room 1 always prints on printer 1, room 2 always prints on
printer 2).
Also sometimes Pediatrics were included in QS exam tree, but only used
in one room or area.
As NX is a stand-alone system each NX room can have its own exam

tree and printer, if needed. So these multiple trees may no longer be
needed on each system. For each QS Study Group consider if it is still
needed.
Depending on the situation the conversion has to be done for each room
separately.
(8) Confirm to create the .XML file by choosing <Convert to file>.

Select a destination to store the converted exam tree file.


9.3.4 Importing the converted Exam Tree into NX Configuration Tool
(1) Start the configuration tool: Start Æ AGFA Æ NX Æ Start NX Configurator

(3) Select Exam/Add Exams from the menu.
(4) Browse to the location where the converted exam tree file resides and confirm
the selection.
(5) The system presents a list of exam groups that are available in
the exam tree export file.
(6) Select the exam groups to import.
NOTE:
All exposures need to have “Show exposure in UI” checked in the tree to be able to see
the exposures in the GUI.
Result After importing, the selected exam groups are available in the workspace and can be
used after activating the configuration.
If needed start reorganizing it into the EXAM GROUP/EXPOSURE structure, and
remove the Left/Right indications if present. e.g. change ‘Elbow AP left’ and ‘Elbow
AP right’ to ’Elbow AP’.
9.4 Creating Exposure Groups
Be aware that NX also provides the possibility to create Exposure groups. They have
three purposes only:
• To map protocol codes coming from the RIS to exposures from the exam tree,
so they will be automatically displayed in the image overview pane when
starting an exam.
• In exceptional cases to create a layout that combines two or more exposures
from separate cassettes onto one film lay-out.
E.g. to put the Chest AP and LAT onto one 14” x 17” layout.
• To create a group of exposure used during emergency exam (with license).
NOTE:
It is not recommended using exposure groups to create a multitude of complex
automatically selected layouts as this will make the configuration more complex.
Multi-image layouts should be composed on the fly during the Quality Control phase of
the examination in the editing environment of the NX software.
Typically Exposure Groups should NOT be displayed in the Add Image pane of NX!


10 Secure Communication (SSL)
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
Switching on SSL for communication to archives and printers has an important impact
on the performance. It will take longer until the printout and/or softcopy image is
available at the destination.

1. Explanation of SSL 10.1
2. Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Personal’ Store 10.2
Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Trusted Root 10.3

3
Certification Authorities’ Store
4. Enabling the Secure Communication in NX Configuration Tool 10.4
Granting the current User Access to the private Key of the 10.5
5.
personal Certificate


10.1 Explanation of SSL
Secure Dicom means that Dicom connections will be setup over

SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). NX fully supports this.
Setting up the system for secure Dicom is more than just using the configuration tool to
flag on the ‘secure dicom’ or ‘SSL’ flag.
NX uses the Windows XP certificate store to physically store all device certificates
(= its own certificate and the certificates of all devices with which it should be able to
communicate over SSL).
Windows XP stores the keys and certificates in so-called System Stores.
• The “Personal” store holds very sensitive cryptographic key information, which
is stored in a protected format to prevent unauthorized access. Typically, a key
stored in this type of entry is a secret key or a private key accompanied by the
certificate chain for the corresponding public key.
• The “Trusted Root Certification Authorities” certificate store holds public key
certificates belonging to other parties. It is called a "trusted certificate" because
the logged on user trusts that the public key in the certificate indeed belongs to
the identity identified by the "subject" (owner) of the certificate. The issuer of the
certificate vouches for this, by signing the certificate.
10.2 Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Personal’ Store
(1) Log on using the crservice account.

(2) Select Start AGFA Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install tools Æ Manage Certificates.
The following window will be shown:
Figure 47


(3) Right-click the folder Personal and select ‘All Tasks Æ Import…’.
(4) Click <Next> on the welcome window of the import wizard:
Figure 48
(5) Browse to the file containing the identity certificate and click <Next>:
NOTE:
• This is a personal certificate (also known as the identity certificate) that
holds both private and public keys. The certificate can be delivered by
the manufacturer (Agfa), by the hospital itself (= own certification
authority) or by a third-party (= external certification authority such as
Verisign).
• Identity credentials are stored in a p12 file, which is password
protected. Make sure the p12 file and the password is available.
Figure 49


(6) Check the checkbox ‘Mark the private key as exportable’ flag and enter the
password for the private key and click <Next>.
IMPORTANT:
Not checking the checkbox will cause the SSL communication from
NX to fail!
Figure 50
(7) Choose the Certificate store location ‘Personal’ and click <Next>:
Figure 51


(8) Click <Finish>:
Figure 52
Result The NX identity certificate has now been installed properly. Now so-called trusted
certificates of the different DICOM devices to communicate with over SSL can be
added. Refer to section 10.3.
10.3 Certificate Installation in the Windows XP ‘Trusted Root Certification

Authorities’ Store
(1) Select: Start Æ AGFA Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install tools Æ Manage Certificates.

The following window will be shown:
Figure 53


(2) Select the folder ‘Trusted root certification authorities’ and select
All tasks Æ Import and click <Next>:
Figure 54
(3) Browse to the file containing the identity certificate and click <Next>:
Figure 55


(4) Choose the Certificate store location ‘Trusted Root Certification Authorities’ and
click <Next>:
Figure 56
(5) Click <Finish>:
Figure 57
(6) Repeat steps (2) – (4) until all trusted certificates are imported.


10.4 Enabling the Secure Communication in NX Configuration Tool
(1) Start the Configuration Tool.

(2) Go to: Security and License Management Æ Configure SSL Settings
(3) Enter the Certificate Common Name.
This “Common Name” has to match exactly (mind capitalization!) with the
common name specified in the certificate.
(4) Go to: Device Configuration
(5) Check the ‘Enable SSL’ flag for all DICOM devices that need to communicate via
SSL.
(6) Install the public part of the NX certificate that has been used on each DICOM
device that needs to communicate over SSL. (Refer to the respective device
documentation).
(7) Try out the secure communication using the ‘Test Communication’ button
available in the device configuration pane.
If it fails, check in the certificate management that indeed the proper certificates
are available and also check whether the NX public certificate has been installed
on each device that needs to communicate over SSL).
(8) Activate the configuration.
10.5 Granting the current User Access to the private Key of the personal
Certificate
(1) Go to Start Æ Run and type cmd. This opens a DOS prompt.
(2) Type following into the DOS prompt but do not press <Return> yet:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\winhttpcertcfg.exe -g -c
LOCAL_MACHINE\My -s <Certificate common name> -a
<User account>
(3) Replace <Certificate common name> with the common name of the
identity certificate (the one installed under the Personal folder in the certificate
management tool (It’s the name of the certificate, not the file name!). In case
there are spaces in the certificate common name, put it between double quotes:
e.g. “my certificate”.
(4) Replace <User account> with the local computer account or the domain
account (if the system is configured to be able to access a network location for a
non-DICOM RIS connection for example).
If the account name is not known refer to section 10.5.1.
(5) Press <Return>.
Result The following message is displayed:

Granting private key access for account: <PCName>\NXWorkstationUser


10.5.1 Finding out the currently used User Account Name (if not known)
(1) Go to: Start Æ Control Panel Æ Administrative tools Æ Services

(2) Right-click the service NXWorkstation and choose Properties.
Result In the tab Log on in the field “This account“the name of the account that is currently
used is displayed.
11 Settings for Antivirus Software
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 10 minutes (without installation of the software)

1. McAfee 8.0 11.1
2. Norton Antivirus 10.0 11.2
11.1 McAfee 8.0
After the antivirus software has been installed, most of the settings can be left on
default. Some of them need to be adjusted:


(1) Leave these settings default:
Figure 58: General Settings, tab general settings
Figure 59: General Settings, tab Blocking


Figure 60: General Settings, tab Messages
Figure 61: General Settings, tab Reports


Figure 62: All processes, tab Processes
(6) Check the box “When writing to the disk”, uncheck “When reading from disk”.
Select “All files”:
Figure 63: All processes, tab Detection
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to uncheck “When reading from disk”. If it is checked, the NX software
ran very slow.


(7) To select disks, files or folders that don’t need to be scanned, click the button
<Exclusions…>:
Figure 64: All processes, tab Detection
(8) Click the <Add…> button and select the folder where NX stores the image data:
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Datafiles
NOTE:
Exclude the directory “DataFiles” from scanning (the place where NX
Images are stored) for following reasons:
• The performance of the software will be higher.
• The possibility of “false positives”. A “false positive” can be an image file
that contains a bit sequence that looks like a virus. The virus scanner
identifies this file as a virus.
On a CMS no images are stored, so this location is not available.
(9) Click <Apply>.


(10) Leave these settings default.

Remark: It is possible that the section Compressed files is unavailable.
Figure 65: All processes, tab Advanced
Figure 66: All processes, tab Actions


(12) Leave these settings default and click <OK>.
Figure 67: All processes, tab Unwanted Programs
(13) Open the VirusScan Console.
Figure 68
(14) Right-click on Access Protection and choose Properties.

(15) Select the tab File, Share, and Folder Protection.
(16) Disable the security rule Prevent remote creation of autorun.inf files.
(17) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
Reason: This rule prevents NX to perform successful DICOM export on CD.


(18) Right-click on AutoUpdate and choose Properties:
Figure 69
(19) Click the button <Schedule…>:
Figure 70
(20) On the tab Schedule, set the schedule task on weekly: Start time 6:00 AM local
time. The day of auto-update is Thursday.
Figure 71
NOTE:
Reason: Most virus updates are released on Wednesday night.


11.2 Norton Antivirus 10.0
11.2.1 Special Feature of Norton Antivirus
The Norton Antivirus Corporate 10.0 provides the opportunity to use it as a “managed
solution” (it also can be used as a “normal” virus scanner). “Managed solution” means
that installations, updates, settings and scheduled scans can be done from a central
server. The server can have other clients and servers in his group and coordinate the
different security levels and settings across domains and groups.
11.2.2 Norton Antivirus Corporate 10.0 Settings: Server
After the antivirus software has been installed, most of the settings can be left on
default. Some of them need to be adjusted:
(1) Open Norton Antivirus by right clicking the Norton icon in the tray:
Figure 72
(2) Enter the password: Symantec:
Figure 73


(3) Adjust the virus definition update schedule. Check “Enable scheduled automatic
updates”. Click <Schedule…>.
Figure 74
(4) Set the frequency on weekly, every Thursday at 6 AM.
Figure 75
NOTE:
The reason is that most virus updates are released on Wednesday night.


(5) Go to Scan Æ Scan a Floppy Disk and mark them in the right pane:
Figure 76
(6) Go to Configure Æ File System Auto-Protection. Make sure the radio button is
on “All types” and check the box “Exclude selected files and folders”.
Click the button <Exclusions>.
Figure 77


(7) Click <Files/Folders>.
Figure 78
(8) Mark the folder DataFiles folder on the D: drive.
Figure 79
NOTE:
Exclude the directory “DataFiles” from scanning (the place where NX Images are
stored) for following reasons:
• The performance of the software will be higher.
• The possibility of “false positives”. A “false positive” can be an image file that
contains a bit sequence that looks like a virus. The virus scanner identifies this
file as a virus.
On a CMS no images are stored, so this location is not available.
11.2.3 Norton Antivirus Corporate 7.6 Settings: Client
On the client there are no settings to be changed. The changes are done on the central
server and have influence on the client.


12 Monitor Software Installation and Calibration
INSTRUCTION:
The information for monitor software installation and monitor calibration are described in
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS108.10E
13 How to configure P-Values for Monitor, Print or Archive
REQUIRED TIME:
When are P-values needed?

If a consistent presentation of images on workstation, hardcopy and/or softcopy in
different light conditions should be accomplished.
Where must P-values be activated?

• For Monitor:
Activate p-values output.
NOTE:
Monitor P-value output is mandatory on BARCO monitors and not
supported on Standard Monitors.
• For printers (hardcopy):
Activate p-values output AND configure the environment conditions.
• For archive:
Activate p-values output
For details on P-values, see also NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
Product Description DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).

1 Barco Monitors 13.1
2. Printer (Hardcopy) 13.2
3. Archive 13.3


13.1 Barco Monitors
(1) Go to the NX Configuration Tool.

(2) Go to “Device Configuration”.
(3) Select Monitor.
(4) In Type select 8 bit PVAL.
NOTE:
From NX 2.0.6805 on, P-Values is the default setting for the monitor.
13.2 Printer (Hardcopy)
NOTE:
The image presentation on workstation and on hardcopy will be consistent and
optimized, which should not be interpreted as 'identical' presentation.
As this optimization is unique for each light box it can only be done if a printer is
dedicated to a specific light box.
13.2.1 Determination of View Box Illuminance and ambient Luminance
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes (waiting time not included)
(1) Switch on the Light box and wait about 15 minutes.

(2) Measure the luminance in the center of this area and in each corner 10 cm from
the edges.
(3) Calculate the average of the measured values.
(4) Enter this value as maximum luminance (cd/m²) in the NX. See next section.
(5) Switch off the viewing box.
(6) Measure the reflected ambient light in the center of the light box with a distance
of about 60 cm (normal reporting distance).
(7) Enter this value as ambient light (cd/m²). See next section.
(8) Ensure the printer has been properly calibrated.
(9) Validate the image quality with the radiologist.


NOTE:
If the illuminance of the light box is changeable, adjust the illuminance between 2000
and 4000 cd/m² (consult the radiologist for that). Mark the position of the turn switch
e.g. with a permanent marker or a label, so that the radiologist can change the
luminance of the light box and easily find back to the defined status.
13.2.2 Configuring P-value Output on NX and Setup Environment Conditions for

Hardcopy Viewing
NOTE:
• The use of P-values will only provide optimal results when using a light box with
luminance within a range of 800 to 4000 cd/m².
• The implementation of P-values on the NX workstation is limited to 4000 as
described in DICOM part 14, although in Mammography higher output light boxes
are used up to 6000 cd/m2.
• For a light box with luminance between 4000 – 6000 cd/m2, set the View box setting
in NX to the maximum (4000 cd/m²). This range is specific for reporting
Mammograms because of the higher density.
• It is important to note that the effect of consistent perception will only be achieved if
the image is viewed under the same circumstances as entered during the system
configuration, based on the measured values for light box luminance and ambient
light.
• P-values should not be used to tune the image quality to individual user taste.
(1) Start the NX Configuration Tool.

(2) Go to: Device Configuration.
(3) Select a printer from the tree view.
(4) Select Image sheet settings.
(5) In View Box settings fill in the measured value (cd/m²) for the view box
illumination.
(6) Fill in the measured value (cd/m²) for the reflected ambient light.
(7) Go to <Advanced settings>.
(8) Choose 12 bit P-value pixel format.
(9) Repeat this for all printers.


13.2.3 Required Tool: Luminance Meter
NOTE:
This Luminance Meter is also part of the CR Mammography Toolbox!
Model LxPlus from company Wellhöfer / Germany

Article-No. * 10+7 9820 0415 0
Vendor AGFA
Details • Spot luminance meter
• Used to measure the luminance and illuminance of a viewing box
and displays.
• The device has to be calibrated regularly (2 years).
• Accuracy: 10 % Range : 0.05 - 10.000 cd/m2
• Measurement angle: 1° max 5°
• Light sensitivity: CIE spectral response
Remark Other local products compliant can also be used.
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
13.2.3.1 Ordering of the Luminance Meter
The ordering of the Luminance Meter can be done through the local or regional AGFA
logistic departments. The procedure is identical for Agfa employees and external
partners.
Place an order at least 8 weeks before the luminance meter is needed.
The Luminance Meter has to be calibrated regularly every two years. These
measurement devices only can be calibrated via the AGFA logistic. The process is
defined as follows and should be started by the NSO 8 weeks before the calibration
period will run out:
(1) Place an order for a swap unit for the measurement device to be calibrated.
(2) Wait until calibrated swap device is delivered.
(3) An invoiced for the swap unit is delivered.
(4) Fill in the form to return parts. Enter the device description and serial number.


(5) Return the device to be calibrated together with the "Return form" within 4 weeks
otherwise the credit note will be lost.
(6) A credit note for the device to be calibrated is granted.
(7) The costs for the calibration are covered by the difference of the invoice and the
credit note.
Product Order Number *

LxPlus Luminance Meter from company Wellhöfer / 10+7 9820 0415 0
Germany
Swap Unit for the Luminance meter 10+7 9820 0411 0
(Wellhoefer Luminance meter LX Plus)
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
Address to return devices to be calibrated:
Matrium GmbH
Retourenlager Agfa
Landshuter Straße 26
D-85716 Unterschleissheim
Germany
Ensure safe packaging when returning measurement devices.


13.3 Archive
(1) Open the NX Configuration Tool.

(2) Go to “Device Configuration”.
(3) Select an Archive.
(4) Select in Device Settings the Output type (depending on the receiving station).
• 15-bit PVAL VOI LUT (preferred setting)
• 12-bit PVAL
• 8-bit PVAL
(5) Repeat this for all Archive devices.
14 Managing Protocol Codes
REQUIRED TIME:
This section provides general information for mapping RIS Protocol Code attributes
and converting Protocol Codes using the Excel Sheet.
For detailed instruction on these steps refer to: NX Configuration Tool online help Æ
Managing Protocol Codes
Protocol codes are imported from the RIS, and can be linked to exposure groups,
exposures and exams that are displayed in the user interface. This way, an incoming
protocol code can be “resolved”, and the operator receives immediate feedback on the
examination he needs to perform.
Configuration of Protocol codes involves:

(1) Mapping the RIS attribute containing the protocol code to the right NX
database field.
(2) Creating a list of known protocol codes.
(3) Linking the protocol codes to the exam tree.


14.1 General Information for Mapping RIS Protocol Code Attributes
The standard way to do this according to DICOM is to make use of:

Scheduled Protocol Code Sequence (0040,0008)
It is important to note that this is a ‘Sequence’. A sequence contains one or more
‘items’ each item contains a number of attributes, such as Protocol code value,
Protocol code meaning, etc., organized in a particular structure.
There are 3 ways of mapping protocol codes into NX, described in the next 3 sections.
14.1.1 Following DICOM (this is the default Mapping)
RIS Dicom RIS Label Value NX Dicom Tag NX Label

Tag
0040,0008 Scheduled (…) 0040,0008 Scheduled
Protocol Code Protocol
Sequence Code
Sequence
14.1.2 Using an other Sequence

Tag
0032,1064 Requested (…) 0040,0008 Scheduled
Procedure Protocol
Code Code
Sequence Sequence
NOTE:
This can be done because these two sequences have an identical structure. Trying to
map any other sequences would not work.
A limitation of this sequence is that it can only contain one ‘item’, the (0040,0008) can
contain one or more ‘items’!


14.1.3 Using a ‘string Field’
Many RIS systems will provide the value we want to use as a protocol code in another
DICOM attribute. E.g. Requested Procedure Description (0032,1060)
Because in this case an individual ‘string’ attribute will be mapped it cannot be mapped
directly into the sequence (this will not match the structure).
To match the structure, map it to a specific attribute of the sequence namely:
Protocol value (0040,0008)

Tag
0032,1060 Requested (…) 0040,0008 Protocol
Procedure value
Description
NOTE:
• When looking through the list of NX attributes, this attribute is referred to by the
same number (0040,0008). Only the name is different.
This is because it is part of a sequence. These parts do not have unique identifiers
outside the sequence.
• The function “Add Unmapped Field” can also be used when one RIS attribute should
be mapped to two different NX attributes. Do this by adding the attribute to the
‘Unmapped Fields’ list manually (use the correct number but give it a different
name), then map it to an available field. E.g.: UDField1 (= User defined field)
14.1.3.1 Protocol Codes longer than 16 Characters
If "User non-DICOM protocol codes" in the main RIS configuration screen are enabled,
protocol codes longer than 16 characters are accepted.
If this option is disabled, the Protocol code value can contain a maximum of 16
characters. If by accident a string longer than 16 characters is received from the RIS,
then NX will not show any thumbnails for the scheduled exam containing the longer
string. A general parse error will be displayed. The cause of parse errors can be found
in the logging. The user will need to select exposures manually for this exam.
A protocol code longer than 16 characters is never sent to the archive (independent of
the setting of this flag).


14.1.4 Converting Protocol Codes using the Excel Sheet (ready for Import)
NOTE:
Microsoft Excel is not installed on the NX. A PC with Excel installed is required to use
the conversion Excel sheet.
The Excel sheet allows converting a list of protocol codes into the NX compliant
protocol code list format. The advantage of the excel sheet is that one can enter/import
data (code/meaning-pairs) in many formats and save in the right XML-format for
importing in the Configuration Tool.
The source values can be entered manually, copied pasted from an external source or
imported though the excel application.
Two Microsoft Excel files are stored on the NX system:
• Generate Protocolcodes.xls
• Generate Protocolcodes_Excel2000 Only.xls (to be used on MS Excel 2000)
The excel sheet can be used to convert ‘regular’ protocol codes and Japanese protocol
codes. Only the first case is described below.
(1) Go to: C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Bin\Service\ProtocolCodesTemplate
(2) Copy the xls file to a PC that has MS Excel installed (e.g. service PC).
(3) Open the tab ‘Regular Protocol Codes’ on the excel sheet.
(4) Enter a value for ‘protocol code’ and ‘protocol meaning’ by
• Entering the values row by row manually, or
• Copy & Pasting a whole range of protocol codes from an external source into
the excel sheet, or
• Importing the values through the excel import functionality.
(5) Press the <Generate Codes> button on the Excel sheet.
A File Save dialog box is displayed.
(6) Select the location and filename and choose XML format in order to save the
XML file.
(7) Press the <Save> button.
(8) The word ‘Generated’ is displayed after every row of protocol code value &
meaning pairs.
(9) Close the excel sheet without saving the changes.
NOTE:
• The excel-sheet is not available to the Key User.
• The XML file is signed, so that it cannot be tampered with afterwards.


15 Removing Restore Points
REQUIRED TIME:
In order to reduce the size of the C: partition it might be necessary to remove all
Windows restore points except for the latest one.
(1) Double click on My Computer.

(2) Right-click on HD Drive C:
(3) Select <Properties>.
(4) Click <Disk Cleanup> and wait until the system has done some calculations:
Figure 80
(5) Select the tab More Options in the window Disk Cleanup for System (C:).


(6) In the section System Restore click the button <Clean up…>:
Figure 81
(7) Click <Yes> on following window:
Figure 82
(8) Exit the window Disk Cleanup for System (C:) by clicking <OK>.
(9) Click <Yes> on following window:
Figure 83


16 Access to Network Drive for non-DICOM RIS
To support a non-DICOM RIS, a network drive can be used to store the RIS data file.
The NX requires access permissions to this network drive.
Following solutions are possible:

1. Share an NX drive 16.1
2. Access to Network Drive (Domain) 16.2
3. Access to Network Drive (Workgroup) 16.3
16.1 Share an NX Drive
(1) Reserve space on a NX drive.

(2) Let the RIS write the data file onto the reserved space on the NX system.
NOTE:
The only drawback of this solution is that this requires that the RIS should be
capable of handling situations where the NX system is not running when it wants to
write the file (e.g. the NX PC is switched off).
16.2 Access to Network Drive (Domain)
Prerequisite The NX itself must be part of the domain (otherwise it cannot use a domain account).
(1) For instructions how to configure the NX workstation service to use the domain
account refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E section Configuring Network
(2) Make sure the NX has the appropriate access to the location on the domain.


16.2.1 On the Domain
(1) Ask the hospital administrator to create a domain account that has at least
READ access to the network folder in which the RIS files are stored, if this has
not been done during installation planning phase.
(2) Check the to topics in the IMPORTANT below:
IMPORTANT:
• To support the ‘accession number’ option or the ‘remove data file’ option in the
NX Configuration tool requires READ and WRITE access permissions.
• It is important that the password of this account does NOT expire. Password
rules are defined by the domain configuration, not by the NX Workstation
configuration.
16.2.2 On the NX
(1) Log in using the crservice account.

(2) Add the domain account to the local administrator group.
(3) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Administrative tools Æ Services.
(4) Select “NX Workstation service” in the list of services.
(5) Right click and select 'Properties'.
(6) In the properties dialog, select the ‘Log on’ tab.
(7) Select ‘This account’.
(8) Enter the name and password of the domain account and click <OK>.
(9) Confirm the dialog displaying when the change will take effect by clicking <OK>.
(10) Log out and log in with the domain account (in order to configure and test the
RIS in the configuration tool).
(11) Start the NX Configuration tool.
(12) Load active configuration.
(13) From the Configuration tool menu, select ‘Security Æ Service log in’.
(14) Use the account name configtoolservice and the “magic password” as
communicated during training.
(15) Go to Security Æ User Management Æ Manage users.
(16) Add the domain account and define it as a serviceEngineer (this is just needed
for testing in configuration tool, later this will be undone).


(17) In the RIS configuration, set up the data file by using the UNC name of
the network drive or network location, e.g.:
\\mynetworkdrive\RISfiles or
\\hostname\sharename or
\\ipaddress\sharename).
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use any mapped drives!
Mapped drives do not work for the NX background service.
(18) Click the button <Query RIS> to try the connection in

the NX configuration tool.
If this succeeds, activate the configuration.
Remark: At this moment the NX background service will be restarted using
the account specified.
(19) Remove the serviceEngineer role for the account. See step (16).
Result From then on, in the QCIDViewer the RIS can be queried even if logged in with
another account.
16.3 Access to Network Drive (Workgroup)
In case there is no domain server used, there is also a way to set it up in a workgroup
environment.
NOTE:
The NX and the remote system must be part of the same workgroup. For configuration
of NX in a workgroup, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E section Configuring Network
16.3.1 On the Workgroup Remote System
(1) Go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ User Accounts

(2) Make sure the account ‘TestAccount’ has already been created. If not, create it.
(3) Create a share and an account on the PC hosting the RIS data file if these do
not exist already.
(4) Right-click the folder to share and select ‘Properties’.
Go to tab ‘Sharing’.


(5) Enter a share name.
Figure 84
NOTE:
When using as string: \\hostname\SYSTEM (C)\SHARE,
the C-drive has to be shared, too!
(6) Click <Permissions>.
(7) In case the group or user name ‘Everyone’ appears, remove it.
Click <Add…> and select the ‘TestAccount’.
Figure 85
(8) Make sure the checkboxes ‘Allow Full Control’, ’Change’ and ‘Read’
are checked.
(9) Click <OK>.


16.3.2 On the NX

(2) Create the local account ‘TestAccount’ (with same password as on the remote
system) and add it to the administrators group.
It is important that the password of this account does NOT expire.
(3) Go to: StartÆ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Administrative tools Æ Services
(4) Select “NX Workstation service” in the list of services.
(5) Right click and select 'Properties'.
(6) In the properties dialog, select the ‘Log on’ tab.
(7) Select radio button ‘This account’ and browse to ‘TestAccount’.
Enter the password of the account and click <OK>:
Figure 86
(8) Confirm the dialog displaying when the change will take effect
by clicking <OK>.
(9) Logout and log in with TestAccount (in order to configure and test the RIS in
the configuration tool).
(11) Load active configuration.
(12) From the Configuration tool menu, select Security Æ Service log in’.
(13) Use the account name configtoolservice and the “magic password” as
communicated during training.
(14) Go to: Security Æ User Management Æ Manage users


(15) Add User 'TestAccount' (‘Manage Users’) and define it as a serviceEngineer.

This is just needed for testing in configuration tool, later this can be made
undone again.
(16) In the RIS configuration, select the datafile by using the UNC name of
the network drive or network location (e.g. \\mynetworkdrive\RISfiles or
\\hostname\sharename or \\ipaddress\sharename).
Do NOT use any mapped drives. Mapped drives do not work for the NX
background service.
(17) Click the <Query RIS> button to try the test connection option in
the NX configuration tool.
If this succeeds, activate the configuration. At this moment the NX background
service will be restarted using TestAccount.
(18) Remove the serviceEngineer role for TestAccount. See step (15).
Result From then on, in the QCIDViewer the RIS can be queried even if logged in with
another account than TestAccount.


17 Installing new Device Models
REQUIRED TIME:
Device models are required in order to be able to work with a specific device. When
compared with a device driver, the difference lies in the fact that a device model only
contains metadata about the device and does not contain ‘code’.
The lifeline of the device models is decoupled from the NX Software: New device
models can be supplied after the release of NX, adding support for new digitizer types,
printer types and archives.
New device models can be installed using the NX Configuration Tool. Depending on
the type of device, models are either created and distributed by the development team
or by the IME group.
Distributed by the IME team: See section:

1. Printer Model Files 17.1
Distributed by the development team:
2. Installing a new Archive Type 17.2
3. Installing a new ID Tablet Type 17.3
4. Installing a new Digitizer Type 17.4
5. Installing a new Monitor Type 17.5
NOTE:
Additionally there are X-Ray device generator types available. For Installation
Instructions refer to the respective Solution Manual.


17.1 Printer Model Files
17.1.1 Installing Printer Model Files
(1) Download DICOM Printermodel-Files from MedNet GSO Library:

Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstations Æ NX <version> Æ Freeware
(2) Download the related Service Bulletin from MedNet GSO Library, announcing
the release of the Printermodel-Files. The installation instructions are given
there.
17.1.2 Released Printer Model Files
The released DICOM printer model files are listed in a Service Bulletin announcing the
latest printer model files on MedNet GSO Library.
NOTE:
Latest Connectivity Release Documents for the respective Printers can be found in
MedNet, Healthcare Library (set “views” to document type) under path:
Connectivity Release Document Æ General Info Æ Connectivity & Application
For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa partner.
17.2 Installing a new Archive Type
NOTE:
The installation of a new archive type is only possible in the context of adding a new
Archive device.
(1) Put the file containing the NX model of the archive type on the system
(e.g. ‘My Documents’ folder).
(2) Start up the NX Configuration Tool.
(3) Press the <Add archive> button.
(4) In the ‘Add archive’ dialogue, press the <Upload model> button.
(5) Browse to the location of the file containing the archive model.
(6) The system will install the new archive type.


17.3 Installing a new ID Tablet Type
(1) Put the file containing the NX model of the ID Tablet on the system
(3) Press the <Add ID Tablet> button.
(4) In the ‘Add ID Tablet’ dialogue, press the <Upload model> button.
(5) Browse to the location of the file containing the new model.
(6) The system will install the new ID Tablet type.
17.4 Installing a new Digitizer Type
(1) Put the file containing the NX model of the digitizer type somewhere on
the system (e.g. ‘my documents’ folder).
(3) Press the <Add digitizer> button.
(4) In the ‘Add digitizer‘ dialogue, press the <Upload model> button.
(5) Browse to the location of the file containing the digitizer model.
(6) The system will install the new digitizer type.
17.5 Installing a new Monitor Type
(1) Put the file containing the NX model of the monitor type (available from Mednet
GSO Library or from NX Starterkit DVD 2 in the folder DRIVERS) on the system
(3) Go to: Device Configuration Æ Monitor
(4) Click <Modify>.
(5) Click <Upload>.
(6) Browse to the location of the file containing the digitizer model and click <Open>.
(7) When status “Ready” appears, click <Ok>.
(8) The monitor type is now available in the dropdown list.
(9) Click <OK>.
(10) The system will install the monitor type.


18 How to use a Network Drive for exporting Images
REQUIRED TIME:
• Depends on the number of exported images:
The time required per image is approximately 30 seconds.
• The required time also depends on the network performance.
The Upgrade Export and Import tool requires that the NX background process is
running. In normal usage, the background process runs as a Windows Service
(NXWorkStation). However, this imposes two issues:
• A Windows Service can’t handle network drives properly.
• The NXWorkStation Service runs under the credentials of the ‘hidden’ user
NXWorkStationUser. This is a local user that probably has no privilege to read
and write on the network drive.
To overcome these problems, use the following additional procedure before starting the
Upgrade Export or Import Tool:
(1) Contact the customer’s system administrator to give write permissions on

the network drive for the crservice account.
(3) Stop the NXWorkStation service from within the Windows Services
control panel:
Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Administrative Tools Æ Services.
Right-click NXWorkStation and select Stop.
(4) Type Ctrl-Shift-Esc to open the Task Manager Processes Tab and wait
until the process with image name
“NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe” disappears
(at that point in time the background process has really finished running).
(5) Open a Command Tool window (Start Æ Run Æ Cmd).
(6) Go to the folder NX\Bin: cd C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin
(7) Start the NX background process:
NX.Application.NonVisual.ConsoleHost.exe
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\PlugIns\Hospital.xml
(this is one command line.)
Now the NX background process now runs as a normal process – instead of a
Windows Service – under the credentials of the logged in user.


(8) Wait until the NX background process has started up completely. In the
command tool window observe the message Everything has been started up.
IMPORTANT:
Don't close the Command Tool window yet!
(9) Use the Upgrade Export/Import Tool as described in the upgrade procedures.
NOTE:
After finishing using the Upgrade Export/Import Tool:
(1) Close the Upgrade Export/Import Tool.
(2) Close the Command Tool Window to stop the NX background process.
(3) In the Windows Services control panel, right-click "NXWorkStation" and select
"Start" to restart the NX Workstation service in its normal user mode.


19 Adding a NX Workstation to the cpf-File using the CCM Tool
NOTE:
As of NX 2008 this can be done automatically via the configuration tool Device
Configuration Æ Digitizers via the buttons <Modify CPF> and <Create CPF>.
Description of the fields in the general Workstation settings screen and how they match
with the CCM tool:
ID Field name in the NX Configuration tool Field name in the

Number CCM tool
1 Processing station name: Processing station

NX will write this onto the cassette. The dicom name.
digitizer uses this to resolve to which station it
needs to send (see cpf file). Fill in a dummy
value when a TWAIN digitizer is connected (as
this field is then not used).
2 Performed station AE title: Processing station AE

The NX dicom AE title. Used for dicom title
communications to archive and RIS (NX as
SCU).
Further also used in dicom digitizer scenario
(NX as SCP).
3 Port: Port Number

The dicom-SCP port NX is listening on for
dicom digitizer communication.
4 ID Station name: ID Station name

Only used for Fast ID with dicom digitizers.
(‘Fast ID’ means: Digitizer does ID instead of ID
tablet)
5 Fast preview AE title: Precheck AE title

The NX AE title for fast preview (SCP)
6 Fast ID AE title ID station AE title
7 Character set: Not applicable

Not used when communicating with digitizers.
(Used for communication with RIS and PACS
systems)
8 Not applicable Precheck name
NOTE: In the description below, the field names are addressed via the ID number.


ACTION:
Identify the present scenario:
• Installation of NX at a new site, from scratch:
Æ There is no existing cpf-file. The CCM tool will automatically create an empty
cpf-file (see the documentation of the CCM tool for more information).
• Adding a digitizer or NX workstation to an existing site:

Æ Start from the existing cpf-file that has been loaded on the digitizer(s).
• Mixed QS-NX environments:

Æ Start from the existing cpf-file that has been loaded on the digitizer(s), that
may be generated by QS.
19.1 Adding the NX Station to the cpf File Configuration
(1) Start the CCM tool: Start Æ AGFA Æ Service Æ CCM Tools)
(2) If the CCM is started for the first time, click Clear all tables to be able to select
Read CPF:
Figure 87
(3) Press the <Read CPF> button and select the cpf-file to add an extra
NX workstation to.
(4) Press the <Destination configuration> button.


(5) Press the <Network> button:
Figure 88
(6) Press the <ADD> button:
Figure 89


(7) Enter the hostname and IP address of the NX workstation to add and click on
<Back to overview>:
Figure 90
(8) Go back one menu level and select <Application>:
Figure 91


(9) The application info screen opens up. Press the <ADD> button:
Figure 92
(10) Enter following settings:

• Enter The AE title of the NX workstation: Performed station AE title (ID: 2)
• Select the IP address of the NX workstation.
• Select “ADC-QS” as application type.
• Select “DICOM” as protocol.
• Enter the port number on which NX is listening. This should match with the
Storage port in the workstation settings pane of the NX Configuration tool.
NOTE:
Make sure that the capitalization is identical to the way that it was added
in NX.
Figure 93


(11) Click on <Back to overview>.

(12) The application info screen appears again.
If fast preview has NOT been configured on NX, jump directly to step (14).
Always enter a fast preview AE title in NX Service and Configuration Tool
environment "General Settings", whether it is really used or not.
If fast preview has been configured on NX, click the <ADD> button:
Figure 94

• The Fast preview AE title (ID:4) configured in the NX configuration tool /
workstation settings pane.
• Select the IP address of the NX workstation.
• Select ‘Precheck1’ as application type.
• Fill in the Fast preview port number of NX (located next to the
fast preview AE title), which was configured in the
NX configuration tool / workstation settings pane.
Figure 95


(14) Click on <Exit>.

(15) Click the <Precheck> button in order to configure fast preview .
Clarification : Fast preview is called “precheck” in the CCM tool.
Figure 96
(16) Click the <ADD> button to add an NX pre-check station.

• The Fast Preview AE title (ID:4) that was just added in the previous step.
• As destination, enter the ID Station name (ID:3) that was configured in the NX
Configuration tool.
Figure 97



(20) In case the digitizer should not be configured for Fast ID, skip this step and
go directly to step (25).
Press the <Application> button to add a Fast ID AE title.
Figure 98
(21) Click the <ADD> button in the AE title overview.

• Enter the Fast ID AE title (ID:5) that was configured on NX in the Configuration
tool / workstation settings pane.
• Select the IP Address of the NX workstation
• Select ‘IDEN1’ as application type.
• Enter the Fast ID port number that was configured on NX in the Configuration
tool / workstation settings pane.
Figure 99



(25) Press the <ID-station> button and click the <ADD> button to add a new
identification station.
Figure 100

• Select the identification station AE title (Fast ID AE title (ID:5)).
• Enter the name ID Station name(ID:3) as configured in the workstation settings
pane in the NX Configuration tool.
• In case Fast Preview was also configured, select here the
Fast Preview AE title (ID:4) that has been created in earlier steps.
Figure 101


(28) Click <Exit>.

(29) Click the <Processing station> button and click the <ADD> button.
Figure 102

• Select the Performed Station AE title (ID:2) from the list.
• Enter the correct Processing station name (ID:1) in the ‘destination’ field
(make sure that the capitalization is IDENTICAL to the way that it was
entered it in the NX configuration tool / workstation settings pane).
• Skip the print processing section, as it is not applicable.
Figure 103

(32) Click <Exit>.


(33) Click <Main Menu>.

(34) Click the <Write CPF> button and save the cpf-file to the desired location:
Figure 104
20 Switching Dose Calculation from Lgm to Exposure Index (EI)
20.1 When is a Change from Lgm to EI required?
The correct dose calculation type depends on the digitizer type connected to the NX:
• As long as speed class * digitizers are used, it is not recommended to use EI.
In this case the dose calculation type Lgm is preferred.
• As soon as a speed class-free * digitizer is introduced on a site, using EI is
required for the connected NX.
• As soon as one NX of one site is converted to EI, it is recommended to switch all
other NXs on site to EI as well.
• If other NXs are connected to the NX using EI via a Central Monitoring System
(CMS), the other NX systems must be switched to EI as well.
* For detailed information about dose calculation type compatibility of digitizers refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E


20.2 EI Configuration on a new System
The dose calculation setting is made via the NX Activation Utility. Select the dose
calculation type during the activation of the NX.
For details refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
20.3 Switching from Lgm to EI on a running NX (or when upgrading from a NX)
IMPORTANT:
The dose calculation setting is made via the NX Activation Utility. In case of an upgrade
from an earlier NX version, using the Activation Utility will result in the loss of all
examination data and a reset of all configuration data to factory settings. Which
upgrades are affected and which data has to be exported and re-imported is described
in chapter 7 Upgrade Installation from NX DD+DIS115.10E.
Procedure Step Reference
(1) In case of an upgrade, follow the upgrade NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service

instructions given in chapter 7 Upgrade Manual chapter 7 Upgrade
Installation from NX DD+DIS115.10E until Installation from NX
section “Change Dose Type”. DD+DIS115.10E section
Exporting Data
(2) Run the activation utility and change the dose Refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
type from Lgm to EI. Service Manual chapter 4
DD+DIS105.10E
(3) In case of an upgrade, continue with the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service

upgrade instructions given in chapter 7 Manual chapter 7 Upgrade
Upgrade Installation from NX Installation from NX
DD+DIS115.10E after section DD+DIS115.10E
“Change Dose Type”. (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
(4) Adapt the NX configuration if needed Refer to the NX Configuration

(e.g. displayed Lgm fields must be changed Tool Online Help
into EI fields etc.). (press <F1> to open it).


20.4 Exposure Index Configuration during Clean Install
The dose calculation setting is made via the NX Activation Utility. For information on
how to use the Activation Utility to select the dose calculation type for a clean installed
system refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Clean Install
Procedure DD+DIS107.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


Imaging Services Installation and Configuration
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides a step-by-step guide for the installation of a staged

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 (GenRad, Mammography or Central Monitoring System).
It also describes the complete configuration steps for a GenRad application or CMS
(Central Monitoring System) workstation. Detailed configuration steps for a
Mammography application are described in the CR Mammography Solution Manual.
REQUIRED TIME:
Refer to sections 1 and 2.
IMPORTANT:
The time needed for configuration activities is considerably shorter if pre-
defined configuration files and default exam trees are imported on the system.
Only configuration steps that are not covered by these files need to be
performed on site.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS106.10E Chapter 3 - Installation Planning
DD+DIS105.10E Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration Appendices
DD+DIS109.10E Chapter 5 - Offline Configuration Tool Installation and Use
DD+DIS107.10E Chapter 5 - Clean Install Procedure
DD+DIS105.10E Chapter 9 - Troubleshooting
DD+DIS227.04E CR Mammography Solution Manual
DD+DIS012.06E Licensing - Service Manual

sw_04_install-config_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Installation and Configuration
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 FLOWCHART OF INSTALLATION PROCESS NX WORKSTATION (GENRAD OR

MAMMOGRAPHY) ...................................................................................................................6
2 FLOWCHART OF INSTALLATION PROCESS NX WORKSTATION (CMS)...........................7
3 EXTRACT EXISTING EXAM TREE CONFIGURATION ..........................................................8
3.1 From the PRID Station..............................................................................................................8
3.2 From CR QS .............................................................................................................................8
4 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................................10
4.1 Connections to Network, TWAIN Digitizer, ID Tablet, UPS....................................................10
4.1.1 Desktop PC Connectors .........................................................................................................11
4.1.2 HP Notebook Ports .................................................................................................................12
4.1.3 Connecting the Licensing Dongle ...........................................................................................14
4.2 Logging in to the NX Workstation ...........................................................................................16
4.3 Configuring Basic Operating System Settings........................................................................16
4.4 Configuring Network ...............................................................................................................19
4.4.1 Changing TCP/IP Settings of Local Area Connection (LAN)..................................................19
4.4.2 Configuring the wireless Network Connection for the wireless ICU Workflow .......................20
4.4.3 Changing the Hostname and/or Workgroup or Domain of the NX System ............................21
4.5 Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ..................................................................24
4.5.1 Connecting the UPS ...............................................................................................................24
4.5.2 Modifying the UPS Model .......................................................................................................24
4.6 Update ID Tablet Firmware.....................................................................................................26
5 CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES IN THE OPERATING SYSTEM ..........................................27

5.1 Editing Security Settings according to Hospital Guidelines ....................................................27
5.2 Creating and Configuring Users on Operating System and Domain ......................................28
5.2.1 Configuring Users ...................................................................................................................28
5.2.2 Domain Environment ..............................................................................................................28
5.2.3 Workgroup Environment .........................................................................................................29
6 LOADING LICENSES.............................................................................................................31
7 ACTIVATION ..........................................................................................................................33


8 INSTALLING MONITOR SOFTWARE AND MONITOR CALIBRATION ................................35

9 INSTALLING THE ID SCANNER DRIVERS ..........................................................................35
10 CONFIGURATION ACTIVITIES IN THE NX CONFIGURATION TOOL ................................36
10.1 Enabling or disabling active Licenses.....................................................................................37
10.2 User Configuration ..................................................................................................................37
10.3 Import available Configuration Settings ..................................................................................38
10.4 Configuring Devices................................................................................................................39
10.4.1 Important Information for Network Device Configuration........................................................40
10.4.2 Select Character Set...............................................................................................................40
10.4.3 Monitor ....................................................................................................................................41
10.4.4 ID Tablet..................................................................................................................................41
10.4.5 ID Scanner ..............................................................................................................................41
10.4.6 Printer......................................................................................................................................42
10.4.7 Archive ....................................................................................................................................42
10.4.8 Storage Commit ......................................................................................................................45
10.4.9 RIS and MPPS ........................................................................................................................45
10.4.10 Export Destination...................................................................................................................46
10.4.11 Priors Viewer...........................................................................................................................47
10.4.12 Secure Communication...........................................................................................................47
10.4.13 NX Rooms...............................................................................................................................47
10.5 Configuring Exam Tree ...........................................................................................................48
10.6 Configuring Digitizers..............................................................................................................49
10.6.1 DICOM Digitizer ......................................................................................................................49
10.6.2 TWAIN (ASAP) Digitizer .........................................................................................................51
10.7 Emergency Configuration .......................................................................................................52
10.8 General Security Configuration...............................................................................................52
10.9 Configuring GUI ......................................................................................................................53
10.9.1 General Settings .....................................................................................................................54
10.9.2 Manage Worklists Æ General Settings ...................................................................................54
10.9.3 Manage Worklist .....................................................................................................................54
10.9.4 Manage Worklist Æ Closed Exams ........................................................................................55


10.9.5 Manage Worklist Æ Search list...............................................................................................55
10.9.6 Configure Examination Æ General Settings ...........................................................................55
10.9.7 Configure Examination Æ XRG Parameters ..........................................................................55
10.9.8 Configure Examination Æ View Patient ..................................................................................56
10.9.9 Configure Examination Æ Edit Patient....................................................................................56
10.9.10 Configure Examination Æ View Image Details .......................................................................56
10.9.11 Configure Examination Æ Edit Image Details.........................................................................57
10.9.12 Configure Examination Æ Compose Exam ............................................................................57
10.9.13 Configure Examination Æ Tools & Annotations......................................................................57
10.9.14 Configure Editing Æ General Settings ....................................................................................57
10.9.15 Configure Editing Æ Softcopy & Print View ............................................................................58
10.9.16 Configure Editing Æ Tools & Annotations...............................................................................58
10.9.17 About IME Settings for Input Fields ........................................................................................58
10.10 Activating the Configuration ....................................................................................................59
11 CONFIGURATIONS ACTIVITIES IN THE NX VIEWER.........................................................60

11.1 Dose Configuration .................................................................................................................60
11.2 Configure Queues...................................................................................................................60
12 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ANTI-VIRUS SOFTWARE SETTINGS ....................................60

13 UPLOADING FINGERPRINT FILE.........................................................................................61
13.1 Generating the Fingerprint File ...............................................................................................61
13.2 Uploading the Fingerprint to the ELMS...................................................................................61
14 BACKUP .................................................................................................................................62
15 NX ACCEPTANCE TEST .......................................................................................................63
16 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................63
16.1 How to find Connectivity Information on MedNet....................................................................63
16.2 How to configure P-Values .....................................................................................................64
16.3 Managing Protocol Codes.......................................................................................................64


1 Flowchart of Installation Process NX Workstation

(GenRad or Mammography)
Install UPS (optional).

Configure digitizers.
NOTE:
The outlined timings can significantly vary depending on the complexity of the given
situation on site.


2 Flowchart of Installation Process NX Workstation (CMS)
When configuring an NX Central Monitoring System (CMS), there are less

configuration items due to the fact that all image identification & acquisition related
configuration is not applicable.
It is advised to install the different NX systems that need to be monitored from the CMS
prior to installing the CMS itself.
NOTE:
The outlined timings can significantly vary depending on the complexity of the given
situation on site.


3 Extract Existing Exam Tree Configuration
NOTE:
This section is only applicable if an existing PRID or QS station is available.
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
Mammography exam tree configuration cannot be recovered! The configuration has to
be reconfigured manually.
3.1 From the PRID Station
ACTION:
Get the Customer Parameter File (cpf) file from the PRID station at:
C:\Prid\data\adc.cpf
3.2 From CR QS
(1) Click File in the Menu Bar and select Export XML.
Figure 1
(2) Choose a directory to export to.
Figure 2


(3) Enter a file name and click <Save>.
Figure 3
(4) Wait until the exporting of the XML data has been completed.
(5) Click <OK>.
Figure 4
Result: The XML data has now successfully been exported.
(6) Copy the XML-data to removable media (e.g. CD or USB memory stick).


4 Installation
IMPORTANT:
For both, Installation and Configuration, have the Acceptance Test Protocol document
at hand and fill it in at every installation and configuration step instead of filling it in
afterwards. This saves a lot of time and is best practise.
The document is available in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 6
Acceptance Test DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
4.1 Connections to Network, TWAIN Digitizer, ID Tablet, UPS
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• Always connect the external power supply for the ID Tablet. Using the USB cable
for power supply is not supported.
• If an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) is available, only connect the power
cables and switch on the UPS. Connection of the serial cable will be done later.
The NX system may require following hardware connection interfaces:
Device Connection
Network UTP (LAN)

Network (wireless) WLAN card integrated in NX laptop
TWAIN digitizers (CR 30-X, DX-S) Firewire IEEE1394
UPS RS232 serial connection
Touch screen monitor RS232 serial connection and USB 1.1
Keyboard PS/2 or USB 1.1 or 2.0
Mouse PS/2 or USB 1.1 or 2.0
Dongle USB 1.1 or 2.0
ID Tablet / ID Scanner USB 1.1


Adjacent USB-ports are grouped by pairs on a USB-channel. To avoid hardware

problems, use devices that are compatible to the same USB-version on the
same channel.
It is recommended to connect the devices as listed in the table and displayed
in the following sections.
4.1.1 Desktop PC Connectors
NOTE:
USB ports on the front of the machine are not used.
Desktop PC Connectors - rear side
USB Pair Device

Pair 2 Keyboard
Pair 2 Mouse
Pair 3 Dongle
Pair 4 ID Tablet
Pair 4 (to be connected after touch screen Touch Screen Monitor
software has been installed, see section 8)
Figure 5: Desktop PC connectors and caption
NOTE:
Figures above illustrate the DELL GX 620, USB connections are similar on other
supported desktop models.


4.1.2 HP Notebook Ports
HP EliteBook 8530p – left side
No. Connector Advised Device Connection

1 2 x USB 2.0 ports NX dongle, ID Tablet (or optional ID scanner to be
connected during driver installation, see section 9)
2 RJ-45/Ethernet port LAN (fixed network) *
3 HDMI port Not supported
4 eSATA port Not supported
5 Firewire port ** Firewire Digitizer **
6 Media Card Reader Not supported
7 Integrated Smart Card Reader Not supported
8 ExpressCard/54 slot Not supported
HP EliteBook 8540p – left side
1 8 3 4 1 2 5 6 7

1 3 x USB 2.0 ports NX dongle, ID Tablet (or optional ID scanner to be
connected during driver installation, see section 9)
2 Firewire port ** Firewire Digitizer **
3 Display port Not supported
4 eSATA port Not supported
5 Audio-in jack Not supported
6 Audio-out jack Not supported
7 ExpressCard/54 slot Not supported
8 Vent -
Figure 6: HP Notebook ports (left side) and caption


HP EliteBook 8530p – right side
HP EliteBook 8530p does not feature supported ports on the right side
HP EliteBook 8540p – right side
4 3 2 1 5 6

1 RJ-45/Ethernet port LAN (fixed network) *
2 2 x USB 3.0 ports Not supported
3 Optical Drive (CD/DVD) -
4 Smart Card reader Not supported
5 RJ-11 jack (modem) Not supported
6 Security cable slot -
Figure 7: HP Notebook ports (left side) and caption
IMPORTANT:
* If Intensive Care Unit (ICU) workflow in a wireless network environment will be used
on this NX workstation, do not connect the fixed network cable.
** The laptop is delivered with a Firewire 6 to 4 pin gender changer that allows to
connect the FireWire cable delivered with the digitizer (6 pin connector) to the laptop
(4 pins socket).
HP EliteBook 8530p and 8540p – rear side (similar)

9 Power connector Mains power ***
10 VGA/external monitor connector Not supported
Figure 8: HP Notebooks ports (rear side) and caption
NOTE:
*** The laptop does not require a UPS and does not require grounding, so the power
cable can be plugged directly into any mains power outlet.


4.1.3 Connecting the Licensing Dongle
NOTE:
To prevent loss of the dongle, it has to be fixed to the PC with the cable tie (in scope of
delivery).
If the Install new hardware wizard pops up, it means the dongle was connected to a
different USB-port than it was connected to in production. Just connect the dongle to
another USB-port or follow the wizard.
4.1.3.1 Attaching the Dongle to a Desktop PC
(1) Open the PC housing.

(2) Check following figure – rear side of the PC:
Figure 9
(3) Guide the cable tie from the inside of the PC through the perforated plate to the
outside of the PC. Take care that the tie does not block the movement of the fan.
(4) Guide the cable tie through the hole in the dongle.
(5) Guide the cable tie back from the outside through the perforated plate to the inside
of the PC.
(6) Secure the cable tie. Do not tighten the cable tie too much.
• Be sure the dongle can still be removed from the USB connector while being
attached with the cable tie (see figure above).
• Position the lock of the cable tie inside the PC.
• Use only one cable tie, the second cable tie is a spare.
(7) Close the PC housing.


4.1.3.2 Attaching the Dongle to a Laptop PC
(1) Open the PC lid.

(2) Guide the first cable tie besides the left hinge of the laptop screen:
Figure 10: Example of fixing the dongle to the laptop
(3) Guide the second cable tie through the hole in the dongle.
(4) Attach both ties on both ends to each other by inserting the end of each tie through
the straplock of the other tie for about 2 cm (3/4 inch). Just enough to lock it:


NOTE:
Do not tighten the cable ties too much.
Be sure the dongle can still be removed from the USB connector while being
attached with the cable ties, see figure above.
(5) Position the tie to allow comfortable closing of the laptop screen:
4.2 Logging in to the NX Workstation
A pre-installed local service account (crservice) can be used. In the Operating

System Login use the account crservice and password that has been
communicated during the training. Only for configuring the basic XP settings (described
in next section) it is strongly advised to use the Administrator account.
4.3 Configuring Basic Operating System Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Log in using the Administrator account.

Don't use crservice here as we like to keep the crservice account as it is
(for servicing reasons e.g. The NX installer program works best with an
English account).
(2) Select Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel. If the Control Panel is in
“Category View”, click Switch to classic view.


(3) Double-click Date & Time and adjust the date and time properties.
Figure 13
(4) Open the tab Time Zone.
Figure 14
(5) Select the correct time zone and check the checkbox: Automatically adjust for
daylight saving changes
(6) Click <OK>.
(7) Go back to the Control Panel and choose Regional & Language Settings.
(8) Set the appropriate setting in the tabs Regional Options and the Languages.
(9) Go to the tab Advanced and select the language to match the language version
of non-unicode programs.
Figure 15


(10) Check the checkbox Apply all settings to the current user account and to the
default user profile.
NOTE:
This has only effect when users are not in a domain.
For instructions to:

• Change the language of single users.
• Change to non-standard string formats (e.g. Date &Time, figure
formats).
• Configure the default language for new NX users.
Refer to chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices section
Changing the regional settings of the NX (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
(11) Go to the tab Languages and click <Details...>.

(12) If the correct keyboard is not listed under Installed services, click <Add...>,
select the keyboard layout and click <OK>.
(13) Select in the Default Input Language dropdown list, the correct input language.
(14) Click <OK>.
(15) Confirm that the files already installed on the hard disk can be used.
Only if a dialog asks if files should be copied from Windows CD-ROM or if the
files already installed on the hard disk can be used.
(16) Reboot the PC if the system asks to.


4.4 Configuring Network
REQUIRED TIME:
4.4.1 Changing TCP/IP Settings of Local Area Connection (LAN)
IMPORTANT:
If the wireless Intensive Care Unit (ICU) feature will be used on this NX workstation,
do not perform section 4.4.1. Continue with section 4.4.2.
(1) Go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Network Connections
Figure 16
(2) Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties. The window
Local Area Connection Properties opens.
(3) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Figure 17


(4) Click <Properties>. The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties opens.

(5) Change the values according to the customers needs.
Figure 18
NOTE:
If a Domain Name System (DNS) server is used, configure it. Make sure the
DNS is configured properly and that it can be reached from the workstation.
Symptoms of wrong DNS configuration are failing or delayed connections to
other systems.
If no DNS server is used, the windows host file has to be updated.
See also section 10.4 Configuring Devices.
(6) Click <OK> (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties).

(7) Click <OK> (Local Area Connection Properties).
4.4.2 Configuring the wireless Network Connection for the wireless ICU Workflow
IMPORTANT:
• This section is only applicable if the wireless Intensive Care Unit feature (technical
license: NX_ICU_CONFIGURATION) will be used on this NX workstation.
• The wireless NX must not be plugged in to the Ethernet network: Only one operating
mode is possible, either wireless or fixed network.
• The wireless NX must only be used for GenRad applications.
• The images on the wireless NX are not available for Central Monitoring.


(1) Go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Network Connections

IMPORTANT:
Do not disable the Local Area Connection.
(2) Right-click Wireless Network Connection and choose Properties.

(3) Configure the wireless network connection accroding to the settings of the
wireless network on site.
4.4.3 Changing the Hostname and/or Workgroup or Domain of the NX System
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• Gather information about network environment in the hospital
(Domain or Workgroup) or refer to the information that was gathered in chapter 3
Installation Planning (DD+DIS106.10E).
• The hostname of the NX system as set in production might not meet the hospital
requirements. In case of multiple NX systems in a network it also might conflict with
an already existing system.
To change the hostname and or the workgroup/domain of the NX PC, perform the
following steps:
(1) Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop and select Properties.
(2) Select the tab Computer Name in the System Properties.
Figure 19


(3) Click <Change…>. Result: The window Computer Name Changes opens.
Figure 20
(4) Enter the new Computer name (host name) and/or the Workgroup or Domain.
(5) Click <OK>.
(6) Click <OK> on the following Welcome message (only if the Workgroup or Domain
was changed).
Figure 21
(7) A message appears asking to reboot.

(8) Click <OK> (Computer Name Changes dialog box).
(9) Click <OK> (System Properties).
(10) Reboot the PC.
(12) Run the Hostname Synchronizer Tool via:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Installtools Æ HostName Synchronization Tool


(13) Click <Synchronise>:
Figure 22
(14) Wait until the tool reports that it has finished its job. This may take some time:
Figure 23
(15) Close the tool.


4.5 Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• The UPS software has already been installed and configured for the Powerware
5115 model in production.
• Connecting the UPS via USB cable is not supported.
• Always use COM port 1 on the NX. Using COM port 2 is not supported.
• Powerware UPS in combination with CR QS 3.x requires a modified serial cable.
This should not be used on NX!
4.5.1 Connecting the UPS
(1) Shutdown the NX Workstation.

(2) Power down the UPS.
(3) Use the standard serial cable to connect the UPS to COM port 1.
(4) Power on the UPS.
(5) Power on the NX Workstation.
4.5.2 Modifying the UPS Model
NOTE:
Modifying the UPS model is only needed if a different Powerware model than 5115 is
connected.
(1) Go to: Start Æ Programs Æ Lansafe Æ Lansafe

(2) Open the menu Configuration and select: Communication Settings...


(3) Click <Detect...> on the Communication Settings dialog:
Figure 24
(4) Click <OK> on the Verify Detected UPS dialog:
Figure 25
(5) Click <OK> on the Verify UPS Manufacturer and Model dialog:
Figure 26


(6) Click <OK> on the Save Communication Settings dialog:
Figure 27
(7) The correct model is now configured.
4.6 Update ID Tablet Firmware
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• If the ID tablet firmware is 1.12.07 or later this step is not required.
• If a mobile ID Scanner is used with this NX workstation, updating the ID Tablet
firmware is not required.
INSTRUCTION:
For instructions to find out the installed version of the firmware and how to update it
refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration
Appendices section Upgrading ID tablet firmware DD+DIS105.10E


5 Configuration Activities in the Operating System
IMPORTANT:
For both, Installation and Configuration, have the Acceptance Test Protocol document
at hand and fill it in at every installation and configuration step instead of filling it in
afterwards. This saves a lot of time.
The document is available in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual Chapter 6
NOTE:
NX does not provide an out-of-the-box configuration, this means that each installation
requires configuration steps.
5.1 Editing Security Settings according to Hospital Guidelines
REQUIRED TIME:
During installation planning the security guidelines were cross-checked with the
hospital IT security specialist. Now these settings can be applied to the NX operating
system.
• For the hospital guidelines and the gathered remarks of the customer refer to NX
2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 3 Installation Planning
• For instructions in how to access those settings refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices
DD+DIS105.10E, section Editing Security Settings according to Hospital Guidelines


5.2 Creating and Configuring Users on Operating System and Domain
REQUIRED TIME:
5.2.1 Configuring Users
Configuring a user on the NX system always involves two steps:

• Giving the user an account on the operating system and domain
(= authentication) : Every user needs to have a user account to log on to the
Windows XP system on which NX is running.
Two different scenarios are covered in this section:

o NX Workstations in a Domain
o NX Workstations in a Workgroup
• Giving the user access rights to the NX application (= authorization): Every user
needs to have the appropriate rights to perform functions (e.g. starting the
application, rejecting an image, etc) in the NX application. As already mentioned,
these authorization settings are kept in an XML file on the system.
See also section 10.2.
NOTE:
• All users on the NX system should best be configured with the same regional
settings. See also Changing the regional settings of the NX in chapter 4
Appendices.
• On a laptop PC, special power settings are required. They have to be configured
manually on each individual user account for users. Check the procedure in chapter
4 Appendices, Laptop Power Settings.
• On a laptop PC, the screen resolution must be changed to 1680 x 1050 pixels. This
has to be configured manually on each individual user account.
5.2.2 Domain Environment
During the installation planning phase the hospital domain administrator should have
either created a domain account for AGFA Servicing that also has administrator rights
on the local machine or should now be present to grant access.


5.2.3 Workgroup Environment
Purpose In a workgroup environment XP users cannot be shared across workstations. This

implies that each user has to be added with the same name on each workstation. It is
recommended to use the same user password and password expiration rules then.
IMPORTANT:
This even must be done when a CMS is involved.
On a CMS NX, only in-room NX systems will be reachable on which the currently
logged in user also has access rights using the same password.
On a domain, this all works automatically. In a workgroup it has to be setup manually.
Create an account on the operating system:
(1) Go to the desktop and right-click My Computer. Select the Manage option.
(2) Select System Tools Æ Local Users and Groups:
Figure 28
(3) Click on the ”Users” folder:
Figure 29


(4) Select Action Æ new user in the menu bar:
Figure 30
(5) Enter the user name and password to add. For the other options, consult the
hospital administrator for his/her preferences.
Figure 31
(6) Click <Create>. Finally, click <Close> (or press <Create> again for creating a
set of users). In case the user is a standard user, skip the next steps.


(7) Double-click the newly created user from the list.
Figure 32
(8) Click the tab Member Of and add the groups in which to enroll this user.
Result It is now possible to log on to this machine using this user account.
6 Loading Licenses
CAUTION:
Make sure the settings in section 4.3 Configuring Basic Operating System Settings
have been set correctly.
REQUIRED TIME:


To load a license, the Application License File (ALF) is needed.

• This has been obtained during the installation planning phase via National Service
Organization (NSO).
Or:
• It can be created in the Electronic License Management System (ELMS).
The required information is described in chapter 3 Installation Planning
(DD+DIS106.10E).
NOTE:
• For further information concerning obtaining or creating the ALF refer to the
Licensing Service Manual DD+DIS012.06E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
• The system is delivered with a dongle that has to be plugged into the system at any
time, in order to get access to the licensed functionality.
The ALF has to be imported and the license has to be loaded into the system:
(1) Copy the license key file to: C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing
(2) Start up the license manager tool from
Start Æ AGFA Æ Service Æ License manager.
(3) Click the <Add license file> button.
(4) Browse to the folder: C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing
(5) Select the file received from the ELMS.
The license file has been installed successfully.
(6) Reboot the PC.
NOTE:
The logging information of the Licensing process can be found in the log file:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\LicensingService.log


7 Activation
REQUIRED TIME:
The NX workstation is setup to be configured as one of these profiles, based on the

information retrieved from the loaded ALF file:
• In-room mixed use NX workstation: Depending on the available licenses, the NX
workstation will be able to perform:
o Only GenRad examinations
o Only Mammography examinations
o Both GenRad and Mammography examinations
• In-room veterinary NX workstation: Allows only configuring Veterinary
examinations.
• Central monitoring system: Allows monitoring a set of in-room NX workstations.
NOTE:
Activation will fail if the network is unplugged during activation of the NX Software.
(1) Log out and in again using the crservice account.

(2) Start the NX Activation Utility by using the shortcut on the desktop, or start it via:
Start Menu Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools
Figure 33
(3) Click <Next> on the message that a fresh NX will be activated.

(4) Choose the values for dose calculation: Logarithm Median (LGM) values or
Exposure Index (EI)
Decision should be based on these rules:
• If a CMS is installed, all connected NX in-room workstations must have the
same setting as the CMS.
• For information about which digitizer type is compatible with which dose
calculation, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
For more generic information about dose calculation refer to chapter 1 Product
Description, section Dose Monitoring (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) and the
NX User Manual.


(5) Click <Next>.

NOTE:
The following software components are automatically installed during
activation of the NX software if the License File contains a license that
depends on one of the components:
• TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP)
• Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE)
• X-Ray Generator and DR Detector Interfacing Software (XRDI)
• Sedecal Software Console (DX-D 300 U-arm)
The NX Activation Utility will ask to confirm the selected components and
will automatically install the software components on the NX Workstation.
(6) Select the default language for the NX workstation and click <Next>.
NOTE:
After Activation, the NX workstation will be configured to use the default
string formats (e.g. date and time) for the selected language, and the
selected language will be the default language for new users.
For instructions how to tune the local string formats (e.g. date and time) or
how to change a user's language refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices
DD+DIS105.10E, section Changing the regional settings
(7) Check the overview of specified selections. To change options, click <Back>, to
cancel the activation, click <Cancel>. If all selections are correct, click
<Activate>. The activation starts.
(8) Click <Next> after the activation has completed.
(9) Choose Reboot now and click <Finish>.
NOTE:
The logging information of the process NX activation can be found in the log file:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\Nx\NXactivate.log


8 Installing Monitor Software and Monitor Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Identify and retrieve the required Monitor Software. Refer to

(2) For installation and calibration instructions, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS200.09E
9 Installing the ID Scanner Drivers
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
This section is only applicable if the ID Scanner will be used in combination with this NX
workstation.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Install the ID Scanner drivers on NX Workstation.
(2) Adjust the COM Port Properties.
For detailed instructions refer to the ID Scanner Service Manual chapter 1 Controls,
Connections, and Setup Procedures DD+DIS124.09E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


10 Configuration Activities in the NX Configuration Tool
To save time, parts of the configuration can also be prepared off-site with the Offline
Configuration Tool. The offline prepared configuration must be exported into a
Configuration File, saved on a portable medium to be able to take it on site and
imported when performing the configuration on-site.
IMPORTANT:
Some configurations have to be made on-site using the regular Configuration Tool
since they are not part of a full export file of the configuration data. For more
information about the use and the limitations of the Offline Configuration Tool refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Offline Configuration Tool Installation
and Use DD+DIS109.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
The typical configuration procedure in the NX Configuration Tool is the following:

(1) Enable or disable licenses if needed. See section 10.1.
(2) Configure the user accounts. See section 10.2.
(3) Import available configuration settings. See section 10.3.
(4) Configure manually only the settings that are not covered by the imported
configuration settings. See sections 10.4 - 10.9.
NOTE:
Be aware that for Mammography systems the instructions for manual
configuration are described in the CR Mammography Solution Manual
(5) Activate the configuration. See section 10.10.
NOTE:
• An online help is available for each window of the regular Configuration Tool and
the Offline Configuration Tool. To access the online help go to the respective
window and press <F1>.
By clicking the arrow button on the upper left side of the online help it can be
searched by key words also:
• After any change of the NX configurations an activation of the configuration is

required to apply the changes.


10.1 Enabling or disabling active Licenses
In most of the cases this step is not required. It is only required in case of the following
reasons:
• To enable a certain license that is not enabled automatically or
• To disable a certain license from using it except in emergency situations.
(1) Double-click the NX Configurator on the desktop.

(2) Select ”Load active configuration”.
(3) Click <Security and License Management>.
(4) Select <Manage licenses>.
(5) Disable or enable active licenses if needed in the overview of available licenses.
Remark: It is not possible to enable a license that is not specified in the license
file.
NOTE:
Closing the Config Tool before activating the configuration will undo the new license
settings. When trying to activate the configuration before the configuration is fully
completed, verification errors may occur. See section 10.10 for more information.
10.2 User Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
This section only refers to Windows user accounts (not NX user accounts).
For Managing Users and Roles, read the information in the Configuration Tool online
help (go to Security and License Management and press <F1>).
To add users to the NX Configuration Tool, one needs to be aware of the following
topics:
• When logged in using a local machine account, the ‘domain’ list is empty, unless
this account has been added to the domain. Only local accounts can be selected.
• When logged in using a domain account and this domain account is not a local
administrator it is possible that no local accounts are displayed. Unless the FSE is
logged in as a local administrator, only domain accounts can be added.


10.3 Import available Configuration Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
There are several possibilities how pre-defined configuration settings can be available:
• Default configuration settings delivered with the NX for:
o Mixed Use
o Mammography only
o CMS
o Veterinary
• Configuration settings prepared off-site with the Offline Configuration Tool
• Configuration settings from other NX systems
The settings can be imported:

• Fully, i.e. all settings of the file are imported.
• Partially, i.e. only selected configuration data (e.g. user interface customization)
INSTRUCTION:
For the detailed procedure refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section Import available
configuration settings (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


10.4 Configuring Devices
REQUIRED TIME:
The scope of device configuration differs between In-Room NX workstations and

NX CMS workstations:
Checkpoints for In-Room NX: See section: Checkpoints for CMS NX: See section:
1. Select Character Set 10.4.2 1. Monitor 10.4.3
2. Monitor 10.4.3 2. Export Destination 10.4.10
3. ID Tablet 10.4.4 3. Priors Viewer 10.4.11
4. ID Scanner 10.4.5 4. NX Rooms 10.4.13
5. Printer 10.4.6
6. Archive 10.4.7
7. Storage Commit 10.4.8
8. RIS and MPPS 10.4.9
9. Export Destination 10.4.10
10. Priors Viewer 10.4.11
11. Secure Communication 10.4.12
NOTE:
The configuration of the digitizers will follow in section 10.6.
NOTE:
An online help is available for each window of the regular Configuration Tool and the
Offline Configuration Tool. To access the online help go to the respective window and
press <F1>.
By clicking the arrow button on the upper left side of the online help it can also be
searched by key words:


10.4.1 Important Information for Network Device Configuration
IMPORTANT:
When configuring a network device (e.g. RIS/PACS), use the field Host Name
(not IP address):
Figure 34: Example
If the hospital has no DNS support, additionally the windows hosts file has to be
updated:
(1) Go to: C:\WINDOWS\system32\drivers\etc
(2) Double-click the file: hosts
(3) Choose the Editor to edit the file.
(4) Go to the very end of the displayed text and add the IP-addresses and hostnames
of the network device.
(5) Save and close the file: hosts
NOTE:
For additional help on the configuration topics, follow the described path in the
Configuration Tool and press <F1>.
10.4.2 Select Character Set
NOTE:
The characters sets are used for communication with DICOM RIS, MPPS and PACS
systems. The NX Station will only send out characters which are defined in the
selected character sets.
Path General Configuration Æ Configure Workstation settings Æ General Settings

Action Update the general configuration settings, e.g:
(1) Enter the AE-Title of the NX Workstation.
(2) Select the character sets NX has to support.


10.4.3 Monitor
Path Device Configuration Æ Monitor

Action Configure Monitor.
Additional Info For each monitor type (including laptop displays), a dedicated monitor model file must
be selected to use the specific screen resolutions. NX is installed with a complete list
of supported monitor types:
(1) Click <Modify>.
(2) Select the monitor type from the dropdown list. If the monitor type is not listed,
see NOTE below.
(3) Click <OK>.
NOTE:
If the monitor type is not available on the system, and a model file describing the
monitor type is available, the monitor type can be added to the system by the service
engineer. For instructions refer to Chapter 4 Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section
Installing new Device Models (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
10.4.4 ID Tablet
IMPORTANT:
If a mobile ID Scanner is used with this NX workstation, configuring the ID Tablet is not
required.
Path Device Configuration Æ ID Tablet

Action Configure ID Tablet.
NOTE:
The ID Tablet will not be operational before the PC has been rebooted!
10.4.5 ID Scanner
Path Device Configuration Æ ID Tablet

Action For configuration instructions refer to the ID Scanner Service Manual chapter 1
Controls, Connections, and Setup Procedures DD+DIS124.09E


10.4.6 Printer
Path Device Configuration Æ Printer

Action Configure/Add/Remove printers.
Additional Info NX is installed with a complete list of supported printer types. If the printer type is not
available on the system, and a file describing the printer type is available, the printer
type can be added to the system by the service engineer.
INSTRUCTION:
For instructions refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation
and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section Installing new Device Models
NOTE:
True size printing on Drystar 3000 requires installation of an additional PMS-file on
the printer! Refer to the Service Documentation of Drystar 3000 for more information
NOTE:
All Drystar printer models (apart from DI3000) assume that the printer has A#sharp.
There are no separate printer models for non-A#sharp Drystar printers anymore.
If a Drystart printer has to be added that doesn't have A#sharp, refer to section 7.1 and
the AGFA HEALTHCARE Connectivity Release Document:
NX (x.x.xxx) GENRAD applications to Drystar 4500, 5500, 5300 and 5302 (Document
No. 001083 Revision 1.2). For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa
partner.
10.4.7 Archive
Path Device Configuration Æ Archive

Action Configure or add new Archives.
Additional Info NX is installed with a list of preconfigured archive types and a set of generic archive
types. If the archive type is not available on the system, a generic archive type can be
selected. If a file is available describing the archive type, the archive type can be
added to the system by the service engineer.
INSTRUCTION:
and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section Installing new Device Models


NOTE:
When using Musica2 image processing (Musica2 license is active), recommended
output types for Archive are:
• 15-bit PVAL VOI LUT (recommended for full DICOM P-Value compliant results)
• 12-bit VOI LUT OD REL (if P-Values cannot be used, this output type gives the
closest results)
For more information on P-values refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section How to
configure P-Values (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
10.4.7.1 Special: Configuration of Agfa PACS supporting Musica2 Processing on the Archive
To archive an image on a PACS supporting Musica2 processing, two images are sent
to the PACS:
• An image 'for presentation' (identical to other PACS images)
• An image 'for processing' (used by the PACS to re-process using different Musica2
settings)
System Diagnosis images should only be sent as an image 'for presentation'.
(1) Create a new archive device and configure the Device Settings Æ SOP Class of
the archive to be one of these:
• DX for Presentation
• MG for Presentation
(2) Enter the same host name as for the original archive but choose a different
AE-Title.
This archive destination will now receive unprocessed pixel data from the
NX Workstation.
(3) Enable the checkbox Musica on PACS for this archive.
(4) Go to Exam tree configuration.
(5) Click Find and Replace Exposure Settings.
(6) In the Find pane, select General Radiology in the Application dropdown.
(7) Click <Find>.


(8) In the Result List pane, uncheck:

• AutoQC2 exams
• System Diagnosis exams
• CR Mammo QC exams
• Other exams that are not intended to be sent to the Musica on PACS-archive.
NOTE:
the Find and Replace will overwrite the 'Additional Destination' setting for
all exams that are checked in the result list.
(9) Select the additional archive on the Replace With pane, drop down menu
Additional Destination.
(10) Click <Replace>.
(11) Click <Commit>.
(12) Repeat steps (5) to (11) and select Mammography in the Application dropdown
10.4.7.2 Special: Configuration of the Field “StationName” on PACS
NOTE:
The following logic has to be taken into account when configuring the use of the field
“StationName” on PACS systems for images originating from an NX system.
The “StationName” in the Dicom message sent by NX to the PACS when an image is
archived is different for CR and DR images.
• CR images: For CR images the “StationName” is equal to the "name of the
digitizer" which has scanned the image plate containing the CR image exposure.
The "name of the digitizer" is equal to the "Name" as defined for the digitizer device
in the NX Configuration Tool (pane Device Configuration). This behavior is identical
in all NX versions except for the FLFS stitched images.
FLFS stitched images: Prior to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 version, the

“StationName” for the FLFS stitched images is empty. From NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
version onwards, the “StationName” of the FLFS stitched image is set equal to the
“StationName” of the first FLFS partial image. I.e. equal to the "name of the
digitizer" which has scanned the image plate containing the first FLFS partial image
exposure.
• DR images: Prior to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 version, the “StationName” for the
DR images is empty. From NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 version onwards, the
“StationName” of the DR images is set equal to the "name of the NX workstation"
which has acquired the DR image. The "name of the NX workstation" is equal to the
"ID station name" as defined in the NX Configuration tool (pane Workstation
settings).


10.4.8 Storage Commit
To activate DICOM Storage Commit on an existing archive:
(1) Go to: Device Configuration Æ Archive Æ Device Settings Æ Storage Commit

(2) Check the box and enter the Hostname, AE Title and Port Number of the Archive,
where NX will send the Storage Commit Request to.
(3) Go to: General Configuration Æ Workstation Settings Æ Storage Commit
(4) Check the box and enter the Port Number on which NX will be listening for
Storage Commit messages.
The storage commit-port has to be different from 104, the storage port!.
Choose another port number, e.g. 105.
The AE Title is always the same as the Performed Station AE Title.
(5) On the archive configured in the Configuration Tool configure the Performed
Station AE Title and storage commit-port number to send Storage Commit
messages to.
NOTE:
Some archives (e.g. IMPAX) do not offer an extra port number configuration for
storage commit.
When configuring these archives (NX AE Title, NX hostname, NX port number…), use
the port number that was chosen for storage commit on the NX (e.g. 105 in the example
above).
10.4.9 RIS and MPPS
Path Device Configuration Æ RIS

Action Configure RIS or add new RIS.
10.4.9.1 Configuring a DICOM RIS
(1) Fill the following fields to configure the query filter that defines which records are
fetched from the RIS:
• SPS Start Date
• Modality
• Scheduled Station AE-Title


(2) Perform the steps described in chapter Configuring the RIS in the NX Online
Help.
10.4.9.2 Configuring a non-DICOM RIS
(1) Select the type of RIS query (Accession number, data file, delimited worklist, user
program, xml worklist).
(2) Fill in the configuration settings depending on the type of RIS query.
NOTE:
• To support a non-DICOM RIS, a network drive can be used to store the RIS data
file to which NX requires READ ACCESS permissions.
• To support the ‘accession number’ option or the ‘remove data file’ option in the
NX Configuration tool this requires FULL ACCESS permissions.
• For a RIS using Delimited Worklist:
If more fields are listed in the parameter file than are sent out by the RIS, the
worklist query results in an error. Make sure that the parameter file is limited to the
fields that are sent out by the RIS.
INSTRUCTION:
For the procedure to configure the access to a network drive refer to
Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section Access to Network Drive for non-DICOM RIS
10.4.10 Export Destination
Path Device Configuration Æ Export Destination

Action Configure export functionality.
NOTE:
The default configuration contains three pre-configured export destinations. On
NX 2.0.XX00 only one export destination can be configured, so remove at least
two of the pre-configured destinations before activating the configuration.


10.4.11 Priors Viewer
Path Device Configuration Æ Priors

Action Configure priors functionality. For more information refer to the
Configuration Tool online help.
NOTE:
• This functionality is only available under the Priors License.
• The first time Viewing Priors is used, some dialogs will pop up to configure
the communication to the WEB1000 (e.g. Java install, certificates,...).
These dialogs can be confirmed. This will happen for each different user!
10.4.12 Secure Communication
ACTION:
For detailed configuration procedures refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section Secure
Communication (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
10.4.13 NX Rooms
NOTE:
This configuration step is only applicable for CMS.
Path Device Configuration Æ Rooms

Action Configure Rooms. For more information refer to the
Configuration Tool online help.


10.5 Configuring Exam Tree
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes (depending on complexity of exam tree)
NOTE:
A Central Monitoring System doesn't require exam tree configuration.
There are several possibilities how pre-defined exam trees can be available:
• Different default exam trees are delivered as separate XML files with the NX
(Path: C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\FactorySettings\) for:
o GenRad
o Mammography
o Production
o Radiotherapy
o System Diagnosis (GenRad and Mammography exam groups, available in
the Configuration Tool by default)
o Veterinary
• Exam trees prepared off-site with the Offline Configuration Tool.
• Exam trees settings from other NX systems
• Converted Exam Trees from CR QS systems (not applicable for Mammography)
Use the Configuration tool to import and customize the pre-defined exam trees. If there
is no exam tree available, the entire configuration must be done on site.
INSTRUCTION:
For the detailed import and conversion procedures refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E,
section Import available configuration settings (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
For the customization and configuration procedures refer to the Configuration Tool
online help (<F1>) section Configuring the Examination Tree.
NOTE:
• Changes to the Modality Settings (X-Ray Device) only apply to examinations that
are started after the change is activated. Already existing examinations are not
affected!
• The feature Set as default of the NX application allows to fine tune the
Musica 1 settings via the NX GUI. For information about this feature refer to the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 9 Troubleshooting
DD+DIS105.10E, section Tips &Tricks (Intranet Link / Extranet Link). This
functionality is not available if Musica2 image processing is configured.


10.6 Configuring Digitizers
REQUIRED TIME:

1. DICOM Digitizer 10.6.1
2. TWAIN (ASAP) Digitizer 10.6.2
10.6.1 DICOM Digitizer
NOTE:
• This functionality is only available under the DICOM digitizer license.
• DICOM digitizers: SOLO, COMPACT, COMPACT PLUS, CR-25, CR-75,
CR 85-X, CR 35-X, DX-G*, DX-M
* DX-G: DICOM digitizer as of SW version ≥ NIM_2xxx
To activate a system with a DICOM digitizer, configuration is needed both on NX and

on the digitizer. The digitizer is configured via a cpf-file that is created using the
CCM-tool or the Configuration Tool.
10.6.1.1 Configuring Digitizer on NX
(1) Go to Device Configuration Æ Digitizer and press <F1>.

(2) Follow the instructions in section Configuring Digitizers for configuring NX for
receiving images from a DICOM digitizer.
IMPORTANT:
• Configuring the Emergency Procedure is ALWAYS required, even for digitizers that
do not have any emergency buttons. The reason for this is that these settings will
be used in case an image comes in that was not identified on this NX workstation.
• In case of ADC SOLO and CR25.0, two emergency buttons need to be configured
which are used for sending emergency images to NX.
• The Emergency Procedure for SOLO, CR25.0 configuration requires that the
Exam Group and Exam entered in the NX Configuration Tool have to match the
Exam and Subexam that are configured in the cpf-file and linked to the emergency
button.


10.6.1.2 Configuring the DICOM Digitizer
To configure a DICOM digitizer for sending images to NX, follow the instructions
according to the different scenarios A or B and C and/or D:
A: Installation of NX at a new site, from scratch (No existing cpf-file):
(1) Use the button <Create CPF> in the digitizer settings of the Configuration Tool
to create a new CPF-file. The file is to be saved on the local file system or
portable media.
(2) Upload the modified cpf-file to the digitizer: Refer to service documentation of the
digitizer.
B: Adding a digitizer or NX workstation to an existing site:
Start from the existing cpf-file that has been loaded on the digitizer(s):
(1) In the digitizer settings of the Configuration Tool use the button <Modify CPF>
to update the CPF file on the digitizer with the NX Workstation data. The file is
automatically downloaded from the digitizer, modified and uploaded again.
NOTE:
A warning about the text encoding of the CPF file may be displayed,
which can be safely ignored.
C: Extra Configuration needed for Fast Preview functionality:
(1) Go to the service menu and enable the ‘Precheck’ feature.

(2) Restart the digitizer in case direct ID was not configured. Otherwise perform the
extra configuration needed for direct ID functionality (next step).
D: Extra Configuration needed for Direct ID functionality:
(1) Go to the service menu and enable the ‘Direct ID’ feature.
(2) Restart the digitizer.


10.6.2 TWAIN (ASAP) Digitizer
NOTE:
This functionality is only available under the TWAIN digitizer license for:
• DX-S
• CR 30-X
• DX-G (ASAP)*
* For a DX-G digitizer running with SW version ≥ NIM_2xxx refer to section 10.6.1 (DICOM digitizer).
10.6.2.1 Configuring TWAIN Digitizer on NX

(2) Read Configuring Digitizers for information about configuring NX for receiving
images from a TWAIN digitizer.
NOTE:
A lot of settings in the General settings Æ Workstation Settings pane in the
NX Configuration tool are not used when working with TWAIN digitizers.
10.6.2.2 Configuring the Digitizer
ACTION:
Refer to the service documentation of the digitizer.
NOTE:
Configuring the Emergency Procedure is required if on the DX-S the emergency button
is used for sending emergency images to NX.


10.7 Emergency Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:

(2) In the Configuration Tool online help go to: Digitizer Settings Æ Emergency
Procedure
10.8 General Security Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Go to Security and License Management and press <F1>.

(2) Read the information about general security configuration.


10.9 Configuring GUI
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
The following steps need to be performed to configure the GUI. Depending on the
application type of the workstation, some functions may not be available.
In the Configuration Tool go to User Interface Configuration to open the window for
configuring the NX GUI:

1. General Settings 10.9.1
2. Manage Worklists Æ General Settings 10.9.2
3. Manage Worklist 10.9.3
4. Manage Worklist Æ Closed Exams 10.9.4
5. Manage Worklist Æ Search list 10.9.5
6. Configure Examination Æ General Settings 10.9.6
7. Configure Examination Æ XRG Parameters 10.9.7
8. Configure Examination Æ View Patient 10.9.8
9. Configure Examination Æ Edit Patient 10.9.9
10. Configure Examination Æ View Image Details 10.9.10
11. Configure Examination Æ Edit Image Details 10.9.11
12. Configure Examination Æ Compose Exam 10.9.12
13. Configure Examination Æ Tools & Annotations 10.9.13
14. Configure Editing Æ General Settings 10.9.14
15. Configure Editing Æ Softcopy & Print View 10.9.15
16. Configure Editing Æ Tools & Annotations 10.9.16
17. About IME Settings for Input Fields 10.9.17


10.9.1 General Settings
Path User Interface Configuration Æ General Settings
(1) Go to the Image Overview Pane or the Current Patient List pane.
(2) Select the Patient Name-elements which will be used in NX (for example Prefix,
First name, Middle name, Last name, Suffix).
(3) Keep the default value Normal for Person Name Representation for Western
languages. For Asian languages choose Ideographic or Phonetic.
(4) Click the labels to be displayed in the Exposure thumbnail (empty thumbnail)
and the Image thumbnail (thumbnail with image).
(5) Select the elements that should accompany the Patient name in the
Patient exam switch bar.
10.9.2 Manage Worklists Æ General Settings
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Worklist Settings Æ General Settings
(1) Select Show Manual Worklist checkbox to show the Patient List in the
user interface.
(2) Select the action buttons to be shown in the Worklist overview.
10.9.3 Manage Worklist
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Worklist Settings Æ Configure Worklist
(1) Click the column to be configured. The selected column will be displayed with
a grey contour.
(2) Select or deselect the Show in UI check box.
(3) Enter a new number in the position box to reposition the column.
(4) Add a new label if necessary.


10.9.4 Manage Worklist Æ Closed Exams
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Worklist Settings Æ Configure Closed List
(1) Click on the column to be selected. The selected column be displayed with a
grey contour.
(3) Reposition the column by entering a new number in the position box.
10.9.5 Manage Worklist Æ Search list
NOTE:
This section is only applicable to NX CMS.
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Worklist Settings Æ Configure Search List
(1) Click the column to be configured. The selected column will be displayed with a
grey contour.
(3) Enter a new number in the position box to reposition the column.
10.9.6 Configure Examination Æ General Settings
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ General Settings

Action Select the Action buttons to be shown in the Examination pane.
10.9.7 Configure Examination Æ XRG Parameters
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ Configure XRG Parameters
(1) Select a label and configure it.

In the NX user interface, a maximum number of 8 labels can be displayed.The
selected label will become green.
(2) Reposition the label if needed by entering another number and modify the
other fields.


10.9.8 Configure Examination Æ View Patient
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ Configure View Patient Pane
(1) Select a label and configure it.

In the NX user interface, a maximum number of 8 labels can be displayed.
The selected label will become green.
other fields.
NOTE:
To configure specific Veterinary DICOM fields, refer to the General
Settings Æ Veterinary Settings screen, where a predefined list can be
created.
10.9.9 Configure Examination Æ Edit Patient
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ Configure Edit Patient Pane
(1) Configure the data items for patient details separately for view and edit mode.
(2) Configure up to 8 data items by defining their position, label and content and
determine whether this field is mandatory (in Edit mode).
NOTE:
To configure specific Veterinary DICOM fields, refer to the
General Settings Æ Veterinary Settings screen, where a predefined list
can be created.
10.9.10 Configure Examination Æ View Image Details
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ

Configure View Image Detail Pane
(1) Select a label that and configure it. A maximum of 16 labels can be displayed. The
selected label will become green.
other fields.


10.9.11 Configure Examination Æ Edit Image Details
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ

Configure Edit Image Detail Pane
(1) Configure the data items for patient and image details separately for view and edit
mode.
(2) Configure up to 8 data items by defining their position, label and content in
Edit mode.
10.9.12 Configure Examination Æ Compose Exam
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ Configure Add Image Pane.
Action Define the layout of the Add Image pane.
10.9.13 Configure Examination Æ Tools & Annotations
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings Æ Configure Tools in

Examination
Action Select and position the tools and annotations to display in the examination
user interface.
10.9.14 Configure Editing Æ General Settings
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Editing Settings Æ General Settings
(1) Select the default viewing mode for viewing images in the Editing environment
(print mode or normal mode). Also select this option to see the toggle buttons to
switch between print and normal mode in the editing user interface.
(2) Select the action buttons to be shown in the Editing window.


10.9.15 Configure Editing Æ Softcopy & Print View
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Editing Settings

Æ Configure Normal Mode & Print Modes.
Action Select the properties of the Status Box in the Editing window of NX.
10.9.16 Configure Editing Æ Tools & Annotations
Path User Interface Configuration Æ Editing Settings Æ Configure Tools and Annotations.
Action Select the tools and annotations to be displayed in the Editing window.
10.9.17 About IME Settings for Input Fields
The IME mode setting in the Configuration Tool allows to change the behaviour of the
keyboard for East-Asian languages (e.g. hiragana/katakana/romaji in Japanese),
without them one has to use the keyboard shortcut each time to perform the switch.
IME settings can be made in:

• User Interface Configuration Æ Examination Settings
Æ Configure XRG Parameters
Æ Configure Edit Patient Pane
Æ Configure Edit Image Detail Pane
Figure 35
NOTE:
• <Blank> means "not specified", it does not mean "not active"! If IME is enabled on
the system, it is active with the last setting.
• If IME is not required for a certain field, set 'Disable' rather than 'Off' or 'NoControl'.


10.10 Activating the Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• After any change of the NX settings, an activation of the configuration is required to
apply the changes.
• If there are different settings for dose calculation values in the Configuration Tool
than chosen during activation of the NX (section 7) this will cause errors during the
activation of the configuration.
Example: Exposure Index (EI) was chosen during activation of the NX. The
Configuration Tool uses LgM values for several settings (GUI configuration, Device
Configuration, print sheet box, etc.).
The error messages will point to the configuration items where the wrong value is
used. Remove the reference, or use the correct value for dose calculation and
activate the configuration.
(1) Select File Æ Activate configuration in the configuration tool menu.

(2) Solve all configuration errors reported by the Configuration Tool (if there are
some).
(3) Retrigger the activation of the configuration.


11 Configurations Activities in the NX Viewer
REQUIRED TIME:
11.1 Dose Configuration
(1) In the NX Viewer Main Menu click <Help>.

(2) Go to: NX User Manual Æ Using the Main Menu Æ Quality Assurance Æ
Modifying Dose Monitoring Statistics
(3) Follow the instructions for dose configuration.
11.2 Configure Queues
(1) In the NX Viewer Main Menu click <Help>.

(2) Go to: NX User Manual Æ Using the Main Menu Æ Monitoring and Management
Æ Queue Management
(3) Follow the instructions for configuring queues.
12 Recommendations for Anti-virus Software Settings
ACTION:
To find the procedures on how to configure the supported Anti-virus software refer to
Appendices DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


13 Uploading Fingerprint File
13.1 Generating the Fingerprint File
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Go to Start Æ AGFA Æ Service Æ License Manager.

(2) Click on <Generate Fingerprint>.
(3) Adapt file name and location e. g. external Memory stick.
(4) Click <Save>.
(5) Check the status bar of the License manger until the remark creating …
disappears.
(6) Wait until the License manger is on status Normal.
(7) Close the License Manager.
Result The Fingerprint File has been generated.
13.2 Uploading the Fingerprint to the ELMS
ACTION:
Upload the Fingerprint File to the ELMS. This can be done by the FSE or the
representative of the National Service Organization (NSO) who is dedicated to handle
the topics regarding Licenses Management.
INSTRUCTION:
For instructions to upload the Fingerprint File to the ELMS refer to the Licensing Service
Manual DD+DIS012.06E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


14 Backup
REQUIRED TIME:
make a backup. Follow this procedure:
(1) Open the configuration tool and load the active configuration.
(2) In the configuration tool menu select File Æ Save as…”.
(3) Choose a portable medium to save the configuration file on and store this file on a
save place. Name the file that it can be identified later on: e.g.
<Site>_initial_configuration_<date>.xml
The file should be kept outside the NX hard disk to have it available in case the
NX hard disk crashes.
(4) Run the script ‘Backup all data’:
Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore Æ Backup all data
NOTE:
• For more information about backup scripts, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
• If a restore of the system is performed (e.g. after hardware replacement), use the
Clean Install Procedure. Refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5
Clean Install Procedure DD+DIS107.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
The material for a clean install of the original software is delivered with the
NX system as a set of two DVDs:
o NX Starterkit DVD1
o NX Starterkit DVD2


15 NX Acceptance Test
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT
(1) Check if all required fields of the Acceptance Test have been filled out and
complete it.
(2) Distribute the completed and signed document according to the instructions given
in the Acceptance Test document.
NOTE:
The document template is available in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 6 Acceptance Test DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
16 System Integration
16.1 How to find Connectivity Information on MedNet
Find information and procedures on MedNet Healthcare Library.

For external partners: please contact your local Agfa partner:
(1) In Views sort by document type.
(2) Go to: Connectivity Release Document Æ General Info Æ Connectivity and
Application.
(3) Select the needed Connectivity document(s).
NOTE:
These documents are also available on a Connectivity CD. Updates are
announced via Service Bulletin.


16.2 How to configure P-Values
Definition When do are P-values needed? -

If a consistent presentation of images on workstation, hardcopy and/or softcopy in
different light conditions should be accomplished.
Action For detailed configuration procedures refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
16.3 Managing Protocol Codes
Definition Protocol codes are imported from the RIS, and can be linked to exposure groups,
exposures and exams that are displayed in the user interface. This way, an incoming
protocol code can be “resolved”, and the operator receives immediate feedback on the
examination he needs to perform.
A rough overview of the actions for configuration of Protocol codes is:
(1) Map the RIS attribute containing the protocol code to the right NX database field.
(2) Create a list of known protocol codes.
(3) Link the protocol codes to the exam tree.
NOTE:
For detailed information refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link) and the Configuration Tool online help.


Imaging Services Software Options
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
► Content of Chapter 5 ‘Software Options’
This chapter contains the instructions for all options.

They are listed in chronological sequence:
Timeline Document No. Contents Edition.

Revision
2010
May DD+DIS107.10E Clean Installation Procedure 1.0
May DD+DIS110.10E Remote Servicing 1.0
May DD+DIS108.10E Monitor Options 1.0
May DD+DIS112.10E Using the RF-Tag Initialization Tool 1.0
June DD+DIS111.10E Musica2 Image Processing Software 1.0
June DD+DIS109.10E Offline Configuration Tool Installation and Use 1.0

sw_05_options_toc_e_template_v06
DD+DIS105.10E Software Options


NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Clean Installation Procedure
This document describes the installation of an NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 system starting

from scratch.

1.1 09-2010  Added remark to create partition D: on disk 0.
Refer to section 3.5
 Added step to select proper XRDI version if the
corresponding license is available.
Refer to section 5.2.
Depending on the system, following documentation is needed on site:
Document Title
DD+DIS116.10M NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Spare Parts List
DD+DIS012.06E Licensing Service Documentation
DD+DIS124.09E ID Scanner Service Manual

sw_05_software-options_e_template_v05
DD+DIS107.10E Software Options - Clean Installation Procedure
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
1. Read the “Generic Safety Directions” document
the equipment.
2. Strictly observe all safety directions within the “Generic Safety Directions” and on
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF CLEAN INSTALL PROCEDURE....................................................................5

2 PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................6
2.1 Downloading / ordering the Clean Install Kit.............................................................................6
2.2 Obtaining additionally needed Tools, Documentation and Software ........................................6
2.2.1 Tools for a clean Installation Procedure ...................................................................................6
2.2.2 Documentation for a clean Installation Procedure ....................................................................7
2.3 Software for a clean Installation Procedure ..............................................................................7
2.3.1 TWAIN Digitizer Device Software (ASAP) ................................................................................7
2.3.2 Latest Hotfix ..............................................................................................................................7
2.3.3 Configuration File for the NX Workstation ................................................................................8
2.4 Obtaining Application License File (if needed) .........................................................................8
3 CLEAN INSTALL PROCEDURE ..............................................................................................8

3.1 Prerequisites .............................................................................................................................8
3.2 Reset a previous RAID Configuration.....................................................................................10
3.3 Adjust BIOS Settings ..............................................................................................................12
3.3.1 Adjusting BIOS Settings for DELL PCs ..................................................................................12
3.3.2 Adjusting BIOS Settings for HP PCs ......................................................................................13
3.4 Installing the Operating System (OS) .....................................................................................14
3.4.1 Starting the OS Installation .....................................................................................................14
3.4.2 Automatic Installation of Operating System............................................................................16
3.4.3 Finishing OS Installation .........................................................................................................17
3.5 Performing additional Partitioning ...........................................................................................18
3.6 Configuring Basic Operating System Settings........................................................................22
3.7 Installing the latest available Hotfixes.....................................................................................25
3.8 Configuring Network ...............................................................................................................26
3.8.1 Changing TCP/IP Settings of Local Area Connection (LAN)..................................................26
3.8.2 Configuring the wireless Network Connection for the wireless ICU Workflow .......................28
3.8.3 Changing the Hostname and/or Workgroup/Domain of the Operating System......................28
3.9 Installing NX Software and Documentation ............................................................................30


3.9.1 Installing NX Software.............................................................................................................31
3.9.2 Installing NX Software Update (SU) .......................................................................................32
3.9.3 Installing NX Online Help ........................................................................................................32
3.10 Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ..................................................................33
3.11 Installing TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP)...........................................................................33
3.12 Installing FUSE Software ........................................................................................................34
4 OPERATING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION............................................................................35

5 LOADING LICENSES AND ACTIVATING THE INSTALLATION...........................................35
5.1 Loading Licenses (ALF) ..........................................................................................................35
5.2 Activation.................................................................................................................................36
6 INSTALLING ADDITIONAL DRIVERS ...................................................................................39

6.1 Installing Monitor Software and Calibration ............................................................................39
6.2 Upgrading ID Tablet Firmware................................................................................................40
6.3 Installing the ID Scanner Drivers ............................................................................................40
7 NX CONFIGURATION VIA CONFIGURATION TOOL...........................................................41

8 COMPLETING INSTALLATION .............................................................................................41
8.1 Activating RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) .....................................................41
8.2 Adjusting Anti-Virus Settings...................................................................................................45
8.3 Backup of Configuration Data .................................................................................................45
8.4 Performing the NX Acceptance Test ......................................................................................46


1 Overview of Clean Install Procedure
Overview of required steps:

# Step Section Duration*
PREPARATION
1. Download / order the clean installation kit. 2.1 -
2. Obtain additional tools, documentation and software. 2.2 -
3. Obtain the Application License File (ALF) if not available anymore. 2.3 -
CLEAN INSTALL PROCEDURE
4. Check prerequisites. 3.1 -
5. Reset a previous RAID Configuration. 3.2 10 min.
6. Adjust BIOS settings. 3.3 10 min.
7. Install operating system. 3.4 60 min.
8. Perform additional partitioning. 3.5 5 min.
9. Configure basic operating system settings. 3.6 5 min.
10. Install hotfixes (I). 3.7 50 min.
11. Configure network. 3.8 10 min.
12. Install application and documentation. 3.9 30 min.
13. Install UPS (optional). 3.10 5 min.
14. Install TWAIN digitizer software (if applicable) 3.11 10 min.
15. Install FUSE software. 3.12 10 min.
OPERATING SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
16. Edit security settings according to hospital guidelines. 4 10 min.
17. Create and configure users. 4 15 min.
LOADING LICENSES AND ACTIVATING THE INSTALLATION
18. Load Licenses 5.1 10 min.
19. Activate NX 5.2 15 min.
INSTALLING ADDITIONAL DRIVERS
20. Install monitor software and calibrate monitor. 6.1 20 min.
21. Upgrade ID Tablet firmware (if applicable) 6.2 10 min.
22. Install ID Scanner Driver (if applicable) 6.3 10 min.
NX CONFIGURATION VIA CONFIGURATION TOOL
23. Enable or disable active licenses if needed. 7 10 min.
24. Configure users. 7 10 min.
25. Import Configuration settings. 7 20 min.
26. Activate the configuration 7 2 min.
COMPLETING INSTALLATION
27. Activate RAID 8.1 130 min.
28. Adjust Anti-virus settings (if applicable) 8.2 20 min.
29. Create backup of configuration data. 8.3 10 min.
30. Perform Acceptance Test. 8.4 30 min.
Overall required time: Approximately 8 hours
* Reference value. Required time depends on the complexity of the situation on site.


2 Preparation
2.1 Downloading / ordering the Clean Install Kit
NOTE:
Starting with NX 2.0 staged on DELL Optiplex 755 the Clean Install Material is
delivered with the system.
 The Clean Install material is available as spare part. See NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 13 Spare Parts List DD+DIS116.10M (Intranet Link /
Extranet Link).
 The Clean Install material can also be downloaded from the FTP-Server:
(1) Open the FTP Access document on the GSO Library (Intranet Link /
Extranet Link).
(2) Connect to the FTP server according to the instructions given in the FTP
Access document.
(3) Download the following ISO files and burn it as disk image on DVD:
 NX_X.8300_DVD1_VX.Y.iso
 NX_X.8300_DVD2_VX.Y.iso
NOTE
For a specification of the contents of the Starterkit DVDs and the DVD versions that are
compatible with a specific NX profile refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
2.2 Obtaining additionally needed Tools, Documentation and Software
2.2.1 Tools for a clean Installation Procedure
Take the following tools on site:

 A standard serial cable to upgrade the firmware of the ID Tablet.
If the ID Tablet is connected via USB, make sure to take a serial cable on site.
 A portable medium (USB Stick or CD-R/RW).


2.2.2 Documentation for a clean Installation Procedure
Take the following documentation on site:

 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual, DD+DIS105.10E
 If the NX workstation is part of a Mammography or DR Solution: The corresponding
solution service manual.
2.3 Software for a clean Installation Procedure
2.3.1 TWAIN Digitizer Device Software (ASAP)
If the NX Workstation is connected to a TWAIN digitizer (e.g. DX-S, CR 30-X or

DX-G ASAP *), the compatible device software has to be downloaded from
Mednet GSO Library and installed on the workstation.
* DX-G is a DICOM digitizer as of SW version  NIM_2xxx
(1) To find the compatible version number(s) refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
(2) Go to the Mednet GSO Library (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) to download the
device software packages:
GSO Library  Computed Radiography  CR Digitizers  <Digitizer name> 
Freeware
2.3.2 Latest Hotfix
During Clean Installation a Hotfix version is installed on the system that may not be the
latest available Hotfix version.
Run the FUSE updater on the Service PC to receive the latest available Hotfix version.
NOTE:
For instructions to obtain and install the Fast Update Service (FUSE)
software refer to the FUSE Service Manual FUSE - Fast Update Service
(Automatic Software Update) DD+DIS134.08E


2.3.3 Configuration File for the NX Workstation
If the configuration for the specific site is lost:

Organize the default configuration file of the NX workstation of the region or country
(to be setup by the country during the initial NX workstation installations).
2.4 Obtaining Application License File (if needed)
IMPORTANT:
When performing a clean installation, the Application License File (ALF) should
normally still be available and can be used for the same software version after the
clean install.
This is not the case if the ALF got lost after a system crash. In this case fetch it from
the Electronic License Management System (ELMS).
INSTRUCTION:
For a detailed description of the procedures to obtain a License File (ALF) refer to the
Licensing Service Manual (DD+DIS012.06E) on MedNet GSO Library
3 Clean Install Procedure
3.1 Prerequisites
ACTION:
Check the following items before starting the installation:
 Check hardware to see if it is supported for NX Operating System.

Install the NX only on computers that are on the supported Hardware list.
The list of supported hardware is specified in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual, chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E
 Use the correct set of the Installation DVDs:

o NX Starterkit DVD 1
o NX Starterkit DVD 2


 Identify Windows License Key:
For all installations provide the Windows license key for the operating system. This
is often a ‘hologrammed’ sticker attached to the system itself by the manufacturer.
The key itself is referred to as the ‘Product ID’ and
has the form 5 characters in 5 blocks, for example:
HVYF3-T28PW-HWGKB-33J4W-B4VPM (Example)
 Make sure a network is connected:
When installing, the NX PC must have a network connection.

The minimum is a connection to a hub so the system can recognize a network
connection and another PC on the network.
The system can be connected to a larger network like the hospital or company
network. In this case, if other NX systems are installed at the same time, an IP
conflict can occur.
 Optionally, connect a QWERTY (US international) keyboard:
When logged on as administrator MS Windows will always be set to “English”.

Therefore it is easier working with a QWERTY keyboard (US international) attached
when typing something.


3.2 Reset a previous RAID Configuration
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
These steps are only required if RAID was already activated before on the installed
hard disks.
If the installed hard disks have not been using RAID before, continue with section
3.3 "Adjust BIOS Settings".
(1) Press <CTRL-i> during system boot, when the screen is displaying the Intel
Matrix Storage Manager RAID overview.
On a HP PC it is necessary to first press <Enter> on the message:
Press any key for option ROM messages
(2) Choose option 3 to Reset Disks to Non-RAID in the Main Menu:
Figure 1
(3) Select both Member Disks with <Space> and press <Enter> to complete.


(4) Press <Y> to confirm the Warning dialog:
Figure 2
(5) Reboot and enter the BIOS-setup:

 On a Dell PC: Press <F2>.
 On a HP PC: Press <F10>.
(6) Set the drive access to IDE (Non-RAID):
 On a Dell PC: Set SATA operation to be to: RAID/Autodetect/ATA
 On a HP PC: Set SATA operation to: IDE
(7) Insert the NX Starterkit DVD 2.
(8) Reboot the PC and
 On a DELL PC: Press <F12> during the boot sequence (custom boot).
 On a HP PC: Press <F9> during the boot sequence (custom boot).
NOTE:
After changing the BIOS settings on HP desktop PCs, an additional
screen is displayed that informs about updated configuration options.
Confirm the changes by pressing <F1>.
(9) Select to boot from CD-ROM and press <Enter>.


NOTE:
Be aware that the installation has to be cancelled in the next step!
(10) Cancel the installation by pressing <N>:

+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! AGFA NX System !
! Multi Language !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
! New Installation. !
! !
! (Y) Installation !
! (N) Exit !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
Figure 3
(11) Access the CD-ROM drive by typing into the DOS prompt: K:\ or I:\
Remark: Depending on the SATA (Serial Advanced Technology Attachment)
emulation the CD-ROM will now be available on either K: or I:
(12) Type: Gdisk.exe 2 /i /DEL /ALL /Y
Remark: This will erase all parititons on the 2nd harddrive.
(13) Continue with section 3.4 Installing the Operating System (OS).
3.3 Adjust BIOS Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
To setup the BIOS settings on DELL PCs refer to section 3.3.1.
For HP PCs refer to section 3.3.2.
3.3.1 Adjusting BIOS Settings for DELL PCs
(1) Enter the BIOS setup by pressing <F2> during booting.

(2) Make sure that the boot sequence is set as follows: First hard drive (HD), then
CD/DVD drive.


(3) Set ATA/SATA mode:

 For machines that use serial ATA drives find a BIOS option to set the ATA
mode. Normal or combined can be chosen here. Make sure to set this setting
to ‘combined’.
 For Dell 745: SATA operation to be set to: Legacy
 For Dell 755: SATA operation to be set to: RAID/Autodetect/ATA
 For Dell 960: SATA operation to be set to: RAID/Autodetect/ATA
(4) Activate SMART Reporting: Set Drives\SMART Reporting to <ON>.

(5) Deactivate Hyper-threading (not applicable for multiple core CPUs):
Select Performance\Hyper-Threading and set it to <Off>.
(6) Activate Multiple CPU core (only applicable for multiple core CPUs (e.g. Dell
D830, Dell Optiplex 755 and Dell Optiplex 960):
Set Multiple CPU core to <ON>.
NOTE:
Also check if a SCSI hard disk is installed. If yes, additional
configurations need to be performed later in section 3.6.
(7) Save changes and exit BIOS:

 On a Dell 960: Press <Apply> to confirm all changes and press <Exit> to
leave the BIOS settings
 On other Dell PCs: Exit with <ESC> and save the changes.
3.3.2 Adjusting BIOS Settings for HP PCs

(2) Make sure that the boot sequence is set as follows: First the hard drive (HD),
then the CD/DVD drive.
NOTE:
On HP 8530p and HP 8540p laptops the CD/DVD drive is referred to as
"Notebook Upgrade bay".
(3) Set Storage Options:

 For HP DC7800 and HP DC7900 and 8000 Elite set: SATA emulation to IDE
 For HP 8530p and HP 8540p laptops set: SATA device mode to ATA/IDE


NOTE:
Also check if a SCSI hard disk is installed. If yes, additional
configurations need to be performed later in section 3.6.
(4) Go to File  Save Changes & Exit, press <Enter> and accept with <F10>.
NOTE:
3.4 Installing the Operating System (OS)
NOTE:
Recommendation: Have the Acceptance Test Protocol document at hand and fill it in at
every installation and configuration step instead of filling it in afterwards.
The document is available in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 6
IMPORTANT:
Installing the Operating System leads to a removal of all available data on the complete
hard disk, including all existing partitions!
3.4.1 Starting the OS Installation

(2) Reboot the PC and
 On a HP PC: Press <F9> during the boot sequence (custom boot).
 On a DELL PC: Press <F12> during the boot sequence (custom boot).
(3) Select to boot from CD-ROM and press <Enter>.


(4) Confirm the installation by pressing <Y>.

+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! AGFA NX System !
! Multi Language !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
! New Installation. !
! !
! (Y) Installation !
! (N) Exit !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
Figure 4
(5) Confirm the installation once more by pressing <Y>. Be aware that as soon as
<Y> is pressed, the (re-)installation is starting, and all data will be erased.
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! AGFA NX on XP !
! Multi Language !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
! !
! Installation will erase all current systems !
! !
! (Y) This machine will be totally reinstalled !
! (N) Exit to Operating system !
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
Figure 5
(6) After approximately 5 minutes, the RAID BIOS setting instruction is displayed.
Remove the DVD from the drive and press <CTRL+ALT+DEL> to reboot.
Figure 6
IMPORTANT:
Perform the next four steps only on an HP DC7800, HP DC7900, HP 8000 and
HP8540p system. On DELL systems continue with step (10).
(8)  On HP8540p: Set “SATA device mode” to: AHCI
 On HP 8530p: Do not activate the storage option RAID.
 On all other HPs: Set Storage Options/SATA emulation to: RAID
(9) Save changes and exit the BIOS.
NOTE:


IMPORTANT:
Perform the next steps only on a DELL 755 or DELL 960 system. Also perform
them if installing a DELL 755 or DELL 960 system without RAID!
(11) Set ATA/SATA mode to: RAID ON
(12) Save changes and exit the BIOS.
NOTE:
Directly after reboot an extra screen is displayed showing automatically
updated configurations. Save the changes by pressing <F1>.
NOTE:
The RAID setting is applied for consistency between all hardware types and has no
effect on the functionality of a system without RAID hardware.
Result From now on the installation is automatic.
3.4.2 Automatic Installation of Operating System
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
Now the Operating System installs automatically. On RAID systems, the installation
may be interrupted by a failure of the system to boot after an automatic reboot.
This can be solved by changing the boot order of the hard disks:
On an HP PC:
(1) Press <F10> during booting to enter the BIOS setup.
(2) Go to Storage and select Boot Order.
(3) Set the other hard disk as primary boot media.
(4) Press <F10> to accept changes.
(5) Select Save Changes and Exit and press <F10> to accept.
On a DELL PC:
(1) During booting press <F12> to enter the BIOS setup.
(2) Select the other hard disk as primary boot media.


Result After changing the boot order, the installation will continue.
IMPORTANT:
Don’t click anything until the log on screen described in the next section appears.
It could interrupt the installation.
The automatic installation consists of the Norton Ghost Restore Procedure, the
Windows Setup and post-installation customization.
 Norton Ghost Restore Procedure:
A progress bar indicates the progress of the restore procedure. The PC will
automatically reboot afterwards.
 Windows Setup:
During the installation a lot of screens of the Windows Setup are displayed.
The installation runs in the background.
 Post-installation customization:
Automatic scripts run once the Windows Setup process has completed. Wait until
the log on screen appears. Do not interrupt these scripts.
3.4.3 Finishing OS Installation
NOTE:
It is possible that after the Operating System installation the screen resolution is set
very low. In this case set the resolution to minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels. See below for
resolutions of laptop PCs:
 On a Dell D830 and HP 8530p laptop PC: Set it to 1680 x 1050 pixels.
 On a HP 8540p laptop PC: Set it to 1600 x 900 pixels.
NOTE:
Attach the Windows License sticker to the upgraded workstation next to the Windows
Server License sticker (if not yet done).
Result The Operating System installation is finished. It is now necessary to carry out system
configuration steps.


3.5 Performing additional Partitioning
REQUIRED TIME:
The operating system has now been installed on the System & Configuration partition
(drive letter C:).
For NX one more partition (Data & Backup partition) has to be defined with
the following parameters:
Drive letter: D:
Volume Label: DATA
Size: Complete Remaining rest of disk-space
IMPORTANT:
RAID Sytems contain a second hard disk for RAID mirroring. On RAID systems create
both partitions on one disk!
NOTE:
The screenshots below are made on a two hard disk system. If the platform contains
only one harddisk, the previous OS installation step has allocated an amount of
Gbyte of the first hard disk found for the C partition. The D partition has to be made
manually.
To create a new partition, perform the following steps:
(1) Right-click My Computer and select Manage from the menu:
Figure 7


(2) In the Computer Management window, select Disk Management:
Figure 8: Example – The disk sizes may differ.
(3) Right-click an unallocated disk partition on disk 0.

(4) Select ”New Partition” from the menu.
(5) Click <Next> in the welcome window:
Figure 9


(6) Select Primary Partition and click <Next>:
Figure 10
(7) Leave the default maximum diskspace as partition size for the new partition click
<Next>.
212869
Figure 11 – Example
(8) Choose the drive letter D and click <Next>.
Figure 12


(9) Enter the following settings:

 Choose the partition formatting.
 Fill in the appropriate Volume Label DATA.
 Check: Perform a quick format
 Uncheck: Enable file and folder compression
Figure 13
(10) Click <Next>.

(11) Click <Finish> in the summary window to create the partition:
Figure 14
Result: The new partition and the remaining unpartitioned space is displayed in
the computer management window.
(12) Close the window Computer Management.


3.6 Configuring Basic Operating System Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
Whenever the language or unicode settings are changed it is advised to use the
Administrator account.
Reason: The service language should always be English. In case service is performed
remotely, the service engineer might not be able to understand the local language.
(1) Log in using the Administrator account (don't use crservice account here).
(2) Go to Start  Settings  Control Panel. If the Control Panel is in
Category View click Switch to classic view.
(3) Double-click Date & Time and adjust the Date and Time Properties.
Figure 15


(4) Open the tab Time Zone.
Figure 16
(5) Select the correct time zone and check the checkbox: Automatically adjust for
daylight saving changes
(6) Click <OK>.
(7) Go back to the Control Panel and choose Regional & Language Settings.
(8) Set the appropriate setting in the tabs Regional Options and Languages.
(9) Go to the tab Advanced and select the language to match the language version of
non-unicode programs:
Figure 17
(10) Check the box Apply all settings to the current user account and to the default
user profile.


(11) Click <OK> on following message:
Figure 18
NOTE:
This has only effect when users are not in a domain. For instructions to:
 Change the language of single users
 Change to non-standard string formats (e.g. Date & Time, figure
formats)
 Configure the default language for new NX users
refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and
Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E section Changing the
regional settings of the NX (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
(12) Go to the tab Languages and click <Details...>.

(13) If the correct keyboard is not listed under Installed services, click <Add...>,
select the keyboard layout and click <OK>.
(14) Select in the Default Input Language dropdown list, the correct input language.
(15) Click <OK>.
(16) Click <OK> if this screenshot appears:
Figure 19
(17) Confirm that the files already installed on the hard disk can be used
(Only if a dialog is displayed asking for a decision).
(18) Reboot the system if it is requested by the system.


NOTE:
The following steps are only applicable to PCs with SCSI disk, not for SATA disks:
(19) On the desktop, click right on My Computer and select Properties.

(20) Go to tab Hardware and click Device Manager.
(21) Select the disk drive, click right and select Properties.
(22) In the tab Policies check Enable write caching on the disk.
Figure 20
(23) Click <OK>.

(24) Repeat the steps from step (19) if the system contains more than one SCSI disk.
3.7 Installing the latest available Hotfixes
REQUIRED TIME:
Check if the latest Hotfix version is installed on the clean installed NX:
(1) To find out the installed version refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E
(2) If a higher Hotfix version has been downloaded by FUSE (see section 2.2.2),
install the latest Hotfix version on the system.
NOTE:
Some of the Hotfix patches are skipped during installation since the NX application is
not installed yet. This is why the Hotfix installation will be repeated after installing the
application (section Fehler! Verweisquelle konnte nicht gefunden werden.).


3.8 Configuring Network
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
The following actions need to be performed to configure the Windows network settings.

1. Changing TCP/IP Settings 3.8.1
Configuring the wireless Network Connection for the 3.8.2

2.
wireless ICU Workflow
Changing the Hostname and/or Workgroup/Domain of the 3.8.3

3.
Operating System
3.8.1 Changing TCP/IP Settings of Local Area Connection (LAN)
IMPORTANT:
If the wireless Intensive Care Unit (ICU) feature will be used on this NX workstation,
do not perform the steps described here (in section 0). Continue with section 3.8.2.
(1) Log in using crservice account.

(2) Go to Start  Settings  Control Panel. If Control Panel is in Category View,
switch to Classic View and select Network Connections.
Figure 21


(3) Right-click Local Area Connection and go to Properties. The window Local Area
Connection Properties opens.
(4) Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP):
Figure 22
(5) Click <Properties>.

The window Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties opens.
(6) Change the values according to the customers needs:
Figure 23
(7) Click <OK> (on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog).
(8) Click <OK> (on the Local Area Connection Properties dialog).


3.8.2 Configuring the wireless Network Connection for the wireless ICU Workflow
IMPORTANT:
 This section is only applicable if the wireless Intensive Care Unit feature (technical
license: NX_ICU_CONFIGURATION) is used on this NX workstation.
 The wireless NX must not be plugged into the Ethernet network: Only one operating
mode is possible, either wireless or fixed network.
 The wireless NX must only be used for GenRad applications.
 The images on the wireless NX are not available for Central Monitoring.
(1) Go to: Start  Settings  Control Panel  Network Connections

IMPORTANT:
Do not disable the Local Area Connection.
(2) Right-click Wireless Network Connection and choose Properties.

(3) Configure the wireless network connection according to the settings of the
wireless network on site.
3.8.3 Changing the Hostname and/or Workgroup/Domain of the Operating System
NOTE:
Gather information about network environment in the hospital (Domain or Workgroup)
or refer to the information gathered in chapter 3 Installation Planning
(DD+DIS106.10E).
To change the hostname and or the workgroup of the NX PC, perform following steps:
(1) Right-click the My Computer icon on the desktop and select Properties.


(2) Select the tab Computer Name:
Figure 24
(3) Click <Change…>. The window Computer Name Changes opens.

(4) Enter the new parameters:
 Computer name (Host Name)
 And/or the Workgroup
 And/or the Domain
Figure 25
(5) Click <OK>.

(6) If the Workgroup or Domain has been changed the following welcome message
is displayed:
Figure 26


(7) Click <OK>. A message appears asking to reboot.

(8) Click <OK> (on the Computer Name Changes dialog box).
(9) Click <OK> (on the System Properties dialog box).
(10) Reboot the PC.
3.9 Installing NX Software and Documentation
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes (without additional Software Update)
Prerequisites:
Successful OS installation & partitioning (C and D)
The crservice account language setting is 'English'.
NOTE:
The following actions need to be performed to install Application and Documentation.

1. Installing Application 3.9.1
2. Installing NX Software Update (if available) 3.9.2
3. Installing NX Online Help 3.9.3


3.9.1 Installing NX Software
IMPORTANT:
 Before continuing, make sure the partition D (DATA) was created on disk 0 as
described in section 3.5.
 Do not disconnect the network during installation of the NX software, otherwise the
installation will fail!

(3) Browse in the CD-drive to the folder:
Service Software  NX Application NX X.0.8300.
(4) Double-click the file: NX X.0.8300 (Build.6.X.XXXX).exe
(5) The installation is guided by a setup wizard. Read carefully the messages and
instructions displayed in the wizard screens.
NOTE:
 The wizard will ask if a single partition system must be installed.
Do not check the box Install a single-partition system.
Figure 27
 This dialog decides on which partition the examination data (Pixel Files)
will be stored. The examination data must always be stored on
partition D on disk 0. Make sure the DATA partition D has been created
as described in section 3.5. If it hasn’t been created yet, cancel the
installation and create partition D.
(6) Reboot the workstation after finishing the installation wizard.



NOTE:
The logging information of the process application installation can be found in the log
file: C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\NXMain.log
NOTE:
After first reboot of the system, Windows may detect the USB dongle as 'new
hardware' and the installation wizard pops up. Follow the instructions of the wizard to
install the WIBU drivers.
3.9.2 Installing NX Software Update (SU)
NOTE:
This is the moment when available NX software updates are installed. Check the NX
2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Bulletins to see if there is a SU released for NX 2.0.8300 /
3.0.8300. The most recent SU should be installed. The documentation and software is
available on NX Starterkit DVD 1.

(2) Browse to the CD-drive to the folder Service Documentation to find the respective
installation instructions.
(3) Browse to the CD-drive to the folder Service Software to find the respective
installation package.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the ALF file to be activated, matches the version of the
software which is installed! How to pre-create an ALF file is described in section
2.3 "Obtaining Application License File (ALF)".
3.9.3 Installing NX Online Help
REQUIRED TIME:

Internet Explorer is automatically started, showing the Documentation CD
Navigation screen. If the Internet Explorer is not automatically started, browse to
the CD drive and double click index.htm.


(2) Click Install Online Help.

Three messages can pop up:
 Internet Explorer message “Active content in html …”: Click <Yes>.
 File download security warning: Click <Run>.
 Internet Explorer security warning “Publisher could not be verified …”:
Click <Run>.
(3) Click <Next>.
(4) The Online Help installer will guide through the Online Help installation
on the system. Choose one of the options.
(5) Click <Install>.
(6) Click <Finish> to end the installation procedure.
(7) Remove the NX Starterkit DVD 1.
(8) After finishing the upgrade inform the user representative about the usage of the
NX Online Help.
NOTE:
 Installing the Online Help (any language) will also install a special Thai font on the
NX Workstation that is required to read the Thai Online Help. This implies that
browsing Thai Online Help directly from the CD will not work before the Online Help
is actually installed on the Workstation.
 If required, the font can be manually installed by copying this file from the CD into
the Windows font folder: C:\…\Nx Online Help\Windows\Fonts\Angsd___.ttf
3.10 Installing an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
REQUIRED TIME:
For the UPS installation and configuration procedure refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
3.11 Installing TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP)
REQUIRED TIME:


NOTE:
This section is only applicable if a TWAIN digitizer is connected to the NX workstation:
(1) Install the digitizer software of the TWAIN digitizer (CR 30-X or DX-S or DX-G with
SW < NIM_2XXX) as described in the installation instructions enclosed to the
software.
IMPORTANT:
When the configuration of the NX workstation is finished, and the digitizer is switched
on, it is possible, that the following error messages are displayed on the NX
workstation:
Symptom 1 Error indicating, that the registration of the serial number failed.
Reason Restore not performed: NX workstation does not recognize the serial
number of the connected device.
Solution Step 1: Switch off digitizer. Step 2: Restore the latest digitizer backup.
Step 3: Re-boot control PC. Step 4: Switch on digitizer.
Alternative solution:
Fill in site specific data (Digitizer service client menu Configuration – Site
specific data). When done, select buttons <update site specific
data> and <configure site with new EMS serial number>.
Symptom 2 Error indicating, that software versions loaded onto machine and
installed on PC are not identical.
Reason Software mismatch between digitizer software loaded on digitizer and
installed on NX workstation.
Solution Perform software upload to the digitizer as described in the instructions
in the digitizer device software package. If the software version on the
digitizer is higher than on the workstation, install the corresponding
digitizer software version on the workstation.
3.12 Installing FUSE Software
REQUIRED TIME:


4 Operating System Configuration
Perform following steps as described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual

chapter 4 Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link):
 Editing Security Settings according to Hospital Guidelines

 Creating and Configuring Users on Operating System and Domain
5 Loading Licenses and Activating the Installation
5.1 Loading Licenses (ALF)
CAUTION:
For details refer to section 3.6.
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
If the installation wizard for the license dongle has not appeared yet, unplug the dongle
and reconnect it. The wizard will pop up. Click through it using the default settings.
Figure 28
To load the licenses the Application License File (*.alf) is needed (see section 0):


(1) Copy the ALF to: C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing

(2) Start up the license manager tool from:
Start  AGFA  Service  License manager
(3) Click the <Add License…> button.
(4) Browse to the folder: C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing
(5) Select the ALF and click <Open>.
(6) Reboot the PC.
Result The license file has been loaded successfully.
NOTE:
The logging information of the Licensing process can be found in the log file:
5.2 Activation
REQUIRED TIME:
The NX workstation is setup to be configured as one of these profiles, based on the

information retrieved from the loaded ALF file:
In-room mixed use NX workstation: Depending on the available licenses, the NX
workstation will be able to perform:
o Only GenRad examinations
o Only Mammography examinations
o Both GenRad and mammography examinations
For more information about the license configurations refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 Product Description
In-room veterinary NX workstation: Allows only configuring veterinary examinations.
Central monitoring system: Allows monitoring a set of in-room NX workstations.
IMPORTANT:
Activation will fail if the network is unplugged during activation of the NX Software.


(1) Log out and in again using the crservice account.
(2) Start the NX Activation Utility using the shortcut on the desktop, or
start it via
Start Menu  Agfa  NX  Service  Install Tools.
Figure 29
(3) Click <Next> on the message that a fresh NX will be activated.
(4) Choose the values for dose calculation: Logarithm Median (LGM) values or
Exposure Index (EI)
Decision should be based on these rules:
 If a CMS is installed, all connected NX in-room workstations must have the
same setting as the CMS.
 For information about which digitizer type is compatible with which dose
calculation, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link). For
more generic information about dose calculation refer to chapter 1 Product
Description, section Dose Monitoring (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) and the
NX User Manual.
(5) Click <Next>.
NOTE:
Depending on the licenses, following components are installed now:
 Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE)
 X-Ray Generator and DR Detector Interfacing Software (XRDI)
 Sedecal Software Console (DX-D 300 U-arm)
The software for each component is already available in folder:
c:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Installers\


(6) If one or more of the above mentioned

components are installed, select the
component and press next. See
example in Figure 30.
If none of the above mentioned
components are installed, continue
with next step.
Figure 30
IMPORTANT:
If more than one component is displayed (like in the example of Figure 30),
select the required component. For compatibility information refer to the
solution specific information.
Example for XRDI:
Solution GSO Library Path Document

CR Mammo 1C Computed Radiography
=> CR Mammography Systems
=> CR Mammo Phase 1C
CR Mammo (DX-M) Computed Radiography Software / Hardware
=> CR Mammography Systems Compatibility Chart
=> CR Mammo Solution (DX-M) and/or specific Service
DX-D 300 Direct Radiography => DR Equipment Bulletin
=> DX-D 300 (Soft Console)
DX-D 500 Direct Radiography => DR Equipment
=> DX-D 500n
(7) Select the default language for the NX workstation and click <Next>.
NOTE:
After Activation, the NX workstation will be configured to use the default
string formats (e.g. date and time) for the selected language, and the
selected language will be the default language for new users.
For instructions how to tune the local string formats (e.g. date and time) or
how to change a user's language refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices


(8) Check the overview of specified selections: To change options, click <Back>. To
cancel the activation, click <Cancel>. If all selections are correct, click
<Activate>. The activation starts.
(9) Click <Next> after the activation has completed.
(10) Choose Reboot now and click <Finish>.
NOTE:
The logging information of the process NX activation can be found in the log file:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\Nx\NXactivate.log
6 Installing additional Drivers
6.1 Installing Monitor Software and Calibration
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To identify and retrieve the required monitor software refer to

(2) For instructions to install the software and calibrating the monitors, refer to
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Monitor Options


6.2 Upgrading ID Tablet Firmware
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
 If the ID tablet firmware version is 1.12.07 or higher this step is not required.
 If a mobile ID Scanner is used with this NX workstation, updating the ID Tablet
firmware is not required.
and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E section ‘Upgrading ID tablet firmware’
(Intranet Link / Extranet Link). This section also describes how to check the ID tablet
firmware version.
6.3 Installing the ID Scanner Drivers
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
This section is only applicable if the ID Scanner is used in combination with this NX
workstation.
INSTRUCTION:
For detailed instructions refer to the ID Scanner Service Manual chapter 1 Controls,
Connections, and Setup Procedures DD+DIS124.09E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
A short overview of the instructions is:
(1) Install the ID Scanner drivers on the NX Workstation.
(2) Adjust the COM Port Properties.


7 NX Configuration via Configuration Tool
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 5 – 15 minutes depending on the amount of configuration tasks
(1) Perform the "Configuration via Configuration Tool" as described in NX 2.0.8300 /

3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration
(2) Perform following settings in case the NX workstation is running on a laptop PC:
 Power settings as described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E section
Laptop Power Settings (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
These settings also have to be applied on the automatically created
accounts: ‘crservice’ and ‘Administrator’
 On laptop PCs configure the screen resolution manually on each individual
user account:
o On the Dell D830 and HP 8530p laptop PCs: Change the screen
resolution to 1680 x 1050 pixels.
o On the HP 8540p laptop PC: Change the screen resolution to 1600 x
900 pixels
.
(3) Perform additional configuration steps if required for this specific system, e.g.
additional users, PCAnyWhere configuration, etc.
8 Completing Installation
8.1 Activating RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks)
IMPORTANT:
RAID is supported ONLY on hardware that has been ORIGINALLY delivered as RAID
system and equipped with a second harddisk.
For specification of hardware types supporting RAID refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility Chart DD+DIS105.10E
It is not allowed to install RAID on systems not originally delivered as RAID system,
even if the hardware is compatible with RAID.


REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 130 minutes (waiting time included)

(2) Refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1 SW/HW Compatibility
Chart DD+DIS105.10E to find the folder of the respective RAID tool installer,
depending on the NX PC that is used.
(3) Double-click the respective installer file: E.g. R208364.exe or sp44098.exe
(4) A security warning may be displayed. Click <Run>:
Figure 31
(5) Click <Continue> on the next dialog:
Figure 32


(6) A location is requested where to unzip the files to:

Enter C:\DRV\<Name of the RAID installer file> and then click
<Ok>.
R208364
(7) Create the location by clicking <Yes>.
Figure 34
(8) Click <Ok> on the next dialog:
Figure 35


(9) Confirm all screens of the Intel Matrix Storage Manager setup wizard.
Result: The PC will be automatically rebooted:
Figure 36: First dialog of Setup Wizard Figure 37: Last dialog of Setup Wizard

(11) Click the Start button. Go to All Programs  Intel Matrix Storage Manager  Intel
Matrix Storage Console to launch the Intel Storage Console.
(12) Select: Protect data from a hard drive failure with RAID 1:
Figure 38
(13) Click <Create a RAID 1 volume>.


(14) Click <Yes> on following message to start migrating:
Figure 39
Result The progress of migration is displayed:
Figure 40
IMPORTANT:
Do not perform a reboot of the system until the migration process has finished
completely! Apart from that the the migration process does not interfere with other
actions to be carried out on the PC.
8.2 Adjusting Anti-Virus Settings
To find the procedures on how to configure the supported Anti-virus software refer to
8.3 Backup of Configuration Data
REQUIRED TIME:
make a backup. Follow this procedure:
(1) Open the Configuration Tool and load the active configuration.
(2) In the Configuration Tool menu select: File  Save as…


save place. Name the file that it can be identified later on: e.g.
<Site>_initial_configuration_<date>.xml
Agfa  NX  Service  Backup Restore  Backup all data
For more information about backup scripts, see NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E
8.4 Performing the NX Acceptance Test
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
Check if all required fields of the Acceptance Test have been filled out, complete it and
hand it over to the customer according to the instructions given in the Acceptance Test
document.
IMPORTANT:
Refer to the respective Solution Manual (e.g. CR Mammography Solution Manual) for
additional Acceptance Test on Solution level.


NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Remote Servicing
This document informs about important topics when using for remote servicing:
• Secure Remote Service System (SRSS)
• Remote Desktop
• pcAnywhere
• Fast Update Service (FUSE)

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS134.08E FUSE Manual
SRSS Manuals (e.g. Entry Level, SRSS for OEM and 3rd party)

► Manufacturer
Publisher
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SETTING SCREEN RESOLUTION FOR REMOTE SERVICING ............................................4

2 USING SRSS............................................................................................................................5
3 REMOTE DESKTOP ................................................................................................................5
4 PCANYWHERE ........................................................................................................................5
4.1 Configuring pcAnywhere...........................................................................................................5
4.2 Terminating pcAnywhere Session ............................................................................................7
4.3 Rebooting the Remote PC from a pcAnywhere Session..........................................................7
4.4 Rebooting the Remote PC from a Remote Desktop Session...................................................8
5 FAST UPDATE SERVICE (FUSE) ...........................................................................................8


1 Setting Screen Resolution for Remote Servicing
NOTE:
Make sure to apply the screen settings before logging on to NX via Remote Service, as
NX will only run properly at the specified resolution!
(1) First set the display settings of the client PC on the resolution
1280 x 1024 pixels.
(2) Open the Citrix Program Neighborhood and double-click the icon SNDB.
(3) Click <Settings> in the toolbar:
Figure 1
(4) Open the Default Options tab and in window Properties, select
Seamless Window:
Figure 2
(5) Click <OK>.


2 Using SRSS
In order to connect to an NX station via Secure Remote Service System (SRSS), the
user name & password for the “crservice” account needs to be used.
For more information regarding the usage of SRSS, please refer to the service
manuals of SRSS on MedNet GSO library (Intranet Link / Extranet Link):
Path: Technical Services Æ Service Delivery Æ SRSS
3 Remote Desktop
NOTE:
Be aware that when using Remote Desktop on Windows XP, it is possible for one
person only to be connected at a time.
4 pcAnywhere
4.1 Configuring pcAnywhere
NOTE:
• On NX 1.0 the configuration of pcAnywhere callers had to be re-done when the
hostname changes. This is not required anymore for NX versions later than
NX 1.0.
• Re-configuring pcAnywhere should not be required on NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300,
only in case of problems or if extra callers are to be added.
• By default, two callers are configured: crservice and Administrator


(1) Open the pcAnywhere icon on the desktop.

(2) Click on Hosts in the left pane as shown, right-click on
Network, Cable, DSL and select Properties.
Figure 3
(3) Go to the Callers tab on top.

(4) Choose the Windows type:
• To add a new user, click the icon new caller:

• To edit a listed caller, double click the entry in the caller list.
Figure 4
(5) Check the bullet: User


(6) Select [Local Machine] for Domain.

(7) Select the user account.
(8) Repeat this for all other accounts access needs to be granted to.
4.2 Terminating pcAnywhere Session
NOTE:
To terminate a pcAnywhere Session, use Disconnect…. Using Logoff will cause the
pcAnywhere host service on the NX workstation to crash and to be no longer
accessible.
4.3 Rebooting the Remote PC from a pcAnywhere Session
NOTE:
If a software installer wants to automatically reboot the remote PC, it is advised to
refuse the automatic reboot and reboot the remote PC manually using this procedure.
(1) Within pcAnywhere, choose the option Restart Host Computer on the
left option panel:
Figure 5
(2) Confirm the Reboot request.

(3) The remote session is terminated on the Host computer and Host computer will
be rebooted.


4.4 Rebooting the Remote PC from a Remote Desktop Session
(1) On the remote PC, go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Windows Security
Figure 6
(2) In the Windows Security dialog, click <Shutdown...>.
(3) In the Shutdown dialog, select Restart and click <OK>.
5 Fast Update Service (FUSE)
The FUSE environment will automatically allow downloading and installing software
updates from a centralized Update Server.
The download can be achieved via the internet on a customer processing station (e. g.:
NX workstation) or a Service PC.
These software updates comprise Operating System (OS) hotfixes and Agfa Imaging
applications (e.g. NX updates).
NOTE:
The initial release of FUSE contains only OS hotfixes updates, support for other types
of updates are planned to be added in later releases.


For more information about installation and use of FUSE, refer to:
Item Name Reference *

Service Bulletin Release of FUSE – Fast Update Service Intranet Link /
(DD+DIS166.08E) Extranet Link
Service FUSE – Fast Update Service (DD+DIS134.08E) Intranet Link /
Documentation Extranet Link
FUSE Software Installation file (exe file) Intranet Link /
Extranet Link
* For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative for access to the
documents and software.


NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Monitor Options
This document provides:

• Installation Instructions for optional monitor types
• Calibration Instructions for all supported monitor types

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Documentation

► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPTIONAL MONITORS ............................................4

1.1 Obtaining the Installation Material for optional Monitors...........................................................4
1.2 Installing the PCIe Controller in the NX PC and connecting Monitor........................................6
1.3 Installing the BARCO Diagnostic Drivers..................................................................................7
1.4 Installing the MediCal QA Web Agent Software .....................................................................12
1.5 Installing the BARCO Touchscreen Driver .............................................................................12
1.6 Installing the ELO Touchscreen USB Driver...........................................................................14
2 CALIBRATION AND SETTINGS INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................16

2.1 Barco MediCal QA Web Calibration Procedure......................................................................17
2.2 Calibrating Standard Monitors ................................................................................................21
2.3 Setting up Monitor Resolution in Windows .............................................................................23
2.4 Configuring the Monitor in the NX Configuration Tool ............................................................24
2.5 Configuring the Taskbar Behavior on Display with Side-Application......................................24


1 Installation Instructions for optional Monitors
The following table shows, which installation procedures have to be performed for the
optional monitors. The symbol “9” indicates that the procedure has to be performed:
Section BARCO Monitor ELO

MFCD MFCD MFCD NIO 3MP-1H- NIO 2MP-1H- Wide Screen
1218 1219 1219 TS PCIe Diagn. PCIe Diagn. Touch monitor
1.1 Obtaining the Installation
Material for optional Monitors 9 9 9 9 9 9
1.2 Installing the PCIe Controller
in the NX PC and connecting - - - 9 9 -
Monitor
1.3 Installing the BARCO
Diagnostic Drivers - - - 9 9 -
1.4 Installing the MediCal QA Web
Agent Software 9 9 9 9 9 -
1.5 Installing the BARCO
Touchscreen - - 9 - - -
1.6 Installing the ELO
Touchscreen USB Driver - - - - - 9
1.1 Obtaining the Installation Material for optional Monitors
The monitors are available as optional kits. For the order number refer to the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Bulletin No. 1 Release of NX 2.0.8300 - 3.0.8300
NOTE:
The NX workstation only supports a single display. Dual display setup is not
supported.
The kit for BARCO monitors includes:

• BARCO Monitor
• Power cord
• Analogue monitor connector cable
• Digital monitor connector cable
• Connection plate


The kit for BARCO Diagnostic monitors includes:

• BARCO Diagnostic Monitor
• PCIe (PCI Express) Display Controller
• 12 V DC Power supply
• Power cables (US, UK, DIN-EU, Australia)
• Digital video connector cable
• Monitor Driver CD
• USB cable (not required)
• Cover plate for hiding the cables
NOTE:
The monitor can be swiveled between landscape and portrait position. For use
on a NX workstation, only landscape position is supported.
The kit for ELO widescreen touch monitor includes:

• ELO widescreen touch monitor
• 12 V DC Power supply
• Power cables (US, UK, DIN-EU, Australia)
• Digital video connector cable
• USB cable
• Cover plate for hiding the cables


1.2 Installing the PCIe Controller in the NX PC and connecting Monitor
WARNING:
Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before disconnecting or
connecting cables on printed circuit boards.
CAUTION:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap (CM+9 9999 0830 0)
around the wrist and connect the other end of this strap on a grounded conducting
metal piece.
(1) Open the NX PC housing.

(2) Remove the already installed display controller from the PCIe expansion slot.
NOTE:
The Barco controller will not support other monitor types. The original
display controller will be required if the BARCO Diagnostic Monitor is ever
removed again. Store the original display controller in save place, close to
the NX PC.
(3) Remove the Barco display controller from it's package and install it in the PCIe
expansion slot.
(5) On the NX PC, plug the video cable into the display controller's video output.
(6) On the display, plug the video cable into the DVI (digital) input.
(7) Connect the output of the 12 V DC power supply to the DC input of the display.
(8) Connect one end of the power cable that is used in the country to the AC input of
the 12 V DC power supply.
(9) Connect the other end of the power cord to a grounded power outlet.
IMPORTANT:
If the monitor is connected to a PC delivered with a DisplayPort to DVI-D Adapter (e.g.
HP DC7900), make sure the adapter is removed before from the DisplayPort of the PC.
Otherwise the detection of the PCle controller will fail.


1.3 Installing the BARCO Diagnostic Drivers
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
The BARCO Diagnostic monitor driver software is available on NX StarterKit DVD 2.
The location of the driver on the DVD is described in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
(1) Power on the Monitor and the PC.

(3) If the Found new Hardware wizard pops up, click <Cancel>.
(4) If this dialog appears, click <OK>:
Figure 1
(5) Insert the Starterkit DVD 2 into the CD-ROM drive.

(6) Browse to the folder where the driver is stored and double-click the
installer executable file.


(7) In the Barco Product Installation Wizard click <Next>:
Figure 2
(8) Click <Next> in the window listing the components to be installed.

(9) In the Barco Graphics Device Driver Installation Wizard click <Next>:
Figure 3


(10) Click <Next> in the window displaying the supported devices:
Figure 4
(11) Uncheck the checkbox Enable the DualView device? and click <Next>:
Figure 5


(12) Click <Next> on the selection overview window:
Figure 6
(13) Set following parameters:

• Palette mode: Select color to gray compatibility.
• Check the checkboxes Disable 10-bit grayscale and Disable Menu Shadow
Effect.
Figure 7
(14) Click <Next>.


(15) The Installation results are displayed, click <Finish>:
Figure 8
(16) Select to reboot the system and click <Finish>.

(18) Warning dialogs concerning orientation of the display may pop up:
Check the checkbox Don't show this message again and acknowledge the
warning. Click <No> if the dialog requests to reboot.


1.4 Installing the MediCal QA Web Agent Software
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) To find the which version of the MediCal QA Web Agent software is required for
the monitor and where it can be found on the NX Starterkit DVDs refer to
(2) Run the MediCal QA Web Agent installer.
(3) On the welcome message click <Next>.
(4) Accept the license agreement and click <Next>.
(5) Customer Information: Leave the default settings and click <Next>.
(6) Destination Folder: Leave the default setting and click <Next>.
(7) Click <Install>.
(8) After the installation click <Finish>. Do not reboot the computer to save time.
1.5 Installing the BARCO Touchscreen Driver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
Before starting the driver installation, make sure that the monitor’s USB cable is not
connected to the NX PC yet.
(1) To find the location of the touch screen driver installer, on the NX StarterKit
DVD 2 refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
(2) Run the touch screen driver installer.
(3) On the welcome message click <Next>.
(4) Do not check the PS/2 Interface Driver. Only click <Next>.
(5) Select 'none' when asked to do 4-point calibration. Click <Next>.


(6) Read the information dialog and plug in the USB cable.
NOTE:
After plugging in the USB cable, the windows dialog New hardware found
may appear. Cancel this dialog.
(7) Click <Next> in the information dialog.

(8) Do not check the Multi-monitor option. Only click <Next>.
(9) Click <Next> on the Destination Folder dialog.
(10) Click <Next> on the Program Folder dialog.
(11) The software asks to perform the calibration of the touch functionality (4 point
calibration). Click <Yes>:
Figure 9
(12) Perform the calibration following the instructions on the screen.

(13) The following window indicates a successful installation. Click <OK>:
Figure 10


1.6 Installing the ELO Touchscreen USB Driver
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• Before starting the driver installation, make sure that the monitor’s USB cable is
connected to the NX PC.
• If the Found new Hardware wizard pops up during installation, click <Cancel>.
(1) To find the location of the touch screen driver installer, on the NX StarterKit
DVD 2 refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
(2) Run the touch screen driver installer.
(3) Select English and click <Next>
(4) Accept the license agreement by clicking <Yes>.
(5) After the drivers are installed, check the option Calibrate Elo Touchscreen
monitors:
(6) Click <Finish>.

(7) The calibration window is displayed. Press the target with a finger.
Figure 11


NOTE:
The default behaviour of the ELO Touchscreen software is to produce a sound signal
when the user touches the screen. If this is not wanted by the customer, the sound can
be turned off using the following procedure:
(1) Click the ELO icon in the Windows toolbar.

(2) Select Elo Touchscreen properties from the menu.
(3) Open the tab Sound.
(4) Uncheck the option Beep on touch.
(5) Click <OK>.


2 Calibration and Settings Instructions
NOTE:
• Monitor calibration is mandatory when:
o A new NX Workstation is installed.
o NX is installed on an existing QS hardware.
o Upgrade or update of NX, if it cannot be confirmed that calibration was
performed before, according to this procedure.
o Before configuring image processing parameters, if it cannot be confirmed that
calibration was performed before, according to this procedure.
o A new monitor is installed.
o The environmental viewing conditions are changed.
• Monitor calibration is required, regardless whether P-values are configured for
display.
• Monitor calibration is recommended if the previous calibration was performed more
than 12 months ago.
The following table shows, which calibration procedures have to be performed and
which settings have to be applied for the monitors. The symbol “9” indicates that the
procedure has to be performed:
Section BARCO Monitor ELO HP/Dell

MFCD 1218, MFCD NIO 3 MP/2 MP Wide Screen Standard
MFCD 1219 1219 TS Diagnostic Touch monitor monitor
2.1 Barco MediCal QA Web

Calibration Procedure 9 9 9 - -
2.2 Calibrating Standard
Monitors - - - 9 9
2.3 Setting up Monitor Resolution
in Windows 9 9 9 9 9
2.4 Configuring the Monitor in the
NX Configuration Tool 9 9 9 9 9
2.5 Configuring the Taskbar
Behavior on Display with - - - 9* -
Side-Application
* Optional. See section 2.5 if it is applicable.


2.1 Barco MediCal QA Web Calibration Procedure
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
If a BARCO monitor is used, NX has to be configured to send P-values to the display.
(1) Use the monitor's on screen display (OSD) to configure contrast and brightness to
50 %. Refer to the BARCO Monitor User Manual for detailed instructions.
(2) Run the MediCal QA Web Agent: Start Æ Programs Æ Barco
NOTE:
The documentation of the Medical QA Web Agent can be accessed as
online help by clicking Help or as PDF document at this location:
C:\Program Files\Barco\QAWebAgent\docs\MediCal QAWeb Agent
manual.pdf
(3) Click Switch User:
Figure 12


(4) Select the user Advanced and type in the password: advanced
Figure 13
(5) Click <OK>.

(6) Click <Configuration>.
(7) Check if the display is listed in the tab General.
Remark: Some display types are automatically added to the list, some are not.
If the display is not added automatically, continue with step (8). If the display is
added automatically, select it and go to step (9).
Figure 14


(8) Click <Add display> to add the display for calibration if the display is not listed
in the tab General. The display information is detected automatically:
(9) Select the tab Calibration and click <Calibrate>:
Figure 16


(10) Set following values (mandatory):

• Display function: DICOM GSDF
• Click the button <Advanced> and in the Advanced options uncheck the
option Full calibration:
Figure 17
NOTE:
For all other settings it is advised to leave the defaults settings. For more
details refer to the MediCal QA Web documentation, section
How to calibrate displays.
(11) Click <Calibrate>.

(12) Click <OK>:
Figure 18
(13) Click <Close>.

(14) Click <Exit>.
(15) Reboot the NX workstation.


(16) Depending on the configured frequency for the QAWeb Visual Test, the following
screen may pop up after the reboot (might be hidden behind the NX application
window):
Figure 19
(17) Fill in crservice in the field Name and click <OK>.

(18) Choose the correct answers for the questions of the visual test.
NOTE:
After calibration, the typical light output will be lower than before calibration and reach
a value of approximately 180 cd/m².
2.2 Calibrating Standard Monitors
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
If a Standard Monitor is used, NX has to be configured to send gamma-values to the
display.
(1) Open the NX Configuration Tool.

(2) Go to: Device Configuration
(3) Select Monitor.
(4) In Type select 8 Bit GAMMA.
(5) In Test image select SMPTE.
(6) Click <View>.


(7) Check test image for following criteria:

A darker 95 % square in the full white square in the SMPTE pattern as well as a
brighter 5 % square in the black square of the SMPTE pattern are visible
(see arrows in figure below).
Figure 20
(8) Use the monitor's on screen display (OSD) to configure contrast and brightness
based on the SMPTE Test Pattern. Adjust brightness and contrast until the 5 %
and 95 % fields on the SMPTE -Test Pattern are best visible.
It may be necessary to switch a few times between brightness and contrast to get
the optimal result.
NOTE:
The calibration procedure may result in not getting the maximum light
output of the monitor, which is normal behavior.
For detailed description how to adjust brightness and contrast refer to
the monitors User Manual.
(9) If the result is not sufficient, click the image to return to the Configuration Tool and
adjust Gamma value and repeat from step (6).


2.3 Setting up Monitor Resolution in Windows
(1) Go to the Display Properties and set the Screen resolution to it’s maximum
value. The maximum value for the resolution depends on the type of monitor:
Figure 21: Example resolution Figure 22: Example resolution

BARCO 3 MP Monitor BARCO 2 MP Monitor
(2) Click <OK>.


2.4 Configuring the Monitor in the NX Configuration Tool
A dedicated monitor model file must be loaded in the NX Configuration Tool:

(1) In the Configuration Tool go to: Device Configuration Æ Monitor
(2) Click <Modify>.
(3) Select the monitor type in the dropdown. If the monitor type is not listed, see
NOTE below.
(4) Click <Ok>.
NOTE:
If the monitor type cannot be selected in the NX Configuration Tool, the monitor type is
not known to the NX workstation yet. The monitor type can be added to the system
using the model file describing the monitor type. The monitor model file is available on
Mednet GSO Library:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ <NX version> Æ Freeware
Link to the MedNet GSO Library: Intranet Link / Extranet Link
2.5 Configuring the Taskbar Behavior on Display with Side-Application
NOTE:
This section is only applicable if a monitor model file has been chosen in section 2.4
that has a double resolution specification (monitor resolution and NX pane
determination).
If a monitor model file is used that has a double resolution specification, the monitor
space of the NX application is limited. This allows another application to occupy the
rest of the display area. In this case also the visibility of the Windows taskbar can be
configured (default: taskbar is visible):
• To enable the taskbar auto-hide functionality, go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service
Æ Install Tools Æ Windows Taskbar - Turn AutoHide On
• To disable the taskbar auto-hide functionality, go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service
Æ Install Tools Æ Windows Taskbar - Turn AutoHide Off
NOTE:
• These settings must be applied to each user account.
• The NX application will automatically resize after startup.


Document Status: Approved Livelink ID: 30045010 Version: 5
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Using the RF-Tag Initialization Tool
This document describes the usage of the Radio Frequency (RF)-Tag Initialization Tool
installed on the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation. The procedure is different and
separately described for:
• CR cassettes
• CR detectors (for DX-S, DX-G and DX-M digitizers)

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS014.05E DX-S Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service –
Replacements Repair Procedures
DD+DIS035.09E DX-G Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service –
DD+DIS001.10E DX-M Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service –

► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
1.1 Information about the RF-Tag...................................................................................................4
1.2 When to use the RF Tag Initialization Tool...............................................................................5
2 PREREQUISITES.....................................................................................................................5
3 INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPLACING THE RF TAG CHIP CARD .............................................6
3.1 Replacing a RF Tag Chip Card of a CR Cassette ....................................................................6
3.2 Replacing a RF Tag Chip Card on a CR Detector (for DX-S / DX-G / DX-M) ..........................6
4 INSTRUCTIONS FOR INITIALIZING PROCEDURE ...............................................................7

4.1 Initializing a CR Cassette using an ID Tablet ...........................................................................7
4.2 Initializing a CR Detector on a DX-S Digitizer...........................................................................9
4.3 Initializing a CR Detector via ID Tablet (DX-G, DX-M and DX-S)...........................................10


1 Introduction
1.1 Information about the RF-Tag
The Radio Frequency (RF) - tag is a crucial part of a digitizer workflow. The RF-tag is
implemented on the micro chip of every:
• CR cassette
• CR detector (DX-S and DX-G)
It stores the patient related data as well as image plate related data:
IP-related data:
These data are static on the micro chip:

• Amount of cycles
• Code number = plate sensitivity
• Plate format
Patient related data:
These data are entered either manually via ID-viewer / ID-tablet or can be retrieved
from a RIS system:
• Demographic data
• Exposure settings
The RF-tag is read by the RF-tag reader of the digitizer, before the actual scanning is
started.


1.2 When to use the RF Tag Initialization Tool
IMPORTANT:
• Using the RF Tag Initialization Tool is not required when obtaining a new CR
cassette or detector:
o The RF-tag in a Cassette is already initialized, but requires resetting of
counter and setting correct plate type. This is done using the NX Application
Main Menu.
o The RF-tag on a new DX-S / DX-G detector is already initialized on delivery
and requires no extra settings.
For a detailed description of initializing new cassettes or detectors refer to the NX
User Manual on MedNet HealthCare Library path:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ NX X.0.8300 Æ User
Manual Æ NX User Manual 4420
• Using the RF Tag Initialization Tool is required, whenever a broken cassette
RF-tag chip or a detector RF-tag chip is replaced with a spare RF-tag. In this
case, an initialization of this RF-tag via the RF Tag Initialization Tool is required.
NOTE:
CR 30-X cassette spare parts are always delivered as a combination of tray and IP
(Image plate). The RF-tag is not replaceable. For this reason, initializing the CR 30-X is
never required.
2 Prerequisites
The RF-Tag tool is installed on the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstations.

No further prerequisites are required.


3 Instructions for Replacing the RF Tag Chip Card
3.1 Replacing a RF Tag Chip Card of a CR Cassette
(1) Order the RF Tag chip card spare part for the respective cassette using one of
the following order numbers*:
• Chip Card Holder (complete) CR Cassette: CM+9 8304 6130 3
• Chip Card Holder (complete) CR Mammo Cassette: CM+9 8330 6130 3
• Chip Card Holder (complete) CR Cassette 15x30: CM+9 8316 6130 3
• Chip Card Holder (complete) RT Cassette: CM+9 8304 6150 2
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this
document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
(2) Follow the instructions for the chip card replacement enclosed to the delivered
spare part.
3.2 Replacing a RF Tag Chip Card on a CR Detector (for DX-S / DX-G / DX-M)
INSTRUCTION:
• Order the RF Tag chip card (Transponder) spare part using the following order
number*: CM+9 5180 4005 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of this document.
When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
• For replacement instructions refer to:

o DX-S: Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service – Replacements
Repair Procedures DD+DIS014.05E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
Or:
o DX-G: Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service – Replacements
Repair Procedures DD+DIS035.09E as of Edition 1 Revision 3
Or:
o DX-M: Service Manual chapter 3.5 Repair and Service – Replacements
Repair Procedures DD+DIS001.10E as of Edition 2 Revision 0


4 Instructions for Initializing Procedure
4.1 Initializing a CR Cassette using an ID Tablet
(1) Open the cassette.

(2) Look-up the Image Plate Type printed on the rear side of the image plate
(e.g. code 37).
(3) Close the cassette.
(4) Insert the cassette in the cassette slot of the ID Tablet.
(5) Stop the NX application.
(6) Open the RF Tag Initialization Tool from menu:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ RF Tag Initialization Tool
(7) Select:
• Device: ID Tablet
• Type of Cassette: Solo Cassette
Figure 1
(8) Click <OK>.

(9) Leave the existing Cassette Number or enter a new Cassette Number. The new
number should correspond to the cassette to be initialized.
E.g. use the following number for a 18 x 25 Mammography cassette: 1824M1
(18 = width in cm; 24 = height in cm, M = Mammo; 1 = cassette number):
Figure 2


(10) Select the Cassette Type, e.g. MAMMO 18x24cm.
NOTE:
These parameters are automatically adapted when selecting the
Cassette Type.
• Cassette Format
• Scan Resolution
• Scan Size
(11) Select the Image Plate (IP) Type,

found on the rear side of the IP
(e.g. code37).
The digitizer sensitivity and erasure
time will be adapted according to the
IP performance.
Figure 4
(12) Click <Initialize>.

(13) Write the Cassette Number on the cassette label and on the rear side of the IP
(if not yet done). Based on this labeling, the user can find the cassette matching
an image on the NX workstation.


4.2 Initializing a CR Detector on a DX-S Digitizer
NOTE:
The DX-S detector can be initalized without ID Tablet. The DX-S digitizer can be used
to initialize the cassette.
(1) Open the detector cassette.

(2) Note down the IP serial number printed on the chip on the image plate
(starting with: 302).
Figure 5: Example
(3) Close the detector cassette.

(4) Start the RF Tag Initialization Tool:
Start Æ AGFA Æ ServiceÆ RF Tag Initialization Tool
(5) Select Device: DX-S Digitizer. Type of Cassette is grayed out:
Figure 6
(6) Click <OK>.

(7) Click <OK> on the message informing that the ASAP component must be
restarted after exiting the tool.
(8) The application software is stopped and connection to the digitizer is set up.
(9) Insert the cassette in the digitizer. The RF Tag content is displayed and the
<Initialize> button and <Eject> button are enabled.
(10) Enter the IP serial number that was noted down in step (2).
(11) Click the <Initialize> button. The RF tag is initialized and the cassette is
ejected by the digitizer.
(12) Exit the tool (the ASAP component is automatically restarted).


4.3 Initializing a CR Detector via ID Tablet (DX-G, DX-M and DX-S)
NOTE:
• DX-G/DX-M: Always use the ID Tablet to initialize the DX-G detector.
• DX-S: The ID Tablet connected to another digitizer on site can also be used to
initialize the DX-S detector.
(1) Open the detector cassette.

(2) Note down the IP serial number printed on the chip on the image plate
(starting with: 302).
Figure 7: Example
(3) Close the detector cassette.

(4) Start the RF Tag Initialization Tool:
Start Æ AGFA Æ ServiceÆ RF Tag Initialization Tool
(5) Select Device: ID Tablet and Type of cassette: DX-S/NIMBUS Cassettes:
Figure 8
(6) Click <OK>.

(7) The application software is stopped and connection to the ID Tablet is set up.
(8) Insert the cassette in the ID tablet. The RF Tag content is displayed and the
<Initialize> button is enabled.
(9) Enter the IP serial number that was noted down in step (2).
(10) Click the <Initialize> button. The RF tag is initialized.
(11) Exit the tool and remove the cassette from the ID tablet.


Details as of PDF Creation Date

Document Metadata
Title: 05-NX8300-RF-Tag-Tool
Livelink ID: 30045010
Version#: 5
Version Date: 2010/05/27 12:26 PM CET
Status: Approved on 2010/06/01 12:34 PM CET
Owner: Florian WeiÃŸ (awuyl)
Created By: Florian WeiÃŸ (awuyl)
Created Date: 2010/04/28 04:21 PM CET
PDF Creation Date: 2010/06/01 12:35 PM CET
This document was approved by:
Signatures:
1. Patrick Hellemans (amdxe) on 2010/05/27 03:16 PM CET

2. Kurt Jakobus (agkjb) on 2010/05/27 04:09 PM CET
3. Lieven Lauwers (awibr) on 2010/06/01 11:17 AM CET
Detailed Approver History:
 Approval Workflow started on 2010/05/27 12:30 PM CET

 Approval task originally assigned to Florian WeiÃŸ (awuyl)
 Approval task reassigned to Kurt Jakobus (agkjb) on 2010/05/27 12:54 PM CET
 Approval task completed by Kurt Jakobus (agkjb) on 2010/05/27 04:09 PM CET
 Approval task originally assigned to and completed by Patrick Hellemans (amdxe) on
2010/05/27 03:16 PM CET
 Approval task originally assigned to and completed by Lieven Lauwers (awibr) on
2010/06/01 11:17 AM CET
Version & Status History

Version# Date Created Status
5 2010/05/27 12:26 PM CET Approved - 2010/06/01
4 2010/05/27 12:25 PM CET
3 2010/05/04 02:03 PM CET Reviewed - 2010/05/18
2 2010/04/29 02:40 PM CET
1 2010/04/28 04:21 PM CET

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Musica2 Image Processing Software
This document provides the information for Field Service Engineers (FSE) and/or
Clinical Application Specialists (CAS) to set-up the optional Musica2 packages for
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Processing Stations.

Revision Date
1.0 06-2010 Initial Release
Document Title
Not applicable

Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2010 Agfa HealthCare N.V..
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 BRIEF INTRODUCTION IN MUSICA2 ......................................................................................5

1.1 Musica2 in a Nutshell.................................................................................................................5
1.2 Musica (1) compared to Musica2 ..............................................................................................6
1.3 Musica2 Inside – Key Functional Elements...............................................................................9
1.4 Musica2 License Policy ...........................................................................................................10
1.4.1 NX Musica2 .............................................................................................................................10
1.4.2 NX Musica2 Platinum Package ...............................................................................................10
1.4.3 NX Musica2 Neonates .............................................................................................................11
1.4.4 NX Musica2 Veterinary Licenses.............................................................................................12
1.4.5 Summary of Musica2 License Policy.......................................................................................12
1.5 Printers to be used with Musica2.............................................................................................13
1.6 Information Sources for Musica2 .............................................................................................13
2 REQUIRED TIME ...................................................................................................................13

3 REQUIRED TOOLS................................................................................................................13
4 MUSICA2 PREPARATIONS ...................................................................................................14
4.1 Prerequisites ...........................................................................................................................14
4.2 Preparations before On-Site Visit ...........................................................................................15
4.3 On-Site Preconditions .............................................................................................................15
5 ENABLING MUSICA2 ON NX .................................................................................................16

5.1 Install new *.alf – File ..............................................................................................................16
5.2 Enable Musica2 Licenses on NX.............................................................................................16
5.3 Configuring Archive on NX......................................................................................................17
5.4 Configuring the NX Monitor.....................................................................................................17
5.4.1 Configuring a Barco Monitor MFCD 1219...............................................................................17
5.4.2 Configuring a Dell Monitor Office Type 19” LCD-TFT.............................................................18
5.5 Configuring the Printer on NX .................................................................................................19
5.6 Configuring and Calibrating the PACS Monitor ......................................................................21
5.7 Verifying the Configuration......................................................................................................21
6 CONFIGURING THE MUSICA2 PACKAGES .........................................................................22


6.1 Configuring the Package General Radiology (GenRad).........................................................23
6.2 Configuring the Package General Radiology “Soft”................................................................25
6.3 Mixed Settings of “General Radiology” and “General Radiology Soft” ...................................28
6.4 Configuring the NX Musica2 Platinum Package – Adults........................................................33
6.5 Configuring the NX Musica2 Platinum Package - Pediatrics...................................................36
6.6 Configuring the NX Musica2 - Neonates .................................................................................37
6.7 Configuring the NX Musica2 Veterinary Package ...................................................................38
6.8 Taste Adjustment ....................................................................................................................39
6.8.1 Prerequisites for Taste Adjustments.......................................................................................40
6.8.2 Configuring Musica2 Taste Settings in the Configuration Tool ...............................................41
6.8.3 Activating Musica2 Advanced (Part of License “NX Premium Tools”).....................................42
7 WORKING WITH THE “ADVANCED ARCHIVE CORRECTION TOOL” ...............................43

8 CUSTOMER INFORMATION AND HAND-OVER..................................................................45
8.1 Generic Information ................................................................................................................45
8.2 Information on specific Appearance of Musica2 Images.........................................................45
8.3 Improved Visualization of wide-latitude Exams ......................................................................46
8.4 Advice for use of Window/Level..............................................................................................46
8.5 Collimation and Black Border..................................................................................................46
8.6 Impact of Taste Adjustments on Images ................................................................................47
8.7 Follow-up Contact ...................................................................................................................47
9 CHECKLIST FOR MUSICA2 ...................................................................................................48


1 Brief Introduction in Musica2
1.1 Musica2 in a Nutshell
M
U lti
S cale
I mage
C ontrast
A mplification
Musica2_dis038.07_002.cdr
Figure 1
Musica² is the new generation Image Processing for digital X-ray and the next step in
multi-scale technology that made the first generation of Musica outstanding.
It is built on multi-scale technology as its predecessor Musica (1) and makes use of
algorithms for simultaneous rendition of bone and soft tissue.
Musica² is able to adapt to variations in exposure technique, dose, patient size and
body part. It works unperceived in the background and is self-adjusting by setting
automatically its internal parameters.


1.2 Musica (1) compared to Musica2
This section points out the differences between Musica (1) and Musica2.
Both algorithms make use of the multi scale technology.
With regard to image quality, the Musica2 images look different. Musica2 images have
a different look and feel than Musica (1). It is not possible to mimic the Musica (1) look
and feel.
With Musica2 it is possible to render simultaneously bone and soft tissue.

Musica2 gives improved visualization of wide latitude exams such as lumbar spine, full
leg and so on.
Musica (1) works with a parameter table to identify the body part, while Musica2 is self
adjusting. There is no longer need for an extensive parameter adjustment.
One of the benefits of Musica2 is its robustness and its effect on the work flow.
Work flow and productivity improvement are the result of the increased image quality,
the body part independency, the control of contrast and brightness of bone and soft
tissue independently and the self adjusting parameters.
IMPORTANT:
The generally accepted guidelines for producing x-ray exposures (best practice,
ALARA principle for dose – As Low As Reasonably Achievable, etc.)
have to be followed.
All components of the entire imaging chain have to be correctly adjusted.
This is especially applicable for the configuration and calibration of all monitors.


The following table shows some Musica (1) and Musica2 characteristics compared
to each other.
Characteristics Musica (1) Musica²
Technology • Multiscale • Multiscale

• Simultaneous bone and soft
tissue rendering
• Image processing is nearly
independent of possible errors
of the collimation/black border
software
Image Quality • Good • Different look and feel

• Improved visualization of wide-
latitude exams, e.g.(lumbar)
spine, full leg …
Configuration • Parameter table for • Self-adjusting

body part identification
• Easy installation and
maintenance: no need for
extensive parameter adjustment,
• NX Musica2 works body part
independent
• Musica2 Platinum package
adapted to optimize body parts
abdomen, skeleton, chest
Workflow • Manual re-processing in • Less Window/Level corrections

case of dose deviations needed by both, radiographer
and radiologist


Wide latitude bone rendering
Figure 2: Figure 3:
Musica (1) Image Processing - Skeleton Musica2 Image Processing - Skeleton
Wide latitude soft tissue rendering
Figure 4: Figure 5:
Musica (1) Image Processing - Skull Musica2 Image Processing - Skull


1.3 Musica2 Inside – Key Functional Elements
The following chart figures out the different Musica2 image processing steps, starting
with the analysis of the raw image and ending up with the finally processed Musica2
image.
1 8
Gain Adjustment Gradation Processing
Input Output
2 7
Image Decomposition Image Reconstruction
in areas
(Multi-scale with Transform)
Inverse poor
Transform
(Multi-scale Transform)
3 Image Analysis
Analysis 6
Histograms
Excess Contrast
Decomposition Global Noise Estimation Noise Reduction
edges to improve
Reductionimage
of grayscale Local CNR Estimation (CNR-based)
Mask Image Computation
Global Gain Calculation
4 5
Subtle Contrast Edge Enhancement
Enhancement -
(high frequencies)
Musica2_dis038.07_001.cdr
Figure 6
1. Automatic image analysis to determine input image structure and set algorithm
parameters (e.g., gain).
2. Decomposition of grayscale image into collection of contrast images containing
different spatial-frequency sub-bands.
3. Contrast equalization: Reduce contrast of high-contrast objects.
4. Contrast equalization: Increase contrast of objects with subtle contrast.
5. Enhance relevant edges to improve diagnostic conspicuity.
6. Reduce noise in areas with poor signal contrast.
7. Reconstruct an enhanced image by recombining contrast layers.
8. Prepare enhanced image for output by adjusting gradation curve.


1.4 Musica2 License Policy
Musica2 functionality is an integral part of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software. To be

able to use Musica2 functionality, the customer has to purchase one of the following
optional license packages which will then be enabled by the field service engineer via
installation of a new license file (*.alf) from the Electronic License Management System
(ELMS). Musica (1) image processing is not available when Musica2 license is enabled.
1.4.1 NX Musica2
Base Package for Musica2 comprising following technical licenses:

NX_MUSICA2
NX_MUSICA2_GENRAD_SOFT
With this licenses the user can select between two predefined default settings “General
Radiology” or “General Radiology (Soft)”. These settings differ in the global taste
adjustment for contrast, brightness and sharpness.
The NX Musica2 package is available for all “NX Lite” and “NX Premium”
GenRad packages.
It is not available for the NX Mammo package.
IMPORTANT:
The NX Musica2 pediatric license is additionally necessary if the customer wants to get
access to the NX age groups.
The “General Radiology” processing is then be used for all patient ages, including
pediatrics. An optimized image processing for pediatrics is included in the Musica2
Platinum Package.
An optimized image processing for neonates is additionally available in the
NX Musica2 Neonates package.
1.4.2 NX Musica2 Platinum Package
It comprises:
• Musica2 license as described above, but without NX Musica2 GenRad Soft
• NX Musica2 pediatric license
• Two specialized sub-sets of application for optimized processing:
Adults & Pediatrics, each group containing one or more
specialized packages:
Adults:
NX_Musica2_CHEST_ADULTS
NX_Musica2_ABDOMEN_ADULTS
NX_Musica2_SKELETON_ADULTS


Pediatrics:
NX_Musica2_CHEST_PED
NX_Musica2_ABDOMEN_PED
NX_Musica2_SKELETON_PED
The “NX Musica2 Platinum” license is available for all full feature GenRad packages
(= “NX Premium”).
It is not available for the limited “NX Lite” and the “NX Mammo” package.
IMPORTANT:
NX checks to which age group the selected exposure type belongs to, and assigns
the adult or pediatric image processing accordingly.
(> 12 years = adult image processing; < 12 years = pediatric image processing)
NOTE:
If you need information about the new Musica Mammo for CR Mammography
images, refer to the CR Mammography Solution Service Manual, DD+DIS227.04E,
and the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 upgrade training on Academy Learning Platform
(ALP).
1.4.3 NX Musica2 Neonates
NX MUSICA2 NEONATAL license is an optional license. It comprises the following

technical license:
NX_MUSICA2_NEO_NATALS
The image processing has been optimized for use with newborn children
(Neonates, 0 - 4 weeks age).
A typical requirement for this application is to handle images made with a rather
low dose / high noise. During their stay in a Neonatal Intensive Care unit (NIC),
patients often need a large number of X-Ray exams to follow-up their critical health.
In this situation each exposure is done with the lowest possible dose.
IMPORTANT:
The NX Musica2 pediatric license is not a prerequisite to use the neonatal image
processing.
However, either the NX Musica2 or the NX Musica2 Platinum have to be present on
the NX processing station.


1.4.4 NX Musica2 Veterinary Licenses
The improved veterinary Image Processing offers two different optional licenses:
• "NX Musica2 Veterinary Small Animals" license is an optional license.

It comprises the technical license NX_MUSICA2_VET_SMALL_ANIMALS.
The image processing is optimized for small animals, e.g. cats.
• "NX Musica2 Veterinary Large Animals" license is an optional license:

It comprises the technical license NX_MUSICA2_VET_LARGE_ANIMALS.
The image processing is optimized for large animals, e.g. horse, cattle or similar.
1.4.5 Summary of Musica2 License Policy
The following table outlines the naming of Musica2 licenses with respect to commercial
usage, technical usage in the Electronic License Management System (ELMS), and in
the configuration tool of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software.
Commercial ELMS / *.alf-file NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Security &

License Management
NX Musica2 2
NX_MUSICA2 Musica Base
NX_MUSICA2_GENRAD_SOFT Musica2 GenRad Soft
NX Musica2 NX_MUSICA2_CHEST_ADULTS Musica2 Chest Adults

2
Platinum NX_MUSICA2_ABDOMEN_ADULTS Musica Abdomen Adults
Package NX_MUSICA2_SKELETON_ADULTS Musica2 Skeleton Adults
2
NX_MUSICA2_ABDOMEN_PED Musica Abdomen Pediatrics
NX_MUSICA2_SKELETON_PED Musica2 Skeleton Pediatrics
2
NX_MUSICA2_CHEST_PED Musica Chest Pediatrics
NX_MUSICA2_PEDIATRIC Musica2 Pediatric
NX MUSICA2 NX_MUSICA2_NEO_NATALS Musica2NeoNatals

NEONATAL
NX Precision NX_MUSICA2_ADVANCED Musica2 Advanced
Tools
NX Musica2 NX_MUSICA2_VET_SMALL_ANIMALS Musica2 Veterinary Small Animals
Veterinary Small
Animals
NX Musica2 NX_MUSICA2_VET_LARGE_ANIMALS Musica2Veterinary Large Animals
Veterinary Large
Animals


1.5 Printers to be used with Musica2
It is advised to use p-values for printing when using Musica2 on the NX Processing
Station.
All the Agfa printers support p-values, except LR3300 / LR5500 with LRDC controller,
because "Presentation LUT shape" (2050,0020) is not supported.
Special remark for the Drystar 2000, Drystar 3000, LR 3300 with MG3000 and LR5500
with MG3000: p-values are supported when the latest dcm software = DCM 2.4.4
(dcm32957.zip) is installed on the printer. It can be downloaded from MedNet GSO
Library, file size 13 MB (Intranet link / Extranet link).
No printer host profile has to be created, because NX sends the needed DICOM tags
such as view box illumination and reflected ambient light to the printer.
1.6 Information Sources for Musica2
Beside this Service documentation further information on Musica2 is available on

the Agfa Homepage:
• Musica2 homepage,
• MUSICA² brochure with image library and in-depth image processing tutorial
A Web based Training is available on the Academy Learning Platform (ALP).

For external partners: Please contact your local Agfa representative for access.
2 Required Time
REQUIRED TIME:
It takes between 45 to 60 minutes to establish Musica2 on an NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Processing Station.
3 Required Tools
The following tool is necessary to set-up and configure Musica2 for the
NX Processing Station:
• Barco Nio watch calibration software (part of the NX delivery)
The following tool is optional:

• Barco Medical Pro calibration software to calibrate PACS monitors available on:
Agfa Intranet Æ Healthcare Æ Services Info Æ 3rd Party Supplier Æ Barco Support


4 Musica2 Preparations
4.1 Prerequisites
(1) Make sure that you fulfil the following training requirements for Musica2:
• Technical Training and Application NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 - Instructor

Based Training (IBT)
• Upgrade Training to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 - Web Based Training (WBT)
on Academy Learning Platform (ALP)
• Musica2 - (WBT) on Academy Learning Platform (ALP)
• CR Application Training (IBT)
(2) Consider the following planning and scheduling topics for Musica2:
• Communication between Sales and FSE / CAS during Sales Phase:

- Which Musica2 package has been sold to the customer?
- Which tastes does the customer prefer, (e.g. abdomen, chest, skeleton
adults/pediatrics)
- Agreed additional services
• Task planning and scheduling between FSE and CAS.
• Time scheduling with the customer:
- Time for installation and configuration (approximately 60 minutes)
- Time for initial adaptation (approximately 30 minutes)
- Time to instruct the customer (approximately 2 hours)
- Time for follow-up visit, one final adaptation inclusive
(approximately. 2 hours, extra service visit Æ additional service)
• If the customer wishes to have more adaptations than the ones
defined in the sales contract, the additional work has to be considered and
to be invoiced. This must be clarified beforehand.


4.2 Preparations before On-Site Visit
The following tasks have to be performed by the Field Service Engineer / Clinical
Application Specialist, before going on-site.
(1) Ask for calibration conditions of the PACS devices (additional service).
(2) Get the “alf” license file as described in the CR Licensing Service Manual,
(3) Get the required tools as described in section 3.
(4) Get the latest revision of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Documentation, available
on MedNet GSO Library, especially “Chapter 4 – Installation and Configuration –
Appendices”, for the monitor calibration and configuration of p-values.
(5) Optional: Get anonymized NX studies of different body parts in native format, and
store them on portable media ( e.g. CD, USB-stick). This can be useful if you have
no images at the customer site to make taste adjustments.
4.3 On-Site Preconditions
It must be clarified:
• To which PACS stations the NX Processing Station will send images.
• Which printers will be used.


5 Enabling Musica2 on NX
The goal of this section is to have the Musica2 functionality with basic settings running
on NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 30 minutes,
excluded optional monitor calibration of PACS monitor (2-3 hours)
5.1 Install new *.alf – File
NOTE:
This step applies only, if you want to enable Musica2 on an NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Processing Station that is already in use.
In case of a new installation, the ordered Musica2 licenses are already activated in
the *.alf file.
Before the Musica2 license can be enabled, you have to install a licensing file (*.alf)
containing the activated Musica2 license(s).
The Agfa Licensing Policy via Electronic License Management System is described in
detail in the CR Licensing Service Documentation DD+DIS012.06E
5.2 Enable Musica2 Licenses on NX
(1) Go to Security & License Management Æ Manage Licenses.
(2) Activate all Musica2 licenses the customer has ordered.
Figure 7


5.3 Configuring Archive on NX
(1) Go to: Devices Æ Device Configuration Æ Archive

(2) Set Output Type to <15 bit PVAL VOI LUT> (IMPAX 4.5 SP5+).
Figure 8
5.4 Configuring the NX Monitor
5.4.1 Configuring a Barco Monitor MFCD 1219
(1) Go to Devices Æ Device Configuration Æ Monitor.
Figure 9
(2) Set Type to <8 bit PVal>.
(3) Calibrate the NX monitor with NIO Watch calibration software, as described
in chapter 4, appendices, section 11, of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual.


5.4.2 Configuring a Dell Monitor Office Type 19” LCD-TFT
(1) Go to: Devices Æ Device Configuration Æ Monitor
Figure 10
(2) Set Type to <8 bit GAMMA>.

Set Gamma to <2.2> (= Windows "Industry Standard" for monitors).
NOTE:
Calibration tools for current office type LCD displays are available on the market,
but currently not supported by Agfa.
Calibration of a standard DELL monitor is described in chapter 4 - appendices,
section 11, of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual.


5.5 Configuring the Printer on NX
(1) Go to: Devices Æ Device Configuration Æ Printer
Figure 11
(2) If required, add a new printer.
(3) Go to: Image Sheet Settings
(4) Set value in View Box Illumination to <2000> (default value is 2500),
or use the exactly measured value.
(5) Set value in Reflected Ambient Light to <1> (default value is 10),
or use the exactly measured value.
Figure 12
A detailed description of determining view box settings can be found in the

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Documentation, chapter 4 - appendices.
(6) Click <Advanced Settings>.


(7) Configure following settings:

• Select Magnification Type: Bicubic Bell (default value is Bicubic hi-res)
• Set Smoothing Factor: (default value is -0.7)
- Normal: 0.9
- Softer: 1.0 – 2.0
• Check that Configuration Info is: PERCEPTION_LUT=LINEAR
(= default value)
• Select Pixel Format: 12 bit PVALUE (default value is 8 bit OD)
Figure 13
(8) Click <OK>.


5.6 Configuring and Calibrating the PACS Monitor
(1) Click Start, select Settings, select Impax Configuration.
(2) Click the tab Monitor.
(3) Set the PACS Monitor Calibration to ‘NEMA’.
Figure 14
(4) Calibrate the PACS monitor with e.g. MediCal Pro calibration software.
5.7 Verifying the Configuration
Check that:
(1) The monitor calibration is done.
(2) The image transfer to archive works.
(3) The images look similar on NX, PACS and

hardcopy/view box.


6 Configuring the Musica2 Packages
The goal of this section is to configure the Musica2 packages according to customer
tastes that have been defined during sales phase.
REQUIRED TIME:
10 minutes – 30 minutes, depending on configured packages
NOTE:
There are two different possibilities of linking exposure types to the different packages:
(a) By linking the package manually with the dedicated Exposure type
(b) Via button <Find> and <Replace> in Exam Tree Configuration
NOTE:
By default, all exposure types are automatically linked to the Musica2 GeneralRadiology
package.
Note that the exam System Diagnosis always uses Musica (1) image processing and
cannot be modified. These images cannot be sent to PACS.


6.1 Configuring the Package General Radiology (GenRad)
Required technical license: Musica2

The default package General Radiology will be activated, not the optional General
Radiology (Soft). Independently of the exam type, one universal image processing for
adults and children is applied.
(1) Check if ordered licenses are enabled in:

Security Æ License management Æ Manage licenses
Figure 15


(2) Verify the configuration by checking 3 or 4 different examination groups:

• Go to: Exam Æ Exam Tree Configuration
• Select Exposure type Æ Image processing Æ Package and verify the
selected Musica² package. It has to be General Radiology.
Figure 16


6.2 Configuring the Package General Radiology “Soft”
Required technical licenses: Musica2 and Musica2 GenRad Soft
NOTE:
By default, the exposure types are linked to the General Radiology package.
The goal of this configuration exercise is to link all exposure types to the taste
“General Radiology Soft” (settings: C -7, S -1, D 0).
Procedure
(1) Check in Security Æ License management Æ Manage licenses that the

correct licenses are enabled: Musica2 and Musica2 GenRad Soft
(2) Go to: Exam Æ Find & Replace Exposure Settings
Figure 17


(3) In Find… select the Application General radiology.
Figure 18
(4) Click <Find>.
(5) The Result List shows all existing exposure types.
Figure 19


(6) To link all these exposure types to the “General Radiology Soft” taste
package:Go to Replace with….
• Go to: Processing settings.
• Select in the pull down menu Package the option
General Radiology (Soft).
Figure 20
(7) Click <Replace> and check the result in the result list, changes are in blue.
Figure 21


(8) Click <Commit> to confirm and activate.

The color blue in the result list will change to black.
(9) Verify the configuration by checking 3 or 4 different examination groups:

selected Musica² package. It has to be General Radiology (Soft).
6.3 Mixed Settings of “General Radiology” and “General Radiology Soft”
Required technical licenses: Musica2 and Musica2 GenRad Soft
NOTE:
The goal of this configuration exercise is to link all exposure types either to the taste
“General Radiology” or to the taste “General Radiology Soft”.
Example: Customer wants to have all chest exposures in taste “General Radiology
Soft”, all other exposures in taste “General Radiology”.
Procedure
(1) Check in Security Æ License managementÆ Manage licenses that the correct
licenses are enabled: Musica2 and Musica2 GenRad Soft.
(2) Go to Exam Tree Configuration.
(3) Go to Exam Æ Find & Replace Exposure Settings.
(4) In Application select General Radiology and click <Find>.
(5) Go to Replace with Æ Processing Settings.
(6) Go to Processing settings and select in the pull down menu Package
the option General Radiology.


(7) Click <Replace> and check the result in the result list, changes are in blue.
(8) Click <Commit> to confirm and activate.

The color blue in the result list will change to black.
(9) Go back to Find: Select the “Application”: General radiology.
Select Exam Group: Chest
Figure 22
(10) Click <Find>.


(11) The Result List shows the examination group and all exposures which are
linked to the package General Radiology.
Disable all exposure types which should not be changed.
Figure 23
(12) Go to: Replace with…
(13) Go to Processing settings and select in the pull down menu Package the option
General Radiology (Soft).
Figure 24


(14) Click <Replace> and check the result in the Result List,
changes are displayed on the monitor in blue.
Figure 25
(15) Click <Commit> to confirm.

The color blue in the Result List will change to black.
(16) Verify the configuration by checking 3 or 4 different examination groups,

(e.g. chest):
selected Musica² package.
Alternatively, the linking can be done directly in the exam tree. Refer to next page.


(1) Go to the exam Chest and select one by one the exposure types you want to
change:
Example:
Chest = General Radiology (Soft)
Ribs = remains General Radiology
Figure 26: Exposure type “Chest”
Figure 27: Exposure type “Ribs”


6.4 Configuring the NX Musica2 Platinum Package – Adults
Required technical licenses:

• Musica2
• Musica2 Abdomen Adults
• Musica2 Chest Adults
• Musica2 Skeleton Adults
NOTE:
• By default, the exposure types are linked to the General Radiology package.
The goal of this configuration exercise is to link all exposure types to one of the
image processing packages abdomen, chest or skeleton.
• The procedure to configure the Platinum Package - Pediatrics is the same as for
the Platinum Package – Adults. Check the necessary licenses in section 6.5.
Procedure
(1) Check in Security Æ License managementÆ Manage licenses that the
correct licenses are enabled (see above).
(2) Go to: Find and replace exposure settings
(3) Go to: <Find>
Figure 28


(4) Select the Application General radiology.
(5) Click: <Find>
(6) Check the result in the Result List.

All exposure types of the exam tree must be listed.
(7) Go to: <Replace with …>
(8) In Processing Settings select the package Skeleton.
(9) Click <Replace> and view the results list.

All exposure types must be linked to Skeleton (in blue).
(10) Click <Commit> to activate the package.
(11) Go to: Find …
(12) In Processing Settings:

• Select Examination Group: Abdomen
• Click: <Find>
(13) In the Result List verify if all exposure types you want to link to Abdomen
are activated in the check box.
(14) Go to. Replace with ...
(15) In Processing Settings select the package Abdomen.
(16) Click <Replace> and view the Result List.
(17) Click <Commit> to activate the package.
(18) Go to: Find …


(19) In Processing Settings select Examination Group Chest and click <Find>.
(20) In the Result List verify if all exposure types you want to link to Chest are
activated in the check box.
(21) In Replace with… Æ Process Settings select package Chest.
(22) Click <Replace> and view the Results List.
(23) Click: <Commit>
(24) Verify the configuration by checking 3 or 4 different examination groups,

(e.g. chest):
selected Musica² package.
Alternatively, the linking can be done directly in the exam tree.


6.5 Configuring the NX Musica2 Platinum Package - Pediatrics

• Musica2
• Musica2 Pediatric
• Musica2 Abdomen Adults
• Musica2 Chest Adults
• Musica2 Skeleton Adults
• Musica2 Abdomen Pediatrics
• Musica2 Chest Pediatrics
• Musica2 Skeleton Pediatrics
NOTE:
The goal of this configuration exercise is to link all exposure types to one of the image
processing packages abdomen, chest or skeleton.
Procedure
(1) Check in Security Æ License managementÆ Manage licenses

that the required licenses are enabled (see above).
(2) To configure the pediatrics package perform the same procedure steps as
described in section 6.4.
NOTE:
As the automatic selection of the Platinum Adults or Platinum Pediatrics package is
done based on the age group of the different exams, it is important to configure the
age groups correctly.
Creating pediatric exams for patients younger than 12 years in the "Adults" age group,
will result in incorrect processing.


6.6 Configuring the NX Musica2 - Neonates
Required licenses:
• NX MUSICA2 package or NX MUSICA2 PLATINUM package
• NX MUSICA2 NEONATAL license
NOTE:
The Neonatal license can only be selected in the age group 17+ and in the 0 - 1.5
age group.
If the NX Pediatric license is not used, the Neonates package has to be linked to an
exposure type of the age group 17+. With an NX Pediatric license the Neonate
package has to be linked to an exposure type of the age group 0 - 1.5.
Procedure

(2) Go to Exam Tree configuration.
(3) In case there is no pediatric license used, go to the age group 17+.
In case a pediatric license is used, go to the age group 0 - 1.5.
(4) Select the exposure type you want to use for Neonates image processing,
e.g. Chest AP.
(5) Copy and Paste this exposure type and rename it, e.g. Chest AP Neonates.
(6) In Image Processing, link the exposure type to the package "Neo-Natal".


6.7 Configuring the NX Musica2 Veterinary Package

• NX Musica2 Veterinary Small Animals
and/or
• NX Musica2 Veterinary Large Animals
NOTE:
The transition between Veterinary Small Animals (VSA) and Veterinary Large Animals
(VLA) is not critical as both Musica2 packages visualize all anatomy. The preference for
one of these packages depends also on the customer's taste.
In general, the following configuration rules should be used:
• For weight based exam trees +/- 45 kg (100 lb) is a good transition value from
small to large animals.
• For species based exam trees, VSA can be used for all animals up to large dogs
and VLA can be used for horses and animals of similar size.
The following procedure refers to the default veterinary exam tree.

Exposures have to be linked as follows:
• To NX Musica2 Veterinary Small Animals:
- All exposures within exams that include a weight < 45 kg
- The exam "Small animal / Reptile"
• To NX Musica2 Veterinary Large Animals:
All exposures in exams without a weight in their name belong to horse anatomy.
If the veterinary does only small animals or only horses, customize the exam tree
according to the customer's needs.


Procedure

(2) Go to Exam Tree configuration.
(3) In Find and replace Exposure Settings:

• Link the exam groups mentioning a weight in kg to the package NX Musica2
Veterinary Small Animals.
• Link the exam groups referring explicitly to small animals to the package
NX Musica2 Veterinary Small Animals.
• Link all other exam groups to the NX Musica2 Veterinary Large Animals.
6.8 Taste Adjustment
Taste adjustment is possible on two levels:
a) Adjustments in NX Configuration Tool:

Applied changes are always on package level. All exposures that are linked to this
package will be changed. For the procedure see section 6.8.2.
b) Adjustments in the Editing Screen of the NX user interface:

“Modify Musica Settings” in the Editing screen (for service no license required)
Settings can be applied and stored only for the selected image.
Defining these changed parameters as default for other images is not possible on
this level. For the procedure see section 6.8.3.


6.8.1 Prerequisites for Taste Adjustments
Prior to any taste adjustments:

• Review existing images of different body parts to get a first impression of the
customer’s specific taste.
• Adapt the Musica2 configuration according to this taste as described in 6.8.2
concentrate first on brightness, in a second step on contrast and, if required,
on sharpness.
• Do not try to imitate film screen or Musica (1) appearance of images.
To adjust Musica2 to customer tastes, images are required. There are different
possibilities to acquire images:
• Import existing images from portable media.
• In case of an existing NX installation, use the images which are already present:
select an image, save it as new and re-process that image with Musica2.
• In case of a new NX installation, wait for the first incoming images of patients.
Musica2 allows following taste adjustments:
BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the mid-gray level.
Possible Range: -20 to +20, step size: 1

Recommended Range: -10 to +10
Small, visible step size on diagnostic monitor: 3 units
CONTRAST Adjusts the overall contrast impression with no black or white

clipping effects.
Possible Range: -20 to +20, step size: 1

Recommended Range: -15 to +15
Small, visible step size on diagnostic monitor: 4 units
SHARPNESS Increases the level of the finest details.
Possible Range: -5 to +5, step size: 0.5

Recommended Range: -2.5 to +2.5
Small, visible step size on diagnostic monitor: 1-2 units,
depending on display resolution


6.8.2 Configuring Musica2 Taste Settings in the Configuration Tool
Procedure
(1) In NX Configuration Tool, go to General Æ Workflow Management Æ
Image Presentation.
(2) Adapt the taste of the required package(s) by changing the values for
Brightness, Contrast, Sharpness.
Figure 29
(3) Verify and activate the configuration.


6.8.3 Activating Musica2 Advanced (Part of License “NX Premium Tools”)

• Musica2
• Musica2 Advanced
NOTE:
The Musica2 Advanced functionality (“Modify Musica settings”) is always available for
the CR Service account, even if the license is disabled.
Procedure
(1) Check in Security Æ License managementÆ Manage licenses that the correct
license is enabled: Musica2 advanced
(2) The window Modify Musica settings is visible on the NX display in the
Editing screen.
The modified settings (contrast, brightness and sharpness) can be saved for
the current image only.
Figure 30


7 Working with the “Advanced Archive Correction Tool”
The “Advanced Archive Correction Tool” can be used as an optional correction tool, in
case a “p-value” calibration is not possible on the PACS.
This can have the following reasons:

• Adaptation would have an impact on images from other modalities:
e.g. Computer Tomography, Ultra Sound, Magnetic Resonance.
• Recalibration of all PACS stations can be very labor intensive and cannot be
invoiced.
Goal of the Correction is to reach a similar look of images on NX and PACS monitors,
although the images are not sent according to the DICOM standard.
Procedure
(1) Go to: Devices Æ Archive
(2) Select the archive.
(3) In Archive Æ Device Settings select Advanced Settings.
NOTE:
The grayscale correction and correction of resolution is only available with
Musica2 and in OD archive formats.


(4) Select Predefined.

Select either Correction1 or Correction 2.
Figure 31
Currently, two predefined correction settings are available to compensate for

following common problem situations:
Correction 1:
IMPAX is set to "NEMA", IMPAX monitor however is calibrated for
gamma 2.20
Grey = 40
Correction 2:
IMPAX is set to “Gamma 2.20", IMPAX monitor however is calibrated for
P-Values
Grey = 60
NOTE:
If the grayscale correction for a PACS is configured, it is not possible to send
Musica1 processed images to this PACS.


8 Customer Information and Hand-over
Communicate the following information on changed or new functionalities outlined in

this section to the customer when handing-over the system.
REQUIRED TIME:
Approximately 15 minutes for radiographers
Approximately 30 minutes for radiologists
NOTE:
To acquire yourself an in-depth knowledge of Musica2, be familiar with the additional
information sources that are mentioned in section 1.6 of this documentation, especially
with the Web Based Training “Musica2”.
8.1 Generic Information
Basically, Musica2 offers a reliable default image processing that – within a limited
range – copes with under- and over exposure and poor exposure technique.
It is, however, crucial that the customer follows generally accepted guidelines for
producing x-ray exposures with respect to best practice (exposure technique,
positioning, collimation of x-ray beam) and the ALARA (As Low As Reasonably
Achievable) principle for dose.
8.2 Information on specific Appearance of Musica2 Images
Musica2 images have a specific appearance with regard to extended bone and soft
tissue rendering. That means, that some Musica2 images look rather different from
film/screen or Musica (1).
Radiologists need to get used to a different look and feel of images, since they may
capture more information in one instance, than they have been used to so far
Example – Skull lateral:
Without loosing the good contrast of the skull, Musica2 image processing now also
visualizes the nasal bone and tissue structure.
The contrast behavior within subtle structures of the face bone and the differences
between air, tissue and bone in the region of the sinus has improved.
Sometimes even ears (skull PA) and hair are visible.
Example – Thoracial spine AP:

This exposure focuses on bone structure, but with Musica2 additionally offers an
improved visualization of lungs tissue.


8.3 Improved Visualization of wide-latitude Exams
This means that absorption differences resulting from wide differences in thickness
and/or denseness of an exposed body part, can now be visualized by Musica2
e.g. (lumbar) spine, full leg/full spine.
Figure 32: Lumbar spine-lat: Improved visualization of wide latitude objects
8.4 Advice for use of Window/Level
Inform the customer that necessity of window/level adjustments will be reduced

with Musica2.
8.5 Collimation and Black Border
Image processing is independent of possible errors of the collimation / black border

software.
Contrary to Musica (1) a wrongly applied automatic collimation does not result in a
wrong window/leveling, but in a wrong positioning of black border (license).
Therefore, advise customers who use the black border license, that they should
collimate manually, if the black border is not properly positioned.


8.6 Impact of Taste Adjustments on Images
• Explain the configured packages and the possible ways of influencing the Musica2
settings (possible only if Musica2 Advanced license in License Package NX
Precision Tools is enabled).
• Changes in Advanced Settings in the User Interface have only impact on the
current image. The modified settings (contrast, brightness and sharpness) can
be saved for the current image only.
• A global change of settings will always influence all exposure types linked to the
dedicated package (can only be done by Service Personnel).
8.7 Follow-up Contact
Agree with the customer a contact after one or two weeks to check if there are
any open questions or issues to be answered or solved.


9 Checklist for Musica2
Checklist for the Configuration of Musica2

Site: Date:
Location: Pages: 1 of 2
Goal:
The following checklist outlines the necessary tasks to implement Musica2 on
an NX Processing Station.
Topics: Done
Preparation (see section 4)
• Prerequisites fulfilled
• Preparations before On-Site Visit done
• On-Site Pre Conditions known
Enabling Musica2 on NX (see section 5)

• New *.alf – file installed
• Musica2 licenses on NX enabled
• Archive, Monitor and Printer configured on NX
• PACS Monitor configured and calibrated
• Verification of installation performed
Configuring the Musica2 Packages (see section 6)

• Settings for “GenRad” or “GenRad Soft” done (if
applicable)
• Mixed settings of “General Radiology” and “General

Radiology Soft” applied (if applicable)
• NX Musica2 Platinum Package – Adults applied (if

applicable)
• NX Musica2 Platinum Package – Pediatrics applied

(if applicable)
• NX Musica2 Neonates Package applied (if applicable)
Check next page Æ


Checklist for the Configuration of Musica2

Site: Date:
Location: Pages: 2 of 2
Configuring the Musica2 Packages (see section 6 - continued)

• NX Musica2 Veterinary Package applied (if applicable)
• Taste Adjustments applied
• License Musica2 Advanced activated (if applicable)
Customer training and hand-over done (see section 8)

• Customer is informed about:
- Information on specific appearance of Musica2 images
- Improved visualization of wide-latitude exams
- Use of window/level with Musica2
- Collimation and Black Border
- Impact of taste adjustments on images
- Follow-up contact after one or two weeks
End


NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Offline Configuration Tool Installation and Use
This manual describes the installation and use of the NX Offline Configuration Tool.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS116.10M NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Spare Parts List

► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTENDED USE OF THE OFFLINE CONFIGURATION TOOL...............................................4

2 PREREQUISITES.....................................................................................................................4
3 OBTAINING THE OFFLINE CONFIGURATION TOOL............................................................5
4 INSTALLING THE OFFLINE CONFIGURATION TOOL ..........................................................5
5 USING THE NX OFFLINE CONFIGURATION TOOL ..............................................................6
5.1 Importing and exporting Configuration Files .............................................................................6
5.2 Information about Configuring Bitmap Images to be printed on Film .......................................8
6 LIMITATIONS OF THE OFFLINE CONFIGURATION TOOL...................................................9

7 ADDITIONAL TOOLS .............................................................................................................10
7.1 Optional additional Tools ........................................................................................................10
7.2 XRDI 8.0 for Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Plug-in...........................................10
7.2.1 Installing the XRDI 8.0 for Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Plug-in .....................10
7.3 Additionally installed Tools......................................................................................................12
7.3.1 ExamTree Conversion Tool ....................................................................................................12
7.3.2 Logging Viewer .......................................................................................................................12
7.3.3 Age Group Copy Tool .............................................................................................................12
7.3.4 Verify Signature of NX Import-Export File Tool.......................................................................16
7.3.5 Configuration Tool Online Help...............................................................................................16


1 Intended Use of the Offline Configuration Tool
The Offline Configuration Tool is an auxiliary tool for the Field Service Engineer (FSE).
The FSE can load and configure any NX configuration file on the Offline Configuration
Tool installed e.g. on the service PC. This makes it possible to prepare the
configuration file before going to the site:
Export Configuration Portable storage medium Load Configuration

(checked to be virus-free,
Load Configuration e.g. USB memory stick) Export Configuration
Configuration Tool Offline

(On NX system) Config Tool
(e.g. on service PC)
Figure 1
NOTE:
The Offline Configuration Tool provides basically the same functionalities and user
interface as the regular Configuration Tool (= the one installed on a real NX system).
There are some limitations which are described in this document in section 6.
2 Prerequisites
Make sure the PC that used for installing the Offline Configuration Tool meets
following requirements:
• Operating System: Windows XP or Windows Vista
• Account rights: Local administrator rights
• Monitor: Minimum screen resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels


3 Obtaining the Offline Configuration Tool
NOTE:
Every NX version starting from NX 2.0.6805 has its own version of the Offline
Configuration Tool. The different versions can be installed parallel. The version number
is part of the name of the installation path:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Offline Config Tool <Version>\Bin
There are two possibilities to obtain the Offline Configuration Tool:
• Either download the Offline Configuration Tool installer from the FTP Server:
(1) Open the FTP Access document on the GSO library with information how to
access the FTP server (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
(2) Connect to the FTP server according to the instructions given in the FTP
Access document.
(3) Download the following ISO files and burn it as disk image on CD:
Offline Config Tool NX X.0.8300.(Build.X.X.XXXX).iso
• Or order it via the spare part channel.

For the CM+ number of the correct version refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual chapter 13 Spare Parts List DD+DIS116.10M
4 Installing the Offline Configuration Tool
(1) Log in to an account that has administrator rights on the PC on which the offline
configurations will be performed.
(2) Insert the CD containing the downloaded or ordered Offline Configuration Tool
software.
(3) Double-click the file Offline Config Tool X.0.8300.exe and observe
the progress of the installer.
Result After the installer is done, it displays a message that the Offline Configuration Tool is
installed successfully.
NOTE:
When not logged in with administrator rights, the installer may indicate that the
installation succeeded even if it has actually failed.


5 Using the NX Offline Configuration Tool
NOTE:
The Offline Configuration Tool can only be used from an account that has
local administrator rights (see prerequisites in section 2).
5.1 Importing and exporting Configuration Files
(1) Start the Offline Configuration Tool:

Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Offline Config Tool Æ
Start Offline Config Tool
(2) Enter these settings into the startup screen of the tool:
Setting Task/Meaning
Enable Central Station Check this box if the tool is used on a
Configuration Central Monitoring System (CMS).
This choice can be made only here!
Enable Exposure Index (EI) Check this box to configure an NX that uses Exposure
Dose Registration Index instead of LgM.
For more information about EI and LgM refer to NX
2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 1
Edition Choose between NX 2.0.8300 and NX 3.0.8300.
Load configuration from an An already existing configuration file can be loaded into
external file the Configuration Tool. This can also be an export file
made by a regular Configuration Tool or a previous
version of the NX Configuration Tool.
Load minimal configuration The minimal configuration is different for a non-CMS
and CMS NX. This functionality is not available in the
regular Configuration Tool. On the regular
Configuration Tool the NX database makes sure that a
minimal configuration is always foreseen.
Use DR Worflow This option is only available if the checkbox Enable
Exposure Index (EI) Dose Registration is enabled.
Check this box if the tool is used to edit a NX
configuration file for a DR environment.
NOTE:
Load active configuration and Restore NX configuration is never active
in this screen of the Offline Configuration Tool.


(3) Disable all licenses that will not be present on the NX on site in order to
represent the site situation as much as possible.
NOTE:
• No Application License file (ALF) is needed to activate licenses on
the Offline Configuration Tool. By default, all licenses are enabled.
• The status of the licenses is not stored in the configuration file that
is exported later on in step (5).
If special license settings are required, they have to be applied on
the NX on site via the regular Configuration Tool.
(4) Set all configuration settings that can be done on the Offline Configuration Tool.
For information that cannot be configured on the Offline Configuration Tool,
refer to section 6.
(5) Export the configuration settings to a configuration export file.
Before exporting, the configuration is automatically verified. When verification
errors occur, the export file can still be saved by clicking <Continue>:
Figure 2
(6) Import this export file to a regular NX Configuration Tool, finish the configuration
and activate it.


5.2 Information about Configuring Bitmap Images to be printed on Film
When configuring bitmaps that should be printed on film, a bitmap file can be uploaded
in the Offline Configuration Tool:
(1) Click the button <Copy Image> in the Bitmapcell editor. The file will be copied
to a specified folder on the PC: C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\OfflineConfig.Tool
\Bin\DataFiles\Configuration\BitmapFiles
Figure 3
(2) On site, copy the files manually from the offline BitmapFiles-folder to the
BitmapFiles-folder on the NX Workstation:
From the offline PC path:

C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\OfflineConfig.Tool\Bin\DataFiles\Configuration
\BitmapFiles
To the NX workstation path:

C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\BitmapFiles


6 Limitations of the Offline Configuration Tool
IMPORTANT:
It is not possible to export the configuration to a previous version of NX!
The export feature of the Oflline Configuration Tool must always be used for NX
systems with the same software version as the Offline Configuration Tool.
NOTE:
There is no access to the NX database. Input and output is handled via
export files (xml). These are the same type of files as used in the previous NX versions
with the regular Configuration Tool.
Following configurations/functions have to be set/used on the regular Configuration
Tool since they can not be done on the Offline Configuration Tool:
Configurations:
• Enabling/disabling of active licenses
• Applying special license settings
• Configuration of X-ray generator device
• Configuration of DR detector device
• Configuration of X-ray generator exposure settings
• Authentication configuration (users and roles) as there is no authentication
management offline
Functions:
• Loading active configuration
• Activating configuration
• Restoring configuration
• Test connection functionalities
• Query RIS
• Test image for the monitor check
• Scan for in-room NXs (CMS functionality)
• Delete session (as there is no NX Database)
• Automatic backup


7 Additional Tools
7.1 Optional additional Tools
7.2 XRDI 9.0 for Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Plug-in
NOTE:
Since XRDI 9.0, an additional XRDI plug-in is available for usage on an NX Offline
Configuration Tool. This plug-in is created for to enable the FSE to prepare an
NX-XRDI configuration offline.
The plug-in:
• Adds the X-ray device model files (XML files) to the folder:
Drive:\Agfa\Healtcare\NX\Offline.Config.Tool.NX.X.8300\Bin\XRayDeviceModels
• Adds the DR Detector model files (XML files) to the folder:
Drive:\Agfa\Healtcare\NX\Offline.Config.Tool.NX.X.8300\Bin\XRayDeviceModels\D
RPanelModels
• Makes is possible to use the Offline Configuration Tool to configure the:
o X-ray generator device
o DR detector device
o X-ray generator exposure settings in the exam tree.
7.2.1 Installing the XRDI 9.0 for Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Plug-in
Prerequisite To be able to install the XRDI configuration plug-in, the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Offline Configuration Tool must be installed on the PC.
(1) Log in to an account that has administrator rights on the PC where the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Offline Configuration Tool is installed.
(2) Insert the CD containing the downloaded or ordered Offline Configuration Tool
software and open it in the Windows Explorer.
(3) Browse to the root folder of the CD.
(4) Double-click the installer file:
XRDI 9.0.XXXX for Offline Config Tool NX X.0.8300.exe and
observe the progress of the installer.
Result After the installer is done, it displays a message that the Offline Configuration Tool is


7.2.2 Using the XRDI 9.0 for Offline Config Tool NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Plug-in
Be aware of the following notes when using the Offline Configuration Tool for
configurations of the X-ray or DR detector device:
NOTE:
When configuring an X-ray device, the following licensing warning may appear, as the
Offline Configuration Tool does not ‘see’ the XRDI licenses:
Figure 4
This warning will disappear when loading the configuration file on a real NX system
with proper licenses.
NOTE:
When configuring a DR detector (DR panel) the Offline Configuration Tool will create a
folder C:\imagers folder with 3 dummy sub-folders:
• PORTABLE
• TABLE
• WALL
On the real NX system, these settings still need to be replaced with the correct
detectors:
Figure 5


7.3 Additionally installed Tools
The following tools are installed on the offline PC together with the Offline
Configuration Tool.
7.3.1 ExamTree Conversion Tool
This tool is used to convert exam trees in Customer Parameter File (CPF)-file format
or a QS-XML-file format to a format that can be imported in the NX Offline
Configuration Tool.
For more information about using this tool refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
7.3.2 Logging Viewer
This tool is used to view NX log files.

For more information about this tool refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual,
Chapter 09 - Troubleshooting DD+DIS105.10E section Fault Finding
7.3.3 Age Group Copy Tool
Premium Musica2 packages on NX require separate pediatrics exams.

The NX Configuration Tool does not allow copying the existing 17+ age group
exposure types into the pediatric age groups.
This can be done using the Agegroup Copy Tool.
7.3.3.1 Using the Agegroup Copy Tool
NOTE:
• The Agegroup Copy Tool can only work with full configuration export xml files
that contains only 17+ exposure types. Using the exam tree export file only is not
supported.
• The file to import must be a NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 configuration file. If only
lower version of the configuration file is available, import the file in the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Offline Configuration Tool first and export it again.


(1) Open the Agegroup Copy Tool:

Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Offline Config Tool NX X.0.8300 Æ
AgeGroup Copy Tool
(2) Go to File Æ Select Configuration:
Figure 6
(3) Browse to the full export configuration file and click the button <Open>.
(4) If also the X-ray Generator (XRG) modality settings of the selected exposures
should be copied, check the checkbox in the main window:
IMPORTANT:
If the modality settings are copied, they should be adjusted manually
since in most cases the adult XRG modality settings cannot be used
for pediatric exposures.
Figure 7


(5) Click <Start> to start copying the age group.

(6) After the file has been loaded, select one of the two options:
• Select all exposures from Exam Groups (Mammography and
Quality Assurance (QA) -exams are not included in the selection).
• Select all exposures from Exposures Groups.
Figure 8
Explanation:
If exposures are selected via exposure groups the following tasks are performed:
• Only the exposure types listed in the selected exposure group are
duplicated to the pediatric age groups.
• The copied exposures are added into the corresponding exposure group.
• For source exposure types included in a printsheet, similar printsheets will
be created for the duplicated exposure types in the target age group.
If exposures are selected via exam groups the following tasks are performed:
• All exposures of the selected exam groups are duplicated to the pediatric
age groups.
• For exposures that belong to an exposure group, the copied paediatric
exposures are included into the exposure group.
• Exposure types which are included in the exposure group but did not occur
in the original selected exposure list are copied to the paediatric exam
groups as well.
• For source exposure types included in a printsheet, similar printsheets will
be created for the duplicated exposure types in the target age group.


NOTE:
The copy operation will be stopped in case one of the target exam
groups already contain pediatric exposure types.
(7) Select the exam groups/exposure groups to be copied and click <OK>.
NOTE:
Warnings are submitted in case that incomplete printsheets are created.
This could occur in case printsheets contain Mammography or QA-
exams combined with exposure types that are selected for duplication.
(8) After duplication has finished, click <Done>:
Figure 9
Result The export file is stored on the same location as the import file but with the string
"Duplicated_" inserted at the start of the filename.
NOTE:
The documentation to the Age Group Copy Tool can also be found in the Offline
Configuration Tool via Start Æ Programs Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Offline Config Tool NX
X.0.8300 Æ AgeGroup Copy Tool Documentation


7.3.4 Verify Signature of NX Import-Export File Tool
This tool can be used to verify whether an export/import xml file is correctly signed.
Since the export/import xml file is verified by the Configuration Tool on
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 this tool is not needed anymore.
7.3.5 Configuration Tool Online Help
The Offline Configuration Tool is installed with an online help.

NOTE:
• To be able to view the online help it might be needed to ‘allow blocked content’
in the browser.
• The content of the online help is identical to the NX Key User Manual.
(1) Press the functional key <F1> to access the online help to the currently active
screen of the Offline Configuration Tool.
(2) Navigate through the online help by using the displayed links or by clicking the
left arrow button:


Imaging Services Acceptance Test
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides the checklists for the acceptance test of the component
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, Type 4406/303 with the customer.
It contains the procedure instructions and can also be used as a report on hardcopy.
IMPORTANT:
This Acceptance Test is mandatory when one of the following service tasks is
performed:
• Installation of a new NX Workstation/Central Monitoring System
• Upgrade/update of an NX Workstation
• Clean installation of an NX Workstation
Fill out this protocol during the installation and configuration tasks!
Edition. Release Changes:

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual:
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration
DD+DIS227.04E CR Mammography Solution Service Manual, chapter 3.6
Connectivity Release Documents on Mednet Healthcare Library

sw_06_acceptance-test_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Acceptance Test
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
1.1 Purpose of this Document.........................................................................................................4
1.2 How to use this Document ........................................................................................................4
2 WHEN TO PERFORM WHAT ..................................................................................................5

2.1 NX Acceptance Test in a Computed Radiography (CR) Environment .....................................5
2.2 NX Acceptance Test in a Direct Radiography (DR) Environment ............................................5
3 SYSTEM INFORMATION.........................................................................................................6
3.1 Customer Information ...............................................................................................................6
3.2 Installer Information ..................................................................................................................6
3.3 Remote Access Information......................................................................................................6
3.4 Software Inventory ....................................................................................................................7
4 LIMITED ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE........................................................................8

4.1 Check new Software Version....................................................................................................8
4.2 GenRad Workflow Test.............................................................................................................9
4.3 Mammography Workflow Test ................................................................................................10
5 FULL ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURE ...........................................................................12

5.1 Hardware Inventory.................................................................................................................12
5.2 NX System Snapshot..............................................................................................................13
5.3 Saving This Form....................................................................................................................13
5.4 Initial Checks...........................................................................................................................13
5.5 Establish/Test Network Connectivity ......................................................................................14
5.6 Technical Configuration Checklist ..........................................................................................15
5.7 Application Configuration Checklist ........................................................................................17
5.8 Function Tests.........................................................................................................................18
5.9 Additional Software Packages Installation and Configuration ................................................20
5.10 Test of Remote Service Capability..........................................................................................21
5.11 Test of UPS.............................................................................................................................21
6 ACCEPTANCE TEST FINALIZATION....................................................................................22


1 Introduction
1.1 Purpose of this Document
This document describes the operations and tests to be performed on the workstation
and is used to report on the results.
The objective behind an Acceptance Test Protocol (ATP) is to verify that a system has
been installed and configured correctly. The ATP is not designed to test the features &
functionality unless the environment in which the device is installed can affect
the functionality.
IMPORTANT:
This technical Acceptance Test does not replace any Acceptance Tests defined
for Solutions (e.g. Acceptance Test for the CR Mammography Solution).
NOTE:
The checklist can be used as a form to hand-over the system from the
Field Service Engineer (FSE) to the Clinical Application Specialist (CAS). It is strongly
recommended that the Field Service Engineer gets in close contact with the
responsible Clinical Application Specialist to synchronize the activities, so that
everything will be in place in time.
1.2 How to use this Document
This report can be filled in on any Service PC that has Microsoft Word installed.
Completing the report is done on a printed copy of the filled in document that is used to
carry the signatures to prove the final acceptance by the customer and for archiving in
the NSO for regulatory proofs:
(1) Download the latest available version of the NX Acceptance Test document from
the MedNet GSO Library to the Service PC with MS Word application installed
(2) Open the downloaded PDF file on the Service PC.
(3) Open the Microsoft Word version of the NX Acceptance Test attached to the PDF
file.
(4) Fill in the applicable parts of document during and after the installation activities.
(5) After the applicable parts have been filled in save the document on the NX
workstation. For more information refer to section 5.3.
(6) Print the filled out document and collect all necessary signatures on the last page.
(7) Hand out a copy of the filled in and signed document to a customer representative.
(8) Store the original filled in and signed document at the local Service Organization.


2 When to perform what
REQUIRED TIME:
Sections 3 - 5 are filled out during installation and configuration.
The finalization of the ATP (section 6) takes approximately 30 minutes.
2.1 NX Acceptance Test in a Computed Radiography (CR) Environment
The following tables show which parts of this document have to be filled out, depending
on the performed environment and activity. The symbol “9” indicates that the section
has to be filled out:
Sections New NX Upgrade from Software Update of NX Clean

workstation earlier NX version (SU1, SU2, etc.) Installation
3 - System Information 9 9 9 ⎯
4 - Limited Acceptance Test
Procedure ⎯ 9* 9 ⎯
5 - Full Acceptance Test
Procedure
9 9 ** ⎯ 9
6 - Acceptance Test
Finalization
9 9 9 ⎯
* Only if the site does not receive additional functionality by the upgrade.
** Only if the site receives additional functionality by the upgrade.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware that this Acceptance Test only covers the NX workstations as a component.
If the NX workstation works as part of a solution (e.g. CR Mammography Solution),
also perform the Acceptance Tests defined for the Solution in the Solution Manual.
2.2 NX Acceptance Test in a Direct Radiography (DR) Environment
NOTE:
In Direct Radiography (DR) environments, some of the tests (workflow tests) described
in this document are not applicable. This is indicated by a note at the beginning of the
respective section. Only the tests covering the NX workstation as component must be
performed. The workflow tests are described in the DR Solution Manual.


3 System Information
3.1 Customer Information
Site Name
Site ID
Street Address
City, State, Zip
Contact Name /
Phone / Email
IT Contact Name /
Phone / Email
Purchase Order #
3.2 Installer Information
Installer Name & Title

Installer Phone
Installer Email
3.3 Remote Access Information
Site Teklink VPN RAS Other Specify:

Access Version:
Type
Remote Dial in Number: User Name: Password:
Login
NX Admin User Name: Admin Password: Domain Name:

Administator
Login
NX Service Service User Name: Service Password: Domain Name:
User Login


3.4 Software Inventory
Gather shipped software and store in a secure location.
Record of installed software before start installation/upgrade/update

If software is to be left in the possession of the customer. Please enter the name of the
individual to which the software has been given under "Guardian" and the location at which
the software will be stored for safe keeping.
Software Version Guardian / Contact Person
Name
Record of installed software after installation/upgrade/update

If software is to be left in the possession of the customer. Please enter the name of the
individual to which the software has been given under "Guardian" and the location at which
the software will be stored for safe keeping.
Software Version Guardian / Contact Person
Name


4 Limited Acceptance Test Procedure
4.1 Check new Software Version
(1) Run the NX Application and check the Software Version in the NX About Box
(Main Menu Æ link About).
(2) Make sure that the Nickname corresponds to the version of the NX Software that
has been installed according to the License File that has been used.
NOTE:
The About Box shows three version identifications:
1. Nickname e.g. NX 3.0.8300
2. Build Number e.g. 6.5.1203


4.2 GenRad Workflow Test
NOTE:
• This test is not applicable for DR environments. Refer to the Acceptance Test in
the DR Solution Manual for instructions for a DR workflow test.
• For a detailed description of the procedures below refer to the Online Help or the
NX User Manual on MedNet Healthcare Library.
Path:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software
Æ NX 2.0.8300 – 3.0.8300Æ User Manual
Perform following workflow test to ensure the functionality of the GenRad NX system.
The steps to be taken depend on the situation given on site. Make sure to cover all
these procedures:
(1) Create a new study:

• If a RIS is available create a test entry in the RIS.
• If no RIS is available create a test exam manually and go to step (3).
(2) Query the worklist and open the test patient.
(3) Open the exam and select an exposure.
(4) Identify an empty cassette via ID-Tablet or digitzer (Fast ID) and digitize the
image plate.
(5) Check, if the image appears in the Examination environment on the Workstation.
(6) Place a free annotation on the image.
(7) If a printer is available: Send the image to the printer and evaluate the content
(textbox etc.).
(8) If an archive (e.g. PACS) is available send the exam to the archive and evaluate
the content on the archive system.


4.3 Mammography Workflow Test
NOTE:
• This test is not applicable for DR environments. Refer to the Acceptance Test in
the DR Solution Manual for instructions for a DR workflow test.
• For a detailed description of the procedures below refer to the Online Help or the
NX User Manual on MedNet Healthcare Library.
Path:
Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ NX 2.0.8300 – 3.0.8300
Æ User Manual
Perform following workflow test to ensure the functionality of the Mammography NX

system. The steps to be taken depend on the situation given on site. Make sure to
cover all these procedures:
(1) Create a new study for a standard Mammography examination of 6 view

positions:
(L-CC, R-CC, L-MLO, R-MLO, L-ML and R-ML):
• If a RIS is available create a test entry in the RIS.
• If no RIS is available create a test exam manually and go to step (3).
(2) Query the worklist and open the test patient.
(3) Take six erased 18 x 24 cm CR Mammography cassettes.
(4) Ask the radiographer to expose the cassette with a phantom (coins, orange,
etc.) so it is possible to check the view position and proper image orientation.
(5) Open the exam and select an exposure.
(6) Identify the cassettes via ID-Tablet or digitzer (Fast ID) and digitize the image
plates.
(7) Check if the images appears in the Examination environment on the
Workstation.
(8) Check the proper orientation of the displayed image on the Workstation.
(9) Place a free annotation on one of the images.
(10) Reject one image for testing.
(11) Simulate a retake by identifying/ exposing/ scanning an additional cassette.
(12) Send the final study to the printer and to the softcopy reporting station.
(13) Add one additional exposure to a closed study.
(14) Print and send the additional image.


(15) If a printer is available, evaluate the printed images:

• All images are printed.
• Maximum density is 3.6.
• Mammography film layouts are applied.
• Mammography textbox is applied
(the layout and location of the text box depends on the configuration and
type of workstation).
• Date format is matching local requirements.
• Images are printed in the expected orientation.
• Images are printed in true size.
(16) If an archive (e.g. PACS) is available, evaluate the content on the archive
system:
• All images of the CR Mammography study can be displayed in the Display
Screen.
• Images can be displayed in true size and in the mode "pixel by pixel".
• Required hanging order is applied.
• Wizards and keyboard shortcuts are working as specified.
• Demographic overlays for CR Mammography are visible.
• The tools defined for CR Mammography are available and can be used to
processes the images.


5 Full Acceptance Test Procedure
5.1 Hardware Inventory
Record of installed Hardware before start of installation/upgrade
Hardware Manufacturer and Type Serial Number

NX PC
Monitor
UPS
External
device
Record of installed Hardware after installation/upgrade
Hardware Manufacturer and Type Serial Number

NX PC
Monitor
UPS
External
device


5.2 NX System Snapshot
(1) Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ ServiceÆ NX System Snapshot

(2) Press any key to continue. The snapshot tool generates a snapshot using
Everest.
(3) Include the NX configuration in the snapshot (Y).
After the tool has finished, it stores a zip file containing the snapshot in:
C:\Agfa\Healtcare\NX\SystemSnapshot
(4) Add the Initial_Installation_Date to the filename of the zip file.
(5) Place it together with this document and with the exported Configuration file into
a folder: Initial_Installation_Date
5.3 Saving This Form
(1) Save this form under the name Initial_ATP_Date_Time.

(2) Place it together with the System Snapshot and the Configuration Snapshot into
the folder, which you created above.
NOTE:
Alternatively embed the NX System Snapshot into this document using the MS Word
function “Insert Æ Object Æ Create from file”.
If this is desired, please embed the two files on this page.
5.4 Initial Checks
Activity Done Remark (if applicable)

(1) Unpack and check
consignment for damage
and completeness.
(2) Make electrical connections
and terminations.
(3) Check/set date, time and
time zone settings.


5.5 Establish/Test Network Connectivity
Obtain the network parameters for the NX Workstation from the network administrator.
If the Installation Planning document for this site is at hand, refer to it. The parameters
should have been collected there.
NOTE:
If DNS is used, obtain the DNS server IP address and request that the NX Workstation
IP address is entered into the DNS server.
If the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Workstation is integrated into a hospital domain provide
the domain name.
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Gateway
DNS server
Host name
Workgroup
name
Domain
name

(1) Enter the IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway
appropriately and fill in hosts
table (see chapter 4 “Installation
and Configuration”).
(2) Check for successful ping of the
Network Switch and/or other
systems.


5.6 Technical Configuration Checklist
Make sure the following configuration steps are performed:

(1) Check if network and domain
configuration is completed.
(2) Check if user configuration is
completed.
(3) Check if the Service account is
activated.
(4) Check if the Licenses are activated.
(5) Check if the User roles are

assigned.
(6) Check if country specific starter
configuration settings are loaded.
(7) Check if existing configuration IMPORTANT:
settings from earlier NX, CR QS or Not applicable for CMS
VIPS are converted to NX format
and loaded.
(8) Check if the monitor is configured IMPORTANT:
for P-Values. Mandatory for Musica2 and
Mammography
(9) Check if the Monitor is configured
for Gamma correction.
(10) Check if the ID Tablet is connected IMPORTANT:
and configured. Not applicable for CMS
(11) Check if Printers are configured. IMPORTANT:

Not applicable for CMS
(12) Check if Mammography printers IMPORTANT:

are configured correctly for Not applicable for CMS
Mammography:
• Dmin = 0.2
• Dmax = 3.6
• Ruler is disabled
• Data type = P-values
• Luminance and Illuminance
(ambient light) are measured
and entered
(13) Check if archive (PACS) IMPORTANT:
destinations are configured. Not applicable for CMS



(14) Check if Mammography Archive IMPORTANT:
(PACS) destinations are configured Not applicable for CMS
correctly for Mammography:
Data type = 15 bit P-values
(15) Check if the RIS is configured. IMPORTANT:
Not applicable for CMS
(16) Check if the Protocol codes are IMPORTANT:

imported (if asked by Application). Not applicable for CMS
(17) Check if the Export destinations

are configured.
(18) Check if the Priors Viewer are
configured.
(19) Check if MPPS is configured. IMPORTANT:
Not applicable for CMS.
(20) Check if the Exam Tree is IMPORTANT:

configured Not applicable for CMS.
(If asked by Application).
(21) Check if the Digitizers are IMPORTANT:
configured in the NX. Not applicable for CMS.
(22) Check if the Digitizers and NXs are IMPORTANT:

configured in CCM and cpf files Not applicable for CMS.
loaded.
(23) Check if the GUI is configured (If
asked by Application).
(24) Check if the Monitor is calibrated IMPORTANT:
for P-values. Mandatory for Musica2 and
Mammography
(25) Check if the Monitor is calibrated
for Gamma correction.
(26) Check if the Rooms are configured
in CMS.
(27) Check if the XRG settings
(Mammo) are received from the X-
ray modality and stored on the NX
workstation.
Also check that the values of the
settings are correct. *
(28) Check if the reject reasons are
configured in the local language.


* NOTE:
For more information about the correct XRG settings and values refer to the XRG
connectivitiy release document on
MedNet HealthCare library Æ General Info Æ Connectivity & Application (choose the
respective X-ray modality vendor). For external partners: Please contact your local
Agfa representative.
5.7 Application Configuration Checklist
Make sure the following configuration steps are performed:

(1) Check if the Exam Tree is IMPORTANT:
converted, loaded and configured. Not applicable for CMS
(2) Check if the Protocol codes are IMPORTANT:

imported and linked to Not applicable for CMS
exposures/groups.
(3) Check if the Printer sheet and IMPORTANT:
image textboxes are configured. Not applicable for CMS

(Mammography) are configured in
GUI configuration for Examination
environment.
(Mammography) are configured in
textbox.
(6) Check if the User accounts are
created.
(7) Check if the GUI is configured.
(8) Check if the Exam tree settings are

accepted by the end-user
responsible for acceptance of the
workstation.
(9) Check if the Image quality is
discussed with responsible
customer representative and
adapted accordingly.
(10) Check if the Key Users are trained.
(11) Check if the Users are trained.
(12) Check if the Radiologists are

trained.



(13) Check if the Erasure Time is set on
750 mR for each Mammography
examination.
(14) Check if the Correct Speed Class
s set for each Mammography
examination:
• 75 for version 1 of modality
alignment procedure.
• 50 for version 2 of modality
alignment procedure.
5.8 Function Tests
NOTE:
This test is not applicable for DR environments. Refer to the Acceptance Test in the DR
Solution Manual for instructions for a DR workflow test.
Test Pass Fail Not applic. Remark (if applicable)

(1) Check start up and shut down.
a) Start-up, shutdown and
start-up the NX workstation.
b) Ensure that the workstation is
working as defined after start-
up, shutdown and start-up.
(2) Check manual patient data input.
a) Enter Patient and Study data
manually.
b) ID the cassette and digitize the
cassette.
c) Check if the image arrives.
If Direct ID, note down in
Remarks
(3) Check patient data input via RIS.
a) Enter Patient and SPS data
via RIS.
b) ID cassette ID and digitize the
cassette.
c) Check if the image arrives.
d) Check if RIS data
mapping is correct.
If Direct ID, note down in
Remarks



(4) Check RIS Automatic SPS
selection without Protocol Codes.
(5) Check RIS Automatic SPS
selection with Protocol Codes.
(6) Check manual and automatic
printing for GenRad:
a) Check that the image textbox
on the printout contains all
necessary data
b) Check that the image on the
printout has the same contrast
appearance as the image
displayed on the NX screen.
c) Check the correctness of true
size printing (see Sheet
Textbox).
printing for Mammography:
a) Take an X-ray exposure of a
standard 4 view
Mammography examination
with phantoms marking the
chest wall side.
b) Perform a study for each
Mammography cassette
format.
c) Print the complete study
automatically and manually
and check:
• If the films are printed by
the correct Mammogprahy
printer.
• If the date format matches
the
local requirements.
• The printouts for proper
image alignment: images
of the right breast shifted
to the right and images of
the left breast shifted to
the left.
• The correctness of true
size printing
(see Sheet Textbox).
routing to PACS destination for
GenRad.



(9) Check that the image on the PACS
has the same contrast appearance
as the image displayed on the NX
screen.
routing to PACS destination for
Mammography:
a) Take an X-ray exposure of a
standard 4 view
Mammography examination
with phantoms marking the
chest wall side.
b) Perform a study for each
Mammography cassette
format.
c) Check:
• If the images are arriving
on the correct Softcopy
destination.
• If the required
demographic overlay data
are displayed.
(11) Check the Storage Commit
functionality.
(12) Check the MPPS functionality
(on the RIS).
(13) Check within the UI worklist pane
the Priors functionality.
(14) Check within the UI worklist pane
that for each room images are
available and can be viewed.
5.9 Additional Software Packages Installation and Configuration
List additionally installed software (e.g. Anti Virus software) in the following list:
Name and version of the installed Software Package Confirmed


5.10 Test of Remote Service Capability
Check here if not applicable
Test Done Remark (if applicable)

(1) Test accessibility over the network for
Remote Desktop.
(2) Test accessibility over the network for the
FTP-server.
(3) Test the remote service connection by
connection through the SRSS and/or other
connection type (remote desktop, FTP, ping,
etc.).
5.11 Test of UPS
Check here if not applicable
Test Done Remark (if applicable)

(1) Allow UPS to build up a full charge.
(2) Check the configuration of the Windows Power
Option.
(3) Check the serial cable which connects the
server and the UPS.
(4) Disconnect external power to the UPS.
(5) Ensure that the UPS continues to power the
system.
(6) Wait until the configured minutes of removing
external power to the UPS have passed.
(7) Ensure that the Windows Power option
performs a correct shutdown of the system.


6 Acceptance Test Finalization
Remarks of the Field Service Engineer
Remarks of the Application Specialists
Remarks of the Customer Representative
Open issues are escalated
Ensure that all open topics which can not be solved on-site are escalated via the
standard Service Escalation channels.
Review all open topics of the site and check if cases have been placed in the AGFA
service tracking tool (Powerhelp).


Satisfactory Completion of System Acceptance Test
The tests outlined in this document have all been executed and have all passed
successfully indicating that the product is installed and configured correctly.
AGFA Service and Applications representatives have reviewed with us the
procedures by which our institution shall contact Agfa for warranty & post
warranty support.
Name of Agfa Field Service Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Agfa Applications Responsible Title
Signature Date
Name of Customer Responsible Title
Signature Date


Imaging Services Upgrade Installation
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Installation Instruction for Upgrade from earlier

NX Versions
This document describes the upgrade procedure from the following earlier NX versions
to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
• NX 1.0
• NX 2.0
• NX 2008
• NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000
• NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200
For details refer to section 1.1.

1.1 09-2010 • Added remark to export configuration and image data
before the upgrade. Refer to section 3.4.
• Added step to select proper XRDI version if the
corresponding license is available. Refer to section 3.6.
Document Title
DD+DIS012.06E Licensing Service Manual

sw_07_upgade-install_e_template_v07
DD+DIS115.10E Upgrade Installation
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


DD+DIS115.10E Upgrade Installation from NX
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW OF THE UPGRADE PROCEDURE .....................................................................5

1.1 Upgrade Possiblities and Paths ................................................................................................5
1.2 Overview of required Steps.......................................................................................................6
2 PREPARATION BEFORE THE UPGRADE .............................................................................7

2.1 Collecting Information to prepare the Upgrade .........................................................................7
2.2 Ordering the Upgrade Material .................................................................................................8
2.3 Obtaining additionally needed Tools, Documentation and Software ........................................9
2.4 Obtaining the new Application License File (ALF) ..................................................................11
3 UPGRADE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................11

3.1 Checking regional Settings of “crservice” Account .................................................................12
3.2 Installing the new Hotfixes ......................................................................................................12
3.3 Installing Support for Thai and East-Asian Languages (if required) .......................................13
3.4 Exporting Data ........................................................................................................................14
3.5 Loading Licenses ....................................................................................................................14
3.6 Installing the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Upgrade.......................................................................16
3.7 Installing NX Software Updates (if available)..........................................................................19
3.8 Reconfiguring the NX Backend Account (if needed) ..............................................................20
3.9 Changing the Size of Partition D to use the complete remaining Disk Space........................20
3.10 Change Dose Type .................................................................................................................21
3.11 Importing Data.........................................................................................................................22
3.12 Checking Regional Settings....................................................................................................22
3.13 Reconfiguration of Certificates for Secure Communication....................................................23
3.14 Upgrading TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP) ........................................................................23
3.15 Upgrading ID Tablet Firmware................................................................................................23
3.16 Installing the NX Online Help ..................................................................................................24
4 COMPLETING THE UPGRADE .............................................................................................25

4.1 Verification ..............................................................................................................................25
4.2 Backup of Configuration Data .................................................................................................26
4.3 Informing the Customer about Upgrade of the NX Office Viewer...........................................26


4.4 Finalize NX Acceptance Test..................................................................................................27
4.5 Documentation Hand-over ......................................................................................................27
5 STEPS AFTER INSTALLATION.............................................................................................27

5.1 Generating the Fingerprint File ...............................................................................................27
5.2 Upload the Finger Print to the ELMS ......................................................................................28
6 TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................................28
6.1 Automatic Import of preserved Data from the original System ...............................................28
6.2 Different Image Appearance on the PACS after the Upgrade................................................30
6.3 Slow Performance after Upgrade from NX 1.0.2405 ..............................................................30
7 APPENDIX A: EXPORTING DATA ........................................................................................31

7.1 Exporting Configuration Data..................................................................................................31
7.2 Keeping Images – Export........................................................................................................32
7.3 Exporting Dose Monitoring Statistics ......................................................................................36
8 APPENDIX B: IMPORTING DATA .........................................................................................38

8.1 Importing Configuration Data ..................................................................................................38
8.2 Keeping Images – Import........................................................................................................41
8.3 Importing Dose Monitoring Statistics (if requested by the Customer) ....................................42


1 Overview of the Upgrade Procedure
1.1 Upgrade Possiblities and Paths
The following earlier NX versions can be upgraded to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300:
Upgrade path In-Room NX Upgrade path CMS NX

• NX 1.0.2405 GenRad • NX 2.0.6805 (SUx) CMS
• NX 1.0.3203 (SUx) GenRad • NX 2008 CMS
• NX 2.0.1703 Mammography • NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 (SU1) CMS
• NX 2.0.6805 (SUx) • NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 CMS
GenRad/Mammography
• NX 2008 InRoom
• NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 InRoom
• NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 (SU1)
InRoom
• NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 InRoom
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

InRoom (Mixed Use or Veterinary) CMS
IMPORTANT:
It is not possible to upgrade NX 2.0.8100 / NX 3.0.8100 systems with this procedure.
NX 2.0.8100 / NX 3.0.8100 systems require a "clean installation procedure".
See the DX-D 500 solution specific service bulletin.
NOTE:
The NX 2.0.8300 and NX 3.0.8300 software versions are both based on identical
installation files. The version difference is based on the activated license packages.


1.2 Overview of required Steps
This table lists the required steps:
NX Workstation
Duration [min.]
Section
CMS
# Step
PREPARATION
1. Collect information to prepare the upgrade. 2.1 -
2. Order the upgrade kit. 2.2 -
3. Obtain additional tools, documentation and software. 2.3 -
4. Obtain the new Application License File (ALF) 2.4 -
UPGRADE PROCEDURE
5. Check regional settings of "crservice" account. 3.1 10
6. Install the hofixes. 3.2 40
7. Install support for Thai and East-Asian Languages (if required). 3.3 10
8. Export data. 3.4 10
9. Load licenses. 3.5 10
10. Install the upgrade. 3.6 30
11. Install NX software updates (if available) 3.7 20
12. Reconfigure NX backend account (if required) 3.8 15
13. Change size of partition D: to use the remaining disk space. 3.9 5
14. Change dose type. 3.10 10
15. Import data. 3.11 15
16. Check regional settings 3.12 5
17. Reconfigure certificates for secure communication (if required) 3.13 15
18. Upgrade TWAIN digitizer software (if required). 3.14 30
19. Upgrade ID tablet firmware (if required). 3.15 10
20. Install the NX online help. 3.16 5
COMPLETING THE UPGRADE
21. Verify the installation. 4.1 2
22. Backup configuration data. 4.2 10
23. Inform the customer about upgrade of the NX office viewer. 4.3 30
24. Finalize the NX acceptance test. 4.4 5
25. Hand-over the DVD with documentation to the customer. 4.5 5
STEPS AFTER INSTALLATION
26. Generate the Fingerprint file 5.1 5
27. Upload the Fingerprint file to ELMS 5.2 5
Overall required time: Approximately 5 hours
* Reference value. Required time depends on the complexity of the situation on site.


2 Preparation before the Upgrade
2.1 Collecting Information to prepare the Upgrade
NOTE:
Obtaining upgrade material and generating the Application License File (performed off-
site by the NSO or on-line via ELMS) requires identification information about the
system’s hardware and software. Obtain following information via remote log in or
telephone call and keep it for further steps:
(1) Collect the following information about the old system on site:
Original software version: NX 1.0.2405 GenRad

(1) Go to the NX main menu. NX 1.0.3203 (SUx) GenRad
(2) Click About. NX 2.0.1703 Mammo
(3) Obtain the NX version from the
NX splash screen. NX 2.0.6805 (SUx) GenRad
NX 2.0.6805 (SUx) Mammo
NX 2.0.6805 (SUx) CMS
NX 2008 InRoom
NX 2008 CMS
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 (SUx)
InRoom
NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 (SUx) CMS
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 InRoom
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 CMS
AGFA serial number:
Written on the AGFA label attached to the
product hardware.
(Needed for creating the license file)
Workstation is connected to a No Yes

TWAIN digitizer (CR 30-X, DX-S,
DX-G with SW < NIM_2XXX): (See
section 3.14)
ID Tablet is connected via USB: No Yes

(See sections 2.3.5 and 3.15)
Secure Communication is used: No Yes

(See section 3.13)


(2) Collect the following information about the new ordered software:
•
Sales Order (SO) number*:

Only required if additional licenses are ordered
(e.g. NX 3.0 Features License).

Version of NX to be installed: NX 2.0.8300 NX 3.0.8300
(Needed to create the license file)
Update to later version: No Yes Name:

(e.g. NX 3.0.8300 SU1)
Optional license packages:

Refer to Chapter 1 “Product Description” to find
a complete list of licenses and dependencies.
Customer requires to to keep Yes, approx. __________ images

existing images:
Professional Service ordered.
Not applicable for upgrade from NX 2008.
(See sections 7 and 8.) No
2.2 Ordering the Upgrade Material
REQUIRED SPARE PARTS:

Order the Upgrade Kit. For the order number refer to the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Bulletin No. 1 Release of NX 2.0.8300 - 3.0.8300 DD+DIS122.10E
Contents of the Upgrade Kit:

• NX Starterkit DVD 1
• NX Starterkit DVD 2
NOTE:
For detailed information about the content of the NX Starterkit DVDs and the software
versions that are compatible with a specific NX profile refer to


2.3 Obtaining additionally needed Tools, Documentation and Software
2.3.1 Documentation for an Upgrade Installation
Take the following documentation on site:

• NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual DD+DIS105.10E
• If the NX workstation is part of a Mammography or DR Solution: The corresponding
solution service manual.
2.3.2 Hofixes for an Upgrade Installation

The latest Hotfix version on release date of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 is contained in the
NX Starter Kit DVD 2.
Run the FUSE updater on the Service PC to receive the latest available Hotfix version.
NOTE:
For instructions to obtain and install the Fast Update Service (FUSE) software
refer to the FUSE Service Manual FUSE - Fast Update Service (Automatic
Software Update) DD+DIS134.08E
2.3.3 TWAIN Digitizer Device Software (ASAP)
If the NX Workstation is connected to a TWAIN digitizer (e.g. CR 30-X, DX-S or

DX-G ASAP *), the compatible device software has to be downloaded from Mednet
GSO Library and installed on the workstation.
* DX-G is a DICOM digitizer as of SW version ≥ NIM_2xxx
(1) To find the compatible version numbers refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
(2) Go to the Mednet GSO Library to download the device software:
GSO Library Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Digitizers Æ <Digitizer name> Æ
Freeware


2.3.4 External Hard Disk for keeping Images
If the customer has the requirement to keep existing images, the space required to
store the images during upgrade can exceed the free disk space on the system.
In this case an external hard disk is required.
Refer to section 3.6 “Keeping images – Export" for important prerequisites to perform
this procedure.
NOTE:
• When upgrading from NX 2008 or higher, exporting and importing the images is not
required.
• Keeping images may involve a "professional service"* that must be ordered by
the customer.
* A "professional service" is a special Agfa service which is not covered by the standard service
procedure.
2.3.5 Standard Serial Cable for ID Tablet Firmware Upgrade
IMPORTANT:
The ID Tablet firmware must be version 1.12.07 or higher.
If the ID Tablet is connected via USB, a standard serial cable to upgrade the firmware
of the ID Tablet is required. This cable has been delivered together with the ID Tablet.
2.3.6 NX Personal Certificate for Secure Communication
When upgrading systems before NX 2.0.6805 only:

If Secure Communication is used, the certificates have to be reconfigured.
Make sure to have the files available containing the NX personal certificate trusted
certificates for all devices connected through secure communication.


2.4 Obtaining the new Application License File (ALF)
There are two possibities:

• The license file is created by the FSE himself, using the Simplified ELMS.
• The license file is generated (using the Simplified ELMS) and provided by the
National Sales Organization (NSO). Using this option, the GSO Service dispatcher
or the FSE initiates the request to generate a new license file towards the NSO.
This process is defined by local procedures in the countries.
The license file is created in ELMS by the ELMS coordinator in the NSO and
provided to the FSE via ELMS or e-mail.
In both cases the information collected in section 2.1 needs to be provided.
INSTRUCTION:
For a detailed description of the procedure how to obtain a License File (ALF) refer to
the Licensing Service Manual (DD+DIS012.06E) on MedNet GSO Library
3 Upgrade Procedure
NOTE:
Recommendation: For both, Installation and Configuration, have the Acceptance Test
Protocol document at hand and fill it in according to the instructions given in the
Acceptance Test document. Fill it at every installation and configuration step instead of
filling it in afterwards. This saves a lot of time and is best practise.
The document is available in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 6


3.1 Checking regional Settings of “crservice” Account
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
Install scripts depend on English as default language.
Make sure that the language for the crservice account is set to English
(United States). This is the default setting and it is not advised to change this setting.
(1) Open Start Menu Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Regional & Language Settings
If this path is not visible, switch to “Classic view” in the control panel.
(2) Check the Regional Options.
3.2 Installing the new Hotfixes
IMPORTANT:
The Hotfix installation must be done prior to installing the product upgrade!
Otherwise installing the NX application will fail.
REQUIRED TIME:
(depending on the version of the hotfixes that is already installed)
(1) Install the Hotfix version contained in the NX Starter Kit DVD 2.
(2) Run the FUSE updater to receive the latest available Hotfix.
(3) Install the latest available Hotfix.
NOTE:


3.3 Installing Support for Thai and East-Asian Languages (if required)
NOTE:
If the original software version is NX 2.0.1703 or higher, this step is not required.
Support for Thai and East-Asian Languages is by default installed on new NX systems
from version NX 2.0.1703 on.
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Go to: Start Menu Æ Settings Æ Control Panel

(2) Double click Regional and Language Options.
(3) Go to tab: Languages
(4) Check both Supplemental Language Support checkboxes:
Figure 1
(5) Confirm the dialog boxes about required disk space.

(6) Click <OK>.
(7) Click <Browse> on the dialog Files Needed and go to C:\I386\Lang.
(8) Click <Open> and <OK>.
(9) Choose <Yes> to restart the PC.
(10) The required OS packages are installed on the NX workstation.
NOTE:
To setup the NX workstation in one of these languages, an additional procedure is
required. See NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and
Configuration DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


3.4 Exporting Data
Perform the following actions according to the NX version that is being upgraded:
• Upgrading from NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:

The export of the configuration data is performed automatically. The image and dose
statistics data remains in the database. I.e. neither automatic nor manual export of
this type of data is required. Since all data is either maintained in the database or
exported automatically, this step is not required.
Continue with the next section.
• Upgrading from NX 2008 and NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000:
The export of the data in general is performed automatically.
Recommendation to prevent additional configuration work or loss of image data in
case problems occur during the upgrade procedure:
o Save the configuration data manually before the upgrade.
o Manually export all images that are needed by the customer after the
upgrade.(not for CMS workstations).
For instructions refer to section 7.2.4.
• Upgrading from NX 1.0 or NX 2.0 (SUx) systems:
The export of the data is not performed automatically. Perform the manual export of
the following data:
o Configuration data
o Images (not for CMS workstations)
o Dose statistics (not for CMS workstations)
For instructions refer to section 7.
3.5 Loading Licenses
To load the licenses, the Application License File (*.alf) is needed.

This file has to be imported and the license has to be loaded into the system.
CAUTION:
Before loading a license key file, make sure the time zone, date and time have been
configured correctly! Refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


REQUIRED TIME:
Procedure to load a license file on the system:
(1) Copy the License File to:

C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing
(2) Start the License Manager Tool:
Start Æ Agfa Æ Service Æ License manager
(3) Click <Add license file>.
(4) Browse to the folder C:\AGFA\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\Licensing.
(5) Select the ALF received from the ELMS or NSO and click <Open>.
(6) Ignore the warning about the license file containing wrong version numbers for the
base license and continue loading the file.
(7) If the ALF is loaded successfully, the License Manager will pop up a dialog box
telling that the licenses have been updated.
The License Manger Tool start screen is displayed. The license file has been
(8) Reboot the workstation.
The message Invalid NX License (=MESS141) will appear. Ignore this message.
(10) Following step is only required for a NX Workstation, not for a CMS:
Stop the NX backend: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Stop NX
NOTE:
• For further information concerning the licensing workflow please refer to the
Licensing Service Manual DD+DIS012.06E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
• The logging information of the Licensing process can be found in the log file:


3.6 Installing the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Upgrade
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
• Make sure the latest Hotfixes are installed as described in section 3.2.
• The NX backend’s (NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkStation.exe) logon account
will be set to default again during the NX installation. If this account has been
customized it has to be reconfigured after the upgrade.
• At least 4 GB of free disk space on the C partition is required to run the installer.
• Make sure the NX workstation is connected to a network before starting the
upgrade. If no network is available, the installation will be aborted. Installation will
fail if the network is unplugged during installation of the NX Software.
• Make sure the license file is loaded. See section 3.5. The license may determine
additional software package installations.
• Make sure user crservice is logged in, the configuration tool as well the NX
application is closed, and the NX backend is stopped (Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ
Service Æ Stop NX. Note: NX backend not available at CMS).
(1) Insert the NX Starterkit DVD 1 in the NX DVD drive.

(2) Browse to the DVD-drive to the folder Service Software Æ NX Application
NX X.0.8300 and double-click: NX X.0.8300.(Build.X.X.XXXX).vX.exe
(3) The installation is guided by a setup wizard. Read carefully the messages and
instructions displayed in the wizard screens. See also IMPORTANT note next
page.


IMPORTANT:
Observe following guidelines when performing the upgrade:
• Do not interrupt the setup process.
• As of upgrades from NX 2008 or higher, the
wizard allows to choose which data to preserve
during the upgrade. Uncheck a box if the data
should not be preserved during upgrade.
Figure 2
• When upgrading a CMS system or from NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 the only

available option is Maintain Configuration Data.
• When upgrading from NX 2008 or higher, the upgrade installer wizard
provides information about the import of the preserved data. Observe
this information carefully. If data is not imported correctly during the
upgrade, additional steps need to be taken in section 3.11 to recover the
data.
• When upgrading from NX 1.0 or 2.0 (SUx), all configuration data,
images and dose statistics will be lost after the installation. Make sure
this data has been exported as described in section 7.
• If the license file contains a license that depends on an additional
software component, this is installed automatically:
o Following components may be installed:
- Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE)
- X-Ray Generator and DR Detector Interfacing Software (XRDI)
- Sedecal Software Console (DX-D 300 U-arm)
o The Install Utility Setup dialogues will ask to confirm the selected
component and will automatically install the software component on
the NX workstation (which is automatically copied from DVD to
folder C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Installers\ before installation).
o If one or more of the above
mentioned components
are installed, select the
component and press
<Next>. See example in
Figure 3.
o If more than one
component is displayed
(like in the example of
Figure 3), select the
required component. For
compatibility information
Figure 3
refer to the solution
specific information.


NOTE:
The Install Utility Setup dialogues sometimes appear hidden
behind the main installer window. In this case it looks as if the
installer is stalling. Then check the Windows Taskbar for the
presence of an Install Utility Setup tab and click the tab to bring
the dialogue to the foreground.
(4) After the upgrade, reboot the workstation

Any of these messages may be displayed:
Message Action
Invalid NX License (=MESS141) This message appears if you decided
to load the new license file after
performing the upgrade.
Critical error Ignore the message.
No digitizer configured
.NET Runtime 2.0 Error for the Start the NX viewer again after some
System.data.sqlclient.sql minutes waiting time.
MESS279 "NX has encountered an The message is caused by a delay in
internal error" the startup of the database after
installation or upgrade.
MESS310 "The system has
encountered an unexpected error"
Provider services not yet ready.
Please try restarting the application.
An exception has occurred, please
check the following error messages.
NOTE:
Following error message pops-up at a CMS after log in as long as no NX in-room
stations are configured. It disappears after configuration:
Configuration problem: No in-room NX stations configured! NX can not be started.
Please configure the in-room stations with the Configuration Tool. [Ref. MESS272].
Contact your service engineer.
(6) Following step is only required for a NX Workstation, not for a CMS:
Stop the NX backend: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Stop NX


NOTE:
The logging information of the process application installation can be found in the
log files:
• C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\NXMain.log
• C:\Agfa\Healthcare\Log\NX\NXActivate.log
3.7 Installing NX Software Updates (if available)
This is the moment when NX software updates are installed. Refer to the
documentation of the respective software update for installation instructions.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure that the ALF file which has been loaded, matches the version of the
software which is installed! How to pre-create an ALF file is described in
section 2.3 "Obtaining Application License File (ALF)".
Currently available Software Updates can be found on the NX Starterkit DVD 1. Also
check the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Bulletins to see if there's a more recent SU
released. The most recent SU should be installed.
(1) Insert the NX Starterkit DVD 1 or the medium that contains the most recent
Software Update.
(2) Open the respective installation instructions (On NX Starterkit DVD1 browse to the
CD-drive to the folder "Service Documentation" to find the installation instructions).
(3) On NX Starterkit DVD1 browse to the folder "Service Software" to find the
installation package.
NOTE:
Running the NX Activation Utility is not required.


3.8 Reconfiguring the NX Backend Account (if needed)
REQUIRED TIME:
As mentioned in section 3.6, the NX installer has overwritten the NX backend account
(NXWORKSTATIONUSER) settings back to default values. The backend account
settings may have been previously customized out of following reason:
Another logon account may have been set to let the NX backend connect to a remote
network drive (e.g. for non-DICOM RIS) to overcome access right problems.
To re-configure it refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation
and Configuration Appendices section Access to network drive for non-DICOM RIS
3.9 Changing the Size of Partition D to use the complete remaining Disk
Space
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
This step is only required in order to activate the EXTENDED_STORAGE license and
if non-allocated physical space is available on the disk. This is typically for NX
hardware that was originally delivered with NX 2008. It can be checked in the Windows
menu "Control Panel - Administrative Tools - Computer Management - Disk
management" whether unallocated physical space is available. It is not required for a
CMS.
(1) Stop the NX application if it is running: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Stop NX

(2) Go to: Start Æ Run…
(3) Type: diskpart
(4) Type the following commands in the diskpart tool:
• Select disk 0
• Select partition 2
• Extend
(5) Reboot the PC.


Result Partition D is now extended to use the full remaining disk capacity.
NOTE:
The full size of the Partition D can only be used to store images, if the optional license
"Extended Storage" is activated.
3.10 Change Dose Type
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
This step is only required if the used dose type (Logarithmic Median = LgM or
Exposure Index = EI) for dose monitoring has changed with the upgrade.
The type of dose monitoring that can be used on an NX workstation is related to the
digitizer(s) connected to the NX.
(1) For an overview of compatible digitizer types an dose value types refer to
(2) To switch from one dose type to the other, the activation tool is used. For details
refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and
Configuration Appendices section Switching dose calculation from Lgm to
Exposure Index DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


3.11 Importing Data
Perform the following actions according to the NX version that has been upgraded:
• Upgrading from NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200:

The image and dose data has not been affected. The import of the configuration
data has been performed automatically (see section 3.6). Make sure that the
configuration data import has been successful (refer to the next bullet item for more
details).
• Upgrading from NX 2008 and NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000:
The import of the data has been performed automatically (see section 3.6). Make
sure that the data import has been successful:
o If the upgrade installer wizard provided information about the successful result
of the data import, continue with next section.
o If the results from the upgrade installer wizard are not known, they can be
checked in the Windows registry file. Refer to section 6.1.1 for instructions on
how to check in the registry file.
o If data is not imported correctly during the upgrade, refer to section 6.1.2 for
instructions on how to recover the data.
• Upgrading from NX 1.0 or NX 2.0 systems:
The import of the data is not performed automatically. Perform the manual import of
the following data:
o Images
o Configuration data
o Dose statistics
For instructions refer to section 8.
3.12 Checking Regional Settings
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) In the Configuration Tool go to General Configuration Æ Regional Settings.

(2) Check if the displayed configuration settings are OK.
(3) If needed refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4 Installation
and Configuration Appendices section "Changing the regional Settings
(language / date & time) DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) for the
procedure to modify the regional settings.


3.13 Reconfiguration of Certificates for Secure Communication
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
If the original software version is NX 2.0.1703 or higher, this step is not required.
If Secure Communication is used, the certificates have to be reconfigured, because on
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 the certificates are retrieved from the Windows XP System
Store, while NX 1.0 retrieves the certificates from the User Store.
INSTRUCTION:
For the procedure how to load the certificates refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices section Secure
Communication DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
3.14 Upgrading TWAIN Digitizer Software (ASAP)
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
This section is only applicable if a TWAIN (= ASAP) digitizer is connected to the NX
workstation.
(1) Install the compatible digitizer software of the TWAIN digitizer (CR 30-X or DX-S
or DX-G with SW < NIM_2XXX) as described in the installation instructions
enclosed to the software.
3.15 Upgrading ID Tablet Firmware
REQUIRED TIME:


NOTE:
If the ID tablet firmware is version 1.12.07 or higher this step is not required.

and Configuration Appendices section Upgrading ID tablet firmware DD+DIS105.10E
3.16 Installing the NX Online Help
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Go to the Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Add/Remove Programs.

(2) Select NX Online Help package and click <Remove>.
Confirm removal of this package.
(3) Insert the User Documentation CD (NX Starterkit DVD 1).
Internet Explorer is automatically started, showing the Documentation CD
Navigation screen. If the Internet Explorer is not automatically started, browse to
the CD drive and double click "index.htm".
(4) Click "Install NX Online Help". Three messages can pop up:
• Internet Explorer message “Active content in html …”: Click <Yes>.
• File download security warning: Click <Run>.
• Internet Explorer security warning: “Publisher could not be verified …”: Click
<Run>.
(5) A welcome screen appears. The online Help installer will guide through the Online
Help installation on the system:
(6) After finishing the installation, the NX viewer has to be restarted to be able to use
the NX online help. Inform the customer about the usage of the NX Online Help.


NOTE:
• Online help for Asian languages requires installation of the additional languages.
See section 3.4 “Installing Support for Thai and East-Asian Languages“.
• If additional languages are not installed, the online help and CD navigation screens
may show strange characters, but this has no influence on the usability of the
installed languages.
• Installing the Online Help (any language) will also install a special Thai font on the
NX Workstation that is required to read the Thai Online Help. This implies that
browsing Thai Online Help directly from the CD will not work before the
Online Help is actually installed on the Workstation.
• If required, the font can be manually installed by copying this file from the CD into
the Windows font folder: C:\…\Nx Online Help\Windows\Fonts\Angsd___.ttf
4 Completing the Upgrade
4.1 Verification
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Run the NX application.

(2) Check the Software Version in the NX Splash Screen from the Main Menu
<About> button.
(3) Verify that it reads NX 3.0.8300 or NX 2.0.8300 (depending on the activated
licenses).


4.2 Backup of Configuration Data
REQUIRED TIME:
create a backup. Follow this procedure:
(1) Open the configuration tool and load the active configuration.
(2) In the configuration tool menu select “File Æ Save as…”.
save place. Name the file that it can be identified later on:
e.g. <Site>_initial_configuration_<date>.xml
Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore Æ Backup all data.
For more information about backup scripts refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service
4.3 Informing the Customer about Upgrade of the NX Office Viewer
Upgrading the NX Office Viewer workstations is responsibility of the customer.
ACTION:
Inform the customer that the upgrade is started automatically on the first startup of the
NX Office Viewer after upgrading the NX workstation.
The upgrade procedure for the NX Office Viewer is described in the User
Documentation (NX Office Viewer Installation Manual) and guided by a wizard installer
application.


4.4 Finalize NX Acceptance Test
REQUIRED TIME:
IMPORTANT:
Check if all required fields of the Acceptance Test have been filled out, complete it and
hand it over to the customer.
IMPORTANT:
Refer to the respective Solution Manual (e.g. CR Mammography Solution Manual) for
additional Acceptance Test on Solution level.
4.5 Documentation Hand-over
REQUIRED TIME:
Hand over the new NX DVDs to the customer. The User Documentation is available on
NX Starterkit DVD 1.
5 Steps after Installation
5.1 Generating the Fingerprint File
REQUIRED TIME:
(5) Go to: Start Æ AGFA Æ Service Æ License Manager

(6) Click on <Generate Fingerprint>.


(7) Adapt file name and location e. g. external Memory stick.

(8) Click <Save>.
(9) Check the status bar of the License manger tool until the remark “creating …”
disappears.
(10) Wait until the License manger tool is on status normal.
(11) Close the License Manager.
5.2 Upload the Finger Print to the ELMS
Upload the FPF file online to the ELMS, or forward the FPF file to the person in the
NSO who is dedicated to handle the topics regarding Licenses Management.
INSTRUCTION:
Refer to the Licensing Service Manual (DD+DIS012.06E) for the procedure
6 Troubleshooting
6.1 Automatic Import of preserved Data from the original System
6.1.1 Checking the Status of the automatic Import
When upgrading from a NX 2008 version or higher, the status of the imported
Configuration data, Image data and Dose Statistic data is displayed in the upgrade
installer wizard during upgrade. If this information has not been observed, check the
status in the Windows registry:
(1) Go to: Start Æ Run…
(2) Type: regedit into the command line and click <OK>.
(3) In the registry edior browse to: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Æ SOFTWARE Æ Agfa
Æ HealthCare Æ NX Æ ImportAfterUpgradeInfo
(4) Check the status (data) of the:
• RuntimeDataStatus / RuntimeDataMessage / RuntimeDataLocation
(information about Image Data import)
• DoseStatisticsStatus / DoseStatisticsMessage / DoseStatisticsLocation
(information about Dose Statistics import)
• ConfigurationDataStatus / ConfigurationDataMessage /
ConfigurationDataLocation (information about Configuration Data import)


6.1.2 Recovering Data after failed automatic Import
Symptom The upgrade installer wizard or the windows registry ImportAfterUpgradeInfo (see
section 6.1.1) informs about a failed automatic import of data.
Cause The automatic import of data was not completed successfully.
Solution Recover the system and import the data manually according to the failed import type.
IMPORTANT:
Perform the following actions only if the respective data import has failed:
• If the import of the Image data failed:

(1) Reset the NX to factory settings:
Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ Reset NX Completely
to Factory Settings for <system type>
(2) Delete the image files that have been moved by the automatic export
(during upgrade installation) from the folder:
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\UpgradeData\PreprocessedPixelFiles
(3) Import Configuration data manually. Refer to the instructions given in
section 8.1. The data to import is located in folder:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\UpgradeData\ConfigurationData
(4) Import Dose Statistic data manually:
Refer to the instructions given in section 8.3.
The data to import is located in folder:
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\UpgradeData\DoseStatistics
(5) Import the Image data manually that has been exported in section
7.2.4. For the import instructions refer to section 8.2.
• If only the import of the Configuration data failed:

Import the Configuration data manually. Refer to the instructions given in
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\UpgradeData\ConfigurationData
• If only the import of the Dose Statistics failed:

Import the Dose Statistic data manually.Refer to the instructions given in
C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Configuration\UpgradeData\DoseStatistics


6.2 Different Image Appearance on the PACS after the Upgrade
Symptom The appearance of the images on the PACS differs from the appearance on the NX
after the upgrade.
Cause The new license NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL can lead to a different image
appearance on the PACS after the upgrade.
Workaround For workaround instructions refer to the NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 Service Bulletin No. 03
“Image Appearance on PACS or CD/DVD Export after Upgrade to
NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200” DD+DIS136.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
The instructions are also applicable for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
6.3 Slow Performance after Upgrade from NX 1.0.2405
Symptom Upon an upgrade from NX 1.0.2405 to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, it is possible that the
system is initally a bit slower because it has a lot of clean-up work to do.
Cause On some sites, the cleanup in NX 1.0.2405 fails to work because of duplicate date/time
combinations.
Solution After one day, performance is back to normal. The clean-up can be monitored in the
'closed exam' screen where the number of sessions decreases.


7 Appendix A: Exporting Data
7.1 Exporting Configuration Data
NOTE:
This step is not applicable when upgrading from NX 2008 or higher.
REQUIRED TIME:
(3) Select Load active configuration.
(4) Select File - Save as… in the configuration tool menu.
(5) Save the configuration file on the harddisk.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure not to lose this file or the NX has to be re-configured from
scratch!
(6) Exit the NX Configuration Tool.
7.1.1 Additional Steps for NX < NX 2.0.6805 in Combination with XRDI
NOTE:
For upgrades before NX 2.0.6805 only:
If the Workstation is connected to the X-Ray Generator (DX-Si System), the XRG-
parameters configuration in the View Image Details pane has to be restored manually.
(1) Go to: User Interface Configuration Æ Configure Examination Environment Æ
View Image Details
(2) Write down the configured XRG-parameters:
Figure 4
(3) See section 8.1.1 Import Configuration Exceptions on how to restore these
settings.


7.2 Keeping Images – Export
NOTE:
• This step is not applicable to Central Monitoring Systems
• When upgrading from NX 1.0.x GenRad and if the Musica2 License is enabled,
keeping images is not supported. Image appearance on the upgraded software
may be different compared to the appearance on the original system.
REQUIRED TIME:
The time required to perform the procedure also depends on the number of exported
images. The time required per image is 30 seconds.
If the procedure to export the images to a network drive is used, the required time is
defined by network performance.
(1) Check if the customer requires to keep exisiting images.

(2) Check if a professional service has been ordered for keeping the images.
7.2.1 Required Disk Space
Be aware of the following requirements:

• The required disk space depends on the number of exported images. The space
required per image varies between 6 MB and 30 MB at an average of 20 MB.
• There should be at least 60 GB free disk space on the C:-drive. The free disk space
on the D:-drive is completely determined by the system's load and the cleanup
rules configuration.
• If there is not enough space on either the C or D drives on the workstation, an
external hard disk is required to store the exported images or they can be exported
to a network drive.
For more information about using a network drive, refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 4 Installation and Configuration Appendices


7.2.2 Effects on the Studies after the Export
Be aware of following effects, the export has on the exported studies:
• After the export and import the study data will be lost (e.g. referring physician).
• After the export and import the print sheet info will be gone.
Therefore the icon is displayed in the images indicating that no print sheet is
available.
• Imported images can not be stitched anymore.
• A new SOPInstanceUID and StudyInstanceUID is generated.
• Only exposures with an image can be exported.
• The print and archive status is reset.
• Since no relations to the original exam tree are preserved or exported, the MUSICA
functionality “SetAsDefault” can not be used on imported images.
But it is possible to adjust the image processing parameters on the imported image.
• The patient data and accession number are kept after the export and import.
• After import of the images and study data, a study will be created per accession
number:
o If in a study with multiple Scheduled Procedure Steps (SPS) each SPS of the
study has a different accession number, one study per accession number will
be made after import.
o SPSs of a study that have the same accession number will likewise be grouped
in one study.
7.2.3 Installing the NX 1.0.3203 Product Upgrade (for Exporting Purpose)
NOTE:
This upgrade is only needed if the user wants to keep the images
(and/or dose data) and if the installed NX version is NX1.0.2405. The reason is that
the NX Upgrade Export Tool (and dose export tool) is not available on earlier versions
of NX.
CAUTION:
Close all exam sessions before continuing with the procedure.
REQUIRED TIME:



(2) Verify that all exam sessions are closed in the NX application:
• Make sure that the examination button is disabled.
• In the Worklist screen, open the Worklist and make sure that none of the
entries shows the 'eye' icon.
• In the Worklist screen, open the Closed Exams list and make sure that none
of the entries shows the 'eye' icon.
(3) Exit the NX Configuration Tool, if it is running.

(4) Exit the NX application, if it is running.
(5) Stop the NX backend: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Stop NX
(6) Check in taskmanager that no NX processes are running anymore.
(7) Insert the NX Starterkit DVD 1 in the NX Workstation.
(8) Browse to the CD and double click "NXProduct.msi" in the folder
Service Software/NX 1.0 SP1.
(9) Click <Yes> to the configuration data warning.
(10) Click <Next>.
(11) Select to accept the End User License Agreement and Click <Next>.
(12) Select Typical and click <Install>.
(13) Some command windows will appear and disappear automatically.
(14) A dialog box appears, informing the operator the installation has finished.
Click <Finish>.
NOTE:
Because there's no valid license available for software version NX 1.0.3203, the
NX application will not run! But this is not needed as only the ‘NX upgrade export tool’
is used in the next section.


7.2.4 Exporting Images
CAUTION:
Close all exam sessions before continuing with the procedure.
NOTE:
For information on how to use a network drive for the export see also
(1) Connect the external harddisk if required.

(4) If the NX application is running, go to the Main Menu and click <Exit NX> to stop
the application.
NOTE:
This does not stop the NX backend process
(Make sure NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkStation.exe is
running in the task manager).
(5) Switch off the log off screensaver to avoid an interruption of the export.
(6) Start the Upgrade Export Tool:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ NX Upgrade Export Tool
(7) Select whether to export All images or All images from the last x days:
Figure 5


(8) Select and create a folder as destination (e.g "C:\NXExport").

(9) Click on <Check>.
An indication on the estimated required size and the available size on the selected
folder is shown.
If there is not enough space on the selected folder, go back to the step (7) to
select a lower amount of images or to step (8) to select a folder on another drive
and check again.
Refer to Chapter 04 Appendices of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
(DD+DIS105.10E) for information on how to use a network drive.
If there is enough space, the <Export> button becomes enabled.
(10) Click <Export> to start the export.
This will take some time. The export is finished when the screen indicates:
‘…Backup finished’
(11) After the export switch on the log off screensaver again.
7.3 Exporting Dose Monitoring Statistics
REQUIRED TIME:
NOTE:
• This step is not applicable when upgrading from NX 2008 or higher.
• This step is not applicable to Central Monitoring Systems.
• Dose statistics are always maintained on all NX Workstations. To be able to access
them, the proper licenses must be acquired by the customer.


Use the dose export tool to export the dose data from the NX database to file.
(1) From NX 2.0.1703 on:

Go to Start Æ Agfa Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ NX Dose Export Tool to start the
tool.
(2) Only for NX versions before NX 2.0.1703:
Follow steps A) to C) to start the tool since the tool is not available on
the system:
A) On the DVD1 go to Service Software Æ dose export tool and choose one of the
following folder:
• Dose export tool for NX 1.0.32xx
• Dose export tool for NX 2.0.1304
• Dose export tool for NX 2.0.1703
NOTE:
for NX version 1.0.2405 an upgrade to NX 1.0.3203 is
required first!
B) Copy the 2 files which can be found under this directory to

C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin.
C) Run NX.Application.Visual.DoseExportTool.exe.
(3) Use the Windows Explorer to create a folder to be used as destination for the
export data (e.g. C:\NXDoseExport).
(4) Click <Browse> and go to the new folder:
Figure 6
(5) Enter a file name for the datafile.

(6) Click <Export> to start the export.


8 Appendix B: Importing Data
8.1 Importing Configuration Data
REQUIRED TIME:

(3) Select Load a configuration from and external file
Figure 7
(4) Select the previously saved configuration file.

(5) Click <Open> to load the configuration file.
(6) Refer to section 8.1.1 Import Configuration Exceptions for any settings to be
applied or corrected manually.
(7) Select File - Activate Configuration in the Configuration Tool menu.
(8) Exit the NX Configuration Tool.
8.1.1 Import Configuration Exceptions
8.1.1.1 "Last MPPS In Progress On" changes to "Study Date Time" in Closed Exams Worklist
NX 2.0.6805 and older versions displayed a wrong label for the optional Closed Exams
list DICOM attribute (0008:0020):
It was labeled as "Last MPPS In Progress On". After the upgrade it will be
automatically re-labeled as "Study Date Time", unless the label had been manually
overwritten in the configuration tool.


8.1.1.2 Days to keep Exams
NOTE:
If the original software version is NX 2.0.1703 or later, this exception does not occur.
The days to keep exams on the system is read from the configuration file. In NX 1.0,
the default was 30 and could not be configured. This value can now be configured. It is
advised to enter a lower value (e.g. 7 days) if the site doesn't need the images to stay
on the system for 30 days.
Days to keep the exams on the system can be configured in: Configuration Tool Æ
General Configuration Æ Workflow Management Æ Identification – Examination
8.1.1.3 “No Filmsize was selected” Error
NOTE:
This exception does not occur if the original software version is NX 1.0.3203 or higher.
Symptom Following error message is generated during activation of the configuration:
Figure 8
Cause From software version NX 1.0.3203 on, a filmsize is required to be defined for
Full Leg Full Spine (FLFS) examgroups.
Solution Configure the filmsizes and try to activate the configuration again.
NOTE:
In case the configuration file does not contain a printer follow the workaround as
described in next section 8.1.1.4.


8.1.1.4 “Wrong Settings” Error
NOTE:
Symptom Following error message is generated when activating the configuration:

"Error, check the exposure settings, modality settings, and printer settings of the partial
exposure. These settings can be wrong."
Cause From NX 1.0.3203 on, all partial exposure attribute settings of a FLFS examination
must be identical. An error in NX 1.0.2405 causes speed class settings to be different
for partial images of the same FLFS exmamination. When activating this configuration,
the error will be generated.
Solution (9) Navigate to the exposure type.

(10) Click "View FLFS partial exposure" (at the top).
(11) Check that all settings are correct (e.g. Speed class) and correct them
if necessary.
8.1.1.5 Workstation connected to X-Ray Generator (DX-Si System)
NOTE:
If the Workstation is connected to the X-Ray Generator (XRG), the XRG-parameters
configuration in the Configuration Tool have to be restored manually.
(1) Go to: User Interface Configuration Æ Configure Examination Environment Æ

Configure XRG Parameters
(2) Configure the parameters to be shown in the Examination environment for either
input of XRG-parameters or display of parameters received from the modality.
8.1.1.6 "Incompatible Dose Statistic Parameter" Error
This error is displayed when changing the dose type.
(1) Adapt the configuration as described in chapter 4, Installation and Configuration

Appendices section "Switching Dose Calculation from Lgm to
Exposure Index (EI)".


8.2 Keeping Images – Import
NOTE:
This step is not applicable to Central Monitoring Systems.
REQUIRED TIME:
The time required to perform the procedure also depends on the number of exported
images. The time required per image is 30 seconds.
(1) Connect the external harddisk if required.

(4) If the NX application is running, go to the Main Menu and click <Exit NX> to stop
the application.
NOTE:
This does not stop the NX backend proccess:
NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkStation.exe.
(5) Start the Upgrade Import Tool

(Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ NX Upgrade Import Tool).
Figure 9
(6) Click <Browse…> to select the folder where the exported Sessions are.
(7) Click <Import>.
This will take some time until the screen shows Restore finished.
NOTE:
After importing the images, closed sessions that had multiple accession numbers, are
split into separate sessions per accession number. See also section 7.2.2.


8.3 Importing Dose Monitoring Statistics (if requested by the Customer)
NOTE:
This step is not applicable to Central Monitoring Systems.
REQUIRED TIME:
(1) Start the Dose Import Tool: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ NX
Dose Import Tool
Figure 10
(2) Click <Browse> and select the previously created file in: C:\NXDoseExport
(3) Click <Restore> to start the import:
Figure 11


(4) If the import file contains insufficient information to determine the application type
of the dose entries, the following dialogue is displayed. Select the exam tree type
of the original NX system type (GENRAD or MAMMO) and click <OK>:
Figure 12
Result The import of the dose monitoring statistics is finished.


Imaging Services Release Information
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document describes the changes in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, compared to the

releases NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100 and NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200.

1.1 07-2010 Adapted list of solved HQ Cases.
Document Title
Chapter 1 - SW/HW Compatibility Chart
Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration Appendices
Chapter 9 - Troubleshooting

sw_08_release-info_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Release Information
► Manufacturer
Publisher
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOLVED HEADQUARTER (HQ) CASES IN NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 ......................................4

1.1 Direct Radiography (reported on NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100) .......................................................4
1.2 User Interface NX Configuration Tool.......................................................................................5
1.3 User Interface NX Viewer .........................................................................................................6
1.4 Image Processing .....................................................................................................................7
1.5 Upgrades...................................................................................................................................7
1.6 RIS ............................................................................................................................................9
1.7 License Manager ......................................................................................................................9
1.8 Documentation ........................................................................................................................10
2 WORKAROUNDS FOR NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 ISSUES......................................................11


1 Solved HeadQuarter (HQ) Cases in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
1.1 Direct Radiography (reported on NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100)
1. Issues with field station names on images sent to PACS

Symptom After sending images of studies containing DR, CR and FLFS images to the PACS
following symptoms are possible:
 Images do not arrive on the PACS.
 Images of studies containing DR, CR and FLFS stitched images display
different station names on the PACS.
 The station name of DR and FLFS stitched images are not filled in.
Cause NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100 in a DX-D 500 system used different or empty station names
in images from different sources (DX-S, Varian detector, or stitched FLFS). This can
lead to issue in the PACS routing.
Solution For NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 the use of the field StationName has been streamlined in
documentation and software for:
 CR images: Configured digitizer name as configured in NX Configuration Tool
 Devices  Digitizer
 FLFS stitched images: Same StationName as in its partial images
 DR images: as configured in NX Configuration Tool  General  WorkStation
Setting
Reference HQ_1001150005
2. Image is not received due to negative exposure value

Symptom In some cases, the Exposure Index (EI) can have a negative value. As a result the
image is not received by the NX.
Cause The negative value occurs due to a compensation calculation embedded in the
software.
Solution If the Exposure Index is 0 or negative, the value "EI: “#####” will be visible on the NX,
and the dose bar indicates underexposed.


3. Workflow issue with Auto-ID functionality and DR exposures

Symptom For systems producing both CR and DR exposures where Auto-ID functionality is
enabled for the CR exposures, the NX doesn’t always process incoming images
correctly.
This can occur if the workflow is carried out very fast and DR exposures are started
before the DX-S cassette identification is complete.
Cause Software issue
Solution Software issue solved as of NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
4. Status of detector panel stays red for a long time

Symptom The status of detector panel stays “red” for a long time. The NX has problems during
reboot.
5. The DAP value displayed on the console and on the NX differ

Symptom The Dose Area Product (DAP) values displayed on the modality console and on the
NX differ by factor 10.
Cause Software issue in handling the decimal digits
1.2 User Interface NX Configuration Tool
6. User without exam tree editing rights has access to XRG modality settings
Symptom A user without rights to edit the exam tree has access to the XRG modality settings
pane on exposure type level.
Cause Software design
Solution The complete modality settings pane is disabled if the user role does not contain the
exam tree configuration rights.


1.3 User Interface NX Viewer
7. Not possible to edit the exposure type after identifying or on imported

images
Symptom 1 It is not possible to change the exposure type, e.g. from L-CC to R-CC, after the
exposure has been identified and the image has not yet arrived on the NX.
Symptom 2 It is not possible to change the exposure type, e.g. from L-CC to R-CC, on imported
images.
Solution Software issue solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
8. Error Message 310 when using the Full Screen mode

Symptom The following error is displayed when using the Full Screen mode for images that
have been transferred from a split view to another study:
Figure 1

9. Images lost after image transfer

Symptom After transferring images from a study to another, the images are lost.
Cause The cleanup process that started right after start of the image transfer removed the
images that were being transferred. This can only happen under very rare timing
conditions of the image transfer and the cleanup process.


1.4 Image Processing
10. Musica2 image processing fails

Symptom The Musica2 image processing fails on exposures with extremely small Region Of
Interest.
Cause Issue of Musica2 image processing
Solution Improved Musica2 image processing.
11. Stitched FLFS images show suboptimal image quality

Symptom Stitched FLFS images are not useable for diagnosis, whereas the individual single
images are OK.
Cause Issue of the FLFS stitching software with processing of Speed Class Free images.
Solution Issue solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
1.5 Upgrades
12. Import of DX-S Limit Pattern NX native files on new NX workstation does not
work
Symptom During upgrade from earlier NX versions the DX-S Limit Pattern NX native files cannot
be imported.
Cause Issue of upgrade scripts
Solution Issue solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 upgrade scripts.


13. Hotfix installation stops and displays Error 1603

Symptom The Hotfix installation stops, displaying error 1603 in the Hotfix installation window.
Cause During production or NX Clean Installation the Windows License key is entered in the
product ID field in Windows via the OSCTRL.vbs tool:
Figure 2: Example Screenshot
Installing Windows SP3 (integrated in the Hotfix as of version 3.0.23) leads to a

Windows License Key mismatch. The error 1603 is returned and Windows SP3 is not
installed.
Solution The use of the the OSCTRL.vbs tool has been removed from the staging procedure in
production and from the Clean Installation procedure.
14. Export automation fails due to security issue

Symptom After use the option for export images to a DVD, the NX shows the following error and
the export fails:
Figure 3
Cause The virus scanner does not allow copying the file: autorun.inf
Solution Software issues solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.


15. Database back-up scripts fail after upgrading from NX 2008 to NX X.0.8000
Symptom The following scripts in Start  Agfa  NX  Service > Backup/Restore do not work
when upgrading from NX 2008 to NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000:
 Backup All Data (NXBackup_Full.bat)
 Backup Configuration Data (NXBackup_ConfigData.bat)
Solution Software issues solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
1.6 RIS
16. DICOM RIS connection issue with some Japanese 2-byte characters
Symptom Querying the RIS containing Japanese some special characters leads to a connection
issue.
Cause If the RIS input for the NX worklist contains a patient name with the character “5c”
(encoded as dual-byte characters), this is interpreted as the separator char “\”. This
causes the connection issue.
Solution Issue solved in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
1.7 License Manager
17. NX does not launch due to MacAddress error in the License Manager
Symptom The NX application does not start. The License Manager shows the error message:
"... mismatch between actual MacAddress and expected MacAddress
(AB-CD-EF-GH-IJ) …"
Cause If the network cable is disconnected, the License Manager does not detect the
MacAddress.
Solution License Manager updated for NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 and NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.


1.8 Documentation
18. DICOM Conformance Statement

Symptom DICOM conformance does not contain unit used for area dose product in case
visualized or manually entered.
Cause Attribute “Image Area Dose Product” (0018,115E) is not documented in DICOM
Conformance Statement.
Solution Attribute “Image Area Dose Product” (0018,115E) is measured in dGy*cm*cm and is
documented as such in the NX 2.0.8200/3.0.8200 and NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 DICOM
Conformance Statement.
19. Request for information about the maximum number of images that can be
stored on NX
Symptom The new functionality “extended storage” allows storing a higher number of images on
the NX workstation. Information about the maximum number of images with the
functionality “extended storage” and without this functionality has been requested.
Cause Introduction of the functionality “extended storage” with NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000.
Solution Added information about the maximum number of storable images on the NX
workstation to the description of the license NX EXTENDED STORAGE in chapter 1
“Product Description”.
20. Description about Barco Monitor Calibration sub-optimal

Symptom Instructions how to use the Monitor Calibration Software Medical QAWeb for Barco
Monitors were sub-optimal.
Cause Missing information.
Solution Updated document DD+DIS108.10E, Software Options, Monitor Options with correct
information.


2 Workarounds for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Issues
The workarounds for following issues are described in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Chapter 9 - Troubleshooting DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
 NX doesn't start when logging in as user with Operator Rights

(HQ_0706080013).
 RIS Query may become slow after Upgrade from NX 1.0 (HQ_0707230004).
 RIS option “User Program” does not work (HQ_0610050006/HQ_0701310002).
 Fast Preview image is not shown. Error messages are displayed
(HQ_0710220006).
 Windows Task Bar in front of NX (HQ_0712190001)
 DVD burn process stops with error 163 (HQ_0910270001).
 Image Appearance on PACS after Upgrade (HQ_1003010001, HQ_1003260002)
 Image Appearance on CD/DVD Export after Upgrade (HQ_1003300001)


Imaging Services Troubleshooting
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document provides troubleshooting information, answers frequently asked

questions and supports with tips and tricks.

Revision Date
Document Title
DD+DIS105.10E Chapter 4 - Installation and Configuration
DD+DIS108.10E Chapter 5 - Monitor Options
DD+DIS107.10E Chapter 5 - Clean Installation Procedure
DD+DIS112.10E Chapter 5 - Using the RF Tag Initialization Tool
DD+DIS115.10E Chapter 7 - Upgrade Installation from NX

troubleshooting_chapter_e_template_v01
DD+DIS105.10E Troubleshooting
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
IMPORTANT:
The installation and service of the product(s) described herein is to be performed
by qualified personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates
or who are otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide
such services.
NOTE:
‘Order List, Checklist for Completeness’ in the GSO Library.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 ISSUES AND SOLUTIONS ......................................................................................................5

1.1 Digitizer/ID-Tablet .....................................................................................................................5
1.2 Configuration Tasks ..................................................................................................................6
1.3 Upgrades...................................................................................................................................9
1.4 RIS ..........................................................................................................................................11
1.5 Printing/Archiving ....................................................................................................................13
1.6 Operating System (Windows XP) ...........................................................................................15
1.7 NX User Interface ...................................................................................................................18
1.8 Exporting/Importing.................................................................................................................20
1.9 Licenses ..................................................................................................................................22
1.10 Offline Config Tool ..................................................................................................................24
1.11 Viewing Priors .........................................................................................................................24
1.12 Monitors ..................................................................................................................................25
2 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQ) .........................................................................28

3 TIPS & TRICKS ......................................................................................................................31
3.1 Cloning a NX System..............................................................................................................32
3.2 Resolving Port Conflicts..........................................................................................................33
3.3 Image Storage Capacity .........................................................................................................35
3.4 Running Internet Explorer .......................................................................................................35
3.5 Schedule an automatic weekly Reboot on the System ..........................................................36
3.6 Checking Version Information with “About NX” (only available as of NX 2.0.6805) ..............40
3.7 Check the ID Tablet Firmware Version Number .....................................................................40
3.8 Checking if an ALF matches a NX Workstation......................................................................41
3.9 Forced Delete..........................................................................................................................42
3.10 Configuring the Auto Log Off / Screen Saver .........................................................................43
3.11 Enabling the Service Mode for Digitizers................................................................................45
3.12 Enabling the Service Mode for Archiving................................................................................45
3.13 Saving the Adjustments of Musica 1 Settings (via NX GUI) to the Backup File .....................46
3.14 Recovering from Disk Failure on a RAID System...................................................................47


3.15 Handling Issues occurring during automated Data Import/Export ..........................................49
4 FAULT FINDING.....................................................................................................................52
4.1 View Logging...........................................................................................................................52
4.2 Log Viewer Configuration........................................................................................................53
4.3 Logging Namespaces .............................................................................................................54
4.4 Configure Logging...................................................................................................................55
4.5 Exporting and Importing Images .............................................................................................56
4.6 DICOM Validation ...................................................................................................................57
4.7 Operational Statistics ..............................................................................................................57
4.8 Finding Configuration Information on the ELMS.....................................................................59
4.9 Database Icon .........................................................................................................................59
4.10 NX Health Icon ........................................................................................................................59
4.11 Check installed Certificates.....................................................................................................60


Troubleshooting
DD+DIS105.10E Issues and Solutions
1 Issues and Solutions
1.1 Digitizer/ID-Tablet
1.1.1 Issue when trying to resend Images
Symptom For example, a scrambled image is received from the digitizer. When trying to
resend it an error occurs.
Cause The error occurs because the software is implemented to ignore images being
sent twice.
Solution (1) Remove the original image from the study via image transfer and then resend
the image from the digitizer. NX gives following message:
Figure 1
(2) Click <OK>.

Result: The image is now received in an emergency study.
1.1.2 Sometimes it takes a long Time to write an Image Plate (Cassette)
Symptom Sometimes it takes several seconds to write a cassette.

More specific: Meant is the time between pressing the "ID" button and when it is
really written on the cassette.
Cause The software architecture only processes one operation on a session at a time.
While receiving an image on a session (i.e. storing the session and image data),
a simultaneous ID command will have to wait.
Solution Solution not applicable, normal behaviour


Troubleshooting
1.2 Configuration Tasks
1.2.1 Print Sheet Text Boxes empty and inaccessible in NX Configuration Tool
Symptom In the NX Configuration Tool, the print sheet text box configuration is lost and
configuration is not accessible anymore.
Cause Software bug
Solution Restore the factory default text box configuration:
(1) Go to: Device Configuration Æ Printers
Figure 2
(2) Click <Restore>. Following message appears:
Figure 3
(3) Click <Yes>.
1.2.2 Configuration Tool start-up Error "Missing or wrong initial configuration of

the database"
Symptom When starting the Configuration Tool, this error appears: "Missing or wrong initial
configuration of the database".
Cause Possible cause is a interrupted procedure to restore configuration
(e.g. power failure).
Solution (1) Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install tools Æ
Reset NX Configuration Factory Defaults
(3) Select Restore again.


Troubleshooting
1.2.3 Activating a Configuration gives Error about wrong Settings for partial Exposure
Symptom Following error message is generated when activating the configuration:

"Error, check the exposure settings, modality settings, and printer settings of the
partial exposure. These settings can be wrong."
Cause From NX 1.0.3203 on, all partial exposure attribute settings of a FLFS (Full Leg Full
Spine) examination must be identical. An error in NX 1.0.2405 causes speed class
settings to be different for partial images of the same FLFS exmamination. When
activating this configuration, the error will be generated.
Solution (1) Navigate to the exposure type.
(2) Click: "View FLFS partial exposure" (at the top)
(3) Check that all settings are correct (e.g. Speed class) and correct them
if necessary.
1.2.4 When using the Digitizer Emergency Button, Images do not arrive on NX
Workstation
Symptom When using the digitizer emergency button, the images are not arriving on the NX
workstation.
Cause The digitizer CPF file contains the destination on the NX where emergency images
should be sent to. If the hostname of the NX Workstation is changed and the CPF
file is updated using the NX Configuration Tool, the emergency destination is not
updated and the digitizer cannot send to this emergency destination anymore.
Solution After changing the hostname of an NX workstation that is configured as emergency
destination, update the emergency destination in the CPF file manually, to reflect the
new hostname.
1.2.5 Error Message "Incorrect AE Title"
Symptom When receiving images, an error is displayed about an incorrect AE Title.

Cause An AE Title of 16 characters or longer has been configured, e.g. for a digitizer.
Solution Modify the configuration to have only AE titles of maximum 15 characters


Troubleshooting
1.2.6 Test Connection to XRG-Modality returns Application Error
Symptom Testing the connection to an XRG-modality in the NX Configuration Tool returns an

application error.
Cause This happens if an ID Tablet is configured, but it is not connected or switched off.
Solution Switch on the ID Tablet and test the connection to the XRG-modality again.
1.2.7 Access denied to Agfa Dicom Bridge (ADB) Tool
Symptom When trying to start the Agfa DICOM Bridge (ADB) Tool, it cannot be started and an
error message is displayed.
Cause The logged on user has not sufficient rights to access the ADB tool folder.
Solution Log in using the “crservice” account to be able to use the ADB tool.
1.2.8 Error Messages when starting NX Viewer or Configuration Tool after Installation
or Upgrade
Symptom After the installation or upgrade starting the NX viewer or the Configuration Tool
fails. One of these messages is displayed:
• Windows Event propoerties dialog:
".NET Runtime 2.0 Error for the System.data.sqlclient.sql"
• MESS279 "NX has encountered an internal error"
• MESS310 "The system has encountered an unexpected error"
• "Provider services not yet ready. Please try restarting the application."
• "An exception has occurred, please check the following error messages"
Cause After installation or upgrade there may be a delay in the startup of the database.
This causes this error.
Solution Starting the NX viewer or Configuration Tool after some minutes waiting time.


Troubleshooting
1.2.9 Configuration Tool not startable after Power Cut during Configuration Restore
Symptom If a power cut occurs during restoring a configuration in the NX Configuration Tool,
the Configuration tool cannot be started anymore after the reboot. An Application
Error is displayed.
Cause Cutting of the power during the restore process is in progress leaves the database in
an inconsistent state.
Solution Reset the configuration data to factory settings and repeat the restore procedure:
(1) Go to: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Backup Restore Æ Restore
Configuration Data
(2) Follow the instructions in the DOS prompt.
(3) Repeat the restore procedure in the NX Configuration Tool.
1.3 Upgrades
1.3.1 Slow Performance after Upgrade from NX 1.0 (SU1)
Symptom Upon an upgrade from NX 1.0 (SU1) to a higher NX version, it is possible that the
system is initially a bit slower because it has a lot of clean-up work to do.
Cause On some sites, the cleanup in NX 1.0 (SU1) fails to work because of duplicate
date/time combinations.
Solution After one day, performance is back to normal.
The clean-up can be monitored in the 'closed exam' screen where the number of
sessions decreases.
1.3.2 NX doesn't start when logging in as User with Operator Rights
Symptom After upgrade of NX 1.0.3203 to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, when logging in to the NX

workstation as user with operator rights. The NX application doesn't start up and the
error message 278 is shown.
Cause This error happens sporadically and is probably related to corrupted
Regional Settings data.
Solution Workaround 1:
(1) Log in to the defective user account.
(2) Open Regional Settings Panel.
(3) Select in the language drop-down any language, other than the intended
language.


Troubleshooting
(4) Select in the language drop-down the intended language for the user.
(5) Click <Apply>.
(6) Click <OK>.
It is required to select another language to force windows to correct the underlying
data for the correct language.
Workaround 2:
Remove and recreate the user with operator rights on Windows level.
1.3.3 Unable to activate XRDI Logging
Symptom The shortcut to "Activate XRDI logging" is not available in the Start menu.
Cause The XRDI (X-Ray Device Integration) installer adds the following item to the start
menu "Activate XRDI logging". When activating the NX workstation, this item is
removed from the Start menu within the list of possible debug loggings.
Solution This logging can still be activated via the folder C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin\Service.
1.3.4 Incorrect Accession Numbers are generated
Symptom When the ADB tool is in use, incorrect accession numbers are generated after the
upgrade to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300.
Cause If no accession number is present in the image sent from NX, the default values in
the ADB configuration file (database.txt) can cause incorrect accession numbers to
be generated.
Solution (1) Log in as “crservice”.
(2) Go to: C:Agfa\Healthcare\ADB
(3) Open the ADB configuration file database.txt in a text editor.
(4) Remove the lines that mention the attributes:
ACCESSION-NUMBER-PREFIX and ACCESSION-NUMBER-MAPPING
(5) Save and close the file: database.txt
NOTE:
This issue can be seen on all versions of NX, but from
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 on, the default settings in the ADB configuration file
do not contain these attributes. However when upgrading an NX workstation
to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, the old settings are copied.


Troubleshooting
1.4 RIS
1.4.1 RIS Query may become slow after Upgrade from NX 1.0
Symptom This issue only occurs on networks that do not use a DNS server and consequently
have the IP addresses configured in the Device Configuration of the Configuration
Tool:
When performing a RIS worklist query on a NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, it may take
longer than on NX 1.0 systems. Independent from the number of worklist items, the
query time is longer by 20-30 seconds.
Cause Normally, DNS queries should only be done for hostnames, not for IP addresses.
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 performs a DNS query although the IP address is configured
for the RIS.
Result: The DNS query fails as there is no DNS server (this action takes about 20 -
30 seconds). After the DNS query NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 will use the configured IP
address and the connection succeeds. NX1.0 did not show this behavior.
The issue is linked to the installed version of the .NET framework, that is delivered
with the NX Software.
Solution (1) The local hosts file of the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 must be updated with IP
addresses and hostnames of the RIS/PACS.
(2) The hostnames of the RIS/PACS must be used in the Device Configuration of
the Configuration Tool instead of the IP-addresses.
For the detailed procedure refer to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter
04 “Installation and Configuration”, section “Configuring Devices”.
Documents NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 04 “Installation and Configuration”,
section “Configuring Devices” DD+DIS105.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)


Troubleshooting
1.4.2 RIS Option “User Program” does not work
Symptom The RIS option type “User program” is configured. When clicking the button
<RIS query> in the NX user interface to create the worklist, the user program does
not start up.
Cause The “User program” (.exe file) cannot be started from the NX application
(<RIS query> button).
Solution (1) Create a batch file somewhere on the NX that calls the executable file (exe) of
the RIS user program.
(2) Open the Configuration Tool and go to:
User Interface Configuration Æ Configure External Applications
(3) Check the checkbox: Worklist Environment
(4) Enter a caption for the button that is related to the function of the
user program.
(5) Set the path to the batch file by clicking the <Browse> button.
(6) In the Configuration Tool go to: Device Configuration Æ RIS
(7) Change the option in the drop-down menu from User Program to Data File.
(8) Check the checkbox: Remove DataFile
(9) If the path to the Data file is not entered yet, click the button <Browse> and
navigate to the data file that is generated by the User program.
(10) Activate the Configuration.
Test following procedure and inform the customer about the new procedure to query
the RIS:
(1) In the NX application Worklist window click the new button.
The user program is started.
(2) Perform the tasks requested from the user program (e.g. choose patient, enter
accession number, etc.). The user program generates the data file.
(3) Click the button <RIS Query>. The NX will fetch the data file and enter the
data into the Worklist.
Reference HQ_0610050006, HQ_0701310002


Troubleshooting
1.4.3 Accession Number cannot be edited after Image has been received
Symptom After the image has been received, it is not possible to modify the accession
number.
Cause This is normal behavior if MPPS is used.
The issue also appears if MPPS is not used on site but configured.
Solution Use the Configuration Tool to remove the configuration of the MPPS if it is not used
at the site.
1.5 Printing/Archiving
1.5.1 Suboptimal Image Quality when printing 12 Bit OD
Symptom When configuring NX to send 12 Bit OD (optical density) image data to the printer,
the printed image quality is not optimal.
Cause Some printers don't support the default NX pixel representation of '1' for this output
type, e.g. Drystar 3000.
Solution Configure NX to send 8 Bit image data.
1.5.2 Drystar 3000 true Size Printing
Symptom True size prints on Drystar 3000 are not true size.
Cause Drystar 3000 requires installation of PMS-file for true size printing from NX.
Solution Refer to the Drystar 3000 Service Documentation for installing the PMS-file.


Troubleshooting
1.5.3 Logfile contains Errors concerning Printing or Archiving Jobs
Symptom After finishing a print job cycle, the log sometimes shows:
2005-12-06 12:47:30,786 [ 4592] - Dicom Printer status =

'ERROR'
2005-12-06 12:47:30,802 [ 4592] - printerStatusInfo (0x2110,
0x0020) = PRINTER DOWN
Or
Originator : DPM
Log severity : Error
Message : Dicom Printer status = 'ERROR'
Or
Originator : DPM
Log severity : Warning
Message : PrintJob ID associated with jobInstanceUID
'1.3.51.0.1.978593.20051024105101.8 ' not found in JobTable!
Or
Error : unacceptable PDU : reason = 1
Error : Close association to NNN failiure: A-RELEASE REQUEST
not confirmed 11.
Cause DICOM Library behavior
Solution This error can be ignored, because there is no effect on application behavior.
1.5.4 Wrong Characters on PACS (e.g. ' º ', ' cm² ')
Symptom Special characters may not be visible on the PACS, or may be displayed wrongly, or
may even cause the rest of a text to be cut off.
Cause For annotations the NX uses international symbols such as ° (degree sign), cm², ....
In some character sets this character is not available and thus cannot be translated
to DICOM.
Solution Configure the NX system to use extended character sets and combine the character
set to be used with ISO 2022 IR 6 (DICOM default repertoire, which contains these
characters).
An alternative is to use UTF-8 encoding (Unicode) ISO_IR 197, which also contains
these characters. Check whether the connected PACS system also supports this.
If one of the solutions described above are used, no information will be lost in the
GSPS when sending it to the PACS. It is still possible that the PACS viewer is using
a font that cannot display a certain character!


Troubleshooting
1.5.5 Image Appearance on PACS after Upgrade
Symptom The Windows Level (W/L) settings of images on the PACS are not in a ratio of
“50% - 50%”. This can result in:
• A very bright and less in contrast image appearance on the PACS compared to
the appearance before the upgrade.
• A very bright and less in contrast image appearance of normal Mammography
images compared to Micro Calcification Enhancement (MCE) images on the
PACS.
Cause Enabling the license NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL in combination with
PACS archives that do not support or follow the DICOM standard can lead to the
described symptoms regarding the image appearance on the PACS.
Solution Workaround:
(1) Check the Connectivity Release documents of the PACS and of the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 for mismatching DICOM settings.
(2) If the PACS cannot be setup to support and follow the DICOM standard,
disable the NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL license in the NX
Configuration Tool.
References HQ_1003010001, HQ_1003260002
1.6 Operating System (Windows XP)
1.6.1 Every Restart or Shutdown takes a very long Time
Symptom Every restart or shutdown takes a very long time.

Users press the button to shut the system down and press it again too early to start it
up again.
The shutdown takes 2 to 3 minutes.
A blank screen appears during shutdown for half a minute or more.
Cause What causes this, is the enabled Windows setting:
“Clear Virtual Memory Pagefile = enabled.”
Solution This setting was introduced for security reasons, but it can be disabled again
manually in case a slow shutdown is considered as a problem:
(1) Open the Control Panel.
(2) Click Administrative Tools.
(3) Click Local Security Policy.
(4) Click the "+" next to “Local Policies”.


Troubleshooting
(5) Click Security Options.

(6) Double-click Shutdown: Clear Virtual Memory Pagefile.
(7) Disable it.
This is the default setting from XOS version 1.0.20 onwards.
1.6.2 Unable to log in using “crservice” Account
Symptom Password is not accepted.

Cause The login dialog is sensitive to keyboard settings. A different keyboard layout might
have to be used when typing the password.
Solution (1) Go to Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel Æ Regional & Language Settings.
(2) In the Languages tab, click <Details>.
(3) In the Settings tab, select the appropriate 'Default input language'.
1.6.3 Secure Dicom Communication stops working
Symptom Secure Dicom communication stops working (failing print/archive jobs). There are
different causes for this fault:
Cause 1 The public certificate of the NX has expired on the external Dicom device with which
the NX needs to communicate over SSL or has been removed accidentally. Refer to
section Fault Finding sub-section 4.11 “Check installed Certificates”.
Solution 1 Get a new certificate from a CA (Certification Authority) for the NX device and
upload it to the external DICOM device.
Cause 2 The public certificate of the external device with which the NX needs to
communicate over SSL has expired on the NX. Refer to section Fault Finding sub-
section 4.11 "Check installed Certificates”.
Solution 2 Get a new certificate from a CA (Certification Authority) for the external device and
install it on the NX (see chapter 5 Appendices, section ‘Secure Communication').


Troubleshooting
1.6.4 Windows Task Bar in front of NX
Symptom The Windows Task bar stays in front of the NX.

Cause If the Task Bar is "unlocked", it can be moved around.
Once moved to the right it will:
• Change the resolution of the NX screen and hide e.g. the LgM value in the
Edit screen.
• Not hide until user interface is restarted.
Solution (1) Go to: Start Æ Run and type gpedit.msc
(2) Go to: User configuration Æ Administrative Templates Æ Start Menu and
Taskbar
(3) Lock the Taskbar and enable it.
No need to reboot. This should lock the task bar immediately and grey out this
setting in the task bar properties.
1.6.5 NX Installation or Activation fails with Application Error Messages
Symptom Installation of the NX application or activation of the NX application fails and

database error messages are displayed. Running Configuration Tool or Activation
Utility also raises error messages.
Cause Network has been disconnected during installation or activation.
Solution (1) Reboot the system.
(2) Reset the system to factory defaults: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install
Tools Æ Reset NX Completely to Factory Settings prior to first Activation
(3) Restart the Activation Utility.


Troubleshooting
1.7 NX User Interface
1.7.1 Double Cursor when adding Markers or Annotations
Symptom When adding markers or annotations, a double cursor is seen (a copy of the correct
one but a little grayer). This is seen in the Editing environment and in the
Examination environment.
Cause Only applicable to Dell 670 with Matrox cards: The video card settings are wrong.
Solution (1) Go to Display Properties Æ Settings and click <Advanced>.
(2) Set the Hardware Acceleration to the 3rd notch from the left
(Disable all DirectDraw and Direct3D Accelerations, etc.).
1.7.2 Scale Factor not shown in Status Box
Symptom Scale factor is not shown in the status box when NX is configured.
Cause This happens if:
• "True Scale" is configured in the Device Configuration Æ Printer Æ Sheet Text
Box and
• "Show true scale factor" is checked in the User Interface Æ Editing Settings Æ
Configure Normal Mode & Print Mode.
This can happen on a workstation with Dutch language settings because the default
label text is too long.
Solution Change the label from "Schaal aanpass..." to "Schaal:".
1.7.3 NX doesn't start after activating Configuration
Symptom Clicking Start NX Viewer doesn't start the NX application.

Cause The NX Workstation Service has been shut down and should be running before the
NX Viewer can be started.
Solution Restart NX: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Restart NX Completely


Troubleshooting
1.7.4 Fast Preview Image is not shown: Error Messages about AE Title are displayed
Symptom After digitizing an exposure, the Fast Preview image is not shown. Following error
messages are displayed:
Figure 4
Cause A Fast Preview AE Title length of 16 characters generates this error.
Solution Workaround: Use Fast Preview AE Titles shorter than 16 characters in the
CCM Tool and the Configuration Tool.
1.7.5 Inverting Collimation Area is not working
Symptom Draw two (or more) collimation areas (any shape), invert all of them and apply
collimation.
Cause The collimation areas are drawn as if they were not inverted, but with an extra
border added.
Solution Only a single collimation area can be inverted.


Troubleshooting
1.8 Exporting/Importing
1.8.1 Opening Repeat/Reject Analysis File in Microsoft Excel
Symptom Depending on the MS Excel version observe the following situations:

• Excel 2000: The file cannot be opened.
• Excel 2002: The file can be opened without problems.
• Excel 2003: The file can be opened, but an error is shown: "There is a problem
with the specified XML or schema source. Click <OK> to have Excel create a
schema based on the XML source".
Cause Excel 2000: Not supported
Excel 2003: Date format incompatibility: See Solution.
Solution Workaround (Excel 2003): When exporting analysis data from NX, two files are
generated: The XML file containing the data and an XSD file containing the XML
schema of the data file.
Make sure to have both files available when opening the XML file in Excel 2003.
1.8.2 No Filename Extension for Dose Monitoring Export File
Symptom When exporting Dose Monitoring statistics, the export file has no default
filename extension.
Solution The export file contains data in XML format, so the user should explicitly provide a
filename with the extension ".xml".
1.8.3 DICOM Export fails for "Unknown error"
Symptom DICOM Export fails with error message "Unknown error occurred during export."
Cause This happens when McAfee Anti-Virus v8.0 is installed because it defines a security
rule: Prevent remote creation of autorun.inf files. This means copying a file called
autorun.inf to a mapped drive is forbidden.
This is part of the DICOM export process.
Solution (1) Go to McAfee VirusScanConsole Æ Access Protection Æ File Æ Share Æ
Folder Protection.
(2) Disable the security rule Prevent remote creation of autorun.inf files.


Troubleshooting
1.8.4 DVD burn Process stops
Symptom Intermittently the DVD burning process started via the NX user interface stops and
the error message “Unknown error RefMess 163” is displayed.
Cause DVDs with insufficient quality have been used.
Solution Only use high-quality DVD media. For a recommendation of high-quality DVDs refer
to: http://www.digitalfaq.com/reviews/dvd-media.htm
References HQ_0910270001
1.8.5 Image Appearance on CD/DVD Export after Upgrade
Symptom On the DICOM viewer which is exported along with the DICOM data, the images
have a grey background and background darkening in parts of the breast tissue.
Cause Enabling the license NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL together with the
NX_MAMMO_DARKENING license and exporting to CD/DVD with Output Type set
to 15-bit PVAL will result in the described symptom regarding the exports on
CD/DVD.
Solution Workaround:
The chosen workaround depends on the preference of the customer:
• If the default 12-bit PVAL output is not acceptable for the customer and a 15-bit
PVAL export is preferred: Disable the NX MUSICA2 VOILUT WINDOWLEVEL
license in the NX Configuration Tool.
• If the default 12-bit PVAL output is acceptable for the customer: Change the
Output Type of the Export destination in the NX Configuration Tool to 12-bit
PVAL.
Solution:
Future NX versions will be released with a DICOM viewer that does not show the
symptom anymore.


Troubleshooting
1.9 Licenses
1.9.1 Socket Error in License Manager Tool
Symptom When running the License Manager Tool, this error is displayed:
Figure 5
As a consequence of this error, the indication of remaining days in the Grace Period
may be wrong.
Solution Reboot the NX Workstation.
1.9.2 Grace Period starts if the Dongle is removed
Symptom The user does not constantly use the application and removes the licensing dongle
for the time the application is not used.
The licenses for the application falls into status: Grace
Figure 6
Cause The Licensing service is automatically started as soon as the PC is started. Since
there is no dongle detected, the licenses fall into status Grace.


Troubleshooting
Solution A checkbox has been created in the License Manager tool to toggle between
enabled and disabled grace functionality.
Communicate following procedure to users who want to temporarily remove the
licensing dongle from the NX workstation:
(1) Log in to the NX workstation.
(2) Start up the License Manager tool from:
Start Æ AGFA Æ Service Æ License manager
(3) Go to the tab License Info.
(4) Uncheck the checkbox: Enable Grace Functionality:
Figure 7
(5) Click <Yes>:
Figure 8
(6) Close the License Manager tool.

(7) Remove the dongle from the USB port of the NX workstation.
NOTE:
When reconnecting the dongle, follow the procedure in reversed order:
(1) Reconnect the dongle.
(2) Check the checkbox: Enable Grace Functionality.


Troubleshooting
1.10 Offline Config Tool
1.10.1 Error saving new Configuration File on Offline Config Tool
Symptom After creating a new configuration file from scratch on the Offline Config Tool, this
error is listed when trying to save the file:
Figure 9
Cause Licenses are read from the database representation on the Offline Config Tool
system. Only when the file is deployed on an NX Workstation, the licenses are read
from the ALF.
Solution Workaround: Manually disable one of the licenses in the Offline Config Tool before
saving the configuration file.
1.11 Viewing Priors
1.11.1 Unable to log in to Web1000 for viewing Priors
Symptom Error message when viewing priors using Web1000: "Unable to log in: An unknown
error occurred, check the local log".
Cause Limitation on number of logged in users (max. 50), when using EPR demo license
on Web1000.
Solution Retry when less users are logged in.
1.11.2 Additional Internet Explorer Windows are displayed when retrieving Priors
in Web1000
Symptom When retrieving prior images from IMPAX using Web1000, additional
Internet Explorer windows are temporarily appearing.
Cause Normal behaviour
Solution None, the windows can be closed without disturbing the operation.


Troubleshooting
1.11.3 "Fatal exception" Error when refreshing the Internet Explorer
Symptom After retrieving the studies from IMPAX and transferring them to WEB1000, the prior
list is not automatically updated. Refreshing the Internet Explorer screen will end in a
"fatal exception" error.
Cause Normal behaviour
Solution (1) Close the Internet Explorer window.
(2) Press the <Priors> button again.
1.12 Monitors
1.12.1 Installation of Barco Diagnostic Monitor fails
Symptom After installing the drivers for a Barco diagnostic monitor, following error message is
displayed:
Figure 10
The installation of the Barco diagnostic monitor fails.

Cause Improper application of the installation process
Solution 1 The complete process is described in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual
chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS108.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link) and has
been updated with supporting information.
If the process still fails try to uninstall and re-install the drivers:
(1) Go to: Start Æ Settings Æ Control Panel
(2) Choose: Add or Remove Programs
(3) Select the Barco nio Display Driver and click <Change/Remove>.
(4) Follow the instructions on the screen to uninstall the driver. If the driver cannot
be uninstalled refer to Solution 2.
(5) Repeat the driver installation procedure described in the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Monitors Options


Troubleshooting
Solution 2 If the driver cannot be uninstalled from the system the dialog Add or Remove
Programs displays following error:
Figure 11
In this case following procedure is recommended:
WARNING:
Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before
disconnecting or connecting cables on printed circuit boards.
CAUTION:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.
(1) Open the NX PC housing.

(2) Remove the already installed Barco display controller from the
PCIe expansion slot.
(3) Install the original display controller in the PCIe expansion slot.
(5) Perform a Clean Installation according to the procedure describe in the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Clean Install Procedure
(6) Repeat the installation of the monitor according to NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Service Manual chapter 5 Monitor Options DD+DIS108.10E


Troubleshooting
1.12.2 Barco MFCD1219 TS does not work due to wrong Driver
Symptom After installation the Barco MFCD1219 Touchscreen does not work.
Cause The wrong driver is installed. During installation of the driver the Windows dialog
New Hardware found is displayed. If multiple drivers are found, the wrong driver may
be highlighted by default.
Solution (1) Go to: Computer Management Æ System Tools Æ Device Manager Æ Mice
and other pointing devices
(2) Uninstall the installed touchscreen driver.
(3) Install the correct driver according to the procedure in chapter 5 Monitor
Options DD+DIS108.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).


Troubleshooting
DD+DIS105.10E Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
2 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Question 1 What to do in case of Musica pre-processing Failures?

Answer In case of a Musica pre-processing failure, the image will be put in a separate folder.
In the viewer and in the logging, there will be a clear indication that this has occurred.
The image itself (for analysis by the MEDICAD team) can be found at the
following locations:
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\DicomAcquiredFiles\Refused (Dicom digitizers) or
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\Refused (Twain digitizers)
These images can be attached to the report for further analysis, when reporting the
case via the escalation channels.
The image is stored as a DICOM file without patient-demographic information in case
the image came from a DICOM digitizer (e.g. ADC Solo). It is composed out of a pixel
file and a demographics file in case that image came from a Twain digitizer.
NOTE:
• Musica pre-processing failures should rarely occur. However, it was of utmost
importance to foresee how the system will react on this, because otherwise the
system would come into a state where it constantly retries to acquire the image.
• In NX, a message will pop up on the screen asking the operator whether or not to
retry the image-processing, prior to actually refusing the image. If the issue is
caused by a temporal problem, the retry can work and the image will not be
refused. In case the issue is data-related, every subsequent retry will fail
(resulting in the refusal of the image).
Question 2 What to do in case of Digitizer Connectivity Issues?

On the digitizer (Tablet ID), the following message is displayed:
‘Station xxxx is not known’.
Or in case of Fast ID: Red light is flashing and the message:

‘Service error 8 (ERR_WTC, WaitC in progress…’ is displayed on the display of the
digitizer.
Answer 1 This is most likely caused by the fact that the processing station name defined in NX
and the processing station name in the CPF file of the digitizer are not identical.
Note that ‘identical’ also means that the same capitalization should be used.
Answer 2 There are too many stations defined in the CPF file, causing the digitizer not to import
all of them. Note that it is undefined which ones will fall out.
To resolve, reduce the number of processing stations in the digitizer CPF file.


Troubleshooting
Question 3 How to trace the CR Cassette/Detector an Image has been exposed on?
Answer If there are doubts about the origin of artifacts on an image, it is useful to determine
the respective CR cassette/detector, the image has been exposed on:
(1) Select the image in the Image Overview of the Main Menu in the NX Viewer.
(2) Click the link View All Image Attributes.
(3) Find the label Detector ID and note it down.
(4) For CR Cassettes:
Compare the Detector ID with the Cassette Number of the CR cassettes and find
the matching one. The Cassette Number of the CR cassettes can be read out
using the RF Tag Initialization Tool:
Figure 12
NOTE:
For detailed information about the RF Tag Initialization Tool refer to the
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 5 Using the RF Tag
Initialization Tool DD+DIS112.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
For Detector Cassettes (DX-S / DX-G):

Compare the Detector ID with the IP serial number written on the label of the IP
chip of the cassettes and find the matching one. The IP serial number is the
second part of the number printed on the label. In the example below, the IP
serial number is “7CBQMK0002”:
Figure 13: Example


Troubleshooting
NOTE:
For detailed information about the pane View All Image Attributes refer
to the NX User manual on NX Startekit DVD 1.
Result The CR cassette/detector that contains the matching Cassette Number/IP serial
number is the CR cassette/detector the image has been exposed on.


Troubleshooting
DD+DIS105.10E Tips & Tricks
3 Tips & Tricks
Overview: See section:

1. Cloning a NX System 3.1
2. Resolving Port Conflicts 3.2
3. Image Storage Capacity 3.3
4. Running Internet Explorer 3.4
5. Schedule an automatic weekly Reboot on the System 3.5
Checking Version Information with “About NX” 3.6

6.
(only available as of NX 2.0.6805)
7. Check the ID Tablet Firmware Version Number 3.7
8. Checking if an ALF matches a NX Workstation 3.8
9. Forced Delete 3.9
10. Configuring the Auto Log Off / Screen Saver 3.10
11. Enabling the Service Mode for Digitizers 3.11
12. Enabling the Service Mode for Archiving 3.12
Saving the Adjustments of Musica 1 Settings (via NX GUI) 3.13

13.
to the Backup File
14. Recovering from Disk Failure on a RAID System 3.14
Handling Issues occurring during automated Data 3.15

15.
Import/Export


Troubleshooting
3.1 Cloning a NX System
NOTE:
Do not try to clone a system using NX backup and restore. Instead, it is advised to use
the Configuration Tool:
On the main system:

(1) Load the active configuration.
(2) Use the Save as… option to export the full configuration to a file that can be
loaded on the ‘clone’ system.
On the ‘clone’ system:

(1) Install the ‘clone’ system’s certificate and the certificates of the other DICOM
systems (SSL only). See NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual chapter 4
Installation and Configuration Appendices DD+DIS105.10E, section 'Secure
Communication', for more information on how to do this
(2) In the Configuration Tool Select Load the configuration via an external file and
browse to the file that has been exported from the main system.
(3) The Configuration Tool will now load the file into its workspace.
(4) Browse to workstation settings, and change:
• ID Station name
• Performed station AE title
• Fast preview AE title (If enabled)
• Performed location (optional)
(5) Browse to Device configuration / RIS (RIS only).
(6) Change the list of scheduled AE titles (when needed).
(7) Browse to Security / Configure SSL settings.
(8) Enter the common name of the clone’s certificate (SSL only).
(9) Activate the settings.
NOTE:
The ‘clone’ system will only look ‘identical’ to the master system in case that on both
systems the same licenses are available. Also the authorization of the logged in user
can cause the system to look differently (certain options are disabled).
Example:‘Print’ view was configured on the master system ‘Normal’ view is shown on
the cloned system, because there is no Print license available on the machine.


Troubleshooting
3.2 Resolving Port Conflicts
In case of port conflicts, typically the NXWorkstation service will not start up, and when
opening the log file NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe.log the error:
‘java.BindException’ can be found.
It is possible that after configuring NX one or more of its services are not able to open a
DICOM port for listening. This means that another program has taken control over one
of these ports, for example a RIS client.
TCP/IP port conflicts on the local NX PC can be caused by:
• Standard Windows applications such as Remote desktop.
• 3rd party applications (e.g. RIS) installed on the NX PC.
NOTE:
Many applications assign ports dynamically.
This does normally not cause a problem because the NX backend starts up when the
system starts up. But when started up from the Configuration Tool (or when another
application is using the same fixed port), a conflict can occur.
NX has a listening port for Fast–ID, storage SCP and storage/commit SCP, so it is
advised to check whether no other applications are claiming any of these ports.
Following simple DOS commands can help to find the conflicts:
(1) Go to Start Æ Programs Æ Accessories Æ Command Prompt to open a DOS
command window.
(2) Type ‘netstat /a’ in a command window to see the list of ports in use.
If running this prior to running NX (make sure that the NX workstation service is
not running), the free ports on the system become visible:
Figure 14


Troubleshooting
(3) Type NetStat /a /o into a command window to display the process ID (PID)
next to each port that is used:
Figure 15 – Command window
(4) Find out which process is using the ID in the Windows task manager:
Figure 16 – Task Manager
(5) Additionally: It is possible to verify which application is claiming a certain port

using a tool such as: TCPView (downloadable at http://www.sysinternals.com/.
Agfa cannot distribute this tool freely, but it can be downloaded at no cost).


Troubleshooting
3.3 Image Storage Capacity
The Image storage capacity depends on preferences, such as the set number of days
an image will be kept on the system.
NOTE:
• Sessions are deleted from the system if they are older than the configured
maximum number of days or if room on the disk is low, meaning less space
than 2 GB.
• Only closed sessions for which printing or archiving is done, not just requested,
can be deleted automatically.
Sessions cannot be deleted automatically if:
• They are locked.
• They are younger than 24 hours.
Manual cleanup may be necessary for sessions that do not properly end printing or
archiving (e.g. pending storage commitment) or that are younger than 24 hours in case
disk size is very critical.
IMPORTANT:
On manual cleanup:
• Pending jobs will be removed from the queues.
• Active jobs will be continued.
The maximum number of days to keep sessions can be configured in the
NX Configuration Tool Æ Workflow Management Æ Identification-Examination Æ
Storage pane.
3.4 Running Internet Explorer
Windows Internet Explorer is started by running the Windows Explorer (file browser)
and typing an http URL (http://...) in the address bar.


Troubleshooting
3.5 Schedule an automatic weekly Reboot on the System
NOTE:
When scheduling the automatic reboot, it should be set to a time when the NX will not
be used, e.g. during the night.
IMPORTANT:
Be aware, that it might be impossible to schedule this automatic reboot in emergency
departments where the system needs to be running at any moment.
(1) Log on to the system using an administrator account (e.g. crservice).

(2) Go to Start Æ Program files Æ Accessories Æ System Tools
Æ Scheduled Tasks.
(3) Double click on <Add Scheduled Task>:
Figure 17
(4) Click <Next>:
Figure 18


Troubleshooting
(5) Click <Browse…> to open file browser dialog.
Figure 19
(6) Browse to C:\windows\system32\shutdown.exe.

This utility allows to reboot a PC.
(7) Give the task an appropriate name (e.g. “ShutdownNX”) and select the
frequency of the shutdown (Weekly).
Figure 20
(8) Click <Next>.


Troubleshooting
(9) Select the start time (= time when the system is preferably not used or
rarely used).
Figure 21
(10) Finally, enter the user name and password under which this task may run.
Click <Next>:
Figure 22
NOTE:
• The task will run under this profile independent of the fact that
somebody is logged in or not. Preferably, use an administrator
account to run this task (e.g. crservice). Note that this does not
need to be a local account. In a domain setup, also a domain
account can be used. After the reboot, a user with log-in rights
must be present to log in.
• In case of password expiration, the task will cease to run.


Troubleshooting
(11) Check Open advanced properties for this task when I click Finish and
click <Finish>.
Figure 23
(12) In the following window, enter the following ‘Run’ command:

C:\windows\system32\shutdown.exe –r –t 60 –f
Figure 24
(13) Click <OK>.
Result The weekly automatic reboot has been scheduled.


Troubleshooting
3.6 Checking Version Information with “About NX”

(only available as of NX 2.0.6805)
The “About NX” utility creates a “snapshot” of the currently installed system and lists all
version related information:
• The installed NX version
• Dose Type
• NX Usage Information (Disk space)
• The installed Hotfix / Documentation CD CD version
• The installed languages
(which were installed using the language CDs)
• NX Component versions
• Installed licenses
• XRDi version information
This tool can be accessed using: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ About NX …
3.7 Check the ID Tablet Firmware Version Number
(1) Search the NXWorkstation log files for text FirmwareInfo. For a detailed
description refer to section “Fault Finding” sub section “View Logging”.
(2) Find out the version number by the text similar to the following example:
1007 ID-TABLET 1.12.07 06/17/05 00005054 1.11.13
Explanation:
• 1.12.07 represents the version of the firmware.
• 5054 is the serial number of the reader.
• 1.11.13 represents the version of the driver on the PC.


Troubleshooting
3.8 Checking if an ALF matches a NX Workstation
(1) Start the Cx License Manager Tool.

(2) Click on the Security Info tab.
(3) Read out the Mac address of the machine and the Serial Number of the dongle:
Figure 25
(4) Open the ALF-file using Internet explorer.

IMPORTANT:
Do not change the content of the ALF and do not save any changes
that have been made unintentionally!
Any changes would invalidate the license file.
(5) Locate the Mac adress in the license file. Do this by searching for the string
HardwareKey (in the XML section ‘FingerprintFile’). The Mac address is the
Value attribute of this XML tag.
Figure 26


Troubleshooting
(6) Locate the dongle serial number in the license file. Do this by searching for the
string ‘Dongle’ (in the XML section ‘FingerprintFile’). The dongle serial number is
the Serial number attribute of this XML tag.
(7) Locate the installed software version in the license file. Do this by searching for
the string InstalledSwComponent. The version number consists of three
numbers: X, Y and Z-version
(8) Now the information has to match:
• The Mac address of the machine to the Mac addres' in the license file.
• The dongle serial number to the dongle serial number in the license file.
• The installed software version to the installed software version in the
license file.
NOTE:
If a license file is loaded and the system goes into grace as a result of the loading,
the user is warned and can cancel the operation via the following warning dialog:
Figure 27
3.9 Forced Delete
In some situations sessions cannot be deleted using the Delete Examination function in
the Main Menu (cleanup date/time issues, exam cannot get into the 'closed'
status, etc).
Any Examination (open or closed) can be deleted by a Service user via the
Configuration Tool:
NOTE:
Make sure there are no jobs in the output queues for the session to be deleted.
These jobs will become faulty after the sessions is deleted.


Troubleshooting
(1) Log in using the “crservice” account.

(2) Stop the NX Software.
(4) Go to "Security and License Management".
(5) Click <Delete Examinations>.
(6) Click <Get Examinations>.
Figure 28
(7) Select an examination and click <Delete>.
(8) If the NX software is running, a confirmation is requested to stop the
NX software.
(9) The examination is deleted.
(10) Restart the system.
3.10 Configuring the Auto Log Off / Screen Saver
3.10.1 Lock the Screen by Password Protection of the current User

(default Configuration after Installation)
Repeat these steps for each configured user:

(1) Right-click anywhere on the desktop and select Properties.
(2) Select the tab Screen Saver.
(3) Select Bezier in the drop-down with the selection of the screen saver (or any
other screensaver).
NOTE:
Do not select Logoff Screen Saver!


Troubleshooting
(4) Set Wait time: Determines the time of non-activity before the screen saver
is activated.
(5) Set On resume, password protect: The user needs to enter his password to
unlock the screen saver.
(6) Click <OK>.
3.10.2 Configuring the Screensaver to log out the current User
Repeat these steps for each configured user:

(3) Select Logoff Screen Saver in the drop-down with the selection of the
screen saver.
(4) Set Wait time: Determines the time of non-activity before the screen saver is
activated.
Execute these steps once:

(1) Log in using an account that has administrator rights.
(4) Make sure that Logoff Screen Saver is selected in the drop-down and click
<Settings>.
(5) Make sure that the checkbox Force application termination is not checked!
(6) Set Countdown for ... seconds: The number of seconds a dialogue is displayed
before the AutoLogOff actually takes place (i.e. after a period of inactivity this
dialogue pops up and the user still has this number of seconds to prevent being
logged off).
(7) Set Logoff message: The message that is to be displayed within this
dialogue box.


Troubleshooting
3.11 Enabling the Service Mode for Digitizers
The service mode allows the service engineer to preserve the data as it was acquired
from the digitizer (without any processing). This can be enabled and disabled per
digitizer.
This is a feature that can be used when there is doubt that the digitizer is sending the
correct information to the NX workstation (can be added as an attachment in the
problem tracking system for example).
When enabled, a DICOM file is generated in the folder:
• D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\DicomFiles in case it is a DICOM digitizer.
• An xml file with the demographic data and the raw pixel data are stored in the
folder D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\TwainProcessedFiles for Twain digitizers
(e.g. DX-S). In a DICOM file, both are available in one file. The names of the files
match the SOP instance UID (unique identifier) of the image in NX.
To enable or disable the service mode, use the following procedure:
(1) Go to:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install tools Æ Set digitizer service mode
(2) All configured digitizers are listed.
(3) Select the digitizer for which the service mode needs to be changed.
Press 0 for cancelling this task.
Result The changes will be picked up when the NX backend service is restarted.
NOTE:
When the service mode is enabled for a digitizer, all pixel data will be stored twice on
the data harddisk. The service engineer is responsible to clean up the data when ready
with it. This cleanup happens automatically when disabling the
service mode.
3.12 Enabling the Service Mode for Archiving
The service mode allows the service engineer to preserve the data as it was sent from
the NX Workstation to the Dicom archive. This can be enabled and disabled per
archive.
This is a feature that can be used when there is doubt that the NX is sending the
correct information to the Dicom archive (can be added as an attachment in the
problem tracking system for example). These Dicom objects can also be viewed using
any DICOM Viewer for further analysis or to compare them with what is visible on the
PACS.


Troubleshooting
When enabled, one or two (in case that the GSPS option was enabled for the archive)
DICOM file are generated in the ArchiveEnhancedServiceModeStorage folder per
archive job. The names of the files match the SOP instance UID (unique identifier) of
the image in NX. To enable or disable the service mode, use the following procedure:
(1) Go to:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install tools Æ Set archiving service mode.
(2) All configured archives are listed.
(3) Select the archive for which the service mode has to be changed. Press 0 for
cancelling this task.
Result The changes will be picked up when the NX backend service is restarted.
NOTE:
When the service mode is enabled for an archive, all pixel data will be stored twice on
the data harddisk. The service engineer is responsible to clean up the data when
he/she is ready with it. This cleanup happens automatically when disabling the
service mode.
3.13 Saving the Adjustments of Musica 1 Settings (via NX GUI) to the Backup
File
In the NX application (GUI), the Musica 1 settings can be adjusted and saved as
default. If these settings should be included into the backup configuration file, so that
they will not have to be repeated after a restore, follow these instructions:
(1) Close the Configuration Tool (if it is still running).

(2) Go to the NX application.
(3) Open a representative image of the regarded exposure type.
(4) Let the customer/key user edit the Musica1 settings.
(5) Click Set as default.
(6) Repeat steps 3 - 5 for as many exposure types as required.
(7) Stop NX.
(8) Open the Configuration Tool.
(9) Load the Active Configuration.
(10) Export the backup configuration file (xml), store it on a safe place (like a CD) and
name it with a time stamp.


Troubleshooting
3.14 Recovering from Disk Failure on a RAID System
On NX systems with RAID functionality, the system remains operational if one of both
disks fails. The user receives a warning that the RAID volume is degraded and should
inform Service to replace the failing disk. After replacing the disk, the RAID must be
activated again.
(1) Change the BOOT ORDER after replacing the disk:
• On a DELL PC:
o During booting press <F12> to enter the BIOS setup.
o Select the RAID Volume (e.g. Intel Volume_000) as primary boot
media.
• Or on an HP PC:
o Press <F10> during booting to enter the BIOS setup.
o Go to Storage and select Boot Order.
o Set the RAID Volume (e.g. Intel Volume_000) as primary boot media.
o Press <F10> to accept changes.
o Select Save Changes and Exit and press <F10> to accept.
(2) Observe a message of degraded RAID is shown when the PC is booting.
Figure 29
(3) Wait until Windows is booted and log in using the “crservice” account.
Intel Matrix storage manager is informing about the fact that the RAID is
degraded an may be rebuild.
Figure 30
(4) Go to Start Æ All Programs > Intel Matrix Storage Manager Æ Intel Matrix
Storage Console to launch the Intel Storage Console.


Troubleshooting
(5) Select Restore RAID 1 data protection and click

<Rebuild RAID volume now>:
Figure 31
(6) Click <Yes> to start migrating.
Figure 32
(7) The progress of migration is displayed:
Figure 33
IMPORTANT:
Do not perform a reboot of the system until the migration process has
finished completely.
NOTE:
The computer can be used normally during the migration process.


Troubleshooting
3.15 Handling Issues occurring during automated Data Import/Export
The feature automated data import/export allows automatically maintaining the

following data when performing an upgrade from NX version 2008 or higher:
• Configuration Data
• Image Data
• Dose Statistic Data
NOTE:
• When starting from an NX 2.0.8000 / 3.0.8000 system, all exports are performed
prior to starting the actual software upgrade.
• When starting from an NX 2008 system, only the export of the configuration data
is performed prior to starting the actual upgrade. If the upgrade is cancelled at this
point, the system is in the same state as before starting the upgrade. The only
exception are the pixel files. As part of the export process, the pixel files are moved
from the folder:
D:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\DataFiles\PreprocessedPixelFiles
To the folder:
To undo this state change, use Windows Explorer to manually move these files
back from the folder:
To the folder:
3.15.1 Best Practices
Be aware of the following best practices using the automated data import/export:
IMPORTANT:
Do not interrupt the upgrade installation.
• If the amount of image data that needs to be preserved is very limited compared
to the total set on the system, it is not advised to use the automated
export/import. Use the manual export/import procedures instead.
The procedures are described in the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual,
chapter 07 Upgrade Installation from NX DD+DIS115.10E


Troubleshooting
• Make sure all sessions are closed prior to starting the upgrade.
• Make sure there are no pending jobs prior to starting the upgrade.
3.15.2 One of the Exports fails
If one of the exports fails a dialogue is shown reporting the outcome of each of the
exports and offering the possibility to cancel the upgrade process. In this case:
(1) Cancel the upgrade procedure.

(2) Use the manual export/import procedures as described in
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Manual, chapter 07 Upgrade Installation
from NX DD+DIS115.10E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
3.15.3 Export of Image Data or Dose Statistics Data fails during NX 2008 upgrade
Due to technical limitations, the automated export process of the image and dose
statistics data can not be performed prior to starting the actual software upgrade. If
these exports fail, the data cannot be recovered after the upgrade. Therefore, it is
recommended to use the manual export/import procedures to safeguard the most
critical data (e.g. Dose Statistics + images of the last couple of weeks) prior to
performing the NX 2008 upgrade.
3.15.4 Import of the Configuration Data fails due to Verification Errors in the Data
If one the import of the configuration data fails due to verification errors in the data:
(1) Load the exported configuration file in the NX Configuration Tool.

(2) Repair the verification errors.


Troubleshooting
3.15.5 Interrupted Import
If after the upgrade one or more imports of image data have been interrupted, e.g.
because the system was switched off during import:
(1) Manually move (not copy and paste) the existing preprocessed pixel files
from the folder:
To the folder:
(2) Run the NX Activation Utility to reset the system to factory defaults:
Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ NX Æ NX Activation Utility
(3) Browse to the folder: C:\Agfa\Healthcare\NX\Bin
(4) Double click the file:
NX.Application.Visual.CommonTools.ImportAfterUpgrade.exe
An application opens.
(5) Use this application to restart the import of the data.
3.15.6 Images show red Crosses after Upgrade
If after the upgrade, the images appear as red crosses in the NX Viewer (and reporting
about missing pixel files), it can be that the associated pixel files have not been moved
back to their original folder.
To repair this situation, use the Windows Explorer to manually move the pixel files from
the folder:
To the folder:


Troubleshooting
DD+DIS105.10E Fault Finding
4 Fault Finding
Overview: See section:

1. View Logging 4.1
2. Log Viewer Configuration 4.2
3. Logging Namespaces 4.3
4. Configure Logging 4.4
5. Exporting and Importing Images 4.5
6. DICOM Validation 4.6
7. Operational Statistics 4.7
8. Finding Configuration Information on the ELMS 4.8
9. Database Icon 4.9
10. NX Health Icon 4.10
11. Check installed Certificates 4.11
4.1 View Logging
CAUTION:
Violation of patient privacy possible!
Since the patient privacy information is human readable, it must be treated as
confidential information and protected from unauthorized access.
IMPORTANT:
Do not alter the security settings of the logfiles, since the application needs to be able
to write to them.
For using the AGFA Healthcare Log Viewer, please read the CX.Logging.Viewer
manual. Access the AGFA Healthcare log viewer’s documentation by selecting Help Æ
User manual in the Log viewer’s menu.
Logging is available on a per-process basis. For NX, logging is available for the
following processes:


Troubleshooting
• NX Workstation Windows service (NX backend, where most of the business logic
is running): NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe.log
• Configuration Tool: NX.Application.Visual.Configuration.ConfigTool.exe.log
• QC/ID Viewer (NX viewer): NX.Application.Visual.QCID.exe.log
(1) Start up the logging viewer by clicking on Logging viewer item in the start
menu: Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Logging
(2) Select File Æ new Æ log4net reader. Browse to the location where the log
files are located (C:\agfa\healthcare\log\NX\xml).
(3) Select a file (see list of files above).
4.2 Log Viewer Configuration
The logging components always log timestamps in GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
format. Upon displaying log entries, the logging viewer will use the time zone of the PC.
This is not a problem in case the log file was created on a PC which is configured in the
same time zone.
When viewing a log file of another time zone the local time of the log entries might be
interesting. E.g. a log file entry created in the UK at 9 AM would be displayed on a
system located in Paris (GMT+1 time zone) as 10 AM.
To override this behavior, please follow this procedure:
(1) Go to: Menu Æ Edit Æ Preferences Æ Preferences

(2) In the ‘Display log entries in specific time zone’ option, select the time zone that
matches the location of the originator of the log file.
(3) Verify that the log entries will all be shown in the local time zone of the originator.


Troubleshooting
4.3 Logging Namespaces
In order to understand the logging information, the meaning of the namespaces need to
be known. The table below lists some of the most important namespaces.
Namespace Description
General
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta Fast Preview communication (high level,
nce.FastPreview.Facade abstracting from the protocol used =>
Common to Compact –family digitizers and
Stratus-family digitizers (e.g. DX-S).
com.agfa.med.DICOM.facility.DTFLogger When set to DEBUG, a very detailed
DICOM log is being produced, both for
MPPS, Dicom RIS communication and
archiving.
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Data All database related actions and actions
pertaining structured data transfer.
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.ImageAcquisitio Core of the system, including state
n.SessionManagement.QCIDSessionFacade management.
Specific to printing
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.Printing Printing
Specific to Compact – family digitizers
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta Image acquisition for Compact-family
nce.Dicom.DicomStorageSCPGateway digitizers
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta Fast ID communication with DICOM
nce.DirectIDGateway digitizers (Compact family)
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta Fast preview communication for DICOM
nce.Dicom.DicomFastPreviewSCPGateway digitizers (Compact family) – low level
Specific to Stratus – family digitizers
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta Image acquisition using a DX-S, including
nce.Twain.Gateway low-level fast preview communication.
Specific to ID Tablet
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta ID Tablet communication
nce.IDTabletGateway
Specific to archiving
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.CompositeInsta DICOM communication for archiving
nce.Dicom.DicomStorageSCUGateway
Agfa.Healthcare.NX.Business.Archiving High-level archiving communication


Troubleshooting
4.4 Configure Logging
The Cx Logging component is delivered with logging configuration functionality.

Through this interface the service engineer is able to adapt the settings for logging.
At installation time the following defaults apply:
• Information of severity levels warning, info, error and fatal are logged.
• Information of severity level debug is not logged.
Note that this includes the ‘Extended service logging’.
• The logging information is stored in files of 20 MB (with a maximum of 5 files)
using a roll-over mechanism. Roll-over mechanism means that when the
maximum size limit is reached, the oldest messages will be overwritten. A log file
only contains the data that was configured to be logged (in other words: What
comes into the log file is dependent on the logging configuration file).
Every process has a logging configuration file

(e.g. NX.Application.NonVisual.NXWorkstation.exe.Logging.config), located in the
C:\agfa\healthcare\NX\bin folder. For the list of processes, see the list in the previous
section.
In order to make things easy, different logging configuration files are foreseen.
Switch between configurations using one of the shortcuts in the Start Menu:
Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Logging Æ program group
Examples are:
• Activate Standard logging
• Activate ID tablet logging
• Activate Archive logging
NOTE:
Apart from ‘Activate Standard logging’, all logging batch files that are available will
activate DEBUG-level logging for certain components.
IMPORTANT:
When debug logging is enabled, this can have a serious impact on the performance of
the NX application.
It is the intention that it is only used for a limited amount of time during the fault finding
process. After that, please switch back ASAP to the standard log configuration.


Troubleshooting
4.5 Exporting and Importing Images
Images can be exported and imported on another (local) NX workstation for further
problem analysis.
NOTE:
Not all information related to the image is exported. Some data on session-level will be
missing and rejected images will be visible as normal images after export and import.
This is the procedure to export images:

(1) Close the session the images will be exported from.
(2) Click Export images in the Main Menu overview list.
The Export image Workspace area appears.
(3) Select a session and the images to export.
(4) Select the file format NATIVE and choose to include or not include the patients
demographics by checking or unchecking the checkbox Include Patient
Demographics.
CAUTION:
Violation of patient privacy possible!
The patients demographics contain patient privacy information.
They must be treated as confidential information and protected from
unauthorized access.
(5) Click <Export>.

(6) Select destination folder and click <OK>.
(7) The files can now be found in the destination folder.
To import the images on an NX Workstation (from a CD):

(1) Click Import images in the Main Menu overview list
A Windows Import-dialog box appears.
(2) Select the CD-drive and click <OK>.
(3) The images are imported in the NX system.


Troubleshooting
4.6 DICOM Validation
In order to validate and test DICOM interfaces the DICOM Validation Tool (DVT) will be
used. This tool provides extensive logging information. DVT is programmed using a
simple scripting language and can be instructed to play either SCU or SCP.
Besides it can be used as a Storage SCP emulator, Print SCP emulator or to validate
Media Stored Files.
4.7 Operational Statistics
The service engineer can consult the operational statistics or infocounters. A total and
a relative counter have to be kept which is incremented each time the specified event
occurs.
4.7.1 Viewing operational Statistics
(1) Start up the Infocounter viewer:

Start Æ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Infocounter viewer
(2) Browse through the Infocounter viewer to see the current value of a certain
counter.
Figure 34


Troubleshooting
4.7.2 Resetting a relative Counter
The relative counter value can be reset to zero by the service engineer, normally after
a service intervention. The absolute counter value cannot be reset.
(1) To reset a counter, select the counter and right-click to select the Reset counter
option from the context menu. Enter the user name and the reason for the
intervention.
Figure 35
(2) Click <Reset>.

(3) Alternatively, it is possible to reset all counters in one go by clicking Tools in the
menu bar and choose Reset all.
Figure 36


Troubleshooting
4.8 Finding Configuration Information on the ELMS
The ELMS contains system configuration information on hardware, licenses, software

versions and hospital contact references.
(1) Log in to the ELMS.
(2) Find the configuration.
The ELMS also allows downloading the most recently generated license key file or
fingerprint file of each system, that can be viewed using the License Manager Tool.
(1) Log in to the ELMS.

(2) Find the configuration.
(3) Download the files.
(4) Start up the license manager tool: Start Æ Agfa Æ Service Æ License manager
(5) Load the files in the viewer.
4.9 Database Icon
The database icon in the task bar indicates the state of the SQL Server database
service. Green indicates that it is properly working.
Note that when logged in as a normal user, the database icon in the taskbar may be
white. This does not mean the database is not running.
4.10 NX Health Icon
The NX health monitor icon in the task bar indicates the health of the NX backend
application.
Green means that the NX backend application is up and running and properly
initialized.
When it stays red, starting the NX Viewer will end up with an error. In order to find out
the details of the error state, please look at the log files.


Troubleshooting
4.11 Check installed Certificates
The following procedure allows checking the presence and content of the installed
certificates. Note that this is only relevant in case SSL has been configured.
(1) Log in with a Windows account with administrator privileges (If possible, with the
same account that used to install the certificates, e.g. CRService).
(2) Start the certificate management tool:
StartÆ Agfa Æ NX Æ Service Æ Install Tools Æ Manage Cerificates
(3) Open up the ‘Personal’ and ‘Trusted Root Authorities’ folders in the Certificate
management tool and check the presence of the required certificates.
(4) Double-click on the certificate to check the content of a certificate
(e.g. expiration date).
Figure 37


Troubleshooting
(5) Double-click on the certificate in the ‘Personal’ folder, select the ‘Details’ tab and
select the ‘Subject’ item to check the common name of the NX certificate (which
needs to be configured in the NX Configuration tool as well).
The text next to ‘CN = ‘ is the common name of the certificate and needs to match
the common name in the NX Configuration tool / Security section.
Figure 38


Imaging Services Maintenance
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
sw_10_maintenance_e_template_v07
1
DD+DIS105.10E Maintenance
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


This document describes all necessary steps to maintain NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 at the
customer’s site.

Revision Date
Document Title
Not applicable


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SAFETY REGULATIONS FOR NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200 HARDWARE ....................................5

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................5
3 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE..................................................................................................5
3.1 Hardware Maintenance Recommendations..............................................................................5
3.2 Hardware Maintenance Checklist .............................................................................................6


1 Safety Regulations for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Hardware
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation complies with the UL1950, respectively

EN 60950, standard for "Information Technology Equipment".
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation must be placed outside a radius of 1.5 m
around the patient.
All configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard
IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system configurator and
is responsible for complying with the systems' standard. If required, contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
There are no user-serviceable parts inside the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 workstation.

Perform no other operations on the workstation than the ones described in the user
manual.
2 Software Maintenance
The NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 software is free of preventive maintenance.
3 Hardware Maintenance
3.1 Hardware Maintenance Recommendations
For cleaning the system chassis or plastic part of the monitor it is recommended to use
a soft cleaning cloth moistened with a solution of three parts water and one part liquid
dishwashing detergent.
The use of desinfecting fluids is not recommend. If applied, ensure that the fluid
does not contain either alcoholic nor other abresive elements such as acids/soap
of any kind.
To remove the dust from the fans or slots/holes a vacuum cleaner with a brush
attachment should be used. In general it is not recommended vacuum cleaning the
motherboard or any internal component at all.


3.2 Hardware Maintenance Checklist
Perform the following hardware maintenance steps on the NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

system:
Not
Device Test Point - Maintenance Point OK
OK
Complete System Talk to the operators about possible problems.
Talk to the physician in charge about the image processing

parameters in the various menus.
NX PC Clean ventilation openings of the workstation.
NX System and Check all external cables and cable connections for damage and
Periphery loose contacts.
ID Tablet Clean surface of the ID Tablet.
Check cassette duct for tight mounting.
Check function of the ID Viewer by identifying a cassette.
Monitor Visually check calibration of the monitor.
If an image error was detected, talk to the radiologist to decide

the recalibration of the monitor.
Recalibrate the monitor or contact the responsible Application
Specialist.
Clean the monitor.
Complete System – Expose a flatfield and evaluate the image on the workstation and
Image Quality the Laserprinter.
Criteria: homogenous field, stripes.
Recalibrate if necessary.
Complete system - Check plates for running askew with a test sheet
Image quality Check test sheet for wobbling of the Galvo in digitizer.
Maintenance If any image faults were detected, inform the responsible

Completion Application Specialist.
Serial number of the NX PC: ...........................................................................................
Remarks:
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Date / Signature Customer


Imaging Services Service Bulletins
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Computed Radiography Æ CR Workstation Software Æ
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Æ Service Bulletin *
* For external partners: Please ask your local Agfa representative for access.

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v02
DD+DIS105.10E Service Bulletins


Imaging Services Glossary
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
This document contains explanations of product specific terms and abbreviations used
in the service documentation for NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300, Type 4406/303.

Revision Date

sw_12_glossary_e_template_v07
DD+DIS105.10E Glossary
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


1 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Glossary
Term Short Description

ADB Agfa Dicom Bridge: A software program that is able to remap
elements in a Dicom message.
ADC QS Agfa Diagnostic Center – Quality System:
A NX predecessor software
ADVT Agfa Dicom Validation Tool: Also called ADV Tool. A tool for
checking Dicom communication.
AE Application Entity: A crucial piece of information needed
whenever connecting any two DICOM devices together.
Each DICOM device needs an AE title of its own.
BIOS Basic Input/Output System: A set of instructions stored on a
ROM chip inside IBM PCs and PC-compatibles, which
handles all input-output functions.
CAS Clinical Application Specialist
CD-R Compact Disc Recordable: A recordable CD-ROM which can
be read by normal CD-ROM drives. Data can only be
recorded once onto a CD-R and cannot be changed.
Cipher An algorithm for putting a message into code by
transposition and/or substitution of symbols.
CMS Central Monitoring System
CPF-file Customer Parameter File: It contains most of the
configuration data in table form.
CR Computed Radiography
CR QS Computed Radiography – Quality System: A NX predecessor
software
Cx Common Components: A software component that can be
reused in several AGFA products.
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine:
DICOM is a standard which addressed the issue of vendor-
independent data for mats and data transfers for digital
medical images.
Database Record The set of attributes that are saved for each
matching dataset.
Dataset The data in a DICOM C-Store request: This is the data that
makes up a DICOM image.
Demographic Data Patient, examination and routing data



Dicom Gateway Application to receive images from CR digitizers.
DMWL Dicom Modality WorkList
DR Direct Radiography
DSS Department Scheduling System: Scheduling and tracking
patients, reviewing department activities, producing end-of
day and other required reports
DX-S Agfa high-end digitizer
EI Exposure Index: A dose measurement type
Encryption Putting data into a secret code so it is unreadable except by
authorized users.
Ethernet Frequently spread technologies for LANs
(Local Area Networks)
FAT File Allocation Table: A file located in sector 0 on a disk,
which contains information about the sizes of files stored on
the disk and which clusters contain which files.
FIFO First In First Out: A method of storage in which the data
stored for the longest time will be retrieved first.
Fire Wire A High Performance Serial Bus used for DX-S.
Firewall A method to shield a network from another network. A
firewall prevents the protected network from access from
outside.
FSE Field Service Engineer
FUSE Fast Update Service
GSDF Grayscale Standard Display Function: Describes how all
available grayscales in an image can be made perceptible on
a viewing device.
GUI Graphical User Interface: An interface that has pictures as
well as words on the screen. Originally invented by Xerox,
the idea was expanded and popularized by Apple
Computers. With windows, icons, pull-down menus, and the
mouse, the GUI is easier to learn and work with.
Healthcare Model Data model to structure patient and examination data in a
hierarchical way in a medical environment.
HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act
HIS Hospital Information System



HL7 Health Level 7:
A specification for electronic data exchange between
healthcare institutions, particularly hospitals, and between
different computer systems within hospitals.
Hostname An alias name of a device connected to a network.
HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol:
The protocol most often used to transfer information from
World Wide Web servers to browsers, which is why Web
addresses begin with http://. It is also called Hypertext
Transport Protocol.
HTTPS HyperText Transmission Protocol Secure:
Netscape’s version of HTTP for secure transactions
IHE Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise: It offers the possibility
that all devices of a solution or part of a workflow are
compatible with each other.
Details: http://www.ihe-europe.net/
IMPAX AGFA’s PACS
(Picture Archiving and Communication System)
IP Internet Protocol: The protocol that is used to route a data
packet from its source to its destination over the Internet.
Keyword A value used in the configuration of ConProxy that will
change the attribute at runtime. Keywords are started with
a ‘$’.
LgM Logarithmic Median: A dose measurement type
Logfile A file which records messages issued by an application.
Matching Dataset A dataset that matches all of the Matching Attributes. Only
matching datasets will be processed by ConProxy.
Matched Record The database record that has for each of the attributes the
same attribute values as the ones in the Matching Dataset.
Meta Data Data about data. Meta data describes how data is to be
interpreted by applications. An example for meta data is a
mapping file.
Microsoft Windows The Microsoft Windows Script Host (WSH) is a language-
Scripting Host independent Script Host for 32-bit Windows platforms.
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step
MSDE Microsoft SQL Desktop Engine is a reduced and thus more
economic version of Microsoft’s SQL relational database. A
relational database contains a full text search function and a
graphical tool for data base management and programming.



MUI Multi Language User Interface: Language packs for the
operating system.
Multithreaded Processing more than one transaction at a time within a
single program.
MUSICA MULTIPLE Scale Image Contrast Amplification:
The Agfa Image Processing software
MWL Modality Worklist: A list of ordered exams at DICOM
conformant workstations and imaging modalities. These work
lists reduce the amount of data entry required at the imaging
modality.
NTFS New Technology File System: The file system used by
Windows NT. It supports multiple file systems, has file
recovery for hard disk crashes, uses the Unicode character
set, and provides for file names up to 255 characters long.
NTP Network Time Protocol:A protocol that can synchronize
clocks on local computers with radio or atomic clocks on the
Internet.
Object An object exists of data and methods.
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication System
Partition A division of a storage area
pcAnywhere A tool for remote desktop connection. One of the advantages
of pcAnywhere is that when you connect to your customer’s
PC, he can see what you are doing. So it is an ideal tool to
e.g. explain workflows to the customer.
PHI Protected Health Information: Patient data which must be
kept protected in order to maintain the patient’s privacy.
Ping Ping is a program to verify if a host system is available via IP
network.
PPD Postscript Printer Definition defines the capability of a
postscript printer.
PPP-Protocol Point to Point Protocol: A protocol for communication
between computers using TCP/IP over standard telephone
lines, ISDN and other high-speed connections. PPP was
developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)
and is defined in RFC 1171. It can be used to connect a
computer to the Internet for services such as the World Wide
Web and email. PPP is faster than SLIP and has better error
correction. It can be used with both synchronous and
asynchronous transmission.



Preview Monitor Displays the image and the name of the patient. This monitor
enables to roughly check whether the exposure was
successful.
Print Spooler Program which takes care that print jobs are managed in the
background.
Procedure In healthcare terms a certain examination on a patient
Procedure Step In healthcare terms a substep of a procedure, i.e. a
CR exam
Proxy Server A server that provides access to files from other servers by
retrieving them either from its local cache or from the remote
server.
P-values Perception values offer the possibility to present images
independently from the viewing device.
RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks: Allows data to be
distributed across multiple hard disks to provide data
redundancy (mirroring) and increase fault tolerance.
RIS Radiology Information System
Rislink AGFA tool to connect to RIS-Systems.
SCP Service Class Provider, provides services in a network
environment.
SCU Service Class User: Uses the services provided by the SCP
in a network environment.
SNDB Service Network Data Base: Allows you to connect remotely
to a site via SRSS.
SOP Service Object Pair
SPS Scheduled Procedure Step
SRSS Secure Remote Service System: Agfa’s solution to protect
health information of individuals.
The SRSS enables the secure connection required for
remote service between Agfa Service Support Engineers
working from an Agfa facility or their homes, and the Agfa
Equipment installed at a hospital.
SSL Secure Sockets Layer: A protocol from Netscape
Communications Corporation, which is designed to provide
secure communications on the Internet.
Subnet Mask A number used to identify a subnetwork when an
IP address is shared by multiple networks.



TCP Transmission Control Protocol: An internet networking
software that controls the transmission of packets of data
over the Internet. Among its tasks, TCP checks for lost
packets, puts the data from multiple packets into the correct
order and requests that missing or damaged packets be
resent. Computers must run TCP to communicate with World
Wide Web servers.
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol: Common
protocol for networks used in the Internet.
Thumbnail Iconized image of an original
UI User Interface
UID Unique Identifier
UDP User Datagram Protocol: A transport layer protocol for
computer networks.
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
VR DICOM Value Representation: It describes how values
are encoded.
Workgroup A workgroup is a logical way to group computers on a
network. In this configuration, all of the members are
considered "peers" and each computer maintains its own
security policies and database of resources, such as users,
printers, and file shares.
Worklist A list that shows the user which studies (Procedure Steps)
still have to be done at a certain modality (e.g. CT, MR, CR).
XML Extended Markup Language
XRDI X-ray Device Integration


Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS116.10M
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300
Type 4406/303
Internal update: 2
Edition 1, Revision 1 Document Node ID: 30228543

07-2010 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v09
DD+DIS116.10M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO Library.


Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 1.0

Revision Date
1.1 07-2010 Power Supplies added, HP8000 RAID1 PC added
NOTE:
Agfa reserves the right to deliver compatible parts or alternative parts.
Prices to the original order may differ.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe orderprocessing-europe.matrium@eads.com
Overseas orderprocessing-overseas.matrium@eads.com
Spare Parts returns
Worldwide returns.matrium@eads.com
NOTE:
For Recycling Information please refer to:
http://intra.agfanet/cd/ep/ehs.nsf


01
02
03
04
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300


07-2010 4406/303 Agfa Company Confidential
Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+3572820 RED DONGLE FOR DEMO TOOL
RED DONGLE FOR DEMO TOOL
RED DONGLE FOR DEMO TOOL
2 CM+3540660 NX ERSATZTEIL FÜR LIZENZ DONGLE
NX SPARE PART FOR LICENCE DONGLE
ACCESSOIRE NX POUR LICENCE DONGLE
3 CM+6004150 NX 8300 OFFL.CONF.TOOL
NX 8300 OFFL.CONF.TOOL
NX 8300 OFFL.CONF.TOOL
4 CM+6004140 NX 8300 CLEAN INSTALL KIT
NX 8300 CLEAN INSTALL KIT
NX 8300 CLEAN INSTALL KIT
99 BA+B4102076 NETZTEIL MIT 1-POLIGEM STECKER ZU MFCD1219
POWER SUPPLY ( 1 - POLE PLUG) FOR MFCD1219
99 BA+B4100180 NETZTEIL MIT 3-POLIGEM STECKER ZU MFCD1219
99 10+9999912750 NX8300 HP8000 RAID1 PC (5O9JY)
NX8300 HP8000 RAID1 PC (5O9JY)
NX8300 HP8000 RAID1 PC (5O9JY)
= Assembly
D = Standard part. For order please refer to the separate spare parts list for standard parts "DD+DIS011.93M".
* = Spare part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300


07-2010 4406/303 Agfa Company Confidential
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1
1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



NX 2.0.8300 3.0.8300 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

NX 2.0.8300 3.0.8300 Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE

Imaging Services Service Manual

This documentation is separately available. Order number: DD+DIS105.10E

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 1

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 2

0 Generic Safety Directions

Installation and Configuration

13 Spare Parts List

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 3

Safety relevant Notes

Not-safety relevant Notes

IMPORTANT: Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out

NOTE: • Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action

Highlighting of Buttons, Functions and Names within a Task

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 4

1 About this Manual

1.1 Target Group

This NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Service Documentation provides information for

1.2 Download from MedNet

This Service Manual is available on the MedNet GSO Library

1.3 Changes compared to preceding NX Versions

NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 is a maintenance release for NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100 (DR use

1.4 Changes compared to NX 2.0.8100 / 3.0.8100

1.4.1 New Customer Features and Improvements in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

• For CR only: Musica MCE (Micro Calcification Enhancement):

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 5

• Installation improvements, semi-automated installation of “auxiliary” software

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 6

1.5 Changes compared to NX 2.0.8200 / 3.0.8200

1.5.1 New Customer Features and Improvements in NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300

• An additional patient identification field “Other Patient IDs” DICOM TAG

1.5 Main Differences between NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 DR Application to CR

• For DR exposures no ‘ID’ button is needed and available.

1.6 Solved HQ Complaints

For a complete list of all HeadQuarter (HQ) complaints, solved in

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 0 NX 2.0.8300 / 3.0.8300 Chapter 0 / 7

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23